diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067-8.txt | 6552 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 116005 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 240043 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067-h/12067-h.htm | 8723 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067-h/images/map.png | bin | 0 -> 127263 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067.txt | 6552 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/12067.zip | bin | 0 -> 115986 bytes |
7 files changed, 21827 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/12067-8.txt b/old/12067-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..128ab9f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6552 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales +by Frank R. Stockton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales + +Author: Frank R. Stockton + +Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + + + + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + +[Transcriber's note: Italics and bold markup only occurred in the +ads for other books at the beginning and end, and using the standard +_italics_ or *bold* just made it hard to read, so this markup has +been removed in the plain-text version.] + + + + +FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS. + + * * * * * + +New Uniform Edition. + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales. +THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. +THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. +THE LATE MRS NULL. +RUDDER GRANGE. + +The set, five vols., $6.25; each, $1.25. + + * * * * * + +RUDDER GRANGE. New Illustrated Edition. With over 100 Illustrations +by A.B. Frost. Square 12mo, $2.00. + + * * * * * + +THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents. + +THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents. + +RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents. + + * * * * * + +A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. + +THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. + +THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00. + +THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales. Illustrated, 4to, cloth, +$2.50; boards, $1.50. + +ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to, +boards, $1.50. + +TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50. + + + + + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN + +AND + +OTHER FANCIFUL TALES + +BY + +FRANK R. STOCKTON + + + + + +New York +1887 +Charles Scribner's Sons. + +Rand Avery Company, +Electrotypers and Printers, +Boston. + + + + + +CONTENTS. + + * * * * * + + I. THE BEE-MAN OF ORN + + II. THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON + + III. OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD + + IV. THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM + + V. CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM + + VI. PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH + + VII. THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS + + VIII. THE BANISHED KING + + IX. THE PHILOPENA + + + + + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN. + + * * * * * + +In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old man who was called +the Bee-man, because his whole time was spent in the company of bees. +He lived in a small hut, which was nothing more than an immense +bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs in +every corner of the one room it contained, on the shelves, under the +little table, all about the rough bench on which the old man sat, and +even about the head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All day +the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects, but this did not +interfere in any way with the old Bee-man, who walked in among them, +ate his meals, and went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being +stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had become so +accustomed to him, and his skin was so tough and hard, that the bees +no more thought of stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or +a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a pocket of his old +leathern doublet; and when he put on this coat to take one of his +long walks in the forest in search of wild bees' nests, he was very +glad to have this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild +honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take out a piece of a +comb for a luncheon. The bees in his pocket worked very +industriously, and he was always certain of having something to eat +with him wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey; and when +he needed bread or meat, he carried some fine combs to a village not +far away and bartered them for other food. He was ugly, untidy, +shrivelled, and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be his +only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and contented; he had +all the honey he wanted, and his bees, whom he considered the best +company in the world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be, +and seemed to increase in number every day. + +One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a Junior Sorcerer. +This young person, who was a student of magic, necromancy, and the +kindred arts, was much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had +frequently noticed in his wanderings, and he considered him an +admirable subject for study. He had got a great deal of useful +practice by endeavoring to find out, by the various rules and laws of +sorcery, exactly why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something +that he was not, and why he was what he happened to be. He had +studied a long time at this matter, and had found out something. + +"Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came out of his hut, "that +you have been transformed?" + +"What do you mean by that?" said the other, much surprised. + +"You have surely heard of animals and human beings who have been +magically transformed into different kinds of creatures?" + +"Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man; "but what have +I been transformed from?" + +"That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer. "But one thing +is certain--you ought to be changed back. If you will find out what +you have been transformed from, I will see that you are made all +right again. Nothing would please me better than to attend to such a +case." + +And, having a great many things to study and investigate, the Junior +Sorcerer went his way. + +This information greatly disturbed the mind of the Bee-man. If he had +been changed from something else, he ought to be that other thing, +whatever it was. He ran after the young man, and overtook him. + +"If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have been transformed, you +surely are able to tell me what it is that I was." + +"No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have not proceeded far +enough for that. When I become a senior I can tell you all about it. +But, in the meantime, it will be well for you to try to discover for +yourself your original form, and when you have done that, I will get +some of the learned masters of my art to restore you to it. It will +be easy enough to do that, but you could not expect them to take the +time and trouble to find out what it was." + +And, with these words, he hurried away, and was soon lost to view. + +Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps, and went to his +hut. Never before had he heard any thing which had so troubled him. + +"I wonder what I was transformed from?" he thought, seating himself +on his rough bench. "Could it have been a giant, or a powerful +prince, or some gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies +wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a horse, or perhaps a +fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I hope it was not one of these. But, +whatever it was, every one has certainly a right to his original +form, and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early +to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have not more pockets to +my old doublet, so that I might carry more bees and more honey for my +journey." + +He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of twigs and straw, +and, having transferred to this a number of honey-combs and a colony +of bees which had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day, +and having put on his leathern doublet, and having bound his new hive +to his back, he set forth on his quest; the bees who were to +accompany him buzzing around him like a cloud. + +As the Bee-man passed through the little village the people greatly +wondered at his queer appearance, with the hive upon his back. "The +Bee-man is going on a long expedition this time," they said; but no +one imagined the strange business on which he was bent. About noon he +sat down under a tree, near a beautiful meadow covered with blossoms, +and ate a little honey. Then he untied his hive and stretched himself +out on the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering about +him, some going out to the blossoms in the sunshine, and some +returning laden with the sweet pollen, he said to himself, "They know +just what they have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know +not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it may be, I am +determined to do it. In some way or other I will find out what was my +original form, and then I will have myself changed back to it." + +And now the thought came to him that perhaps his original form might +have been something very disagreeable, or even horrid. + +"But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever I was that +shall I be again. It is not right for any one to retain a form which +does not properly belong to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my +original form in the same way that I find the trees in which the wild +bees hive. When I first catch sight of a bee-tree I am drawn towards +it, I know not how. Something says to me: 'That is what you are +looking for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my original +form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards it. Something will say +to me: 'That is it.'" + +When the Bee-man was rested he started off again, and in about an +hour he entered a fair domain. Around him were beautiful lawns, grand +trees, and lovely gardens; while at a little distance stood the +stately palace of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people were +walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees and arbors; +splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting for their riders; and +everywhere were seen signs of opulence and gayety. + +"I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I should like to stop +here for a time. If it should happen that I was originally like any +of these happy creatures it would please me much." + +He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes, and taking off his +old doublet, laid that beside it. It would not do to have his bees +flying about him if he wished to go among the inhabitants of this +fair domain. + +For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace and its grounds, +avoiding notice as much as possible, but looking at every thing. He +saw handsome men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and +cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages, and fishes in +crystal globes, and it seemed to him that the best of all living +things were here collected. + +At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to himself: "There +is one being here toward whom I feel very much drawn, and that is the +Lord of the Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like him, +but it would be a very fine thing if it were so; and it seems +impossible for me to be drawn toward any other being in the domain +when I look upon him, so handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must +observe him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter, before +applying to the sorcerers to change me back into a lord of a fair +domain." + +The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of the Domain walking in +his gardens. He slipped along the shady paths, and followed him so as +to observe him closely, and find out if he were really drawn toward +this noble and handsome being. The Lord of the Domain walked on for +some time, not noticing that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly +turning, he saw the little old man. + +"What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he cried; and he gave him +a kick that sent him into some bushes that grew by the side of the +path. + +The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast as he could to the +place where he had hidden his hive and his old doublet. + +"If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is that I was never a +person who would kick a poor old man. I will leave this place. I was +transformed from nothing that I see here." + +He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then he came to a great +black mountain, near the bottom of which was an opening like the +mouth of a cave. + +This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns and under-ground +passages, which were the abodes of dragons, evil spirits, horrid +creatures of all kinds. + +"Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose I ought to visit +this place. If I am going to do this thing properly, I should look on +all sides of the subject, and I may have been one of those horrid +creatures myself." + +Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he approached the opening +of the passage which led into its inmost recesses he saw, sitting +upon the ground, and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid +Youth. + +"Good-day," said this individual when he saw the Bee-man. "Are you +going inside?" + +"Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to do." + +"Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to his feet, "I think I +will go with you. I was told that if I went in there I should get my +energies toned up, and they need it very much; but I did not feel +equal to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait until some +one came along. I am very glad to see you, and we will go in +together." + +So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded but a short +distance when they met a very little creature, whom it was easy to +recognize as a Very Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled in +color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was extremely lively and +active, and came bounding toward them. + +"What did you two people come here for?" he asked. + +"I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my energies toned up." + +"You have come to the right place," said the Very Imp. "We will tone +you up. And what does that old Bee-man want?" + +"He has been transformed from something, and wants to find out what +it is. He thinks he may have been one of the things in here." + +"I should not wonder if that were so," said the Very Imp, rolling his +head on one side, and eying the Bee-man with a critical gaze. + +"All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around, and pick out his +previous existence. We have here all sorts of vile creepers, +crawlers, hissers, and snorters. I suppose he thinks any thing will +be better than a Bee-man." + +"It is not because I want to be better than I am," said the Bee-man, +"that I started out on this search. I have simply an honest desire to +become what I originally was." + +"Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is an idiotic +moon-calf here with a clam head, which must be just like what you +used to be." + +"Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not the least idea what an +honest purpose is. I shall go about, and see for myself." + +"Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend to this fellow who +wants to be toned up." So saying he joined the Languid Youth. + +"Look here," said that individual, regarding him with interest, "do +you black and shine yourself every morning?" + +"No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish. You want to be +invigorated, don't you? Well, I will tell you a splendid way to +begin. You see that Bee-man has put down his hive and his coat with +the bees in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then catch a +lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If you spread them on a +sticky rag, and make a plaster, and put it on the small of your back, +it will invigorate you like every thing, especially if some of the +bees are not quite dead." + +"Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him with his mild eyes, +"but if I had energy enough to catch a bee I would be satisfied. +Suppose you catch a lot for me." + +"The subject is changed," said the Very Imp. "We are now about to +visit the spacious chamber of the King of the Snap-dragons." + +"That is a flower," said the Languid Youth. + +"You will find him a gay old blossom," said the other. "When he has +chased you round his room, and has blown sparks at you, and has +snorted and howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws like a +pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up higher than ever +before in your life." + +"No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but I think I will begin +with something a little milder." + +"Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed Demon of the Gorge +in here. He is generally asleep, and, if you say so, you can slip +into the farthest corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the +opposite wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't get at you, +for he doesn't reach all the way across his cave; I have measured +him. It will tone you up wonderfully to sit there and watch him." + +"Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I would rather stay +outside and let you go up in the corner. The performance in that way +will be more interesting to me." + +"You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very Imp. "I have +offered them to you loose, and I have offered them fastened to a +wall, and now the best thing I can do is to give you a chance at one +of them that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and is +enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his whiskers for a +thousand years. You can go to his cave and examine him just as if he +were stuffed, and then you can sit on his back and think how it would +be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and he should wake +up while you are sitting there. It would be easy to imagine a lot of +horrible things he would do to you when you look at his open mouth +with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible wings all +covered with spikes." + +"I think that might suit me," said the Languid Youth. "I would much +rather imagine the exercises of these monsters than to see them +really going on." + +"Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led the way to the cave of +the Ghastly Griffin. + +The Bee-man went by himself through a great part of the mountain, and +looked into many of its gloomy caves and recesses, recoiling in +horror from most of the dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he +was wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding through the +passages of the mountain, and soon there came flapping along an +enormous dragon, with body black as night, and wings and tail of +fiery red. In his great fore-claws he bore a little baby. + +"Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is taking that little creature +to his cave to devour it." + +He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and following looked in. +The dragon was crouched upon the ground with the little baby lying +before him. It did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and +crying. The monster was looking upon it with delight, as if he +intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon as his appetite should +be a little stronger. + +"It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody ought to do +something." And turning around, he ran away as fast as he could. + +He ran through various passages until he came to the spot where he +had left his bee-hive. Picking it up, he hurried back, carrying the +hive in his two hands before him. When he reached the cave of the +dragon, he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over the +weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation, the Bee-man rushed into +the cave and threw his hive straight into the face of the dragon. The +bees, enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd and +immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and nose of the dragon. +The great monster, astounded by this sudden attack, and driven almost +wild by the numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the +farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his relentless +enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with his great wings and struck +with his paws. While the dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the +Bee-man rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried away. He +did not stop to pick up his doublet, but kept on until he reached the +entrance of the caves. There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one +leg, and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands, and stopped +to inquire what was the matter, and what had become of the Languid +Youth. + +"He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp. "He disappointed me +dreadfully. I took him up to the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the +thing was enchanted, and that he might sit on its back and think +about what it could do if it was awake; and when he came near it the +wretched creature opened its eyes, and raised its head, and then you +ought to have seen how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me +and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me till I can scarcely +move." + +"His energies must have been toned up a good deal," said the Bee-man. + +"Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I raised a howl, and a +Scissor-jawed Clipper came out of his hole, and got after him; but +that lazy fool ran so fast that he could not be caught." + +The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the Languid Youth. + +"You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter, "for the rules of +this institution don't allow the creatures inside to come out of this +opening, or to hang around it. If they did, they would frighten away +visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper part of the +mountain." + +The two proceeded on their way. + +"What are you going to do with that baby?" said the Languid Youth. + +"I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man, "as I go on with +my search, and perhaps I may find its mother. If I do not, I shall +give it to somebody in that little village yonder. Any thing would be +better than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid dragon." + +"Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now to carry a baby." + +"Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take it myself. I like to +carry something, and I have now neither my hive nor my doublet." + +"It is very well that you had to leave them behind," said the Youth, +"for the bees would have stung the baby." + +"My bees never sting babies," said the other. + +"They probably never had a chance," remarked his companion. + +They soon entered the village, and after walking a short distance the +youth exclaimed: "Do you see that woman over there sitting at the +door of her house? She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all +to pieces. She should not be allowed to do that." + +"No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie her hands." + +"Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the Youth, "and if +you give it to her she will no longer think of tearing her hair." + +"But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think this is her child?" + +"Suppose you go over and see," said the other. + +The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he walked toward the woman. +Hearing him coming, she raised her head, and when she saw the child +she rushed towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming with +joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy tears she begged to +know the story of the rescue of her child, whom she never expected to +see again; and she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings. The +friends and neighbors gathered around and there was great rejoicing. +The mother urged the Bee-man and the Youth to stay with her, and rest +and refresh themselves, which they were glad to do as they were tired +and hungry. + +They remained at the cottage all night, and in the afternoon of the +next day the Bee-man said to the Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to +you, but never in all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any +living being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I believe +that I have been transformed from a baby." + +"Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that you have hit the +truth. And now would you like to be changed back to your original +form?" + +"Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the strongest yearning to +be what I originally was." + +The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid feeling, took a +great interest in the matter, and early the next morning started off +to inform the Junior Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he +had been transformed from, and desired to be changed back to it. + +The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were filled with +enthusiasm when they heard this report, and they at once set out for +the mother's cottage. And there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed +back into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what the Bee-man had +done for her that she agreed to take charge of this baby, and to +bring it up as her own. + +"It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior Sorcerer, "and I +am glad that I studied his case. He will now have a fresh start in +life, and will have a chance to become something better than a +miserable old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or +companions but buzzing bees." + +The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned to their homes, +happy in the success of their great performance; and the Youth went +back to his home anxious to begin a life of activity and energy. + +Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer had become a +Senior and was very old indeed, he passed through the country of Orn, +and noticed a small hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He +approached it, and looking in at the door he saw an old man in a +leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating honey. By his magic art +he knew this was the baby which had been transformed from the +Bee-man. + +"Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He has grown into the same +thing again!" + + + + + + THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON. + + * * * * * + +Over the great door of an old, old church which stood in a quiet town +of a far-away land there was carved in stone the figure of a large +griffin. The old-time sculptor had done his work with great care, but +the image he had made was not a pleasant one to look at. It had a +large head, with enormous open mouth and savage teeth; from its back +arose great wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout +legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were no legs +behind,--the body running out into a long and powerful tail, finished +off at the end with a barbed point. This tail was coiled up under +him, the end sticking up just back of his wings. + +The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this stone figure, had +evidently been very much pleased with it, for little copies of it, +also in stone, had been placed here and there along the sides of the +church, not very far from the ground, so that people could easily +look at them, and ponder on their curious forms. There were a great +many other sculptures on the outside of this church,--saints, +martyrs, grotesque heads of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those +of other creatures which cannot be named, because nobody knows +exactly what they were; but none were so curious and interesting as +the great griffin over the door, and the little griffins on the sides +of the church. + +A long, long distance from the town, in the midst of dreadful wilds +scarcely known to man, there dwelt the Griffin whose image had been +put up over the church-door. In some way or other, the old-time +sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of his memory, had +copied his figure in stone. The Griffin had never known this, until, +hundreds of years afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild +animal, or in some manner which it is not now easy to find out, that +there was a likeness of him on the old church in the distant town. +Now, this Griffin had no idea how he looked. He had never seen a +mirror, and the streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent +that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the image of any +thing looking into it, could not be found. Being, as far as could be +ascertained, the very last of his race, he had never seen another +griffin. Therefore it was, that, when he heard of this stone image of +himself, he became very anxious to know what he looked like, and at +last he determined to go to the old church, and see for himself what +manner of being he was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds, +and flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited by men, +where his appearance in the air created great consternation; but he +alighted nowhere, keeping up a steady flight until he reached the +suburbs of the town which had his image on its church. Here, late in +the afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side of a brook, +and stretched himself on the grass to rest. His great wings were +tired, for he had not made such a long flight in a century, or more. + +The news of his coming spread quickly over the town, and the people, +frightened nearly out of their wits by the arrival of so +extraordinary a visitor, fled into their houses, and shut themselves +up. The Griffin called loudly for some one to come to him, but the +more he called, the more afraid the people were to show themselves. +At length he saw two laborers hurrying to their homes through the +fields, and in a terrible voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring +to disobey, the men stood, trembling. + +"What is the matter with you all?" cried the Griffin. "Is there not a +man in your town who is brave enough to speak to me?" + +"I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking so that his +words could hardly be understood, "that--perhaps--the Minor +Canon--would come." + +"Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want to see him." + +The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position in the old church, +had just finished the afternoon services, and was coming out of a +side door, with three aged women who had formed the week-day +congregation. He was a young man of a kind disposition, and very +anxious to do good to the people of the town. Apart from his duties +in the church, where he conducted services every week-day, he visited +the sick and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were in +trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of the bad children in +the town with whom nobody else would have any thing to do. Whenever +the people wanted something difficult done for them, they always went +to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the laborer thought of the young +priest when he found that some one must come and speak to the +Griffin. + +The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange event, which was known +to the whole town except himself and the three old women, and when he +was informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked to see +him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened. + +"Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of me! What should he want +with me?" + +"Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men. "He is very angry now +because he has been kept waiting so long; and nobody knows what may +happen if you don't hurry to him." + +The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his hand cut off than go +out to meet an angry griffin; but he felt that it was his duty to go, +for it would be a woful thing if injury should come to the people of +the town because he was not brave enough to obey the summons of the +Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he started off. + +"Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man came near, "I am +glad to see that there is some one who has the courage to come to +me." + +The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but he bowed his head. + +"Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there is a church with a +likeness of myself over one of the doors?" + +The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature before him and saw +that it was, without doubt, exactly like the stone image on the +church. "Yes," he said, "you are right." + +"Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me to it? I wish very +much to see it." + +The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin entered the +town without the people knowing what he came for, some of them would +probably be frightened to death, and so he sought to gain time to +prepare their minds. + +"It is growing dark, now," he said, very much afraid, as he spoke, +that his words might enrage the Griffin, "and objects on the front of +the church can not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until +morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone image of +yourself." + +"That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I see you are a man +of good sense. I am tired, and I will take a nap here on this soft +grass, while I cool my tail in the little stream that runs near me. +The end of my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and it is +quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure and come early to-morrow +morning, and show me the way to the church." + +The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave, and hurried into +the town. In front of the church he found a great many people +assembled to hear his report of his interview with the Griffin. When +they found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation, but +simply to see his stony likeness on the church, they showed neither +relief nor gratification, but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for +consenting to conduct the creature into the town. + +"What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I should not bring him he +would come himself and, perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with +his red-hot tail." + +Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many plans were +proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming into the town. Some +elderly persons urged that the young men should go out and kill him; +but the young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then some one +said that it would be a good thing to destroy the stone image so that +the Griffin would have no excuse for entering the town; and this +proposal was received with such favor that many of the people ran for +hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear down and break up +the stone griffin. But the Minor Canon resisted this plan with all +the strength of his mind and body. He assured the people that this +action would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would be +impossible to conceal from him that his image had been destroyed +during the night. But the people were so determined to break up the +stone griffin that the Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him +to do but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked up and +down in front of the church-door, keeping away the men who brought +ladders, by which they might mount to the great stone griffin, and +knock it to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After many hours +the people were obliged to give up their attempts, and went home to +sleep; but the Minor Canon remained at his post till early morning, +and then he hurried away to the field where he had left the Griffin. + +The monster had just awakened, and rising to his fore-legs and +shaking himself, he said that he was ready to go into the town. The +Minor Canon, therefore, walked back, the Griffin flying slowly +through the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide. Not +a person was to be seen in the streets, and they proceeded directly +to the front of the church, where the Minor Canon pointed out the +stone griffin. + +The real Griffin settled down in the little square before the church +and gazed earnestly at his sculptured likeness. For a long time he +looked at it. First he put his head on one side, and then he put it +on the other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his left, +after which he shut his left eye and gazed with his right. Then he +moved a little to one side and looked at the image, then he moved the +other way. After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had been +standing by all this time: + +"It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That breadth between the +eyes, that expansive forehead, those massive jaws! I feel that it +must resemble me. If there is any fault to find with it, it is that +the neck seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an +admirable likeness,--admirable!" + +The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning and all the +afternoon. The Minor Canon had been afraid to go away and leave him, +and had hoped all through the day that he would soon be satisfied +with his inspection and fly away home. But by evening the poor young +man was utterly exhausted, and felt that he must eat and sleep. He +frankly admitted this fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would +not like something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged in +politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken the words, he was +seized with dread lest the monster should demand half a dozen babies, +or some tempting repast of that kind. + +"Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between the equinoxes. At +the vernal and at the autumnal equinox I take a good meal, and that +lasts me for half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits, and do +not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But if you need food, go +and get it, and I will return to the soft grass where I slept last +night and take another nap." + +The next day the Griffin came again to the little square before the +church, and remained there until evening, steadfastly regarding the +stone griffin over the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to +look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see him; but the +young clergyman could not stay as he had done before, for he had many +duties to perform. Nobody went to the church, but the people came to +the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him how long the Griffin +was going to stay. + +"I do not know," he answered, "but I think he will soon be satisfied +with regarding his stone likeness, and then he will go away." + +But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after morning he came to the +church, but after a time he did not stay there all day. He seemed to +have taken a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him about +as he pursued his various avocations. He would wait for him at the +side door of the church, for the Minor Canon held services every day, +morning and evening, though nobody came now. "If any one should +come," he said to himself, "I must be found at my post." When the +young man came out, the Griffin would accompany him in his visits to +the sick and the poor, and would often look into the windows of the +school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching his unruly scholars. +All the other schools were closed, but the parents of the Minor +Canon's scholars forced them to go to school, because they were so +bad they could not endure them all day at home,--griffin or no +griffin. But it must be said they generally behaved very well when +that great monster sat up on his tail and looked in at the +school-room window. + +When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no sign of going away, +all the people who were able to do so left the town. The canons and +the higher officers of the church had fled away during the first day +of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the Minor Canon and some +of the men who opened the doors and swept the church. All the +citizens who could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to +distant parts, and only the working people and the poor were left +behind. After some days these ventured to go about and attend to +their business, for if they did not work they would starve. They were +getting a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been told +that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did not feel so much +afraid of him as before. + +Day by day the Griffin became more and more attached to the Minor +Canon. He kept near him a great part of the time, and often spent the +night in front of the little house where the young clergyman lived +alone. This strange companionship was often burdensome to the Minor +Canon; but, on the other hand, he could not deny that he derived a +great deal of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had lived +for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and he told the Minor Canon +many wonderful things. + +"It is like reading an old book," said the young clergyman to +himself; "but how many books I would have had to read before I would +have found out what the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air, +the water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things, and all +the wonders of the world!" + +Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its close. And now the +people of the town began to be very much troubled again. + +"It will not be long," they said, "before the autumnal equinox is +here, and then that monster will want to eat. He will be dreadfully +hungry, for he has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He +will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat them all. What +is to be done?" + +To this question no one could give an answer, but all agreed that the +Griffin must not be allowed to remain until the approaching equinox. +After talking over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people +went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin was not with him. + +"It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster is among us. +You brought him here, and you ought to see that he goes away. It is +only on your account that he stays here at all, for, although he +visits his image every day, he is with you the greater part of the +time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It is your duty to go +away and then he will follow you, and we shall be free from the +dreadful danger which hangs over us." + +"Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved at being spoken to +in such a way. "Where shall I go? If I go to some other town, shall I +not take this trouble there? Have I a right to do that?" + +"No," said the people, "you must not go to any other town. There is +no town far enough away. You must go to the dreadful wilds where the +Griffin lives; and then he will follow you and stay there." + +They did not say whether or not they expected the Minor Canon to stay +there also, and he did not ask them any thing about it. He bowed his +head, and went into his house, to think. The more he thought, the +more clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go away, and +thus free the town from the presence of the Griffin. + +That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread and meat, and +early the next morning he set out on his journey to the dreadful +wilds. It was a long, weary, and doleful journey, especially after he +had gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor Canon kept on +bravely, and never faltered. The way was longer than he had expected, +and his provisions soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but +a little every day, but he kept up his courage, and pressed on, and, +after many days of toilsome travel, he reached the dreadful wilds. + +When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had left the town he +seemed sorry, but showed no disposition to go and look for him. After +a few days had passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of the +people where the Minor Canon had gone. But, although the citizens had +been so anxious that the young clergyman should go to the dreadful +wilds, thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow him, they +were now afraid to mention the Minor Canon's destination, for the +monster seemed angry already, and, if he should suspect their trick +he would, doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one said he +did not know, and the Griffin wandered about disconsolate. One +morning he looked into the Minor Canon's school-house, which was +always empty now, and thought that it was a shame that every thing +should suffer on account of the young man's absence. + +"It does not matter so much about the church," he said, "for nobody +went there; but it is a pity about the school. I think I will teach +it myself until he returns." + +It was the hour for opening the school, and the Griffin went inside +and pulled the rope which rang the school-bell. Some of the children +who heard the bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it to +be a joke of one of their companions; but when they saw the Griffin +they stood astonished, and scared. + +"Go tell the other scholars," said the monster, "that school is about +to open, and that if they are not all here in ten minutes, I shall +come after them." + +In seven minutes every scholar was in place. + +Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy or girl moved, or +uttered a whisper. The Griffin climbed into the master's seat, his +wide wings spread on each side of him, because he could not lean back +in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great tail coiled +around, in front of the desk, the barbed end sticking up, ready to +tap any boy or girl who might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed +the scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them while their +master was away. In speaking he endeavored to imitate, as far as +possible, the mild and gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must +be admitted that in this he was not very successful. He had paid a +good deal of attention to the studies of the school, and he +determined not to attempt to teach them any thing new, but to review +them in what they had been studying; so he called up the various +classes, and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The +children racked their brains to remember what they had learned. They +were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure that they recited as they +had never recited before. One of the boys, far down in his class, +answered so well that the Griffin was astonished. + +"I should think you would be at the head," said he. "I am sure you +have never been in the habit of reciting so well. Why is this?" + +"Because I did not choose to take the trouble," said the boy, +trembling in his boots. He felt obliged to speak the truth, for all +the children thought that the great eyes of the Griffin could see +right through them, and that he would know when they told a +falsehood. + +"You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the Griffin. "Go down to +the very tail of the class, and if you are not at the head in two +days, I shall know the reason why." + +The next afternoon this boy was number one. + +It was astonishing how much these children now learned of what they +had been studying. It was as if they had been educated over again. +The Griffin used no severity toward them, but there was a look about +him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they were sure they +knew their lessons for the next day. + +The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the sick and the poor; +and he began to go about the town for this purpose. The effect upon +the sick was miraculous. All, except those who were very ill indeed, +jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming, and declared +themselves quite well. To those who could not get up, he gave herbs +and roots, which none of them had ever before thought of as +medicines, but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of +the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all that, they +afterward said that no matter what happened to them, they hoped that +they should never again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides, +feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues. + +As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared. All those +who had depended upon charity for their daily bread were now at work +in some way or other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their +neighbors just for the sake of their meals,--a thing which before had +been seldom heard of in the town. The Griffin could find no one who +needed his assistance. + +The summer had now passed, and the autumnal equinox was rapidly +approaching. The citizens were in a state of great alarm and anxiety. +The Griffin showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have settled +himself permanently among them. In a short time, the day for his +semi-annual meal would arrive, and then what would happen? The +monster would certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their +children. + +Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they had sent away the +Minor Canon; he was the only one on whom they could have depended in +this trouble, for he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find +out what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive. Some step +must be taken immediately. A meeting of the citizens was called, and +two old men were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They were +instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner for him on equinox +day,--one which would entirely satisfy his hunger. They would offer +him the fattest mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of +various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might fancy. If none +of these suited, they were to mention that there was an orphan asylum +in the next town. + +"Anything would be better," said the citizens, "than to have our dear +children devoured." + +The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions were not +received with favor. + +"From what I have seen of the people of this town," said the monster, +"I do not think I could relish any thing which was prepared by them. +They appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and selfish. As +for eating one of them, old or young, I could not think of it for a +moment. In fact, there was only one creature in the whole place for +whom I could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor Canon, who +has gone away. He was brave, and good, and honest, and I think I +should have relished him." + +"Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in that case I wish we +had not sent him to the dreadful wilds!" + +"What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean? Explain instantly what +you are talking about!" + +The old man, terribly frightened at what he had said, was obliged to +tell how the Minor Canon had been sent away by the people, in the +hope that the Griffin might be induced to follow him. + +When the monster heard this, he became furiously angry. He dashed +away from the old men and, spreading his wings, flew backward and +forward over the town. He was so much excited that his tail became +red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening sky. When at +last he settled down in the little field where he usually rested, and +thrust his tail into the brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the +water of the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens were +greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old man for telling about +the Minor Canon. + +"It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended at last to go +and look for him, and we should have been saved. Now who can tell +what misery you have brought upon us." + +The Griffin did not remain long in the little field. As soon as his +tail was cool he flew to the town-hall and rang the bell. The +citizens knew that they were expected to come there, and although +they were afraid to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and +they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the platform at one +end, flapping his wings and walking up and down, and the end of his +tail was still so warm that it slightly scorched the boards as he +dragged it after him. + +When everybody who was able to come was there, the Griffin stood +still and addressed the meeting. + +"I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he said, "ever since I +discovered what cowards you are, but I had no idea that you were so +ungrateful, selfish, and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was +your Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your good, and +thought of nothing else but how he might benefit you and make you +happy; and as soon as you imagine yourselves threatened with a +danger,--for well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,--you send +him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes, hoping thereby to +save yourselves. Now, I had conceived a great liking for that young +man, and had intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But I +have changed my mind about him. I shall go and find him, but I shall +send him back here to live among you, and I intend that he shall +enjoy the reward of his labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to +the officers of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I first +came here, and tell them never to return to this town under penalty +of death. And if, when your Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not +bow yourselves before him, put him in the highest place among you, +and serve and honor him all his life, beware of my terrible +vengeance! There were only two good things in this town: the Minor +Canon and the stone image of myself over your church-door. One of +these you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away myself." + +With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it was time, for the +end of his tail had become so hot that there was danger of its +setting fire to the building. + +The next morning, the Griffin came to the church, and tearing the +stone image of himself from its fastenings over the great door, he +grasped it with his powerful fore-legs and flew up into the air. +Then, after hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail an +angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful wilds. When he +reached this desolate region, he set the stone Griffin upon a ledge +of a rock which rose in front of the dismal cave he called his home. +There the image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it had +had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting with the exertion +of carrying such an enormous load to so great a distance, lay down +upon the ground, and regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt +somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon. He found the +young man, weak and half starved, lying under the shadow of a rock. +After picking him up and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew +away to a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and herbs which +he well knew were strengthening and beneficial to man, though he had +never tasted them himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was +greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the Griffin told him +what had happened in the town. + +"Do you know," said the monster, when he had finished, "that I have +had, and still have, a great liking for you?" + +"I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon, with his usual +politeness. + +"I am not at all sure that you would be," said the Griffin, "if you +thoroughly understood the state of the case, but we will not consider +that now. If some things were different, other things would be +otherwise. I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in which +you have been treated that I have determined that you shall at last +enjoy the rewards and honors to which you are entitled. Lie down and +have a good sleep, and then I will take you back to the town." + +As he heard these words, a look of trouble came over the young man's +face. + +"You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the Griffin, "about my +return to the town. I shall not remain there. Now that I have that +admirable likeness of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at +my leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent +proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of cowardly and selfish +people." + +The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back, and dropped into +a doze; and when he was sound asleep the Griffin took him up, and +carried him back to the town. He arrived just before daybreak, and +putting the young man gently on the grass in the little field where +he himself used to rest, the monster, without having been seen by any +of the people, flew back to his home. + +When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the morning among the +citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality with which he was received +were truly wonderful. He was taken to a house which had been occupied +by one of the banished high officers of the place, and every one was +anxious to do all that could be done for his health and comfort. The +people crowded into the church when he held services, so that the +three old women who used to be his week-day congregation could not +get to the best seats, which they had always been in the habit of +taking; and the parents of the bad children determined to reform them +at home, in order that he might be spared the trouble of keeping up +his former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to the highest +office of the old church, and before he died, he became a bishop. + +During the first years after his return from the dreadful wilds, the +people of the town looked up to him as a man to whom they were bound +to do honor and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the sky +to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming back. However, +in the course of time, they learned to honor and reverence their +former Minor Canon without the fear of being punished if they did not +do so. + +But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin. The autumnal +equinox day came round, and the monster ate nothing. If he could not +have the Minor Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down, +with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he gradually +declined, and died. It was a good thing for some of the people of the +town that they did not know this. + +If you should ever visit the old town, you would still see the little +griffins on the sides of the church; but the great stone griffin that +was over the door is gone. + + + + + + OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD. + + * * * * * + +A mountain brook ran through a little village. Over the brook there +was a narrow bridge, and from the bridge a foot-path led out from the +village and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and his +mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had been employed by the +villagers to pipe the cattle down from the hills. Every afternoon, an +hour before sunset, he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage +and play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that were +grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever they might happen +to be, and would come down to the village--the cows by the easiest +paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the +steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all. + +But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not piped the cattle home. +It is true that every afternoon he sat upon the rock and played upon +his familiar instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had +grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of his cheerful +notes, which used to come from the rocky hill on the other side of +the valley, were heard no more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one +could scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had become somewhat +deaf, and did not know that the sound of his pipes was so thin and +weak, and that the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and +the goats came down every afternoon as before, but this was because +two boys and a girl were sent up after them. The villagers did not +wish the good old man to know that his piping was no longer of any +use, so they paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing +about the two boys and the girl. + +Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older then he was, +and was as deaf as a gate,--posts, latch, hinges, and all,--and she +never knew that the sound of her son's pipe did not spread over all +the mountainside, and echo back strong and clear from the opposite +hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of his piping; and +as he was so much younger than she was, she never thought of him as +being very old. She cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his +clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little salary. + +One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old Pipes had finished +his piping, he took his stout staff and went down the hill to the +village to receive the money for his month's work. The path seemed a +great deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and Old +Pipes thought that it must have been washed by the rains and greatly +damaged. He remembered it as a path that was quite easy to traverse +either up or down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man, and as +his mother was so much older than he was, he never thought of himself +as aged and infirm. + +When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had talked a little with +some of his friends, Old Pipes started to go home. But when he had +crossed the bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up the +hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon a stone. He had +not been sitting there half a minute, when along came two boys and a +girl. + +"Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight, and I don't +believe I can climb up this steep path to my home. I think I shall +have to ask you to help me." + +"We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite cheerfully; and +one boy took him by the right hand, and the other by the left, while +the girl pushed him in the back. In this way he went up the hill +quite easily, and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave each +of the three children a copper coin, and then they sat down for a few +minutes' rest before starting back to the village. + +"I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes. + +"Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the boys, "if we had +not been so far to-day after the cows, the sheep, and the goats. They +rambled high up on the mountain, and we never before had such a time +in finding them." + +"Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the goats!" exclaimed Old +Pipes. "What do you mean by that?" + +The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her head, put her hand +on her mouth, and made all sorts of signs to the boy to stop talking +on this subject; but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old +Pipes. + +"Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the cattle can't hear +your pipes now, somebody has to go after them every evening to drive +them down from the mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us +three to do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night the +cattle had wandered far." + +"How long have you been doing this?" asked the old man. + +The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on her mouth more +vigorously than before, but the boy went on. + +"I think it is about a year now," he said, "since the people first +felt sure that the cattle could not hear your pipes; and from that +time we've been driving them down. But we are rested now, and will go +home. Good-night, sir." + +The three children then went down the hill, the girl scolding the boy +all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent a few moments, and then he +went into his cottage. + +"Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those children said?" + +"Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not hear them. I did not +know there were any children here." + +Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly to make her +hear, how the two boys and the girl had helped him up the hill, and +what he had heard about his piping and the cattle. + +"They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why, what's the matter with +the cattle?" + +"Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe there's any thing the +matter with the cattle. It must be with me and my pipes that there is +something the matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the +wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take them. I shall go +straight down to the village and give back the money I received +to-day." + +"Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've piped as well as you +could, and no more can be expected. And what are we to do without the +money?" + +"I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going down to the village to +pay it back." + +The sun had now set; but the moon was shining very brightly on the +hill-side, and Old Pipes could see his way very well. He did not take +the same path by which he had gone before, but followed another, +which led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though longer, was +not so steep. + +When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat down to rest, +leaning his back against a great oak-tree. As he did so, he heard a +sound like knocking inside the tree, and then a voice distinctly +said: + +"Let me out! let me out!" + +Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and sprang to his feet. +"This must be a Dryad-tree!" he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her +out." + +Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a Dryad-tree, but he knew +there were such trees on the hill-sides and the mountains, and that +Dryads lived in them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on those +days when the moon rose before the sun went down, a Dryad could come +out of her tree if any one could find the key which locked her in, +and turn it. Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree, which +stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that key," he said, "I shall +surely turn it." Before long he perceived a piece of bark standing +out from the tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle of +a key. He took hold of it, and found he could turn it quite around. +As he did so, a large part of the side of the tree was pushed open, +and a beautiful Dryad stepped quickly out. + +For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the scene before +her,--the tranquil valley, the hills, the forest, and the +mountain-side, all lying in the soft clear light of the moon. "Oh, +lovely! lovely!" she exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any +thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes, she said: "How good +of you to let me out! I am so happy and so thankful, that I must kiss +you, you dear old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck of Old +Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You don't know," she then went +on to say, "how doleful it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I +don't mind it in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but +in summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the beauties +of the world. And it's ever so long since I've been let out. People +so seldom come this way; and when they do come at the right time they +either don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away. But you, +you dear old man, you were not frightened, and you looked and looked +for the key, and you let me out, and now I shall not have to go back +till winter has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious! +What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I am?" + +"I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you out, since I see +that it makes you so happy; but I must admit that I tried to find the +key because I had a great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to +do something for me, you can, if you happen to be going down toward +the village." + +"To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will go anywhere for you, +my kind old benefactor." + +"Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would take this little bag +of money to the Chief Villager and tell him that Old Pipes cannot +receive pay for the services which he does not perform. It is now +more than a year that I have not been able to make the cattle hear +me, when I piped to call them home. I did not know this until +to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot keep the money, and so I +send it back." And, handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her +good-night, and turned toward his cottage. + +"Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank you over, and over, and +over again, you good old man!" + +Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be saved the fatigue +of going all the way down to the village and back again. "To be +sure," he said to himself, "this path does not seem at all steep, and +I can walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me +dreadfully to come up all the way from the village, especially as I +could not have expected those children to help me again." When he +reached home, his mother was surprised to see him returning so soon. + +"What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come back? What did the +Chief Villager say? Did he take the money?" + +Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent the money to +the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly reflected that his mother +would be sure to disapprove such a proceeding, and so he merely said +he had sent it by a person whom he had met. + +"And how do you know that the person will ever take it to the Chief +Villager?" cried his mother. "You will lose it, and the villagers +will never get it. Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to +have ordinary common sense?" + +Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy years of age he +could scarcely expect to grow any wiser, but he made no remark on +this subject; and, saying that he doubted not that the money would go +safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper. His mother +scolded him roundly, but he did not mind it; and after supper he went +out and sat on a rustic chair in front of the cottage to look at the +moonlit village, and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager +really received the money. While he was doing these two things, he +went fast asleep. + +When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go down to the village +with the little bag of money. She held it in her hand, and thought +about what she had heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she +said; "and it is a shame that he should lose this money. He looked as +if he needed it, and I don't believe the people in the village will +take it from one who has served them so long. Often, when in my tree, +have I heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to take the +money back to him." She did not start immediately, because there were +so many beautiful things to look at; but after a while she went up to +the cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she slipped +the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently sped away. + +The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he would go up the +mountain and cut some wood. He had a right to get wood from the +mountain, but for a long time he had been content to pick up the dead +branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however, he felt so +strong and vigorous that he thought he would go and cut some fuel +that would be better than this. He worked all the morning, and when +he came back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very good +appetite for his dinner. + +Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads, but there was one thing +which, although he had heard, he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss +from a Dryad made a person ten years younger. The people of the +village knew this, and they were very careful not to let any child of +ten years or younger, go into the woods where the Dryads were +supposed to be; for, if they should chance to be kissed by one of +these tree-nymphs, they would be set back so far that they would +cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a very bad boy +of eleven once ran away into the woods, and had an adventure of this +kind; and when his mother found him he was a little baby of one year +old. Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him up more +carefully than she had done before; and he grew to be a very good boy +indeed. + +Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad, once on each +cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous and active as when he was a +hale man of fifty. His mother noticed how much work he was doing, and +told him that he need not try in that way to make up for the loss of +his piping wages; for he would only tire himself out, and get sick. +But her son answered that he had not felt so well for years, and that +he was quite able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old Pipes, +for the first time that day, put his hand in his coat-pocket, and +there, to his amazement, he found the little bag of money. "Well, +well!" he exclaimed, "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that I +had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big oak-tree I must +have gone to sleep and dreamed it all; and then I came home thinking +I had given the money to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the +time. But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall not take +it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go to the village to see +some of my old friends; and then I shall give up the money." + +Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as had been his custom +for so many years, took his pipes from the shelf on which they lay, +and went out to the rock in front of the cottage. + +"What are you going to do?" cried his mother. "If you will not +consent to be paid, why do you pipe?" + +"I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her son. "I am used to +it, and I do not wish to give it up. It does not matter now whether +the cattle hear me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure +no one." + +When the good man began to play upon his favorite instrument he was +astonished at the sound that came from it. The beautiful notes of the +pipes sounded clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over +the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond, while, after a +little interval, an echo came back from the rocky hill on the other +side of the valley. + +"Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my pipes? They must have +been stopped up of late, but now they are as clear and good as ever." + +Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide. The cattle on the +mountain heard them, and those that were old enough remembered how +these notes had called them from their pastures every evening, and so +they started down the mountain-side, the others following. + +The merry notes were heard in the village below, and the people were +much astonished thereby. "Why, who can be blowing the pipes of Old +Pipes?" they said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up to +see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the cattle were coming +down the mountain. And so the two boys and the girl did not have to +go after them, and had an hour for play, for which they were very +glad. + +The next morning Old Pipes started down to the village with his +money, and on the way he met the Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that +you? Why, I thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but a +dream." + +"A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew how happy you have made +me, you would not think it merely a dream. And has it not benefited +you? Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you playing +beautifully on your pipes." + +"Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it before, but I see it +all now. I have really grown younger. I thank you, I thank you, good +Dryad, from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of the money +in my pocket that made me think it was a dream." + +"Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said, laughing, "because +I thought you ought to keep it. Good-by, kind, honest man. May you +live long, and be as happy as I am now." + +Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood that he was really +a younger man; but that made no difference about the money, and he +kept on his way to the village. As soon as he reached it, he was +eagerly questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the evening +before, and when the people heard that it was himself, they were very +much surprised. Thereupon, Old Pipes told what had happened to him, +and then there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations and +hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every one. The Chief Villager +refused to take his money, and, although Old Pipes said that he had +not earned it, every one present insisted that, as he would now play +on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because, for a time, +he was unable to perform his duty. + +So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and after an hour or two +spent in conversation with his friends, he returned to his cottage. + +There was one individual, however, who was not at all pleased with +what had happened to Old Pipes. This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on +the hills on the other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to +echo back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be heard. There +were a great many other Echo-dwarfs on these hills, some of whom +echoed back the songs of maidens, some the shouts of children, and +others the music that was often heard in the village. But there was +only one who could send back the strong notes of the pipes of Old +Pipes, and this had been his sole duty for many years. But when the +old man grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be heard on +the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing to do, and he spent +his time in delightful idleness; and he slept so much and grew so fat +that it made his companions laugh to see him walk. + +On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval, the sound of +the pipes was heard on the echo hills, this dwarf was fast asleep +behind a rock. As soon as the first notes reached them, some of his +companions ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back the +merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very much annoyed and +indignant at being thus obliged to give up his life of comfortable +leisure, and he hoped very much that this pipe-playing would not +occur again. The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and, sure +enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes of the pipes as clear +and strong as they ever had been; and he was obliged to work as long +as Old Pipes played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had supposed, +of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased forever, and he felt that +he had a right to be indignant at being thus deceived. He was so much +disturbed that he made up his mind to go and try to find out whether +this was to be a temporary matter or not. He had plenty of time, as +the pipes were played but once a day, and he set off early in the +morning for the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work for +the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the valley and had +gone some distance into the woods on the hill-side, he stopped to +rest, and, in a few minutes, the Dryad came tripping along. + +"Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you doing here? and how did +you get out of your tree?" + +"Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy; that's what I am doing. +And I was let out of my tree by the good old man who plays the pipes +to call the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me happier to +think that I have been of service to him. I gave him two kisses of +gratitude, and now he is young enough to play his pipes as well as +ever." + +The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with passion. "Am I to +believe," he said, "that you are the cause of this great evil that +has come upon me? and that you are the wicked creature who has again +started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing? What have I +ever done to you that you should have condemned me for years and +years to echo back the notes of those wretched pipes?" + +At this the Dryad laughed loudly. + +"What a funny little fellow you are!" she said. "Any one would think +you had been condemned to toil from morning till night; while what +you really have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every day +the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon you, Echo-dwarf! You +are lazy and selfish; and that is what is the matter with you. +Instead of grumbling at being obliged to do a little wholesome work, +which is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf upon the +rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the good fortune of the old +man who has regained so much of his strength and vigor. Go home and +learn to be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be happy. +Good-by." + +"Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he shook his fat little +fist at her. "I'll make you suffer for this. You shall find out what +it is to heap injury and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from +him the repose that he has earned by long years of toil." And, +shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to the rocky hill-side. + +Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of Old Pipes sounded +down into the valley and over the hills and up the mountain-side; and +every afternoon when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew +more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day, from early morning till +it was time for him to go back to his duties upon the rocky +hill-side, he searched the woods for her. He intended, if he met her, +to pretend to be very sorry for what he had said, and he thought he +might be able to play a trick upon her which would avenge him well. +One day, while thus wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The +Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to ordinary people; +but now he was so anxious to find the object of his search, that he +stopped and asked Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had +not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on him with some +surprise. + +"No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have been looking +everywhere for her." + +"You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with her?" + +Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he should be nearer the +ear of his small companion, and he told what the Dryad had done for +him. + +When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man whose pipes he was +obliged to echo back every day, he would have slain him on the spot +had he been able; but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth +and listened to the rest of the story. + +"I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued, "on account of +my aged mother. When I was old myself, I did not notice how very old +my mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble and decrepit +her years have caused her to become; and I am looking for the Dryad +to ask her to make my mother younger, as she made me." + +The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was a man who might help +him in his plans. + +"Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes, "and it does you +honor. But you should know that a Dryad can make no person younger +but one who lets her out of her tree. However, you can manage the +affair very easily. All you need do is to find the Dryad, tell her +what you want, and request her to step into her tree and be shut up +for a short time. Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree; +she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish. Is not this a +good plan?" + +"Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go instantly and search +more diligently for the Dryad." + +"Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You can easily carry me on +your strong shoulders; and I shall be glad to help you in any way +that I can." + +"Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as Old Pipes carried +him rapidly along, "if he persuades the Dryad to get into a +tree,--and she is quite foolish enough to do it,--and then goes away +to bring his mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break +off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn it again. Then +Mistress Dryad will see what she has brought upon herself by her +behavior to me." + +Before long they came to the great oak-tree in which the Dryad had +lived, and, at a distance, they saw that beautiful creature herself +coming toward them. + +"How excellently well every thing happens!" said the dwarf. "Put me +down, and I will go. Your business with the Dryad is more important +than mine; and you need not say any thing about my having suggested +your plan to you. I am willing that you should have all the credit of +it yourself." + +Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but the little rogue +did not go away. He concealed himself between some low, mossy rocks, +and he was so much of their color that you would not have noticed him +if you had been looking straight at him. + +When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time in telling her about +his mother, and what he wished her to do. At first, the Dryad +answered nothing, but stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes. + +"Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?" she said. "I should +dreadfully dislike to do it, for I don't know what might happen. It +is not at all necessary, for I could make your mother younger at any +time if she would give me the opportunity. I had already thought of +making you still happier in this way, and several times I have waited +about your cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she never +comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot enter a house. I cannot +imagine what put this idea into your head. Did you think of it +yourself?" + +"No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old Pipes. "A little dwarf +whom I met in the woods proposed it to me." + +"Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it all. It is the scheme of +that vile Echo-dwarf--your enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like +to see him." + +"I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes. + +"No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes perceived the +Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There he is. Seize him and drag him out, +I beg of you." + +Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was pointed out to him, +and, running to the rocks, he caught the little fellow by the arm and +pulled him out. + +"Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the door of the great +oak, "just stick him in there, and we will shut him up. Then I shall +be safe from his mischief for the rest of the time I am free." + +Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the Dryad pushed the +door shut; there was a clicking sound of bark and wood, and no one +would have noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening in it. + +"There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be afraid of him. And I +assure you, my good piper, that I shall be very glad to make your +mother younger as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out and +meet me?" + +"Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will do it without +delay." + +And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his cottage. But when +he mentioned the matter to his mother, the old woman became very +angry indeed. She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did +exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses, and she would +have nothing to do with them. If her son had ever allowed himself to +be kissed by one of them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to +its doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a word of +it. He felt better than he used to feel, but that was very common. +She had sometimes felt that way herself, and she forbade him ever to +mention a Dryad to her again. + +That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his plan in regard +to his mother had failed, sat down upon the rock and played upon his +pipes. The pleasant sounds went down the valley and up the hills and +mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons who happened to +notice the fact, the notes were not echoed back from the rocky +hill-side, but from the woods on the side of the valley on which Old +Pipes lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in their work +to listen to the echo of the pipes coming from the woods. The sound +was not as clear and strong as it used to be when it was sent back +from the rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the trees. +Such a thing as an echo changing its place in this way had never been +heard of before, and nobody was able to explain how it could have +happened. Old Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came from +the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree. The sides of the tree +were thin, and the sound of the pipes could be heard through them, +and the dwarf was obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those +notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes thought he might get +the Dryad in trouble if he let any one know that the Echo-dwarf was +shut up in the tree, and so he wisely said nothing about it. + +One day the two boys and the girl who had helped Old Pipes up the +hill were playing in the woods. Stopping near the great oak-tree, +they heard a sound of knocking within it, and then a voice plainly +said: + +"Let me out! let me out!" + +For a moment the children stood still in astonishment, and then one +of the boys exclaimed: + +"Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found! Let's let her out!" + +"What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I am the oldest of all, +and I am only thirteen. Do you wish to be turned into crawling +babies? Run! run! run!" + +And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the valley as fast as +their legs could carry them. There was no desire in their youthful +hearts to be made younger than they were. And for fear that their +parents might think it well that they should commence their careers +anew, they never said a word about finding the Dryad-tree. + +As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother grew feebler and +feebler. One day when her son was away, for he now frequently went +into the woods to hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she +arose from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But she felt so +weak and tired that she was not able to do the work to which she had +been so long accustomed. "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come +when I am too old to work. My son will have to hire some one to come +here and cook his meals, make his bed, and mend his clothes. Alas! +alas! I had hoped that as long as I lived I should be able to do +these things. But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and +some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I wonder where he +is." And tottering to the door, she went outside to look for him. She +did not feel able to stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank +into it, quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep. + +The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to see if she could find +an opportunity of carrying out old Pipes's affectionate design, now +happened by; and seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she +stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently kissed her on each +cheek, and then as quietly disappeared. + +In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and looking up at the +sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is almost dinner-time! My son will be +here directly, and I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet, +she hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and +vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her son arrived +the meal was on the table. + +"How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to herself, as she +was bustling about. She was a woman of very vigorous constitution, +and at seventy had been a great deal stronger and more active than +her son was at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother, he knew +that the Dryad had been there; but, while he felt as happy as a king, +he was too wise to say any thing about her. + +"It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his mother; "and +either my hearing has improved or you speak much more plainly than +you have done of late." + +The summer days went on and passed away, the leaves were falling from +the trees, and the air was becoming cold. + +"Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad, "and the +night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go back into my +comfortable quarters in the great oak. But first I must pay another +visit to the cottage of Old Pipes." + +She found the piper and his mother sitting side by side on the rock +in front of the door. The cattle were not to go to the mountain any +more that season, and he was piping them down for the last time. Loud +and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down the +mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the easiest paths, the +sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the most difficult +ones among the rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the +echoes of the cheerful music. + +"How happy they look, sitting there together," said the Dryad; "and I +don't believe it will do them a bit of harm to be still younger." And +moving quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on his +cheek and then his mother. + +Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it was, but he did not +move, and said nothing. His mother, thinking that her son had kissed +her, turned to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And then +she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous woman of sixty, +followed by her son, erect and happy, and twenty years younger than +herself. + +The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her shoulders as she felt +the cool evening wind. + +When she reached the great oak, she turned the key and opened the +door. "Come out," she said to the Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking +within. "Winter is coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of +my tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the mountain for +the last time this year, the pipes will no longer sound, and you can +go to your rocks and have a holiday until next spring." + +Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly out, and the Dryad +entered the tree and pulled the door shut after her. "Now, then," she +said to herself, "he can break off the key if he likes. It does not +matter to me. Another will grow out next spring. And although the +good piper made me no promise, I know that when the warm days arrive +next year, he will come and let me out again." + +The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the tree. He was too +happy to be released to think of any thing else, and he hastened as +fast as he could to his home on the rocky hill-side. + + * * * * * + +The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in the piper. When the +warm days came again he went to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to +his sorrow and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the +ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it lay with its trunk +shattered and split. And what became of the Dryad, no one ever knew. + + + + + + THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM. + + * * * * * + +There was once a Queen who founded, in her capital city, a grand +museum. This institution was the pride of her heart, and she devoted +nearly all her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it, +and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This museum was intended +to elevate the intelligence of her people, but the result was quite +disappointing to the Queen. For some reason, and what it was she +could not imagine, the people were not interested in her museum. She +considered it the most delightful place in the world, and spent hours +every day in examining and studying the thousands of objects it +contained; but although here and there in the city there was a person +who cared to visit the collection, the great body of the people found +it impossible to feel the slightest interest in it. At first this +grieved the Queen, and she tried to make her museum better; but as +this did no good, she became very angry, and she issued a decree that +all persons of mature age who were not interested in her museum +should be sent to prison. + +This decree produced a great sensation in the city. The people +crowded to the building, and did their very best to be interested; +but, in the majority of cases, the attempt was an utter failure. They +could not feel any interest whatever. The consequence was that +hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to prison, and as +there was not room enough for them in the ordinary jails, large +temporary prisons were erected in various parts of the city. Those +persons who were actually needed for work or service which no one +else could do were allowed to come out in the day-time on parole; but +at night they had to return to their prisons. + +It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a stranger +entered the city one day. He was surprised at seeing so many prisons, +and approaching the window in one of them, behind the bars of which +he saw a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all this +meant. The citizen informed him how matters stood, and then, with +tears mounting to his eyes, he added: + +"Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in that museum; but +it is impossible; I cannot make myself care for it in the slightest +degree! And, what is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and +I shall languish here for the rest of my days." + +Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out of her house. Her +face was pale, and she was weeping bitterly. Filled with pity, he +stopped and asked her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for +a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear children, to take +an interest in that museum. For a time I thought I might do it, but +the hopes proved false. It is impossible. I must leave my little +ones, and go to prison." + +The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases and many others of a +similar character, which he soon met with. "It is too bad! too bad!" +he said to himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble. There is +scarcely a family, I am told, in which there is not some uninterested +person--I must see the Queen and talk to her about it," and with this +he wended his way to the palace. + +He met the Queen just starting out on her morning visit to the +museum. When he made it known that he was a stranger, and desired a +short audience, she stopped and spoke to him. + +"Have you visited my museum yet?" she said. "There is nothing in the +city so well worth your attention as that. You should go there before +seeing any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an intelligent +expression, and I have no doubt that it will interest you greatly. I +am going there myself, and I shall be glad to see what effect that +fine collection has upon a stranger." + +This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what he had heard he felt +quite sure that if he went to the museum, he would soon be in jail; +and so he hurried to propose a plan which had occurred to him while +on his way to the palace. + +"I came to see your Majesty on the subject of the museum," he said, +"and to crave permission to contribute to the collection some objects +which shall be interesting to every one. I understand that it is +highly desirable that every one should be interested." + +"Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although I think that there +is not the slightest reason why every one should not feel the keenest +interest in what the museum already contains, I am willing to add to +it whatever may make it of greater value." + +"In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should be lost in +securing what I wish to present." + +"Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon can you return?" + +"It will take some days, at least," said the Stranger. + +"Give me your parole to return in a week," said the Queen, "and start +immediately." + +The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace. Having filled a +leathern bag with provisions from a cook's shop, he went out of the +city gates. As he walked into the open country, he said to himself: + +"I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise. Where I am +to find any thing that will interest all the people in that city, I +am sure I do not know; but my heart is so filled with pity for the +great number of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes and +shut up in prison, that I am determined to do something for them, if +I possibly can. There must be some objects to be found in this vast +country that will interest every one." + +About noon he came to a great mountain-side covered with a forest. +Thinking that he was as likely to find what he sought in one place as +another, and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the forest, +and walked for some distance along a path which gradually led up the +mountain. Having crossed a brook with its edges lined with +water-cresses, he soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of +which sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to himself, "this +is indeed fortunate! This good and venerable man, who passes his life +amid the secrets of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know." +Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man the object of +his quest. + +"I am afraid you are looking for what you will not find," said the +Hermit. "Most people are too silly to be truly interested in any +thing. They herd together like cattle, and do not know what is good +for them. There are now on this mountain-side many commodious and +comfortable caves, all of which would be tenanted if people only knew +how improving and interesting it is to live apart from their +fellow-men. But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your +quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do nothing for you +myself, but I have a pupil who is very much given to wandering about, +and looking for curious things. He may tell you where you will be +able to find something that will interest everybody, though I doubt +it. You may go and see him, if you like, and I will excuse him from +his studies for a time, so that he may aid you in your search." + +The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of parchment, and, +giving it to the Stranger, he directed him to the cave of his pupil. + +This was situated at some distance, and higher up the mountain, and +when the Stranger reached it, he found the Pupil fast asleep upon the +ground. This individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms, long +hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the Stranger awakened him, +told him why he had come, and gave him the hermit's excuse, the +sleepy eyes of the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long. + +"That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a Monday; for I +generally have to be satisfied with a half-holiday, Wednesdays and +Saturdays." + +"Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the Stranger. + +"Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to the cave; though I +have been known to go fishing on days when there was no holiday. I +have never seen the old man but once, and that was when he first took +me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable. That wouldn't +be hermit-like. He comes up here on the afternoons I am out, and +writes down what I am to do for the next half-week." + +"And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger. + +"Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but there have been +times when I have wondered whether it wouldn't have been better for +me to have been something else. But I have chosen my profession, and +I suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately on our +search; but first I must put the cave in order, for the old man will +be sure to come up while I am gone." + +So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book at a marked page, +and laid it on a flat stone, which served as a table, and then placed +a skull and a couple of bones in a proper position near by. + +The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a line and hook in +his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod from under some bushes. + +"What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger, "we are not going +to fish!" + +"Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a good place, we might +catch something that would be a real curiosity." + +Before long they came to a mountain brook, and here the Pupil +insisted on trying his luck. The Stranger was a little tired and +hungry, and so was quite willing to sit down for a time and eat +something from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait, and he +staid away so long that the Stranger had quite finished his meal +before he returned. He came back at last, however, in a state of +great excitement. + +"Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I have found something that +is truly astonishing! Come quickly!" + +The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil, whose long legs +carried him rapidly over the mountain-side. Reaching a large hole at +the bottom of a precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming: +"Come in here and I will show you something that will amaze you!" he +immediately entered the hole. + +The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what curiosity he had +found, followed him some distance along a narrow and winding +under-ground passage. The two suddenly emerged into a high and +spacious cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof; on the +floor, in various places, were strongly fastened boxes, and packages +of many sorts, bales and bundles of silks and rich cloths, with +handsome caskets, and many other articles of value. + +"What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the Stranger, in great +surprise. + +"Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes fairly sparkling with +delight. "It is a robber's den! Isn't it a great thing to find a +place like this?" + +"A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm; "let us get out of +it as quickly as we can, or the robbers will return, and we shall be +cut to pieces." + +"I don't believe they are coming back very soon," said the Pupil, +"and we ought to stop and take a look at some of these things." + +"Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger; "you do not know what +danger you are in." And, so saying, he turned to hasten away from the +place. + +But he was too late. At that moment the robber captain and his band +entered the cave. When these men perceived the Stranger and the +Hermit's Pupil, they drew their swords and were about to rush upon +them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up his long arms, +exclaimed: + +"Stop! it is a mistake!" + +At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword, and motioned to +his men to halt. "A mistake!" he said; "what do you mean by that?" + +"I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking for curiosities, +and wandered into this place by accident. We haven't taken a thing. +You may count your goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have +not even opened a box, although I very much wanted to see what was in +some of them." + +"Are his statements correct?" said the Captain, turning to the +Stranger. + +"Entirely so," was the answer. + +"You have truthful features, and an honest expression," said the +Captain, "and I do not believe you would be so dishonorable as to +creep in here during our absence and steal our possessions. Your +lives shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain with us; for +we cannot allow any one who knows our secret to leave us. You shall +be treated well, and shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if +your conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full members." + +Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate position. He +strode up and down one side of the cave, vowing inwardly that never +again would he allow himself to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That +individual, however, was in a state of high delight. He ran about +from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures which some of the +robbers showed him. + +The two captives were fed and lodged very well; and the next day the +Captain called them and the band together, and addressed them. + +"We are now twenty-nine in number," he said; "twenty-seven full +members, and two on probation. To-night we are about to undertake a +very important expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall +fasten up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall tell +you to what place we are going." + +An hour or two before midnight the band set out, accompanied by the +Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil; and when they had gone some miles +the Captain halted them to inform them of the object of the +expedition. "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's museum. It +is the most important business we have ever undertaken." + +At these words the Stranger stepped forward and made a protest. "I +left the city yesterday," he said, "commissioned by the Queen to +obtain one or more objects of interest for her museum; and to return +now to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich will be +simply impossible." + +"You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's reflection, "such +an action would be highly dishonorable on your part. If you will give +me your word of honor that you will remain by this stone until our +return, the expedition will proceed without you." + +The Stranger gave his word, and having been left sitting upon the +stone, soon dropped asleep, and so remained until he was awakened by +the return of the band, a little before daylight. They came slowly +toiling along, each man carrying an enormous bundle upon his back. +Near the end of the line was the Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as +heavy as any of the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a +time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it. + +"I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much as they can," he +said. "You ought to have been along. We had a fine time! We swept +that museum clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf or +in a case." + +"What sort of things are they," asked the Stranger. + +"I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't have any light for fear +people would notice it, but the moon shone in bright enough for us to +see all the shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try and +examine any thing, but to take all that was there. The cases had +great cloth covers on them, and we spread these on the floor and made +bundles of the curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully as +soon as we get to the den." + +It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their cave. The +bundles were laid in a great circle on the floor, and, at a given +signal, they were opened. For a moment each robber gazed blankly at +the contents of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and +search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but after a few +minutes, they arose, looking blanker and more disappointed than +before. + +"So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is nothing in the +whole collection that I care for. I do not like a thing here!" + +"Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one of his band. + +"I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for a moment, "that as +these things are of no use to us, we are bound in honor to take them +back." + +"Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do not be in too great +a hurry to do that." He then told the Captain of the state of affairs +in the city, and explained in full the nature of the expedition he +had undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be better," he said, +"if these things were not taken back for the present. If you have a +safe place where you can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen +where they are, and if she chooses she can send for them." + +"Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that she should bear part +of the labor of transportation. There is a disused cave, a mile or so +away, and we will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and then +we shall leave the matter to you. We take no further interest in it. +And if you have given your parole to the Queen to return in a week," +the Captain further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it. Did +you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to the Pupil. + +"Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time fixed for my return. +And I am sure that I like a robber's life much better than that of a +hermit. There is ever so much more spice and dash in it." + +"The Stranger was then told that if he would promise not to betray +the robbers he might depart. He gave the promise; but added sadly +that he had lost so much time that he was afraid he would not now be +able to attain the object of his search and return within the week. + +"If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will gladly assist you." +"Comrades!" he cried, addressing his band, "after stowing this +useless booty in the disused cave, and taking some rest and +refreshment, we will set out again, and the object of our expedition +shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum which will +interest every one." + +Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied by the +Stranger and the Pupil. When they had walked about an hour, the +Captain, as was his custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell +them where they were going. "I have concluded," said he, "that no +place is so likely to contain what we are looking for as the castle +of the great magician, Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed +thither, and sack the castle." + +"Will there not be great danger in attacking the castle of a +magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat anxious tones. + +"Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but we are not such +cowards as to hesitate on account of danger. Forward, my men!" And on +they all marched. + +When they reached the magician's castle, the order was given to scale +the outer wall. This the robbers did with great agility, and the +Hermit's Pupil was among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger +was not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over the wall. +Inside the great court-yard they perceived numbers of Weirds--strange +shadowy creatures who gathered silently around them; but not in the +least appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched into the +castle, the door of which stood open. They now entered a great hall, +having at one end a doorway before which hung a curtain. Following +their Captain, the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it +aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a large table, sat the +great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy over his mystic studies, which he +generally pursued in the dead hours of the night. Drawing their +swords, the robbers rushed upon him. + +"Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to us the treasures of +your castle." + +The old magician raised his head from his book, and, pushing up his +spectacles from his forehead, looked at them mildly, and said: + +"Freeze!" + +Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man remaining in the +position in which he was when the magical word was uttered. With +uplifted swords and glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before +the magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old man said: + +"I see among you one who has an intelligent brow and truthful +expression. His head may thaw sufficiently for him to tell me what +means this untimely intrusion upon my studies." + +The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and in a few moments he +was able to speak. He then told the magician about the Queen's +museum, and how it had happened that he had come there with the +robbers. + +"Your motive is a good one," said the magician, "though your actions +are somewhat erratic; and I do not mind helping you to find what you +wish. In what class of objects do the people of the city take the +most interest?" + +"Truly I do not know," said the Stranger. + +"This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj. "How can you +expect to obtain that which will interest every one, when you do not +know what it is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out +this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be done." + +The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered them to carry the +frozen visitors outside the castle walls. Each one of the rigid +figures was taken up by two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him +up in the road outside the castle. When all had been properly set up, +with the captain at their head, the gates were shut, and the magician +still sitting at his table, uttered the word, "Thaw!" + +Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched away. At daybreak they +halted, and considered how they should find out what all the people +in the city took an interest in. + +"One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil, "whatever it is, it +isn't the same thing." + +"Your remark is not well put together," said the Stranger, "but I see +the force of it. It is true that different people like different +things. But how shall we find out what the different people like?" + +"By asking them," said the Pupil. + +"Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action to words. "This night +we will ask them." He then drew upon the sand a plan of the +city,--(with which he was quite familiar, having carefully robbed it +for many years,)--and divided it into twenty-eight sections, each one +of which was assigned to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the +Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert at climbing." He +then announced that at night the band would visit the city, and that +each man should enter the houses in his district, and ask the people +what it was in which they took the greatest interest. + +They then proceeded to the cave for rest and refreshment; and a +little before midnight they entered the city, and each member of the +band, including the Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the +business assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should disturb +the Queen, for they knew that what she took most interest in was the +museum. During the night nearly every person in the town was aroused +by a black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the windows of +the house, and who, instead of demanding money and jewels, simply +asked what it was in which that person took the greatest interest. +Upon receiving an answer, the robber repeated it until he had learned +it by heart, and then went to the next house. As so many of the +citizens were confined in prisons, which the robbers easily entered, +they transacted the business in much less time than they would +otherwise have required. + +The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into and out of houses +with great agility. He obtained his answers quite as easily as did +the others, but whenever he left a house there was a shade of +disappointment upon his features. Among the last places that he +visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping. He awoke them and +asked the usual question. While they were trembling in their bed, not +knowing what to answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed: +"Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle. Speak +out!" Each of the boys then promptly declared it was fishing-tackle, +and the pupil left, greatly gratified. "I was very much afraid," he +said to himself, "that not a person in my district would say +fishing-tackle; and I am glad to think that there were two boys who +had sense enough to like something that is really interesting." + +It was nearly daylight when the work was finished; and then the band +gathered together in an appointed place on the outside of the city, +where the Stranger awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent +memory, which was necessary in their profession, and they repeated to +the Stranger all the objects and subjects that had been mentioned to +them, and he wrote them down upon tablets. + +The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded to the castle +of the magician, the great gate of which was silently opened for them +by the Weirds. When they were ushered into the magician's room, +Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined them +carefully. + +"All these things should make a very complete collection," he said, +"and I think I have specimens of the various objects in my +interminable vaults." He then called his Weirds and, giving one of +them the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the vaults +and gather enough of the things therein mentioned to fill a large +museum. In half an hour the Weirds returned and announced that the +articles were ready in the great court-yard. + +"Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these men to carry them to +the Queen's museum." + +The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for the assistance he +had given; and the band, accompanied by a number of Weirds, proceeded +to carry the objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was a +strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a stuffed mammoth, +followed by others bearing the skeleton of a whale, while the robbers +and the rest of their queer helpers were loaded with every thing +relating to history, science, and art which ought to be in a really +good museum. When the whole collection had been put in place upon the +floors, the shelves, and in the cases, it was nearly morning. The +robbers, with the Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds +disappeared; while the Stranger betook himself to the Queen's palace, +where, as soon as the proper hour arrived, he requested an audience. + +When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was very pale and that +her cheeks bore traces of recent tears. "You are back in good time," +she said to him, "but it makes very little difference whether you +have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no longer any museum. +There has been a great robbery, and the thieves have carried off the +whole of the vast and valuable collection which I have been so long +in making." + +"I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and I have already +placed in your museum-building the collection which I have obtained. +If your Majesty pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It +may, in some degree, compensate for that which has been stolen." + +"Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can compensate for it; I do +not even wish to see what you have brought." + +"Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger; "but I will be +so bold as to say that I have great hopes that the collection which I +have obtained will interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously +allow them to see it?" + +"I have no objection to that," said the Queen; "and indeed I shall be +very glad if they can be made to be interested in the museum. I will +give orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody can go to +see what you have brought; and those who shall be interested in it +may return to their homes. I did not release my obstinate subjects +when the museum was robbed, because their fault then was just as +great as it was before; and it would not be right that they should +profit by my loss." + +The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several days the museum +was crowded with people moving from morning till night through the +vast collection of stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and +brilliant insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful works +of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive objects which +had been brought from the interminable vaults of the magician +Alfrarmedj. The Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe +whether or not the people were interested, were in no doubt upon this +point. Every eye sparkled with delight, for every one found something +which was the very thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the +Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large case +containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the smallest hooks for +little minnows to the great irons and spears used in capturing +whales. + +No one went back to prison, and the city was full of re-united +households and happy homes. On the morning of the fourth day, a grand +procession of citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen +their delight and appreciation of her museum. The great happiness of +her subjects could but please the Queen. She called the Stranger to +her, and said to him: + +"Tell me how you came to know what it was that would interest my +people." + +"I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to say, I arranged that +they should be asked." + +"That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is a great pity that my +long labors in their behalf should have been lost. For many years I +have been a collector of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable +or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not an original +specimen or a facsimile. My agents brought me from foreign lands, +even from the most distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every +kind; in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable +material, and of those which could not be obtained careful copies +were made. There was not a duplicate specimen in the whole +collection; only one of each kind; nothing repeated. Never before was +there such a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my people +up to an appreciation of button-holes; but, with the exception of a +few tailors and seamstresses, nobody took the slightest interest in +what I had provided for their benefit. I am glad that my people are +happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of my efforts." + +"The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger, "the better you +will understand that we cannot make other people like a thing simply +because we like it ourselves." + +"Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with admiration, "are you +a king in disguise?" + +"I am," he replied. + +"I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and I wish to add that I +believe you are far better able to govern this kingdom than I am. If +you choose I will resign it to you." + +"Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would not deprive you of +your royal position, but I should be happy to share it with you." + +"That will answer very well," said the Queen. And turning to an +attendant, she gave orders that preparations should be made for their +marriage on the following day. + +After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with great pomp and +grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to the museum, and, much to her +surprise, was greatly delighted and interested. The King then +informed her that he happened to know where the robbers had stored +her collection, which they could not sell or make use of, and if she +wished, he would regain the collection and erect a building for its +reception. + +"We will not do that at present," said the Queen. "When I shall have +thoroughly examined and studied all these objects, most of which are +entirely new to me, we will decide about the button-holes." + +The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He was greatly +delighted with the spice and dash of a robber's life, so different +from that of a hermit; and he determined, if possible, to change his +business and enter the band. He had a conversation with the Captain +on the subject, and that individual encouraged him in his purpose. + +"I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life. I have stolen so +much, that I cannot use what I have. I take no further interest in +accumulating spoils. The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and, +if you like we will change places. I will become the pupil of your +old master, and you shall be the captain of my band." + +The change was made. The Captain retired to the cave of the Hermit's +Pupil, while the latter, with the hearty consent of all the men, took +command of the band of robbers. + +When the King heard of this change, he was not at all pleased, and he +sent for the ex-pupil. + +"I am willing to reward you," he said, "for assisting me in my recent +undertaking; but I cannot allow you to lead a band of robbers in my +dominions." + +A dark shade of disappointment passed over the ex-pupil's features, +and his face lengthened visibly. + +"It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at the very outset of +a brilliant career. I'll tell you what I'll do," he added suddenly, +his face brightening, "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession, +I'll promise to do nothing but rob robbers." + +"Very well," said the King, "if you will confine yourself to that, +you may retain your position." + +The members of the band were perfectly willing to rob in the new way, +for it seemed quite novel and exciting to them. The first place they +robbed was their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories, +they knew from whom the various goods had been stolen, and every +thing was returned to its proper owner. The ex-pupil then led his +band against the other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his +movements were conducted with such dash and vigor that the various +hordes scattered in every direction, while the treasures in their +dens were returned to the owners, or, if these could not be found, +were given to the poor. In a short time every robber, except those +led by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business; and the +victorious youth led his band into other kingdoms to continue the +great work of robbing robbers. + +The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities which the +robbers had stolen from her. She was so much interested in the new +museum that she continually postponed the re-establishment of her old +one; and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still in the +cave where the robbers shut them up. + + + + + + CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; + +OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM. + + * * * * * + +The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned ship, very high +in the bow, very high in the stern, with a quarter-deck always +carpeted in fine weather, because her captain could not see why one +should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as on land. +Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a fine, jolly, old-fashioned, +elderly sailor he was. The "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one +sea, and always between two ports, one on the west side of the sea, +and one on the east. The port on the west was quite a large city, in +which Captain Covajos had a married son, and the port on the east was +another city in which he had a married daughter. In each family he +had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was a great joy to +the jolly old sailor to arrive at either port. The Captain was very +particular about his cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally +laden with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or fine +things to wear, or beautiful things to look at. Once a merchant +brought to him some boxes of bitter aloes, and mustard plasters, but +Captain Covajos refused to take them into his ship. + +"I know," said he, "that such things are very useful and necessary at +times, but you would better send them over in some other vessel. The +'Horn o' Plenty' has never carried any thing that to look at, to +taste, or to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young. I am +sure you cannot say that of these commodities. If I were to put such +things on board my ship, it would break the spell which more than +fifty savory voyages have thrown around it." + +There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who used to say that +sometimes, when the weather was hazy and they could not see far, they +would know they were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she +came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her sails and masts, +had gradually become so filled with the odor of good things that the +winds that blew over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance. + +There was another thing about which Captain Covajos was very +particular; he always liked to arrive at one of his ports a few days +before Christmas. Never, in the course of his long life, had the old +sailor spent a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine +grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it would have grieved +him very much if he had been unable to reach one or the other of his +ports in good season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily +laden, and very slow, and there were many days of calms on that sea +when she did not sail at all, so that her voyages were usually very, +very long. But the Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give +himself plenty of time to get to the other end of his course before +Christmas came around. + +One spring, however, he started too late, and when he was about the +middle of his voyage, he called to him Baragat Bean, his old +boatswain. This venerable sailor had been with the Captain ever since +he had commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important occasions he +was always consulted in preference to the other officers, none of +whom had served under Captain Covajos more then fifteen or twenty +years. + +"Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed the Isle of +Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain standing up against the sky +to the north." + +"Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she stands, the same as +usual." + +"That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we are not yet +half-way across, and I am very much afraid that I shall not be able +to reach my dear daughter's house before Christmas." + +"That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat; "but I've feared +something of the kind, for we've had calms nearly every other day, +and sometimes, when the wind did blow, it came from the wrong +direction, and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward." + +"That was very bad management," said the Captain. "The chief mate +should have seen to it that the sails were turned in such a manner +that the ship could not go backward. If that sort of thing happened +often, it would become quite a serious affair." + +"But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain, "and I don't +see how you are going to get into port before Christmas." + +"Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the sea. + +"It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat, "to see you spend +Christmas at sea; a thing you never did before, nor ever shall do, if +I can help it. If you'll take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and +go back. It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than to +the one we are going to, and if we turn back now, I am sure we all +shall be on shore before the holidays." + +"Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain Covajos, "where I was +last winter! Why, that would be like spending last Christmas over +again!" + +"But that would be better than having none at all, sir," said the +boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea would be about equal to none." + +"Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up the coming Christmas +with my daughter and her children, and go back and spend last +Christmas over again with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have +the ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the chief mate +I do not wish to sail backward if it can possibly be avoided." + +For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed back upon her track +towards the city where dwelt the Captain's son. The weather was fine, +the carpet was never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing +was going on very well, when a man, who happened to have an errand at +one of the topmasts, came down, and reported that, far away to the +north, he had seen a little open boat with some people in it. + +"Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be some poor fellows who are +shipwrecked. It will take us out of our course, but we must not leave +them to their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will sail +northward." + +It was not very long before they came up with the boat; and, much to +the Captain's surprise, he saw that it was filled with boys. + +"Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near enough. "And where do +you come from?" + +"We are the First Class in Long Division," said the oldest boy, "and +we are cast away. Have you any thing to eat that you can spare us? We +are almost famished." + +"We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain. "Come on board +instantly, and all your wants shall be supplied." + +"How long have you been without food?" he asked, when the boys were +on the deck of the vessel. + +"We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said one of them; "and +it is now late in the afternoon. Some of us are nearly dead from +starvation." + +"It is very hard for boys to go so long without eating," said the +good Captain. And leading them below, he soon set them to work upon a +bountiful meal. + +Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask them how they +came to be cast away. + +"You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and the Multiplication +Class had a holiday to-day, and each class took a boat and determined +to have a race, so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest +branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division. Our class +rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of the Multiplicationers, +and found indeed that we were out of sight of every thing; so that, +at last, we did not know which was the way back, and thus we became +castaways." + +"Where is your school?" asked the Captain. + +"It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and, although it is a long +way off for a small boat with only four oars for nine boys, it can't +be very far for a ship." + +"That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we shall take you +home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to have the vessel turned toward +Apple Island, that we may restore these boys to their parents and +guardians." + +Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the world where Apple +Island was, but he did not like to ask, because that would be +confessing his ignorance; so he steered his vessel toward a point +where he believed he had once seen an island, which, probably, was +the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty" sailed in this direction +all night, and when day broke, and there was no island in sight, she +took another course; and so sailed this way and that for six or seven +days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All this time, the First +Class in Long Division was as happy as it could be, for it was having +a perfect holiday; fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up +the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle for wind. But +the Captain now began to grow a little impatient, for he felt he was +losing time; so he sent for the chief mate, and said to him mildly +but firmly: + +"I know it is out of the line of your duty to search for island +schools, but, if you really think that you do not know where Apple +Island lies, I wish you to say so, frankly and openly." + +"Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I don't think I do." + +"Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a basis to work upon, +and we know where we stand. You can take a little rest, and let the +second mate find the island. But I can only give him three days in +which to do it. We really have no time to spare." + +The second mate was very proud of the responsibility placed upon him, +and immediately ordered the vessel to be steered due south. + +"One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally unknown place by +going straight ahead in a certain direction, as by sailing here, +there, and everywhere. In this way, you really get over more water, +and there is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging." + +So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end of that time they +came in sight of land. This was quite a large island, and when they +approached near enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome +city. + +"Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to the oldest boy. + +"Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I can say with +certainty that I truly believe that it is; but, I think, if we were +to go on shore, the people there would be able to tell us how to go +to Apple Island." + +"Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we will go on shore and +make inquiries.--And it has struck me, Baragat," he said, "that +perhaps the merchants in the city where my son lives may be somewhat +annoyed when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their goods on +board, and not disposed of. Not understanding my motives, they may be +disposed to think ill of me. Consequently the idea has come into my +head, that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time, and try +to dispose of some of our merchandise. The city seems to be quite +prosperous, and I have no doubt there are a number of merchants +here." + +So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the harbor, and as many +of the officers and crew as could be spared went on shore to make +inquiries. Of course the First Class in Long Division was not left +behind; and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody. The Captain +and his companions were cordially welcomed by some of the dignitaries +of the city who had come down to the harbor to see the strange +vessel; but no one could give any information in regard to Apple +Island, the name of which had never been heard on those shores. The +Captain was naturally desirous of knowing at what place he had +landed, and was informed that this was the Island of the Fragile +Palm. + +"That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain. "Why is it so +called?" + +"The reason is this," said his informant. "Near the centre of the +island stands a tall and very slender palm-tree, which has been +growing there for hundreds of years. It bears large and handsome +fruit which is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection, +is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit." + +"Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you not positive about it?" + +"No," said the other; "no one living has ever tasted the fruit in its +perfection. When it becomes overripe, it drops to the ground, and, +even then, it is considered royal property, and is taken to the +palace for the King's table. But on fête-days and grand occasions +small bits of it are distributed to the populace." + +"Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain Covajos, "when it is in +its best condition to eat?" + +"It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for any one to climb up +that tree, the trunk of which is so extremely delicate and fragile +that the weight of a man would probably snap it; and, of course, a +ladder placed against it would produce the same result. Many attempts +have been made to secure this fruit at the proper season, but all of +them have failed. Another palm-tree of a more robust sort was once +planted near this one in the hope that when it grew high enough, men +could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit from the other. +But, although we waited many years the second tree never attained +sufficient height, and it was cut down." + +"It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I suppose it cannot be +helped." And then he began to make inquiries about the merchants in +the place, and what probability there was of his doing a little trade +here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of his ship was made +up of goods which were greatly desired by the citizens of this place; +and for several days he was very busy in selling the good things to +eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear, and the +beautiful things to look at, with which the hold of the "Horn o' +Plenty" was crowded. + +During this time the First Class in Long Division roamed, in delight, +over the city. The busy streets, the shops, the handsome buildings, +and the queer sights which they occasionally met, interested and +amused them greatly. But still the boys were not satisfied. They had +heard of the Fragile Palm, and they made up their minds to go and +have a look at it. Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into +the country, and in about an hour they came in sight of the beautiful +tree standing in the centre of the plain. The trunk was, indeed, +exceedingly slender, and, as the guide informed them, the wood was of +so very brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected from +the winds by the high hills which encircled it, it would have been +snapped off ages ago. Under the broad tuft of leaves that formed its +top, the boys saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great +nuts as big as their heads. + +"At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy, "is that fruit just +ripe enough to eat?" + +"Now," answered the guide. "This is the season when it is in the most +perfect condition. In about a month it will become entirely too ripe +and soft, and will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest of +us are glad enough to get a taste of it." + +"I should think the King would be exceedingly eager to get some of +it, just as it is," said the boy. + +"Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his father, and I don't +know how many grandfathers back, have offered large rewards to any +one who would procure them this fruit in its best condition. But +nobody has ever been able to get any yet." + +"The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the head boy. + +"Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was a King who so much +desired to taste the fruit as our present monarch." + +The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree, shut one eye, and +gave his head a little wag. Whereupon every boy in the class looked +up, shut one eye, and slightly wagged his head. After which the +oldest boy said that he thought it was about time for them to go back +to the ship. + +As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk together freely, +the boys had an animated discussion. It was unanimously agreed that +they would make an attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the +Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among them was as to +how it should be done. Most of them were in favor of some method of +climbing the tree and trusting to its not breaking. But this the +oldest boy would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then +somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure, responsible for +the rest of the class. At length a good plan was proposed by a boy +who had studied mechanics. + +"What we ought to do with that tree," said he, "is to put a hinge +into her. Then we could let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and +set her up again. + +"But how are you going to do it?" asked the others. + +"This is the way," said the boy who had studied mechanics. "You take +a saw, and then, about two feet from the ground, you begin and saw +down diagonally, for a foot and a half, to the centre of the trunk. +Then you go on the other side, and saw down in the same way, the two +outs meeting each other. Now you have the upper part of the trunk +ending in a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of the +trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place where you first began +to saw, you bore a hole straight through both sides of the cleft and +the wedge between them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole, +and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be apt to move +because she fits in so snug and tight. Then you get a long rope, and +put one end in a slipknot loosely around the trunk. Then you get a +lot of poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot up +until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull it tight. Then you +take another rope with a slip-knot, and push this a little more than +half-way up the trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent too +much strain coming on any one part of the trunk. Then, after that, +you take a mallet and chisel and round off the lower corners of the +wedge, so that it will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of +the ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul her up +again. That will all be easy enough." + +This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced in its favor; +but the oldest one suggested that it would be better to fasten the +ropes to the trunk before they began to saw upon it, and another boy +asked how they were going to keep the tree standing when they hauled +her up again. + +"Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied mechanics; "you just +bore another hole about six inches above the first one, and put in +another bolt. Then, of course, she can't move." + +This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to start out +early the next morning, gather the fruit, and claim the reward the +King had offered. They accordingly went to the Captain and asked him +for a sharp saw, a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and +two very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given to them, +were put away in readiness for the work to be attempted. + +Very early on the next morning, the First Class in Long Division set +out for the Fragile Palm, carrying their tools and ropes. Few people +were awake as they passed through the city, and, without being +observed, they reached the little plain on which the tree stood. The +ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree was sawn, +diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt was put in, and the +corners of the wedge were rounded off. Then the eldest boy produced a +pound of butter, whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes, +paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought the butter. + +"I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along some butter, +because, when the tree is down, we can grease the hinge, and then it +will not be so hard to pull it up again." + +When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of the long ropes, +while another one with a pole pushed against the trunk of the Fragile +Palm. When it began to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and +ran to help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved on its +hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it soon began to move +with greater rapidity, although the boys held it back with all their +strength; and, in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came +to the ground at last with a great thump. And then they all dropped +their ropes, and ran for the fruit. Fortunately the great nuts +incased in their strong husks were not in the least injured, and the +boys soon pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys were +in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts and eating them, but this +the eldest boy positively forbade. + +"This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost sacred, and if we +were to eat any of it, it is probable that we should be put to death, +which would be extremely awkward for fellows who have gone to all the +trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and carry the fruit to +the King." + +According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the hinge in the +tree with the butter, and then set themselves to work to haul up the +trunk. This, however, was much more difficult than letting it down; +and they had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles, +before they could pull upon it with advantage. The tree, although +tall, was indeed a very slender one, with a small top, and, if it had +been as fragile as it was supposed to be, the boys' efforts would +surely have broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm work, +they pulled it into an upright position, and put in the second bolt. +They left the ropes on the tree because, as some of them had +suggested, the people might want to let the tree down again the next +year. It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in their +arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered; but, having noticed a +basket-maker's cottage on their way to the tree, two of them were +sent to buy one of his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached +to two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts, the boys +took the poles on their shoulders, and marched into the city. + +On their way to the palace they attracted a great crowd, and when +they were ushered into the presence of the King, his surprise and +delight knew no bounds. At first he could scarcely believe his eyes; +but he had seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake +about it. + +"I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how you procured this +fruit, and thus accomplished a deed which has been the object of the +ambition of myself and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave +the tree standing?" + +"We did," said the boys. + +"Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty, "is to give you +the reward you have so nobly earned. Treasurer, measure out to each +of them a quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I am +wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of these nuts +cracked, that I may taste of its luscious contents." + +The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied. Huddling together, +they consulted in a low tone, and then the eldest boy addressed the +King. + +"May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should very much prefer to +have you give each of us one of those nuts instead of a quart of +gold." + +The King looked grave. "This is a much greater reward," he said, +"than I had ever expected to pay; but, since you ask it, you must +have it. You have done something which none of my subjects has ever +been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that you should +be fully satisfied." + +So he gave them each a nut, with which they departed in triumph to +the ship. + +By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had sold all his cargo +at very good prices; and when the money was safely stored away in the +"Horn o' Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had +really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible haste," he +said to old Baragat, "to find Apple Island, put these boys ashore, +and then speed away to the city where lives my son. We must not fail +to get there in time to spend last Christmas over again." + +On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had left the Island of +the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors who happened to be aloft noticed +a low, black, and exceedingly unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly +approaching. This soon proved to be the ship of a band of corsairs, +who, having heard of the large amount of money on the "Horn o' +Plenty," had determined to pursue her and capture the rich prize. All +sails were set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became plain +that she could never outsail the corsair vessel. + +"What our ship can do better than any thing else," said Baragat to +the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop her short, and let the other one +go by." + +This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the corsair passed rapidly +by, not being able to stop so suddenly, it soon turned around and +came back, its decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth. + +"They are going to board us," cried Baragat. "They are getting out +their grappling-irons, and they will fasten the two ships together." + +"Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the Captain. "It is +higher there, and we shall not be so much exposed to accidents." + +The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o' Plenty," and in a +moment the two vessels were fastened together; and then the corsairs, +every man of them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks +and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o' Plenty," and sprang +upon its central deck. Some of the ferocious fellows, seeing the +officers and crew all huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a +movement in that direction. This so frightened the chief mate that he +sprang down upon the deck of the corsair ship. A panic now arose, and +he was immediately followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of +course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain and Baragat felt +themselves bound not to desert the crew, and so they jumped also. +None of the corsairs interfered with this proceeding, for each one of +them was anxious to find the money at once. When the passengers and +crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were all on board the corsair ship, +Baragat came to the Captain, and said: + +"If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and separate the +vessels. If we don't do that those rascals, when they have finished +robbing our money-chests, will come back here and murder us all." + +"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and he told the chief +mate to give orders to cast off the grapnels, push the two vessels +apart, and set some of the sails. + +When this had been done, the corsair vessel began to move away from +the other, and was soon many lengths distant from her. When the +corsairs came on deck and perceived what had happened, they were +infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own vessel with the +one they had captured. But the "Horn o' Plenty" could not, by any +possibility, sail as fast as the corsair ship, and the latter easily +kept away from her. + +"Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what you have to do is +easy enough. Sail straight for our port and those sea-robbers will +follow you; for, of course, they will wish to get their own vessel +back again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our part, to +overtake us. In the mean time the money will be safe enough, for they +will have no opportunity of spending it; and when we come to port, we +can take some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those +fellows. They can never sail away from us on the 'Horn o' Plenty.'" + +"That is an admirable plan," said the Captain, "and I shall carry it +out; but I cannot sail to port immediately. I must first find Apple +Island and land these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably +growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue to follow +us wherever we go." + +"I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall see." + +The First Class in Long Division was very much delighted with the +change of vessels, and the boys rambled everywhere, and examined with +great interest all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite +easy about the only treasures they possessed, because, when they had +first seen the piratical vessel approaching, they had taken the +precious nuts which had been given to them by the King, and had +hidden them at the bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain +kept the sailors' winter clothes. + +"In this warm climate," said the eldest boy, "the robbers will never +meddle with those winter clothes, and our precious fruit will be +perfectly safe." + +"If you had taken my advice," said one of the other boys, "we should +have eaten some of the nuts. Those, at least, we should have been +sure of." + +"And we should have had that many less to show to the other classes," +said the eldest boy. "Nuts like these, I am told, if picked at the +proper season, will keep for a long time." + +For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o' Plenty" followed +their own vessel, but then they seemed to despair of ever being able +to overtake it, and steered in another direction. This threatened to +ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind became troubled. +Then the boy who had studied mechanics came forward and said to the +Captain: + +"I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd follow your old +ship, and when night came on I'd sail up quite near to her, and let +some of your sailors swim quietly over, and fasten a cable to her, +and then you could tow her after you wherever you wished to go." + +"But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it," said Baragat, who was +standing by. + +"That could easily be prevented," said the boy. "At their end of the +cable must be a stout chain which they cannot cut, and it must be +fastened so far beneath the surface of the water that they will not +be able to reach it to unfasten it." + +"A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos; "let it be carried +out." + +As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel quietly +approached the other, and two stout sailors from Finland, who swam +very well, were ordered to swim over and attach the chain-end of a +long cable to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult +operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded at last, +and returned to report. + +"We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they said to the Captain; +"and six feet under water. But the only place we could find to make +it fast to was the bottom of the rudder." + +"That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for the 'Horn o' Plenty' +sails better backward than forward, and will not be so hard to tow." + +For week after week, and month after month, Captain Covajos, in the +corsair vessel, sailed here and there in search of Apple Island, +always towing after him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on +board, but never an island with a school on it could they find; and +one day old Baragat came to the Captain and said: + +"If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm regions. I am +quite sure that apples grow in colder latitudes, and are never found +so far south as this." + +"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos. "We should sail for the +north if we wished to find an island of apples. Have the vessel +turned northward." + +And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly moved on to the +north. One day the Captain made some observations and calculations, +and then he hastily summoned Baragat. + +"Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now near the end of +November, and I am quite certain that we shall not get to the port +where my son lives in time to celebrate last Christmas again. It is +dreadfully slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full of +corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her off and sail +straight for our port, for I should lose my good ship, the merchants +would lose all their money, and the corsairs would go unpunished; +and, besides all that, think of the misery of the parents and +guardians of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to find Apple +Island. And if I cannot reach port in time to spend last Christmas +with my son, I shall certainly get there in season for Christmas +before last. It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter, +but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the city where my son +lives; and, besides, it is necessary to go back, and give the +merchants their money. So now we shall have plenty of time, and need +not feel hurried." + +"No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we need not feel hurried." + +The mind of the eldest boy now became very much troubled, and he +called his companions about him. "I don't like at all," said he, +"this sailing to the north. It is now November, and, although it is +warm enough at this season in the southern part of the sea, it will +become colder and colder as we go on. The consequence of this will be +that those corsairs will want winter clothes, they will take them out +of the Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit." + +The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of them; "but still we +wish to go back to our island." + +"Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite proper that we should +return to Long Division. But think of the hard work we did to get +that fruit, and think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It +would be too bad to lose it now!" + +It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad to lose the fruit, +and it was also unanimously agreed that they wished to go back to +Apple Island. But what to do about it, they did not know. + +Day by day the weather grew colder and colder, and the boys became +more and more excited and distressed for fear they should lose their +precious fruit. The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then +a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos and proposed +that he should send a flag of truce over to the corsairs, offering to +exchange winter clothing. He would send over to them the heavy +garments they had left on their own vessel, and in return would take +the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear of his sailors. In +this way, they would get their fruit back without the corsairs +knowing any thing about it. The Captain considered this an excellent +plan, and ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of truce, +and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make the proposition. The +eldest boy and two of the others insisted on going also, in order +that there might be no mistake about the boxes. But when the +flag-of-truce party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not a +corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They had taken with them +all the money-chests, but to the great delight of the boys, the boxes +of winter clothes had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled, +safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile Palm. + +When the matter had been thoroughly looked into, it became quite +evident what the corsairs had done. There had been only one boat on +board the "Horn o' Plenty," and that was the one on which the First +Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before, the two vessels +had passed within a mile or so of a large island, which the Captain +had approached in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and +they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to ferry +themselves over, a few at a time, in the little boat, taking with +them the money,--and all without discovery. + +Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he heard of the loss of +all the money. + +"I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he said, "and +Christmas before last will not be celebrated so joyously as it was +the first time. But we cannot help what has happened, and we all must +endeavor to bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our +search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my own ship, for I +have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck and my other comforts. +The chief mate, however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on +board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The 'Horn o' +Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we shall go faster that +way." + +The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit, and most of them +were in favor of cracking two or three of the great nuts, and eating +their contents in honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded +them. + +"The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind in endeavoring to +take us back to our school, and still intends to keep up the search +for dear old Apple Island. The least we can do for him is to give him +this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he pleases with +it. This is the only way in which we can show our gratitude to him." + +The boys turned their backs on one another, and each of them gave his +eyes a little rub, but they all agreed to give the fruit to the +Captain. + +When the good old man received his present, he was much affected. "I +will accept what you offer me," he said; "for if I did not, I know +your feelings would be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for +yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find Apple Island in +the course of the coming year, I invite you all to spend Christmas +before last over again, with me at my son's house." + +All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and here and +there, but never could they find Apple Island. When Christmas-time +came, old Baragat went around among the boys and the crew, and told +them it would be well not to say a word on the subject to the +Captain, for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending +Christmas away from his families, and the thing had never happened +before. So nobody made any allusion to the holidays, and they passed +over as if they had been ordinary days. + +During the spring, and all through the summer, the two ships kept up +the unavailing search, but when the autumn began, Captain Covajos +said to old Baragat: "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no +longer look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend Christmas +before last over again, with my dearest son; and if these poor boys +never return to their homes, I am sure they cannot say it was any +fault of mine." + +"No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done all that could be +expected of you." + +So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of the sea; and the +Captain was received with great joy by his son, and his +grandchildren. He went to the merchants, and told them how he had +lost all their money. He hoped they would be able to bear their +misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could do nothing else +for them, that they would accept the eight great nuts from the +Fragile Palm that the boys had given him. To his surprise the +merchants became wild with delight when they received the nuts. The +money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared to the value +of this incomparable and precious fruit, picked in its prime, and +still in a perfect condition. + +It had been many, many generations since this rare fruit, the value +of which was like unto that of diamonds and pearls, had been for sale +in any market in the world; and kings and queens in many countries +were ready to give for it almost any price that might be asked. + +When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly rejoiced, and, as +the holidays were now near, he insisted that the boys should spend +Christmas before last over again, at his son's house. He found that a +good many people here knew where Apple Island was, and he made +arrangements for the First Class in Long Division to return to that +island in a vessel which was to sail about the first of the year. + +The boys still possessed the great nut which the Captain had insisted +they should keep for themselves, and he now told them that if they +chose to sell it, they would each have a nice little fortune to take +back with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and then he said +to the Captain: + +"Our class has gone through a good many hardships, and has had a lot +of trouble with that palm-tree and other things, and we think we +ought to be rewarded. So, if it is all the same to you, I think we +will crack the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it." + +"I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he sat, on that +Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's family and the First Class in +Long Division, the eyes of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as +they tasted the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas +before last could be so joyfully celebrated over again." + + + + + + PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH. + + * * * * * + +In the spring of a certain year, long since passed away, Prince +Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit his uncle, the King of Yan. + +"Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince, "or when my late +father went to see him, the journey was always made by sea; and, in +order to do this, it was necessary to go in a very roundabout way +between Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind. It is +beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his way on account of +capes, peninsulas, and promontories. I shall march from my palace to +that of my uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country, +and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my course. Mountains +and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers shall be bridged, houses shall +be levelled; a road shall be cut through forests; and, when I have +finished my march, the course over which I have passed shall be a +mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the world that, +when a prince desires to travel, it is not necessary for him to go +out of his way on account of obstacles." + +As soon as possible after the Prince had determined upon this march, +he made his preparations, and set out. He took with him a +few courtiers, and a large body of miners, rock-splitters, +bridge-builders, and workmen of that class, whose services would, +very probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer whose duty +it was to point out the direct course to be taken, and another who +was to draw a map of the march, showing the towns, mountains, and the +various places it passed through. There were no compasses in those +days, but the course-marker had an instrument which he would set in a +proper direction by means of the stars, and then he could march by it +all day. Besides these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the +schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took them with him. +He wished to show them how, when a thing was to be done, the best way +was to go straight ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing. + +"When they grow up they will teach these things to their children," +said he; "and thus I shall instil good principles into my people." + +The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched over a level +country, with no further trouble than that occasioned by the tearing +down of fences and walls, and the destruction of a few cottages and +barns. After encamping for the night, they set out the next morning, +but had not marched many miles before they came to a rocky hill, on +the top of which was a handsome house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order to go in a direct +line we must make a tunnel through this hill, immediately under the +house. This may cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be +easily removed." + +"Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I will dismount from my +horse, and watch the proceedings." + +When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before his house, he +hurried out to pay his respects to the Prince. When he was informed +of what was to be done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from +laughing aloud. + +"I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea. It is so odd and +original. It will be very funny, I am sure, to see a tunnel cut right +under my house." + +The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at the base of the +hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made a proposition to the Prince. + +"It will take your men some time," he said, "to cut this tunnel, and +it is a pity your Highness should not be amused in the meanwhile. It +is a fine day: suppose we go into the forest and hunt." + +This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care about sitting +under a tree and watching his workmen, and the Jolly-cum-pop having +sent for his horse and some bows and arrows, the whole party, with +the exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a short +distance away. + +"What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but we'll hunt +whatever we happen to see--deer, small birds, rabbits, griffins, +rhinoceroses, any thing that comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping +grasshopper. My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful thing +it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious day!" + +The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop affected the whole +party, and they rode merrily through the forest; but they found no +game; and, after an hour or two, they emerged into the open country +again. At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and +massive building. + +"I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and perhaps we can get +some refreshments at yonder house. So far, this has not been a very +fine hunt." + +"No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But what a joyful thing to +see a hospitable mansion just at the moment when we begin to feel a +little tired and hungry!" + +The building they were approaching belonged to a Potentate, who lived +at a great distance. In some of his travels he had seen this massive +house, and thought it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought +it, fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three +myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred years before, but +no prisoners had ever been sent to this jail. A few days preceding +the Jolly-cum-pop's hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and +had stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition, he had +said to the jailer: + +"It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to this place, and in +all that time there have been no prisoners, and you and your men have +been drawing your wages without doing any thing. I shall return this +way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I shall discharge you +all and close the jail." + +This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did not wish to lose +his good situation. When he saw the Prince and his party approaching, +the thought struck him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them, +and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned. He came out to +meet the hunters, and when they asked if they could here find +refreshment, he gave them a most cordial welcome. His men took their +horses, and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member of the +party into a small bedroom, of which there seemed to be a great many. + +"Here are water and towels," he said to each one, "and when you have +washed your face and hands, your refreshments will be ready." Then, +going out, he locked the door on the outside. + +The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three courtiers, five boys, +five girls, the course-marker, the map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop. +The heart of the jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something +to be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the prisoners a meal +of bread and water through the holes in their cell-doors, and then he +sat down to make out his report to the Potentate. + +"They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to himself, "which are +punished by long imprisonment. I don't want any of them executed." + +So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen, according to the +cell each happened to be in, and he wrote a crime opposite each +number. The first was highway robbery, the next forgery, and after +that followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, poaching, +usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery, using false weights +and measures, burglary, counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, +conspiracy, and poisoning his grandmother by proxy. + +This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate returned. He was +very much surprised to find that seventeen prisoners had come in +since his previous visit, and he read the report with interest. + +"Here is one who ought to be executed," he said, referring to Number +Seventeen. "And how did he poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he +get another woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ some +one to act in his place as the poisoner?" + +"I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said the jailer, +fearful that he should lose a prisoner; "but this is his first +offence, and his grandmother, who did not die, has testified to his +general good character." + +"Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever does it again, let +him be executed; and, by the way, I should like to see the +prisoners." + +Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along the corridors, and +let him look through the holes in the doors at the prisoners within. + +"What is this little girl in for?" he asked. + +The jailer looked at the number over the door, and then at his +report. + +"Piracy," he answered. + +"A strange offence for such a child," said the Potentate. + +"They often begin that sort of thing very early in life," said the +jailer. + +"And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate, looking in at the +Prince, "what did he do?" + +The jailer glanced at the number, and the report. + +"Robbed hen-roosts," he said. + +"He must have done a good deal of it to afford to dress so well," +said the Potentate, passing on, and looking into other cells. "It +seems to me that many of your prisoners are very young." + +"It is best to take them young, my lord," said the jailer. "They are +very hard to catch when they grow up." + +The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop, and asked what was +his offence. + +"Conspiracy," was the answer. + +"And where are the other conspirators?" + +"There was only one," said the jailer. + +Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers. + +"He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother," said the +Potentate. "She must be very aged, and that makes it all the worse +for him. I think he should be executed." + +"Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured that his crime was +quite unintentional." + +"Then he should be set free," said the Potentate. + +"I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just enough +intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here for a long time, but +not enough to deserve execution." + +"Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave; "take good care of +your prisoners, and send me a report every month." + +"That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing very low. + +The Prince and his party had been very much surprised and incensed +when they found that they could not get out of their rooms, and they +had kicked and banged and shouted until they were tired, but the +jailer had informed them that they were to be confined there for +years; and when the Potentate arrived they had resigned themselves to +despair. The Jolly-cum-pop, however, was affected in a different way. +It seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that a person +should deliberately walk into a prison-cell and be locked up for +several years; and he lay down on his little bed and laughed himself +to sleep. + +That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred window, wide awake. +He was a Truant, and had never yet been in any place from which he +could not run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended upon him +to run away and bring them assistance, and he knew that his +reputation as a Truant was at stake. His responsibility was so heavy +that he could not sleep, and he sat at the window, trying to think of +a way to get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its light +he saw upon the grass, not far from his window, a number of little +creatures, which at first he took for birds or small squirrels; but +on looking more attentively he perceived that they were pigwidgeons. +They were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be making +calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At this sight, the heart of +the Truant jumped for joy. "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to +himself, "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried in +various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons; but as he +was afraid to call or whistle very loud, for fear of arousing the +jailor, he did not succeed. Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter +which he had in his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into +the midst of the little group with such force that it knocked the +chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was using it. The little +fellows looked up in astonishment, and perceived the Truant beckoning +to them from his window. At first they stood angrily regarding him; +but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to his relief, they +approached the prison and, clambering up a vine, soon reached his +window-sill. The Truant now told his mournful tale, to which the +pigwidgeons listened very attentively; and then, after a little +consultation among themselves, one of them said: "We will get you out +if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths by six." + +The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then he said: "That is +not the kind of thing I am good at, but I expect some of the other +fellows could tell you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a +row, and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if any one tells +you, will you get us all out?" + +"Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before. "We will do that, +for we are very anxious to know how to divide five-sevenths by six. +We have been working at it for four or five days, and there won't be +any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer." + +The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine; but one of them +lingering a little, the Truant, who had a great deal of curiosity, +asked him what it was they had to divide. + +"There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered, "who helped a +farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound of butter. She did not count +us properly, and divided the butter into seven parts. We did not +notice this at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go +away to a distance, took their portions and departed, and now we can +not divide among six the five-sevenths that remain." + +"That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant, "but I am sure some +of the boys can tell you how to do it." + +The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which were occupied by +four boys, but not one of them could tell how to divide five-sevenths +by six. The Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and neither +did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It was not until they came +to the cell of the oldest girl that they received an answer. She was +good at mental arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said, +"It would be five forty-seconds." + +"Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide the butter into +forty-two parts, and each take five. And now let us go to work and +cut these bars." + +Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron, and they had their +little files and saws in pouches by their sides. They went to work +manfully, and the others helped them, and before morning one bar was +cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were all on the +ground floor, and it was quite easy for the prisoners to clamber out. +That is, it was easy for all but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so +much in his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it +impossible to squeeze himself through the opening made by the removal +of one iron bar. The sixteen other prisoners had all departed; the +pigwidgeons had hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two +parts, and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed +with laughter at the idea of being caught in such a curious +predicament. + +"It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he said. "I suppose I +must stay here and cry until I get thin." And the idea so tickled +him, that he laughed himself to sleep. + +The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried from the prison +as fast as they could. When the day broke they had gone several +miles, and then they stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?" +said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He is a pretty fellow +to lead us into this trouble and then desert us! How are we to find +the way back to his house? Course-marker, can you tell us the +direction in which we should go?" + +"Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the course-marker, +"when I can set my instrument by the stars." + +The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight. Every one was very +hungry; they were in an open plain, no house was visible, and they +knew not which way to go. They wandered about for some time, looking +for a brook or a spring where they might quench their thirst; and +then a rabbit sprang out from some bushes. The whole party +immediately started off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it +here, there, backward and forward, through hollows and over hills, +until it ran quite away and disappeared. Then they were more tired, +thirsty, and hungry than before; and, to add to their miseries, when +night came on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could not set +his instrument by the stars. It would be difficult to find sixteen +more miserable people than the Prince and his companions when they +awoke the next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard ground. +Nearly starved, they gazed at one another with feelings of despair. + +"I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that there is nothing I +would not do to obtain food. I would willingly become a slave if my +master would give me a good breakfast." + +"So would I," ejaculated each of the others. + +About an hour after this, as they were all sitting disconsolately +upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching, a large cart drawn by +a pair of oxen. On the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily +loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book. The boys, when +they saw the cart, set up a feeble shout, and the man, lifting his +eyes from his book, drove directly toward the group on the ground. +Dismounting, he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately told him +his troubles and implored relief. "We will do any thing," said the +Prince, "to obtain food." + +Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man with the red +beard addressed the Prince in a slow, meditative manner: "How would +you like," he said, "to form a nucleus?" + +"Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked the Prince. + +"Yes," replied the man, "you can." + +"We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen, without waiting +for further information. + +"Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to my explanations, +or eat?" + +"Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus. + +The man now produced from his cart a quantity of bread, meat, wine, +and other provisions, which he distributed generously, but +judiciously, to the hungry Prince and his followers. Every one had +enough, but no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened, they +felt like new beings. + +"Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a nucleus, as we +promised. How is it done?" + +"I will explain the matter to you in a few words," said the man with +the red beard. "For a long time I have been desirous to found a city. +In order to do this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every great +city is started from a nucleus. A few persons settle down in some +particular spot, and live there. Then they are a nucleus. Then other +people come there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more +people come and more, until in course of time there is a great city. +I have loaded this cart with provisions, tools, and other things that +are necessary for my purpose, and have set out to find some people +who would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad to have found +you and that you are willing to enter into my plan; and this seems a +good spot for us to settle upon." + +"What is the first thing to be done?" said the Prince. + +"We must all go to work," said the man with the red beard, "to build +dwellings, and also a school-house for these young people. Then we +must till some ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at +least, of a few public buildings." + +"All this will take a good while, will it not?" said the Prince. + +"Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while; and the sooner we +set about it, the better." + +Thereupon tools were distributed among the party, and Prince, +courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work to build houses and form +the nucleus of a city. + +When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning, and found that +all but one of his prisoners had escaped, he was utterly astounded, +and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop saw him, made that individual +roar with laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed to deal +with emergencies. "You need not laugh," he said, "every thing shall +go on as before, and I shall take no notice of the absence of your +companions. You are now numbered One to Seventeen inclusive, and you +stand charged with highway robbery, forgery, treason, smuggling, +barn-burning, bribery, poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault +and battery, using false weights and measures, burglary, +counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and poisoning your +grandmother by proxy. I intended to-day to dress the convicts in +prison garb, and you shall immediately be so clothed." + +"I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished." + +"And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Certainly," replied the jailer. + +"This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I shall spend my whole +time in eating and putting on clean clothes." + +Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to the Jolly-cum-pop. +He put one on, and hung up the rest in his cell. These suits were +half bright yellow and half bright green, with spots of bright red, +as big as saucers. + +The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to another. "If the +Potentate comes here and wants to look at the prisoners," he said to +the Jolly-cum-pop, "you must appear in cell number One, so that he +can look through the hole in the door, and see you; then, as he walks +along the corridor, you must walk through the cells, and whenever he +looks into a cell, you must be there." + +"He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "that all your +prisoners are very fat, and that the little girls have grown up into +big men." + +"I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer. + +For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly amused at the idea of +his being seventeen criminals, and he would sit first in one cell and +then in another, trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a +hard-hearted usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing +heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began to tire of +this, and to have a strong desire to see what sort of a tunnel the +Prince's miners and rock-splitters were making under his house. "I +had hoped," he said to himself, "that I should pine away in +confinement, and so be able to get through the window-bars; but with +nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I see no chance of that. +But I must get out of this jail, and, as there seems no other way, I +will revolt." Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole in +the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We have risen in a body, and +have determined to resist your authority, and break jail!" + +When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled. "Do not proceed +to violence," he said; "let us parley." + +"Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you must open the cell +door. We cannot parley through a hole." + +The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the Jolly-cum-pop, +having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes around his left arm as a +shield, and holding in his right hand the iron bar which had been cut +from his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted the +jailer and his myrmidons. + +"It will be useless for you to resist," he said. "You are but four, +and we are seventeen. If you had been wise you would have made us all +cheating shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you might +have been able to control us; but when you see before you a desperate +highwayman, a daring smuggler, a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily +poacher, a powerful ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator, +and a murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!" + +The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other in dismay. + +"We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop, "and will +readily agree to terms. We will give you your choice: Will you allow +us to honorably surrender, and peacefully disperse to our homes, or +shall we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering you by +numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through the crackling +timbers of the burning pile?" + +The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be better, perhaps," he +said, "that you should surrender and disperse to your homes." + +The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the great gate being +opened, he marched out in good order. "Now," said he to himself, "the +thing for me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer +may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry, he turned the +wrong way, and walked rapidly into a country unknown to him. His walk +was a very merry one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince +and his followers have returned to my house, and are tired of +watching the rock-splitters and miners. How amused they will be when +they see me come back in this gay suit of green and yellow, with red +spots, and with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own dogs +will bark at me! And how my own servants will not know me! It is the +funniest thing I ever knew of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and +wide. But when he had gone several miles without seeing any signs of +his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would have been much better," +he said, as he sat down to rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had +brought with me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of +clothes." + +The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked a long distance +without seeing any person or any house. Toward the close of the +afternoon he stopped, and, looking back, he saw coming toward him a +large party of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived that +the person in advance was the jailer. At this the Jolly-cum-pop could +not restrain his merriment. "How comically it has all turned out!" he +exclaimed. "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself out, +and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer comes now, with a +crowd of people, and takes me back. I might as well have staid where +I was. Ha! ha!" + +The jailer now left his party and came running toward the +Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he said, bowing very low, "do not +cast us off." + +"Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop, looking with much +surprise at the jailer's companions, who were now quite near. + +"We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our wives and children. Our +situations were such good ones that we married long ago, and our +families lived in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the +convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should the Potentate +again visit the prison, he would be disappointed and enraged at +finding no prisoners, and would, probably, punish us grievously. So +we determined to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with you, +wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which I fastened to the +great gate, and in it I stated that sixteen of the convicts escaped +by the aid of outside confederates, and that seventeen of them +mutinied in a body and broke jail." + +"That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your Potentate will not +readily understand." + +"If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain it to him; but, +as it is, he must work it out for himself." + +"Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions." + +"Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection. Let us have +supper. I have had nothing to eat since morning, and the weight of +sixteen extra suits of clothes does not help to refresh one." + +The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that night under some +trees, and started off early the next morning. "If I could only get +myself turned in the proper direction," said he, "I believe we should +soon reach my house." + +The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the course-marker, and +the map-maker worked industriously for several days at the foundation +of their city. They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut +down trees. This work was very hard for all of them, for they were +not used to it. After a few days' labor, the Prince said to the man +with the red beard, who was reading his book: "I think we have now +formed a nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be a +city." + +"No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing is truly a nucleus +until something is gathered around it. Proceed with your work, while +I continue my studies upon civil government." + +Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man raised his eyes from +his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop and his party approaching. +"Hurrah!" he cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And he went +forth to meet them. + +When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop in his bright +and variegated dress, they did not know him; but the boys and girls +soon recognized his jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up +a hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their merry +friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening to the adventures of +the Prince and his companions, and telling what had happened to +himself, the man with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his +party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus which had been +here formed, and help to build a city. + +"Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer, "and the sooner +we build a town wall so as to keep off the Potentate, if he should +come this way, the better shall we be satisfied." + +The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded man: "Others +have gathered around us. We have formed a nucleus, and thus have done +all that we promised to do. We shall now depart." + +The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince paid no attention +to his words. "What troubles me most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop, +"is the disgraceful condition of our clothes. They have been so torn +and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are not fit to be +seen." + +"As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have sixteen suits with me, +in which you can all dress, if you like. They are of unusual +patterns, but they are new and clean." + +"It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my station to appear +inordinately gay than to be seen in rags and dirt. We will accept +your clothes." + +Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on a prison dress of +bright green and yellow, with large red spots. There were some +garments left over, for each boy wore only a pair of trousers with +the waistband tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms; while +the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made very good dresses +for the girls. The Prince and his party, accompanied by the +Jolly-cum-pop, now left the red-bearded man and his new settlers to +continue the building of the city, and set off on their journey. The +course-marker had not been informed the night before that they were +to go away that morning, and consequently did not set his instrument +by the stars. + +"As we do not know in which way we should go," said the Prince, "one +way will be as good as another, and if we can find a road let us take +it; it will be easier walking." + +In an hour or two they found a road and they took it. After +journeying the greater part of the day, they reached the top of a low +hill, over which the road ran, and saw before them a glittering sea +and the spires and houses of a city. + +"It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker. + +"That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are so near, we may as +well go there." + +The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this party, dressed in +bright green and yellow, with red spots, passed through their +streets, was so great that the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter. +This set the boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the +sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when they reached the +palace the King came out to see what was the matter. What he thought +when he saw his nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party +apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot now be known; +but, after hearing the Prince's story, he took him into an inner +apartment, and thus addressed him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you +pay me a visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will come in +the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown to the world that, when +a Prince desires to travel, it is often necessary for him to go out +of his way on account of obstacles." + +"My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words shall not be forgotten." + +After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince and his party (in +new clothes) returned (by sea) to Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop +soon repaired to his home. There he found the miners and +rock-splitters still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated +half-way through the hill on which stood his house. "You may go +home," he said, "for the Prince has changed his plans. I will put a +door to this tunnel, and it will make an excellent cellar in which to +keep my wine and provisions." + +The day after the Prince's return his map-maker said to him: "Your +Highness, according to your commands I made, each day, a map of your +progress to the city of Yan. Here it is." + +The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes upon the floor. +"Leave me," he said. "I would be alone." + +[Illustration: THE MAP OF THE PRINCE'S JOURNEY FROM ITOBY TO YAN.] + + + + + + THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS. + + * * * * * + +There were never many persons who could correctly bound the Autocracy +of Mutjado. The reason for this was that the boundary line was not +stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of money, he sent his +tax-gatherers far and wide, and people who up to that time had no +idea of such a thing found that they lived in the territory of +Mutjado. But when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and +people in the outlying districts needed protection or public works, +the dominion of the Autocrat became very much contracted. + +In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell into bad health +and sent for his doctor. That learned man prescribed some medicine +for him; and as this did him no good, he ordered another kind. He +continued this method of treatment until the Autocrat had swallowed +the contents of fifteen phials and flasks, some large and some small. +As none of these were of the slightest benefit, the learned doctor +produced another kind of medicine which he highly extolled. + +"Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and you will soon +find--" + +"A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in disgust. "I will have +none of it! These others were bad enough, and rather than start with +a new physic, I prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and +big, and send me my secretary." + +When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed him that he had +determined to write his will, and that he should set about it at +once. + +The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest male relatives +were a third cousin on his father's side, and another third cousin on +his mother's side. Of course these persons were in nowise related to +each other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had never seen +either of them. He had made up his mind to leave his throne and +dominions to one of these persons, but he could not determine which +of them should be his heir. + +"One has as good a right as the other," he said to himself, "and I +can't bother my brains settling the matter for them. Let them fight +it out, and whoever conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado." + +Having arranged the affair in this manner in his will, he signed it, +and soon after died. + +The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was a young man of +about twenty-five, named Alberdin. He was a good horseman, and +trained in the arts of warfare, and when he was informed of the terms +of his distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly +willing to undertake the combat for the throne. He set out for +Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable time. + +The third cousin on the mother's side was a very different person. He +was a boy of about twelve years of age; and as his father and mother +had died when he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life +under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who acted as his +guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon arrived in Mutjado,--the +boy, Phedo, being mounted on a little donkey, which was his almost +constant companion. As soon as they reached the territory of the late +Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an inn, and went +forward by himself to take a look at the other third cousin. When he +saw Alberdin mounted on his fine horse, and looking so strong and +valiant, his heart was much disturbed. + +"I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other one was a small +boy, but such does not appear to be the case. There is but one way to +have a fair fight between these two. They must not now be allowed to +see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy grows up, he +will then be able, with the military education which I intend he +shall have, to engage in combat with any man. They must not meet for +at least thirteen years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to +do worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself to undertake +to superintend so long a delay, but I must do my best to keep well +and strong, and to attain the greatest possible longevity." + +Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two chews to +every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate number of chews to other +articles of food; and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now +determined to increase the number of chews to thirty-six, for it +would be highly necessary for him to live until it was time for the +battle between the third cousins to take place. + +Having made up his mind on these points, the old tutor introduced +himself to Alberdin, and told him that he had come to arrange the +terms of combat. + +"In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like to know what sort +of a person my opponent is." + +"He is not a cavalryman like you," answered Salim; "he belongs to the +heavy infantry." + +At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well that a stout and +resolute man on foot had often the advantage of one who is mounted. +He would have preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal +terms. + +"Has he had much experience in war?" asked the young man. + +"It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was almost constantly +in arms, winter and summer." + +"He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin. "I must put +myself in good fighting-trim before I meet him." + +After some further conversation on the subject, the old man advised +Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful plain not far from the base +of a low line of mountains. + +"Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself in the valley on the +other side. With the mountains between you, neither of you need fear +a surprise; and when both are ready, a place of meeting can be +appointed. + +"Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had been settled; "if I +can keep them apart for thirteen years, all may be well." + +As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon the appointed spot, +and began to take daily warlike exercise in the plain, endeavoring in +every way to put himself and his horse into proper condition for the +combat. + +On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched himself and +the boy, Phedo. He carefully studied several books on military +engineering, and caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the +most approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts, and +outside of these was a moat filled with water. In the centre of the +camp was a neat little house which was well provided with books, +provisions, and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When the +drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin to get inside +of the camp; and, moreover, the ramparts were so high that he could +not look over them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have. Old +Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him here to live. It would +be better to wait until he was older before informing him of the +battle which had been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary +for him to have a military education, which could very well be +obtained in a place like this; and he was also very careful to let +him know that there was a terrible soldier in that part of the +country who might at any time, if it were not for the intrenchments, +pounce down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine day, Phedo +was allowed to take a ride on his donkey outside of the +fortifications, but during this time, the old tutor kept a strict +watch on the mountain; and if a horseman had made his appearance, +little Phedo would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge would +have been up in a twinkling. + +After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it dreadfully stupid +to see no one but his old tutor, and never to go outside of these +great ramparts except for donkey-rides, which were generally very +short. He therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go out +and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid of the dreadful +soldier of whom the old man had told him, because at that time of +night this personage would, of course, be in bed and asleep. +Considering these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a +great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened the heavy gate, +let down the drawbridge, mounted upon his donkey, and rode forth upon +the moonlit plain. + +That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a long time the +boy and the donkey rambled and ran; first going this way and then +that, they gradually climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow, +they trotted about for a while, and then went down the other side. +The boy had been so twisted and turned in his course that he did not +notice that he was not descending toward his camp, and the donkey, +whose instinct told it that it was not going the right way, was also +told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right way, and +that the intrenchments offered it no temptations to return. When the +morning dawned, Phedo perceived that he was really lost, and he began +to be afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But, after a +time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking young man on a +handsome horse, and he immediately took courage. + +"Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in danger. If that +horrible cut-throat should appear, this good gentleman will protect +me." + +Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and he was very glad +to meet with so nice a little boy. When Phedo told him that he was +lost, he invited him to come to his tent, near by, and have +breakfast. While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the boy +if in the course of his rambles he had met with a heavy infantry +soldier, probably armed to the teeth, and very large and strong. + +"Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried Phedo, "and I am very +glad that I did not meet him. If he comes, I hope you'll protect me +from him." + +"I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I shall not be able +to help you find your way home, for in doing so I should throw myself +off my guard, and might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with +whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is to be a time +fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself nearly ready, but I +have no doubt that my enemy will be very glad to take me at a +disadvantage if I give him a chance." + +Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The tent was large and +well furnished; there seemed to be plenty of good things to eat; the +handsome horseman was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable +gentleman; and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by high and gloomy +ramparts. + +"I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he to his host, "to +help me to find my way home. I live with my tutor, and I am sure that +when he knows I am gone he will begin to search for me, and after +awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very comfortable here." + +For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat lived together +in the tent, and enjoyed each other's society very much. Then +Alberdin began to grow a little impatient. + +"If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said; "I should like +to do it at once. I am now quite ready, and I think he ought to be. I +expected to hear from him before this time, and I shall start out and +see if I can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about going +over the mountain without giving him notice, but the capital city of +Mutjado is only a day's ride to the west, and there I can cause +inquiries to be made when he would like to meet me, and where." + +"I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted at the idea of +visiting the city. + +"Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your tutor don't seem +inclined to come for you, and, of course, I can't leave you here." + +The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on his donkey, set out +for the city, where they arrived late in the afternoon. After finding +a comfortable lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of +the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be encamped, and +gave them power to arrange with him for a meeting. He particularly +urged them to try to see the old man who had come to him at first, +and who had seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person. In +two days, however, the messengers returned, stating that they had +found what they supposed to be the intrenched camp of the heavy +infantry man they had been sent in search of, but that it was +entirely deserted, and nobody could be seen anywhere near it. + +"It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has watched my +manoeuvres and exercises from the top of the mountain, and has +concluded to run away. I shall give him a reasonable time to show +himself, and then, if he does not come forward, I will consider him +beaten, and claim the Autocracy." + +"That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think, if you can, you +ought to find him and kill him, or drive him out of the country. +That's what I should do, if I were you." + +"Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin; "but I could +not be expected to wait for him forever." + +When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin was informed of +something which he did not know before, and that was that the late +Autocrat had left an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years +old. But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit his +crown, for the laws of the country forbade that any woman should +become Autocrat. A happy idea now struck Alberdin. + +"I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then every one will think +that it is the most suitable thing for me to become Autocrat." + +So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission to speak with her, +and was granted an audience. With much courtesy and politeness he +made known his plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider +it advisable to marry him. + +"I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements," said the +Princess, "but as soon as I heard the terms of my father's will, I +made up my mind to marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot +inherit the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife of +the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your antagonist, and when +you have conquered him, I will marry you." + +"And if he conquers me, you will marry him?" said Alberdin. + +"Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile, and dismissed him. + +It was plain enough that there was nothing for Alberdin to do but to +go and look for the heavy infantry man. Phedo was very anxious to +accompany him, and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city +on their quest. + +When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the morning and found +the boy gone, he immediately imagined that the youngster had ran away +to his old home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping to +overtake him. But when he reached the distant town where Phedo had +lived, he found that the boy had not been there; and after taking +some needful rest, he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and +made his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of him +there. It was necessary for him to be very careful in his inquiries, +for he wished no one to find out that the little boy he was looking +for was the third cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side. +He therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical man, and +determined to use all possible caution. When he reached the camp of +the young horseman, Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his +suspicions became excited. + +"If these two have run off together," he said to himself, "my task is +indeed difficult. If the man discovers it is the boy he has to fight, +my poor Phedo will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe +there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not know that he is +to be one of the combatants, and the man would not be likely to +suspect it. Come what may, the fight must not take place for thirteen +years. And in order that I may still better preserve my health and +strength to avert the calamity during that period, I will increase my +number of chews to forty-two to each mouthful of meat." + +When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that Alberdin and the +boy had been there, and that they had gone away together. + +"Nothing has happened so far," said the old man, with a sigh of +relief; "and things may turn out all right yet. I'll follow them, but +I must first find out what that cavalryman had to say to the +Princess." For he had been told of the interview at the palace. + +It was not long before the migratory medical man was brought to the +Princess. There was nothing the matter with her, but she liked to +meet with persons of skill and learning to hear what they had to say. + +"Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old man. + +"Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor." + +"What is that?" asked the Princess. + +"All diseases," replied the old man, "come from germs; generally very +little ones. My business is to discover these, and find out all about +them." + +"Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know how to cure the +diseases?" + +"You must not expect too much," answered the old man. "It ought to be +a great satisfaction to us to know what sort of germ is at the bottom +of our woes." + +"I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and, so far as I know, +none of my household are troubled by germs. But there is something +the matter with my mind which I wish you could relieve." She then +told the old man how she had determined to marry the victor in the +contest for her father's throne, and how she had seen one for the +claimants whom she considered to be a very agreeable and deserving +young man; while the other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot +soldier, who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid. If this +one should prove the conqueror, she did not know what she should do. +"You see, I am in a great deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any +thing to help me?" + +The pretending migratory medical man looked at her attentively for a +few moments, and then he said: + +"The reason why you intend to marry the victor in the coming contest, +is that you wish to remain here in your father's palace, and to +continue to enjoy the comforts and advantages to which you have been +accustomed." + +"Yes," said the Princess; "that is it." + +"Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder," said the old +man, "the great point is gained. I will see what I can do." + +And with a respectful bow he left her presence. + +"Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away, "she can never +marry my boy, for that is certainly out of the question; but now that +I have found out her motive, I think I can arrange matters +satisfactorily, so far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair +between that young man and Phedo is immensely more difficult. The +first thing is to find them." + +Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor travelled +diligently, and in two days came up with Alberdin and Phedo. When he +first caught sight of them, he was very much surprised to see that +they were resting upon the ground quite a long distance apart, with a +little stream between them. Noticing that Alberdin's back was toward +him, he threw off his disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy +received him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces, +they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old man all that had happened, +and finished by relating that, as they had that day stopped by this +stream to rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire into +the parentage of his young companion; and after many questions about +his family, it had been made clear to both of them that they were the +two third cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado. + +"He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks that have been +played upon him, and went off and left me. Is it true that I am to +fight him? I don't want to do it, for I like him very much." + +"It will be a long time before you are old enough to fight," said +Salim; "so we need not consider that. You stay here, and I'll go over +and talk to him." + +Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin. When the +young man saw him, and recognized him as the person who had arranged +the two encampments, he turned upon him with fury. + +"Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary of my antagonist, +you are but the tutor of that boy! If I had known the truth at first, +I would have met him instantly; would have conquered him without +hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to the capital +city, would have claimed the Autocracy, and would now have been +sitting upon the throne. Instead of that, look at the delay and +annoyance to which I have been subjected. I have also taken such a +fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure his prospects, I +would willingly resign my pretensions to the throne, and go back +contentedly to my own city. But this cannot now be done. I have +fallen in love with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will +marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to what a condition +you have brought me!" + +The old man regarded him with attention. + +"I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement of this matter +for thirteen years. Are you willing to wait so long?" + +"No, I am not," said Alberdin. + +"Very well, then," said the old man, "each third cousin must retire +to his camp, and as soon as matters can be arranged the battle must +take place." + +"There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin in a troubled +voice; "but I shall take care that the boy receives no injury if it +can possibly be avoided." + +The three now retraced their steps, and in a few days were settled +down, Alberdin in his tent in the plain, and Salim and Phedo in their +intrenchments on the other side of the low mountain. The old man now +gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered the germ of +Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he had arranged his plans, and +went over to see the young man. + +"It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate is to be formed +to attend to this business for Phedo." + +"A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?" + +"A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who attends to business for +others; and a syndicate is a body of men who are able to conduct +certain affairs better than any individual can do it. In a week from +to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large plain outside of +the capital city. There the contest will take place. Shall you be +ready?" + +"I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin, "but I shall be +there." + +General notice was given of the coming battle of the contestants for +the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants of the Autocracy +assembled on the plain on the appointed day. The Princess with her +ladies was there; and as everybody was interested, everybody was +anxious to see what would happen. + +Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of the plain, and +demanded that his antagonist should appear. Thereupon old Salim came +forward, leading Phedo by the hand. + +"This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every one can see that +he is too young to fight a battle, a syndicate has been appointed to +attend to the matter for him; and there is nothing in the will of the +late Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate will now +appear." + +At this command there came into the arena a horseman heavily armed, a +tall foot soldier completely equipped for action, an artilleryman +with a small cannon on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a +drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which discharged +one hundred and twenty balls a minute. + +"All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat for the Autocracy +will begin!" + +Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate ranged before him. +Then he dismounted from his horse, drew his sword, and stuck it, +point downward, into the sand. + +"I surrender!" he said. + +"So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him, and throwing +herself into his arms. + +The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy. + +"Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I have my Princess, the +throne and the crown are nothing to me." + +"So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I am content to +resign all the comforts and advantages to which I have been +accustomed." + +Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor, now looked up. + +"You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We are all of the same +blood, and we will join together and form a royal family, and we will +all live at the palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the +government for me until I am grown up; and if I have to go to school +for a few years, I suppose I must. And that is all there is about +it!" + +The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband; the heralds +proclaimed Phedo the conquering heir, and the people cheered and +shouted with delight. All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come +to him from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much preferred to +have a new ruler from the mother's family. + +"I hope you bear no grudge against me," said Salim to Alberdin; "but +if you had been willing to wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo +might have fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have been as +hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer the syndicate. The +odds would have been quite as great." + +"Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer things as they are. I +should have hated to drive the boy away, and deprive him of a +position which the people wish him to have. Now we are all +satisfied." + +Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably make a very +good Autocrat. He declared that if he was to be assisted by ministers +and cabinet officers when he came to the throne, he would like them +to be persons who had been educated for their positions, just as he +was to be educated for his own. Consequently he chose for the head of +his cabinet a bright and sensible boy, and had him educated as a +Minister of State. For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with +a very honest countenance, and for the other members of his cabinet, +suitable youths were selected. He also said, that he thought there +ought to be another officer, one who would be a sort of Minister of +General Comfort, who would keep an eye on the health and happiness of +the subjects, and would also see that every thing went all right in +the palace, not only in regard to meals, but lots of other things. +For this office he chose a bright young girl, and had her educated +for the position of Queen. + + + + + + THE BANISHED KING. + + * * * * * + +There was once a kingdom in which every thing seemed to go wrong. +Everybody knew this, and everybody talked about it, especially the +King. The bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any one +else, but he could think of no way to make them better. + +"I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he said to the Queen +and his chief councillors. "I wish I knew how other kingdoms were +governed." + +One of his councillors offered to go to some other countries, and see +how they were governed, and come back and tell him all about it, but +this did not suit his majesty. + +"You would simply return," he said, "and give me your ideas about +things. I want my own ideas." + +The Queen then suggested that he should take a vacation, and visit +other kingdoms, and see for himself how things were managed in them. + +This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not answer," he said. +"I should not be gone a week before something would happen here which +would make it necessary for me to come back." + +The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a certain time, say +a year. In that case he could not come back, and would be at full +liberty to visit foreign kingdoms, and find out how they were +governed. + +This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible for me to +come back," he said, "of course I could not do it. The scheme is a +good one. Let me be banished." And he gave orders that his council +should pass a law banishing him for one year. + +Preparations were immediately begun to carry out this plan, and in +day or two the King bade farewell to the Queen, and left his kingdom, +a banished man. He went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he +did not wish to cut off all communication between himself and his +kingdom, he made an arrangement which he thought a very good one. At +easy shouting distance behind him walked one of the officers of the +court, and at shouting distance behind him walked another, and so on +at distances of about a hundred yards from each other. In this way +there would always be a line of men extending from the King to his +palace. Whenever the King had walked a hundred yards the line moved +on after him, and another officer was put in the gap between the last +man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked on, his line of +followers lengthened, and was never broken. Whenever he had any +message to send to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he +shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the one next to +him, and it was so passed on until it reached the palace. If he +needed food, clothes, or any other necessary thing, the order for it +was shouted along the line, and the article was passed to him from +man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor, and then +retiring to his proper place. + +In this way the King walked on day by day until he had passed +entirely out of his own kingdom. At night he stopped at some +convenient house on the road, and if any of his followers did not +find himself near a house or cottage when the King shouted back the +order to halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might be. By +this time the increasing line of followers had used up all the +officers of the court, and it became necessary to draw upon some of +the under government officers in order to keep the line perfect. + +The King had not gone very far outside the limits of his dominions +when he met a Sphinx. He had often heard of these creatures, although +he had never seen one before. But when he saw the winged body of a +lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it was. He knew, +also, that the chief business of a Sphinx was that of asking people +questions, and then getting them into trouble if the right answers +were not given. He therefore determined that he would not be caught +by any such tricks as these, and that he would be on his guard if the +Sphinx spoke to him. The creature was lying down when the King first +saw it, but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet. There was +nothing savage about its look, and the King was not at all afraid. + +"Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him, in a pleasant voice. + +"Give it up," replied the King. + +"What do you mean by that?" said the other, with an air of surprise. + +"I give that up, too," said the King. + +The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished. + +"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and +not in answer to any questions, that I do not know where I am going. +I am a King, as you may have noticed, and I have been banished from +my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into the government of +other countries in order that I may find out what it is that is wrong +in my own kingdom. Every thing goes badly, and there is something +very faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to +discover." + +"I am much interested in puzzles and matters of that kind," said the +Sphinx, "and if you like I will go with you and help to find out what +is wrong in your kingdom." + +"All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of your company." + +"What is the meaning of this long line of people following you at +regular distances?" asked the Sphinx. + +"Give it up," said the King. + +The Sphinx laughed. + +"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and +not in answer to any question, that these men form a line of +communication between me and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must +be going on worse than ever, in my absence." + +The two now travelled on together until they came to a high hill, +from which they could see, not very far away, a large city. + +"That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an extensive +country. It is governed by a king of mingled sentiments. Suppose we +go there. I think you will find a government that is rather +peculiar." + +The King consented, and they walked down the hill toward the city. + +"How did the King get his sentiments mingled?" asked the King. + +"I really don't know how it began," said the Sphinx, "but the King, +when a young man, had so many sentiments of different kinds, and he +mingled them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly what he +thought on any particular subject. Of course, his people gradually +got into the same frame of mind, and you never can know in this +kingdom exactly what people think or what they are going to do. You +will find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies, gnomes, +and personages of that kind, who have been drawn here by the mingled +sentiments of the people. I, myself, came into these parts because +the people every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and +riddles." + +On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed by his brother +sovereign, to whom he told his story; and he was lodged in a room in +the palace. Such of his followers as came within the limits of the +city were entertained by the persons near to whose houses they found +themselves when the line halted. + +Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the sights of this strange +city. They took long walks through the streets, and sometimes into +the surrounding country--always going one way and returning another, +the Sphinx being very careful never to bring the King back by the +same road or street by which they went. In this way the King's line +of followers, which, of course, lengthened out every time he took a +walk, came to be arranged in long loops through many parts of the +city and suburbs. + +Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the mingled sentiments +of the people. For instance, he would one day visit a great smith's +shop, where heavy masses of iron were being forged, the whole place +resounding with tremendous blows from heavy hammers, and the clank +and din of iron on the anvils; while the next day he would find the +place transformed into a studio, where the former blacksmith was +painting dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of +egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment of his visitor, +showed his peculiar nature very plainly. Sometimes he would receive +him with enthusiastic delight, while at others he would upbraid him +with having left his dominions to go wandering around the earth in +this senseless way. One day his host invited him to attend a royal +dinner, but, when he went to the grand dining-hall, pleased with +anticipations of a splendid feast, he found that the sentiments of +his majesty had become mingled, and that he had determined, instead +of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services of one of his +servants who had died the day before. All the guests were obliged by +politeness to remain during the ceremonies, which our King, not +having been acquainted with the deceased servant, had not found at +all interesting. + +"Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in favor of moving on. I am +tired of this place, where every sentiment is so mingled with others +that you can never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't +believe any one in this country was ever truly glad or sorry. They +mix one sentiment so quickly with another that they never can +discover the actual ingredients of any of their impulses." + +"When this King first began to mingle his sentiments," said the +Sphinx, "it was because he always desired to think and feel exactly +right. He did not wish his feelings to run too much one way or the +other." + +"And so he is never either right or wrong," said the King. "I don't +like that, at all. I want to be one thing or the other." + +"I have wasted a good deal of time at this place," remarked the King, +as they walked on, "and I have seen and heard nothing which I wish to +teach my people. But I must find out some way to prevent every thing +going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried plan after plan, and +sometimes two or three together, and have kept this up year after +year, and yet nothing seems to do my kingdom any good." + +"Have you heard how things are going on there now?" asked the Sphinx. + +"Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind saying of my own +accord, and not as answer to any question, that I have sent a good +many communications to my Queen, but have never received any from +her. So I do not know how things are going on in my kingdom." + +They then travelled on, the long line of followers coming after, +keeping their relative positions a hundred yards apart, and passing +over all the ground the King had traversed in his circuitous walks +about the city. Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in +straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the King walked a +hundred yards a fresh man from his capital city was obliged to take +his place at the tail of the procession. + +"By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had walked an hour or more, +"if you want to see a kingdom where there really is something to +learn, you ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we are +now approaching." + +"All right," said the King. "Let us go there." + +In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge of a high bluff. +"On the level ground, beneath this precipice," said the Sphinx, "is +the country of the dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of +the bluff and look down upon it." + +The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and looked out from the edge +over the country of the little people. The officer of the court who +had formed the head of the line wished very much to see what they +were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not near enough. + +"You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little houses and huts +are gathered together in clusters. Each one of these clusters is +under a separate king." + +"Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked the King. "That is +the proper way." + +"They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each of these clusters +live the Gaumers who are best suited to each other; and, if any +Gaumer finds he cannot get along in one cluster, he goes to another. +The kings are chosen from among the very best of them, and each one +is always very anxious to please his subjects. He knows that every +thing that he, and his queen, and his children eat, or drink, or +wear, or have must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were +not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he does every thing +that he can to make them happy and contented, for he knows if he does +not please them and govern them well, they will gradually drop off +from him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without any +people or any kingdom." + +"That is a very queer way of ruling," said the King. "I think the +people ought to try to please their sovereign." + +"He is only one, and they are a great many," said the Sphinx. +"Consequently they are much more important. No subject is ever +allowed to look down upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and +clothe him, and send his children to school. If any one does a thing +of this kind, he is banished until he learns better." + +"All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the King, "but I can +learn nothing from a government like that, where every thing seems to +be working in an opposite direction from what everybody knows is +right and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good opinion of his +subjects! What nonsense! It ought to be just the other way. The ideas +of this people are as dwarfish as their bodies." + +The King now arose and took up the line of march, turning away from +the country of the Gaumers. But he had not gone more than two or +three hundred yards before he received a message from the Queen. It +came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming anxious to +shout it to the man ahead of him as quickly as possible. The message +was to the effect that he must either stop where he was or come home: +his constantly lengthening line of communication had used up all the +chief officers of the government, all the clerks in the departments, +and all the officials of every grade, excepting the few who were +actually needed to carry on the government, and if any more men went +into the line it would be necessary to call upon the laborers and +other persons who could not be spared. + +"I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made your line long +enough." + +"And I think," said the King. "that you made it a great deal longer +than it need to have been, by taking me about in such winding ways." + +"It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic smile. + +"Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King, "and so I might +as well go back as soon as I can." And he shouted to the head man of +the line to pass on the order that his edict of banishment be +revoked. + +In a very short time the news came that the edict was revoked. The +King then commanded that the procession return home, tail-end +foremost. The march was at once begun, each man, as he reached the +city, going immediately to his home and family. + +The King and the greater part of the line had a long and weary +journey, as they followed each other through the country and over the +devious ways in which the Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled +Sentiments. The King was obliged to pursue all these complicated +turnings, or be separated from his officers, and so break up his +communication with his palace. The Sphinx accompanied him. + +When at last, he reached his palace, his line of former followers +having apparently melted entirely away, he hurried up-stairs to the +Queen, leaving the Sphinx in the court-yard. + +The King found, when he had time to look into the affairs of his +dominions, that every thing was in the most admirable condition. The +Queen had retained a few of the best officials to carry on the +government, and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the +line of communication. The King set himself to work to think about +the matter. It was not long before he came to the conclusion that the +main thing which had been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so +greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to the court-yard +to speak to the Sphinx about it. + +"I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and I don't wonder that +what you learned when you were away, and what you have seen since you +came back, have made you feel certain that you were the cause of +every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now, what do you intend +to do about your government?" + +"Give it up," promptly replied the King. + +"That is exactly what I should advise," said the Sphinx. + +The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced that being a King +was exactly the thing he was not suited for, and that he would get on +much better in some other business or profession. He determined to be +a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into other countries to +find out things that might be useful to his own nation. His Queen had +shown that she could govern the country most excellently, and it was +not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had ordered all the +men who had made up his line to follow the King's example and to go +into some good business; in order that not being bothered with so +many officers, she would be able to get along quite easily. + +The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and although he did +not this time have a line of followers connecting him with the +palace, he frequently sent home messages which were of use and value +to his nation. + +"I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself. "As the King has +found his vocation and every thing is going all right it is not +necessary I should remain where I may be looked upon as a +questionable personage." + + + + + + THE PHILOPENA. + + * * * * * + +There were once a Prince and a Princess who, when quite young, ate a +philopena together. They agreed that the one who, at any hour after +sunrise the next day, should accept any thing from the other--the +giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"--should be the loser, and +that the loser should marry the other. + +They did not meet as soon as they had expected the next day; and at +the time our story begins, many years had elapsed since they had seen +each other, and the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up. +They often thought of the philopena they had eaten together, and +wondered if they should know each other when they met. He remembered +her as a pretty little girl dressed in green silk and playing with a +snow-white cat; while she remembered him as a handsome boy, wearing a +little sword, the handle of which was covered with jewels. But they +knew that each must have changed a great deal in all this time. + +Neither of these young people had any parents; the Prince lived with +guardians and the Princess with uncles. + +The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising and energetic men, +and were allowed to govern the country until the Prince came of age. +The capital city was a very fine city when the old king died; but the +guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set to work with +all their might and main to improve it. They tore down old houses and +made a great many new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges +over the river on which the city stood; they constructed aqueducts to +bring water from streams many miles away; and they were at work all +the time upon some extensive building enterprise. + +The Prince did not take much interest in the works which were going +on under direction of his guardians; and when he rode out, he +preferred to go into the country or to ride through some of the +quaint old streets, where nothing had been changed for hundreds of +years. + +The uncles of the Princess were very different people from the +guardians of the Prince. There were three of them, and they were very +quiet and cosey old men, who disliked any kind of bustle or +disturbance, and wished that every thing might remain as they had +always known it. It even worried them a little to find that the +Princess was growing up. They would have much preferred that she +should remain exactly as she was when they first took charge of her. +Then they never would have been obliged to trouble their minds about +any changes in the manner of taking care of her. But they did not +worry their minds very much, after all. They wished to make her +guardianship as little laborious or exhausting as possible, and so, +divided the work; one of them took charge of her education, another +of her food and lodging, and the third of her dress. The first sent +for teachers, and told them to teach her; the second had handsome +apartments prepared for her use, and gave orders that she should have +every thing she needed to eat and drink; while the third commanded +that she should have a complete outfit of new clothes four times a +year. Thus every thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the +three uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard work. +There were never any new houses built in that city, and if any thing +had to be repaired, it was done with as little noise and dirt as +possible. The city and the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and +the three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great +comfortable thrones. + +Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things except the +Princess. She often thought to herself that nothing would be more +delightful than a little noise and motion, and she wondered if the +whole world were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last, +she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the place any +longer; but she could think of nothing to do but to go and try to +find the Prince with whom she had eaten a philopena. If she should +win, he must marry her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in +some place where things would be bright and lively. So, early one +morning, she put on her white dress, and mounting her prancing black +horse, she rode away from the city. Only one person saw her go, for +nearly all the people were asleep. + +About this time, the Prince made up his mind that he could no longer +stand the din and confusion, the everlasting up-setting and +setting-up in his native city. He would go away, and see if he could +find the Princess with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he should +win, she would be obliged to marry him; and then, perhaps, they could +settle down in some place where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the +same morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a handsome +suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle white horse, he rode out +of the city. Only one person saw him go; for, even at that early +hour, the people were so busy that little attention was paid to his +movements. + +About half way between these two cities, in a tall tower which stood +upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive Dwarf, whose whole object in +life was to find out what people were doing and why they did it. From +the top of this tower he generally managed to see all that was going +on in the surrounding country; and in each of the two cities that +have been mentioned he had an agent, whose duty it was to send him +word, by means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened. +Before breakfast, on the morning when the Prince and Princess rode +away, a pigeon from the city of the Prince came flying to the tower +of the Inquisitive Dwarf. + +"Some new building started, I suppose," said the Dwarf, as he took +the little roll of paper from under the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is +very different! 'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and +is travelling to the north.'" + +But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about the meaning of +this departure, another pigeon came flying in from the city of the +Princess. + +"Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is a long time since I +have had a message from that city, and my agent has been drawing his +salary without doing any work. What possibly can have happened +there?" + +When he read that the Princess had ridden alone from the city that +morning, and was travelling to the south, he was truly amazed. + +"What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If the city of the Prince +were to the south of that of the Princess, then I might understand +it; for they would be going to see each other, and that would be +natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her city, they are +travelling in opposite directions. And what is the meaning of this? I +most certainly must find out." + +The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he employed to attend +to his most important business. These were a Gryphoness, a Water +Sprite, and an Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for +there were some things he would do which no one else would think of +attempting. The Dwarf called to him the Gryphoness, the oldest and +most discreet of the three, and told her of the departure of the +Princess. + +"Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can, and follow her, and +do not return to me until you have found out why she left her city, +where she is going, and what she expects to do when she gets there. +Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore, you must take with +you the Absolute Fool, to whom she will probably be willing to talk; +but you must see that every thing is managed properly." + +Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf then called the +Water Sprite, who was singing to herself at the edge of a fountain, +and telling her of the departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow +him, and not to return until she had found out why he left his city, +where he was going, and what he intended to do when he got there. + +"The road to the north," he said, "lies along the river bank; +therefore, you can easily keep him company." + +The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy grass to the river, +threw herself into it. Sometimes she swam beneath the clear water; +sometimes she rose partly in the air, where she seemed like a little +cloud of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and sometimes she +floated upon the surface, her pale blue robes undulating with the +gentle waves, while her white hands and feet shone in the sun like +tiny crests of foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously and +rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the south. She did not +forget to glance every now and then upon the road which ran along the +river bank; and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the +Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the water's edge, +while his white horse was grazing near by. + +The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river, and seating +herself upon the edge of the grassy bank, she spoke to him. The +Prince looked up in astonishment, but there was nothing in her +appearance to frighten him. + +"I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command of my master, to ask +you why you left your city, where you are going, and what you intend +to do when you get there." + +The Prince then told her why he had left his city, and what he +intended to do when he had found the Princess. + +"But where I am going," he said, "I do not know, myself. I must +travel and travel until I succeed in the object of my search." + +The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then she said: + +"If I were you, I would not travel to the north. It is cold and +dreary there, and your Princess would not dwell in such a region. A +little above us, on the other side of this river, there is a stream +which runs sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and +which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is the most +beautiful country in the world, and you will be much more likely to +find your Princess there than among the desolate mountains of the +north." + +"I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I will go there, if +you will show me the way." + +"The road runs along the bank of the river," said the Water Sprite; +"and we shall soon reach the Land of the Lovely Lakes." + +The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the river, and was soon +riding along the bank of the stream, while the Water Sprite gayly +floated upon its dancing ripples. + + * * * * * + +When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit of the Princess, +she kept out of sight among the bushes by the roadside; but sped +swiftly along. The Absolute Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse, +rode boldly along upon the open road. He was a good-looking youth, +with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome figure. As he cantered +gayly along, he felt himself capable of every noble action which the +human mind has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him, and in +the course of the morning they overtook the Princess, who was +allowing her horse to walk in the shade by the roadside. The Absolute +Fool dashed up to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had +left her city, where she was going, and what she intended to do when +she got there. + +The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my city because I +wanted to," she said. "I am going about my business, and when I get +to the proper place, I shall attend to it." + +"Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your confidence, do you? +But allow me to remark that I have a Gryphoness with me who is very +frightful to look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the +bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my questions, she +must come out and talk to you, and that is all there is about it." + +"If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the Princess, "let her +come out. No matter how frightful she is, I would rather she should +come where I can see her, than to have her hiding near me." + +The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now came out into the +road. The horse of the Princess reared in affright, but his young +rider patted him on the neck, and quieted his fears. + +"What do you and this young man want?" said the Princess to the +Gryphoness, "and why do you question me?" + +"It is not of our own will that we do it," said the Gryphoness, very +respectfully; "but our master, the Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to +obtain information about the points on which the young man questioned +you; and until we have found out these things, it is impossible for +us to return." + +"I am opposed to answering impertinent questions," replied the +Princess; "but in order to rid myself of you, I will tell you the +reason of my journey." And she then stated briefly the facts of the +case. + +"Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very sorry; but you cannot tell +us where you are going, and we cannot return until we know that. But +you need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we can assist +you in the object of your journey. This young man is sometimes very +useful, and I shall be glad to do any thing that I can to help you. +If you should think that I would injure you, or willingly annoy you +by my presence, it would grieve me to the heart." And as she spoke, a +tear bedimmed her eye. + +The Princess was touched by the emotion of the Gryphoness. + +"You may accompany me," she said, "and I will trust you both. You +must know this country better than I do. Have you any advice to give +me in regard to my journey?" + +"One thing I would strongly advise," said the Gryphoness, "and that +is, that you do not travel any farther until we know in what +direction it will be best to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a +worthy woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this young man +and I will scour the country round about, and try to find some news +of your Prince. The young man will return and report to you to-morrow +morning. And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and obey +you as your servant. As for me, unless we have found the Prince, I +shall continue searching for him. There is a prince in the city to +the north of my master's tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he +whom you seek." + +"You can find out if it is he," answered the Princess, "by asking +about the philopena." + +"That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will return hither as +speedily as possible." And, with a respectful salutation, the +Gryphoness and the Absolute Fool departed by different ways. + +The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she took lodgings. + +The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to the inn, and seeing +the Princess, said: "I rode until after night-fall, searching for the +Prince, before it occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I +would not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of that, I rode +straight to the nearest house, and slept until daybreak, when I +remembered that I was to report to you this morning. But as I have +heard no news of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I +think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly here, where there +is nothing of interest going on, and when a single hour's delay may +cause you to miss the object of your search. The Prince may be in one +place this morning, and there is no knowing where he will be in the +afternoon. While the Gryphoness is searching, we should search also. +We can return before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the +direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she can quickly +overtake us. It is my opinion that not a moment should be lost. I +will be your guide. I know this country well." + +The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning, and consented +to set out. There were some beautiful mountains to the south-east; +and among these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good taste +would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore, took this direction. But +when they had travelled an hour or more, the mountains began to look +bare and bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not +believe any prince would live there. He therefore advised that they +turn into a road that led to the north-east. It was a good road; and +therefore he thought it led to a good place, where a person of good +sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they therefore +travelled. They had ridden but a few miles when they met three men, +well armed and mounted. These men drew up their horses, and +respectfully saluted the Princess. + +"High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect we know you to be +such, we would inform you that we are the soldiers of the King, the +outskirts of whose dominions you have reached. It is our duty to +question all travellers, and, if their object in coming to our +country is a good one, to give them whatever assistance and +information they may require. Will you tell us why you are come?" + +"Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool, riding up in a great +passion. "How dare you interfere with a princess who has left her +city because it was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a +prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order that she may +marry him. Out of my way, or I will draw my sword and cleave you to +the earth, and thus punish your unwarrantable curiosity!" + +The soldiers could not repress a smile. + +"In order to prevent mischief," they said to the Absolute Fool, "we +shall be obliged to take you into custody." + +This they immediately did, and then requested the Princess to +accompany them to the palace of their King, where she would receive +hospitality and aid. + +The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality. He had no son, +and he much wished he had one; for in that case it might be his +Prince for whom the young lady was looking. But there was a prince, +he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was probably the very +man; and he would send and make inquiries. In the mean time, the +Princess would be entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her +servant would make a suitable apology, his violent language would be +pardoned. But the Absolute Fool positively refused to do this. + +"I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit would do such a +thing. What I say, I stand by." + +"Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight a wild beast." And +he gave orders that the affair should be arranged for the following +day. + +In a short time, however, some of his officers came to him and told +him that there were no wild beasts; those on hand having been kept so +long that they had become tame. + +"To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they said; "but he is so +dreadfully cross and has had so much experience in these fights, that +for a long time it has not been considered fair to allow any one to +enter the ring with him." + +"It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young man fight a tame +beast; but, under the circumstances, the best thing to do will be to +represent the case to him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we +have not an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice +between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition and +experience you will explain to him." + +When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool, he refused with +great scorn to fight a tame beast. + +"I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public," he said; "I will +take the old lion." + +The next day, the court and the public assembled to see the fight; +but the Queen and our Princess took a ride into the country, not +wishing to witness a combat of this kind, especially one which was so +unequal. The King ordered that every advantage should be given to the +young man, in order that he might have every possible chance of +success in fighting an animal which had been a victor on so many +similar occasions. A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile, +into which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment, +but where the lion could not follow him, was placed in the middle of +the arena, and the youth was supplied with all the weapons he +desired. When every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his stand +in the centre of the arena, and the door of the lion's den was +opened. The great beast came out, he looked about for an instant, and +then, with majestic step, advanced toward the young man. When he was +within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring. + +The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a creature, and he +could not restrain his admiration. With folded arms and sparkling +eyes, he gazed with delight upon the lion's massive head, his long +and flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful feet and +legs. There was an air of grandeur and strength about him which +completely enraptured the youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt +before him, and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing +eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed. "What unfathomable +expression! What possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere, +what majesty of curve!" + +The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct of the young man; +and he soon began to suppose that this was not the person he was to +fight, but probably a keeper, who was examining into his condition. +After submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a mighty +yawn, which startled the spectators, but which delighted the Absolute +Fool; for never before had he beheld such a depth of potentiality. He +knelt in silent delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength. + +Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however, and he turned and +walked back to his den. "When their man is ready," he thought to +himself, "I will come out and fight him." + +One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude. "The youth has +conquered!" they cried. "He has actually frightened the lion back +into his den!" Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool +upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the open square in +front of the palace, that he might be rewarded for his bravery. Here +the King, followed by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much +delighted as any one at the victory of the young man. + +"Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the bravest of the brave. You +are the only man I know who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you +shall marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only with the +bravest should she wed." + +At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning from their +ride, heard with joy the result of the combat; and riding up to the +victor, the Queen declared that she would gladly join with her royal +husband in giving their daughter to so brave a man. + +The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent thought; then, +addressing the King, he said: + +"Was Your Majesty's father a king?" + +"He was," was the answer. + +"Was his father of royal blood?" + +"No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather was a man of the +people; but his pre-eminent virtue, his great ability as a statesman, +and the dignity and nobility of his character made him the unanimous +choice of the nation as its sovereign." + +"I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool; "for it makes it +necessary for me to decline the kind offer of your daughter in +marriage. If I marry a princess at all, she must be one who can trace +back her lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And as he +spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride. + +For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then loudly he shouted: +"Ho, guards! Annihilate him! Avenge this insult!" + +At these words, the sword of every by-stander leaped from its +scabbard; but, before any one could take a step forward, the Princess +seized the Absolute Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs +to her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and shouted to +her to let go; but she held firmly to his hair, and as he was +extraordinarily active and fleet of foot, he kept pace with the +galloping horse. A great crowd of people started in pursuit, but as +none of them were mounted, they were soon left behind. + +"Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the Absolute Fool, as he +bounded along. "You don't know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!" + +But the Princess never relinquished her hold until they were out of +the King's domain. + +"A little more," cried the indignant youth, when she let him go, "and +you would have pulled out a handful of my hair." + +"A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously, "and you would +have been cut to pieces; for you have not sense enough to take care +of yourself. I am sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which +the Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to wait there +for her as she told me to do." + +"Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have been much better." + +"Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there, and see if she has +returned." + +"If we can find it," said the other, "which I very much doubt." + +There were several roads at this point and, of course, they took the +wrong one. As they went on, the Absolute Fool complained bitterly +that he had left his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk. +Sometimes he stopped, and said he would go back after it; but this +the Princess sternly forbade. + + * * * * * + +When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince, it was night; but +she was not sorry for this. She did not like to show herself much in +the daytime, because so many people were frightened by her. After a +good deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had certainly +left the city, although his guardians did not seem to be aware of it. +They were so busy with a new palace, in part of which they were +living, that they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon +him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew her, and was not +afraid of her, and who told her that the day before, when he was up +the river, he had seen the Prince on his white horse, riding on the +bank of the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something +which now looked like a woman, and again like a puff of mist. The +Gryphoness reflected. + +"If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said to herself, "I +believe that he is the very one whom the Princess is looking for, and +that he has set out in search of her; and that creature in the water +must be our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent out to +discover where the Prince is going. If he had told me about this, it +would have saved much trouble. From the direction in which they were +going, I feel sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to the +Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go there, if she can +possibly get an excuse. I will follow them. I suppose the Princess +will be tired, waiting at the inn; but I must know where the Prince +is, and if he is really her Prince, before I go back to her." + +When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the Lovely Lakes, she +wandered all that day and the next night; but she saw nothing of +those for whom she was looking. + +The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on until near the close +of the afternoon, when the sky began to be overcast, and it looked +like rain. They were then not far from a large piece of water; and at +a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the shore. + +"I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the Princess. + +"It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute Fool. "I should prefer +to be on dry land." + +"As the land is not likely to be very dry when it rains," said the +Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if it is upon wet water." + +"Women will always have their own way," muttered the Absolute Fool. + +The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who gave the Princess +a hearty welcome. + +"You may go on board if you choose," said the Absolute Fool to the +Princess, "but I shall not risk my life in a ship manned by women." + +"It is well that you are of that opinion," said the Captain of the +Amazons, who had heard this remark; "for you would not be allowed to +come on board if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to +protect you and the horse in case it should rain, and will send you +something to eat." + +"While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon Captain, she told +her about the Prince, and how she was trying to find him. + +"Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the search, and take you +in my ship. Some of my crew told me that yesterday they saw a young +man, who looked like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which +adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will sail after him. We +shall keep near the shore, and your servant can mount your horse and +ride along the edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of +this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us." + +Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her crew together. +"Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said. "We have an object. I never sail +without an object, and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our +present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess is in +search; and we must spare no pains to bring him to her, dead or +alive." + +Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not hear this speech. +The day was a fine one, and before long the sun became very hot. The +ship was sailing quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode +down to the water's edge, and called out that he had something very +important to communicate to the Princess. As he was not allowed to +come on board, she was obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed +in a small boat. + +"I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool, "that it is perfectly +ridiculous, and very uncomfortable, to continue this search any +longer. I would go back, but my master would not suffer me to return +without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore, a plan to +propose. Give up your useless search for this Prince, who is probably +not nearly so handsome and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We +will then return, and I will assume the reins of government in your +domain." + +"Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you have been doing; for +I wish some one to take care of my horse." And without another word, +she returned to the ship. + +"I should like to sail as far as possible from shore during the rest +of the trip," said she to the Captain. + +"Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain to the steers-woman; +"and keep him well out from land." + +When they had sailed through a small stream into the lake adjoining, +the out-look, who was swinging in a hammock hung between the tops of +the two masts, sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity +on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under coils of rope, +hem-stitching and embroidery were laid aside, and every woman was at +her post. + +"The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain, "and we will not +awaken her. It will be so nice to surprise her by bringing the Prince +to her. We will run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon +him. But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he resists!" + +The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance ahead, was +so pleasantly employed that he had not noticed the approach of the +ship. He was sitting upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the +water's edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found on the +shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes from the lake, +holding them up in the sunlight to admire their brilliant colors and +graceful forms, and then returning them uninjured to the water. The +Water Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish to come +up and be caught; for the gentle Prince would not hurt them. It was +very delightful and rare sport, and it is not surprising that it +entirely engrossed the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently +landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back from the +water. Then, at their Captain's command, they rushed upon the Prince. + +It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who had been +searching for the Prince, caught her first sight of him. Perceiving +that he was about to be attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon +sailors reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they began +to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly; but seeing that his +assailants were women, he would not draw his sword. The Amazon +Captain and mate, who were armed with broad knives, now raised their +weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or die. But at this +moment, the Gryphoness reached the spot, and catching the Captain and +mate, each by an arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The +other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and the Prince defended +himself by pushing them into the shallow water, where the Water +Sprite nearly stifled them by throwing over them showers of spray. +And now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a youth engaged in +combat with the Amazon sailors, his blood boiled with indignation. + +"A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What a coward! My arm shall +ever assist the weaker sex." + +Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and rushed upon the +Prince. The Gryphoness saw the danger of the latter, and she would +have gone to his assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of +the Amazon Captain and mate. + +Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree where she deposited +the two warlike women upon a lofty branch, from which she knew it +would take them a long time to get down to the ground. When she +descended she found that the Absolute Fool had reached the Prince. +The latter, being a brave fellow, although of so gentle a +disposition, had been glad to find a man among his assailants, and +had drawn his sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to +fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by the waist and +hurled him backward into some bushes. + +"You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince. "He is beneath +your rank! And as you will not draw your sword against these Amazons +you must fly from them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you." + +The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his sword he rapidly +ran along the bank, followed by some of the Amazons who had succeeded +in getting the water out of their eyes and mouths. + +"Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the Absolute Fool. "If you +had not interfered with me," he said to the Gryphoness, "I should +soon have put an end to such a coward." + +The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to which the ship +was moored, when the Princess, who had been awakened by the noise of +the combat, appeared upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she saw +the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly the one for whom +she was looking. Fearing that the pursuing Amazons might kill him, +she sprang from the vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in +a rope, and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the water, +which was here quite deep, and immediately sank out of sight. The +Prince, who had noticed her just as she sprang, and who felt equally +convinced that she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped his +flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as the Princess rose +to the surface, he reached out his hand to her, and she took it. + +"Philopena!" cried the Prince. + +"You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking the water from her +curls, as he drew her ashore. + +At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons forbore to +assail the Prince, and when the Captain and the Mate had descended +from the tree, every thing was explained. + +Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking kind leave of +the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite, and of the Amazon sailors, who +cheered them loudly, rode away to the city of the Princess; while the +three servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their master to +report what had happened. + +The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he was obliged to go +back on foot, having left his horse in the kingdom where he had so +narrowly escaped being killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair +pulled; and had not been treated with proper respect by either the +Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself deeply injured. When he +reached home, he determined that he would not remain in a position +where his great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do +something," he said, "which shall prove to the world that I deserve +to stand among the truly great. I will reform my fellow beings, and I +will begin by reforming the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to +his master, and said: + +"Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling thus with the +affairs of your neighbors. Give up your inquisitive habits, and learn +some useful business. While you are doing this, I will consent to +manage your affairs." + +The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I have a great desire +to know the exact appearance of the North Pole. Go and discover it +for me." + +The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and has not yet returned. + +When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her city, her uncles were +very much amazed; for they had not known she had gone away. "If you +are going to get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then you +will not need our care, and we shall be free from the great +responsibility which is bearing us down." + +In a short time the wedding took place, and then the question arose +in which city should the young couple dwell. The Princess decided it. + +"In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will live in your city, +where all is life and activity; and where the houses are so well +built with all the latest improvements. In the summer, we will come +to my city, where everything is old, and shady, and serene." This +they did, and were very happy. + +The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and live with the Princess, +for she had taken a great fancy to her; but she did not think it +worth her while to ask permission to do this. + +"My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but my appearance is +against me." + +As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate mood, +because she had left so soon the Land of the Lovely Lakes, where she +had been so happy. The more she thought about it, the more she +grieved; and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer, she +sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High into the bright air +the fountain threw her, scattering her into a thousand drops of +glittering water; but not one drop fell back into the basin. The +great, warm sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they +floated away across the bright blue sky. + + + + + +SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG. + +THIRTIETH THOUSAND. + +"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to add to +our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a great +lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with real +regret when the episode is over."--Louisa M. Alcott. + + * * * * * + +LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY. + +By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT. + +Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. One volume, square 8vo, +handsomely bound. $2.00. + +In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has +given us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few +real classics in the literature for children. She has presented a +picture of child-life such as we have never had before; she has not +only taken a subject quite new but she has written with such +exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American +boy's career that even were the situations old the story would be a +notable one. + +"Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly +not a "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the +statement may seem. The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but +with all the elements of a man. Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy +a thoughtful boy, and she is right in believing that the stories +children like best are those best worth thinking about when they are +being read. + +A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE. + + * * * * * + +HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates. + +A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND + +By MARY MAPES DODGE. + +One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations. $1.50. + +The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received +has increased from year to year, until the original plates have +become badly worn from constant use. The publishers have therefore +reissued at half its original price their beautiful Holiday Edition, +of which on its first appearance the Nation said: "We some time ago +expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful +children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates' +deserved an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland +instead of America. The publishers have just issued an edition in +accordance with this suggestion. The pictures are admirable, and the +whole volume, in appearance and contents, need not fear comparison +with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years." + + +AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS. + +By EDMUND ALTON. + +With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of +Congress, etc., etc. + +One volume, square 8vo. $2.50. + +The author of this book was for four years connected with the +legislative branch of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial +page. His record of the memorable scenes and events which came under +his observation is enlivened by anecdotes of public men, humorous and +exciting episodes at the national capitol, and a great variety of +stirring incidents. + + +THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND. + +1580--1643. + +By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE. + +With many illustrations and maps. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + +In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this +story, emphasis has been given to everything that went to make up the +home-life of the pioneer settlers, or that relates to their various +avocations." In all history no better examples of manliness, energy, +and conscientiousness could be found, to be read about and studied by +a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in such a +vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance. + + +THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK. + +By MRS. BURTON HARRISON. + +With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET. + +One volume, square 16mo. $1.00. + +"The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the +Giant-Killer,' 'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our +childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs. Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned +Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the fairy, the wicked +princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes of +that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss +Rosina Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many +pictures scattered through its pages accord well with the good +old-fashioned character of the tales."--Frank R. Stockton. + + +BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES. + +By MRS. BURTON HARRISON. + +Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. One volume, 12mo. +$2.00. + +"Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in +America, or anywhere else, might become intimately acquainted with +the contents of this book. There is more virtue in one of +these stories than in the entire library of modern juvenile +literature."--Julian Hawthorne. + + +THE MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD, +Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire. + +Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE. + +One volume, quarto, $3.00. + +"The Prince of Story-Tellers."--London Times. + + * * * * * + +THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE. + +Uniform illustrated edition. Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over +750 full-page illustrations. Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold +also in separate volumes. + +The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in +such a realistic manner and with so much scientific knowledge +ingeniously wrought into them that they possess a fascination that is +all their own. Their great and continued popularity, among both old +and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in which +all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained, +and the volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding. + +Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00 +A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00 +Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00 +Dick Sands..................................................... 2 00 +A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00 +From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty + Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00 +The Steam House. Part I.--The Demon of Cawnpore. + Part II.--Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00 +The Giant Raft. Part I.--Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon. + Part II.--The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00 +The Mysterious Island. Part I.--Dropped from the Clouds. + Part II.--Abandoned. Part III.--The Secret of the Island. + The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50 + + +A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE +ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS. + + * * * * * + +THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE. + +Intelligence of Animals--Mountain Adventures--Bodily Strength and +Skill--Wonderful Escapes--Thunder and Lightning--Adventures on the +Great Hunting Grounds--Wonders of the Human Body--The Sublime in +Nature. + + +THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE. + +Wonders of Heat--Wonders of the Heavens--Wonders of Optics--The +Sun--Wonders of Acoustics--Wonders of Water--Wonders of the +Moon--Meteors, Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena. + + +THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY. + +Egypt 3,300 Years Ago--Wonders of Sculpture--Wonders of Glass +Making--Wonders of European Art--Wonders of Pompeii--Wonders of +Architecture--The Wonders of Italian Art--The Wonders of Engraving. + +Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable +illustrations. + +Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00. + +Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per +volume. + + +CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS. + +By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT. + +With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE +DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + +"The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of +events of the first half of the present century, and the scope of the +book comprehends all the prominent steps by which we have reached our +present position both as regards extent of country and industrial +prosperity. They include an account of the first Steamboat, the +Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida, +the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no +event of importance has been omitted, and any child fond of +story-telling will gain from this book an amount of knowledge which +may far exceed that which is usually acquired from the rigid +instruction of the school-room." + + +CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY. + +By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT. + +With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE +DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + + * * * * * + +THE IVORY KING. + +A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies. + +By CHARLES F. HOLDER. + +Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations. $2.00. + +The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought +together in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely +of his personal observations. It forms one of the most stimulating +and delightful contributions to the class of Natural History books +for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting forerunner +to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and +has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The +summary of its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant, +its habits and ways and its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four +Tusked Elephants, Hunting and Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant +in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White Elephant, Trained Elephants, +Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The numerous +illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great +variety of sources. + +It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and +valued addition to the library of the average boy or girl just +beginning to cultivate a love of reading and an interest in the world +around them. + + +MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE. + +By CHARLES F. HOLDER. + +Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations. $2.00. + + * * * * * + +SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS. + +THE BOY'S + +Library of Legend and Chivalry. + +EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER, + +And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES. + + * * * * * + +THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR. THE BOY'S FROISSART. +KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES. THE BOY'S PERCY. + +Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00. Sold +separately. Price per volume $2.00. + + * * * * * + +"Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories, +character and the ideals of character remain at the simplest and the +purest. The romantic history transpires in the healthy atmosphere of +the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky.... The figures +of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for Law, +are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the +book is for strength to do well and nobly in the world."--The +Independent. + + * * * * * + +THE BOY'S +Library of Pluck and Action. + +A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP, By Frank R. Stockton. +HANS BRINKER; OR, THE SILVER SKATES. A story of life in Holland. By + Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge. +THE BOY EMIGRANTS, By Noah Brooks. +PHAETON ROGERS, By Rossiter Johnson. + +Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00. Sold separately, +price per volume $1.50. + +In the "Boy's Library of Pluck and Action," the design was to bring +together the representative and most popular books of four of the +best known writers for young people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge, +Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and Rossiter Johnson are familiar +ones in every household, and a set of books, to which each has +contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every +boy who likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are +beautifully illustrated and uniformly bound in a most attractive +form. + + +SCRIBNER'S LIST OF JUVENILE BOOKS. + + * * * * * +The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls. + * * * * * + +THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED. + +By JAMES BALDWIN. + +With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle. One volume, +square 12mo. $2.00. + +Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in +which it most appeals to the boy-reader,--simply and strongly told, +with all its fire and action, yet without losing any of that strange +charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which every previous +attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch. + + +THE STORY OF ROLAND. + +By JAMES BALDWIN. + +With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. One volume, square +12mo. $2.00. + +This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried." +As Siegfried was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the +wants and the understanding of young readers, so is this story a +similar adaptation of the middle-age romances relating to Charlemagne +and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes of the +North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the +Middle Ages. + +"We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this +book. We commend it to parents who are selecting literature for their +children, assured, as we are, that it will convince them that books +may be found which will engage the attention, and stimulate the +imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting +the moral sensibilities."--Philadelphia Messenger. + + +THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK. + + * * * * * + +THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK; + +Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT. + +By DANIEL C. BEARD. + +With three hundred illustrations by the author. One volume, 8vo. +$2.00. + +Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and +practical American boy the things he really wants to know, the +thousand things he wants to do, and the ten thousand ways in which he +can do them, with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every +boy can either procure or make. + +The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and +he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern +devices, besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and +practical ideas. + + +FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES. + + * * * * * + +THE STORY OF VITEAU. + +With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch. + +One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50. + +In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one +that he has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working. +While describing the life and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and +Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran, or in the woods among the +Cotereaux, he gives a picture of France in the age of chivalry, and +tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure +and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to +the attraction of the book. + + +A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP. + +Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50. + +"'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor +to his 'Rudder Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of +delicious nonsense that will be enjoyed by men and women.... The less +serious parts are described with a mock gravity that is the +perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein +of good sense running through it, so that really useful information +is conveyed to the young and untravelled reader's mind."--Philadelphia +Evening Bulletin. + + +THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES. + +With illustrations by Bensell and others. One volume, quarto, boards. +$1.50. + +"Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of +writing in the easiest of colloquial English, without descending to +the plane of the vulgar or commonplace. The very perfection of his +work hinders the reader from perceiving at once how good of its kind +it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,--a real +humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy +fancy,--his stories become irresistibly attractive."--Philadelphia +Times. + + +NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES. + + * * * * * + +ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION. + +One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover, +three hundred and seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new +edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50. + + +TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. + +One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three +hundred and fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new +edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50. + + * * * * * + +Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York. + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful +Tales, by Frank R. Stockton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + +***** This file should be named 12067-8.txt or 12067-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/ + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/12067-8.zip b/old/12067-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..20c02c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067-8.zip diff --git a/old/12067-h.zip b/old/12067-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..09ec199 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067-h.zip diff --git a/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm b/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec3b8f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067-h/12067-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8723 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" + content="text/html; charset=us-ascii"> +<meta content="pg2html (binary version 0.15)" + name="generator"> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of + The Bee-Man of Orn, + by Frank R. Stockton +</title> +<style type="text/css"> + <!-- + body { margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; } + p { text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: .75em; + font-size: 100%; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { text-align: center; } + hr { width: 50%; } + hr.full { width: 100%; } + .poem { margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; } + .poem .stanza { margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; } + .poem p { margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em; } + .poem p.i2 { margin-left: 1em; } + .poem p.i4 { margin-left: 2em; } + .poem p.i6 { margin-left: 3em; } + .poem p.i8 { margin-left: 4em; } + .poem p.i10 { margin-left: 5em; } + .toc { margin-left: 35%; margin-bottom: 0em;} + // --> +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales +by Frank R. Stockton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales + +Author: Frank R. Stockton + +Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + + + + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div style="height: 4em;"></div> + +<center><table border=1 cellpadding=15 width="50%" summary=""><tr><td> +<h2>FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS.</h2> +<hr> +<center> + <i>New Uniform Edition</i>. +</center> +<p>THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales.</p> +<p>THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories.</p> +<p>THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories.</p> +<p>THE LATE MRS NULL.</p> +<p>RUDDER GRANGE.</p> + +<p> + <i>The set, five vols.</i>, $6.25; <i>each</i>, $1.25. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + RUDDER GRANGE. <i>New Illustrated Edition</i>. With + over 100 Illustrations by A.B. Frost. Square + 12mo, $2.00. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. + 12mo, paper, 50 cents. +</p> +<p> + THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo, + paper, 50 cents. +</p> +<p> + RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. +</p> +<p> + THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. +</p> +<p> + THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00. +</p> +<p> + THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales. + Illustrated, 4to, cloth, $2.50; boards, $1.50. +</p> +<p> + ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50. +</p> +<p> + TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50. +</p> +</td></tr></table></center> + +<div style="height: 6em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE BEE-MAN OF ORN +</h2> +<h4> + AND +</h4> +<h2> + OTHER FANCIFUL TALES +</h2> +<h4> + BY +</h4> +<h3> + FRANK R. STOCKTON +</h3> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h5> + New York<br> + Copyright, 1887,<br> + By Charles Scribner's Sons. +</h5> +<h5> + Rand Avery Company,<br> + Electrotypers and Printers,<br> + Boston. +</h5> + + +<hr> +<h2><a name="contents">Contents</a></h2> +<ol type="I"> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter1"> +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter2"> +THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter3"> +OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter4"> +THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter5"> +CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter6"> +PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter7"> +THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter8"> +THE BANISHED KING. +</a> +<li class="toc"><a href="#chapter9"> +THE PHILOPENA. +</a> +</ol> +<hr> + +<a name="chapter1"></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE BEE-MAN OF ORN. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old + man who was called the Bee-man, because his whole + time was spent in the company of bees. He lived in a + small hut, which was nothing more than an immense + bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs + in every corner of the one room it contained, on + the shelves, under the little table, all about the rough + bench on which the old man sat, and even about the + head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All + day the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects, + but this did not interfere in any way with the old Bee-man, + who walked in among them, ate his meals, and + went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being + stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had + become so accustomed to him, and his skin was so + tough and hard, that the bees no more thought of + stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or + a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a + pocket of his old leathern doublet; and when he put + on this coat to take one of his long walks in the forest + in search of wild bees' nests, he was very glad to have + this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild + honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take + out a piece of a comb for a luncheon. The bees in + his pocket worked very industriously, and he was + always certain of having something to eat with him + wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey; + and when he needed bread or meat, he carried some + fine combs to a village not far away and bartered + them for other food. He was ugly, untidy, shrivelled, + and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be + his only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and + contented; he had all the honey he wanted, and his + bees, whom he considered the best company in the + world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be, + and seemed to increase in number every day. +</p> +<p> + One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a + Junior Sorcerer. This young person, who was a student + of magic, necromancy, and the kindred arts, was + much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had frequently + noticed in his wanderings, and he considered + him an admirable subject for study. He had got a + great deal of useful practice by endeavoring to find + out, by the various rules and laws of sorcery, exactly + why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something + that he was not, and why he was what he happened to + be. He had studied a long time at this matter, and + had found out something. +</p> +<p> + "Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came + out of his hut, "that you have been transformed?" +</p> +<p> + "What do you mean by that?" said the other, + much surprised. +</p> +<p> + "You have surely heard of animals and human + beings who have been magically transformed into + different kinds of creatures?" +</p> +<p> + "Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man; + "but what have I been transformed from?" +</p> +<p> + "That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer. + "But one thing is certain—you ought to be + changed back. If you will find out what you have been + transformed from, I will see that you are made all + right again. Nothing would please me better than to + attend to such a case." +</p> +<p> + And, having a great many things to study and investigate, + the Junior Sorcerer went his way. +</p> +<p> + This information greatly disturbed the mind of the + Bee-man. If he had been changed from something + else, he ought to be that other thing, whatever it was. + He ran after the young man, and overtook him. +</p> +<p> + "If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have + been transformed, you surely are able to tell me what + it is that I was." +</p> +<p> + "No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have + not proceeded far enough for that. When I become a + senior I can tell you all about it. But, in the meantime, + it will be well for you to try to discover for yourself + your original form, and when you have done that, + I will get some of the learned masters of my art to + restore you to it. It will be easy enough to do that, + but you could not expect them to take the time and + trouble to find out what it was." +</p> +<p> + And, with these words, he hurried away, and was + soon lost to view. +</p> +<p> + Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps, + and went to his hut. Never before had he heard any + thing which had so troubled him. +</p> +<p> + "I wonder what I was transformed from?" he + thought, seating himself on his rough bench. "Could + it have been a giant, or a powerful prince, or some + gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies + wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a + horse, or perhaps a fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I + hope it was not one of these. But, whatever it was, + every one has certainly a right to his original form, + and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early + to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have + not more pockets to my old doublet, so that I might + carry more bees and more honey for my journey." +</p> +<p> + He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of + twigs and straw, and, having transferred to this a + number of honey-combs and a colony of bees which + had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day, + and having put on his leathern doublet, and having + bound his new hive to his back, he set forth on his + quest; the bees who were to accompany him buzzing + around him like a cloud. +</p> +<p> + As the Bee-man passed through the little village the + people greatly wondered at his queer appearance, with + the hive upon his back. "The Bee-man is going on a + long expedition this time," they said; but no one + imagined the strange business on which he was bent. + About noon he sat down under a tree, near a beautiful + meadow covered with blossoms, and ate a little honey. + Then he untied his hive and stretched himself out on + the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering + about him, some going out to the blossoms in the + sunshine, and some returning laden with the sweet + pollen, he said to himself, "They know just what they + have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know + not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it + may be, I am determined to do it. In some way or + other I will find out what was my original form, and + then I will have myself changed back to it." +</p> +<p> + And now the thought came to him that perhaps his + original form might have been something very disagreeable, + or even horrid. +</p> +<p> + "But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever + I was that shall I be again. It is not right for + any one to retain a form which does not properly belong + to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my + original form in the same way that I find the trees in + which the wild bees hive. When I first catch sight of + a bee-tree I am drawn towards it, I know not how. + Something says to me: 'That is what you are looking + for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my + original form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards + it. Something will say to me: 'That is it.'" +</p> +<p> + When the Bee-man was rested he started off again, + and in about an hour he entered a fair domain. Around + him were beautiful lawns, grand trees, and lovely gardens; + while at a little distance stood the stately palace + of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people + were walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees + and arbors; splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting + for their riders; and everywhere were seen signs + of opulence and gayety. +</p> +<p> + "I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I + should like to stop here for a time. If it should happen + that I was originally like any of these happy + creatures it would please me much." +</p> +<p> + He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes, + and taking off his old doublet, laid that beside it. It + would not do to have his bees flying about him if + he wished to go among the inhabitants of this fair + domain. +</p> +<p> + For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace + and its grounds, avoiding notice as much as possible, + but looking at every thing. He saw handsome + men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and + cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages, + and fishes in crystal globes, and it seemed to him that + the best of all living things were here collected. +</p> +<p> + At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to + himself: "There is one being here toward whom I + feel very much drawn, and that is the Lord of the + Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like + him, but it would be a very fine thing if it were so; + and it seems impossible for me to be drawn toward any + other being in the domain when I look upon him, so + handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must observe + him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter, + before applying to the sorcerers to change me back + into a lord of a fair domain." +</p> +<p> + The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of + the Domain walking in his gardens. He slipped along + the shady paths, and followed him so as to observe + him closely, and find out if he were really drawn + toward this noble and handsome being. The Lord of + the Domain walked on for some time, not noticing + that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly + turning, he saw the little old man. +</p> +<p> + "What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he + cried; and he gave him a kick that sent him into some + bushes that grew by the side of the path. +</p> +<p> + The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast + as he could to the place where he had hidden his hive + and his old doublet. +</p> +<p> + "If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is + that I was never a person who would kick a poor old + man. I will leave this place. I was transformed + from nothing that I see here." +</p> +<p> + He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then + he came to a great black mountain, near the bottom of + which was an opening like the mouth of a cave. +</p> +<p> + This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns + and under-ground passages, which were the abodes of + dragons, evil spirits, horrid creatures of all kinds. +</p> +<p> + "Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose + I ought to visit this place. If I am going to do + this thing properly, I should look on all sides of the + subject, and I may have been one of those horrid + creatures myself." +</p> +<p> + Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he + approached the opening of the passage which led into + its inmost recesses he saw, sitting upon the ground, + and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "Good-day," said this individual when he saw the + Bee-man. "Are you going inside?" +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to + do." +</p> +<p> + "Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to + his feet, "I think I will go with you. I was told that + if I went in there I should get my energies toned up, + and they need it very much; but I did not feel equal + to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait + until some one came along. I am very glad to see + you, and we will go in together." +</p> +<p> + So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded + but a short distance when they met a very little + creature, whom it was easy to recognize as a Very + Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled + in color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was + extremely lively and active, and came bounding + toward them. +</p> +<p> + "What did you two people come here for?" he + asked. +</p> +<p> + "I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my + energies toned up." +</p> +<p> + "You have come to the right place," said the Very + Imp. "We will tone you up. And what does that + old Bee-man want?" +</p> +<p> + "He has been transformed from something, and + wants to find out what it is. He thinks he may have + been one of the things in here." +</p> +<p> + "I should not wonder if that were so," said the + Very Imp, rolling his head on one side, and eying the + Bee-man with a critical gaze. +</p> +<p> + "All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around, + and pick out his previous existence. We have here all + sorts of vile creepers, crawlers, hissers, and snorters. + I suppose he thinks any thing will be better than a + Bee-man." +</p> +<p> + "It is not because I want to be better than I am," + said the Bee-man, "that I started out on this search. + I have simply an honest desire to become what I originally + was." +</p> +<p> + "Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is + an idiotic moon-calf here with a clam head, which + must be just like what you used to be." +</p> +<p> + "Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not + the least idea what an honest purpose is. I shall go + about, and see for myself." +</p> +<p> + "Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend + to this fellow who wants to be toned up." So saying + he joined the Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "Look here," said that individual, regarding him + with interest, "do you black and shine yourself every + morning?" +</p> +<p> + "No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish. + You want to be invigorated, don't you? Well, I will + tell you a splendid way to begin. You see that Bee-man + has put down his hive and his coat with the bees + in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then + catch a lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If + you spread them on a sticky rag, and make a plaster, + and put it on the small of your back, it will invigorate + you like every thing, especially if some of the bees are + not quite dead." +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him + with his mild eyes, "but if I had energy enough to + catch a bee I would be satisfied. Suppose you catch + a lot for me." +</p> +<p> + "The subject is changed," said the Very Imp. + "We are now about to visit the spacious chamber of + the King of the Snap-dragons." +</p> +<p> + "That is a flower," said the Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "You will find him a gay old blossom," said the + other. "When he has chased you round his room, + and has blown sparks at you, and has snorted and + howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws + like a pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up + higher than ever before in your life." +</p> +<p> + "No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but + I think I will begin with something a little milder." +</p> +<p> + "Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed + Demon of the Gorge in here. He is generally asleep, + and, if you say so, you can slip into the farthest + corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the opposite + wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't + get at you, for he doesn't reach all the way across his + cave; I have measured him. It will tone you up wonderfully + to sit there and watch him." +</p> +<p> + "Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I + would rather stay outside and let you go up in the + corner. The performance in that way will be more + interesting to me." +</p> +<p> + "You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very + Imp. "I have offered them to you loose, and I have + offered them fastened to a wall, and now the best + thing I can do is to give you a chance at one of them + that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and + is enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his + whiskers for a thousand years. You can go to his + cave and examine him just as if he were stuffed, and + then you can sit on his back and think how it would + be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and + he should wake up while you are sitting there. It + would be easy to imagine a lot of horrible things he + would do to you when you look at his open mouth + with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible + wings all covered with spikes." +</p> +<p> + "I think that might suit me," said the Languid + Youth. "I would much rather imagine the exercises + of these monsters than to see them really going on." +</p> +<p> + "Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led + the way to the cave of the Ghastly Griffin. +</p> +<p> + The Bee-man went by himself through a great part + of the mountain, and looked into many of its gloomy + caves and recesses, recoiling in horror from most of the + dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he was + wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding + through the passages of the mountain, and soon there + came flapping along an enormous dragon, with body + black as night, and wings and tail of fiery red. In + his great fore-claws he bore a little baby. +</p> +<p> + "Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is + taking that little creature to his cave to devour it." +</p> +<p> + He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and + following looked in. The dragon was crouched upon + the ground with the little baby lying before him. It + did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and crying. + The monster was looking upon it with delight, + as if he intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon + as his appetite should be a little stronger. +</p> +<p> + "It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody + ought to do something." And turning around, he ran + away as fast as he could. +</p> +<p> + He ran through various passages until he came to + the spot where he had left his bee-hive. Picking it + up, he hurried back, carrying the hive in his two hands + before him. When he reached the cave of the dragon, + he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over + the weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation, + the Bee-man rushed into the cave and threw his hive + straight into the face of the dragon. The bees, + enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd + and immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and + nose of the dragon. The great monster, astounded + by this sudden attack, and driven almost wild by the + numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the + farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his + relentless enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with + his great wings and struck with his paws. While the + dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the Bee-man + rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried + away. He did not stop to pick up his doublet, but + kept on until he reached the entrance of the caves. + There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one leg, + and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands, + and stopped to inquire what was the matter, and what + had become of the Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp. + "He disappointed me dreadfully. I took him up to + the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the thing was enchanted, + and that he might sit on its back and think + about what it could do if it was awake; and when + he came near it the wretched creature opened its eyes, + and raised its head, and then you ought to have seen + how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me + and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me + till I can scarcely move." +</p> +<p> + "His energies must have been toned up a good + deal," said the Bee-man. +</p> +<p> + "Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I + raised a howl, and a Scissor-jawed Clipper came out + of his hole, and got after him; but that lazy fool ran + so fast that he could not be caught." +</p> +<p> + The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the + Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter, + "for the rules of this institution don't allow the + creatures inside to come out of this opening, or to hang + around it. If they did, they would frighten away + visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper + part of the mountain." +</p> +<p> + The two proceeded on their way. +</p> +<p> + "What are you going to do with that baby?" said + the Languid Youth. +</p> +<p> + "I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man, + "as I go on with my search, and perhaps I may find + its mother. If I do not, I shall give it to somebody + in that little village yonder. Any thing would be better + than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid + dragon." +</p> +<p> + "Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now + to carry a baby." +</p> +<p> + "Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take + it myself. I like to carry something, and I have now + neither my hive nor my doublet." +</p> +<p> + "It is very well that you had to leave them behind," + said the Youth, "for the bees would have stung the + baby." +</p> +<p> + "My bees never sting babies," said the other. +</p> +<p> + "They probably never had a chance," remarked his + companion. +</p> +<p> + They soon entered the village, and after walking a + short distance the youth exclaimed: "Do you see that + woman over there sitting at the door of her house? + She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all to + pieces. She should not be allowed to do that." +</p> +<p> + "No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie + her hands." +</p> +<p> + "Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the + Youth, "and if you give it to her she will no longer + think of tearing her hair." +</p> +<p> + "But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think + this is her child?" +</p> +<p> + "Suppose you go over and see," said the other. +</p> +<p> + The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he + walked toward the woman. Hearing him coming, she + raised her head, and when she saw the child she rushed + towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming + with joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy + tears she begged to know the story of the rescue of + her child, whom she never expected to see again; and + she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings. + The friends and neighbors gathered around and there + was great rejoicing. The mother urged the Bee-man + and the Youth to stay with her, and rest and refresh + themselves, which they were glad to do as they were + tired and hungry. +</p> +<p> + They remained at the cottage all night, and in the + afternoon of the next day the Bee-man said to the + Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to you, but never in + all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any living + being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I + believe that I have been transformed from a baby." +</p> +<p> + "Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that + you have hit the truth. And now would you like to + be changed back to your original form?" +</p> +<p> + "Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the + strongest yearning to be what I originally was." +</p> +<p> + The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid + feeling, took a great interest in the matter, and early + the next morning started off to inform the Junior + Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he had + been transformed from, and desired to be changed + back to it. +</p> +<p> + The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were + filled with enthusiasm when they heard this report, and + they at once set out for the mother's cottage. And + there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed back + into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what + the Bee-man had done for her that she agreed to + take charge of this baby, and to bring it up as her + own. +</p> +<p> + "It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior + Sorcerer, "and I am glad that I studied his case. He + will now have a fresh start in life, and will have a + chance to become something better than a miserable + old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or + companions but buzzing bees." +</p> +<p> + The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned + to their homes, happy in the success of their great + performance; and the Youth went back to his home + anxious to begin a life of activity and energy. +</p> +<p> + Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer + had become a Senior and was very old indeed, he + passed through the country of Orn, and noticed a small + hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He approached + it, and looking in at the door he saw an old + man in a leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating + honey. By his magic art he knew this was the baby + which had been transformed from the Bee-man. +</p> +<p> + "Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He + has grown into the same thing again!" +</p> +<a name="chapter2"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + Over the great door of an old, old church which + stood in a quiet town of a far-away land there + was carved in stone the figure of a large griffin. The + old-time sculptor had done his work with great care, + but the image he had made was not a pleasant one to + look at. It had a large head, with enormous open + mouth and savage teeth; from its back arose great + wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout + legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were + no legs behind,—the body running out into a long and + powerful tail, finished off at the end with a barbed + point. This tail was coiled up under him, the end + sticking up just back of his wings. +</p> +<p> + The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this + stone figure, had evidently been very much pleased + with it, for little copies of it, also in stone, had been + placed here and there along the sides of the church, + not very far from the ground, so that people could + easily look at them, and ponder on their curious forms. + There were a great many other sculptures on the outside + of this church,—saints, martyrs, grotesque heads + of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those of other + creatures which cannot be named, because nobody + knows exactly what they were; but none were so + curious and interesting as the great griffin over the + door, and the little griffins on the sides of the church. +</p> +<p> + A long, long distance from the town, in the midst + of dreadful wilds scarcely known to man, there dwelt + the Griffin whose image had been put up over the + church-door. In some way or other, the old-time + sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of + his memory, had copied his figure in stone. The + Griffin had never known this, until, hundreds of years + afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild animal, + or in some manner which it is not now easy to find + out, that there was a likeness of him on the old church + in the distant town. Now, this Griffin had no idea + how he looked. He had never seen a mirror, and the + streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent + that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the + image of any thing looking into it, could not be found. + Being, as far as could be ascertained, the very last of + his race, he had never seen another griffin. Therefore + it was, that, when he heard of this stone image + of himself, he became very anxious to know what he + looked like, and at last he determined to go to the old + church, and see for himself what manner of being he + was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds, and + flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited + by men, where his appearance in the air created great + consternation; but he alighted nowhere, keeping up a + steady flight until he reached the suburbs of the town + which had his image on its church. Here, late in the + afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side + of a brook, and stretched himself on the grass to rest. + His great wings were tired, for he had not made such + a long flight in a century, or more. +</p> +<p> + The news of his coming spread quickly over the + town, and the people, frightened nearly out of their + wits by the arrival of so extraordinary a visitor, fled + into their houses, and shut themselves up. The Griffin + called loudly for some one to come to him, but the + more he called, the more afraid the people were to + show themselves. At length he saw two laborers hurrying + to their homes through the fields, and in a terrible + voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring to + disobey, the men stood, trembling. +</p> +<p> + "What is the matter with you all?" cried the + Griffin. "Is there not a man in your town who is + brave enough to speak to me?" +</p> +<p> + "I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking + so that his words could hardly be understood, + "that—perhaps—the Minor Canon—would come." +</p> +<p> + "Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want + to see him." +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position + in the old church, had just finished the afternoon services, + and was coming out of a side door, with three + aged women who had formed the week-day congregation. + He was a young man of a kind disposition, and + very anxious to do good to the people of the town. + Apart from his duties in the church, where he conducted + services every week-day, he visited the sick + and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were + in trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of + the bad children in the town with whom nobody else + would have any thing to do. Whenever the people + wanted something difficult done for them, they always + went to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the + laborer thought of the young priest when he found that + some one must come and speak to the Griffin. +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange + event, which was known to the whole town except + himself and the three old women, and when he was + informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked + to see him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened. +</p> +<p> + "Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of + me! What should he want with <i>me?</i>" +</p> +<p> + "Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men. + "He is very angry now because he has been kept waiting + so long; and nobody knows what may happen if + you don't hurry to him." +</p> +<p> + The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his + hand cut off than go out to meet an angry griffin; but + he felt that it was his duty to go, for it would be a + woful thing if injury should come to the people of the + town because he was not brave enough to obey the + summons of the Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he + started off. +</p> +<p> + "Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man + came near, "I am glad to see that there is some one + who has the courage to come to me." +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but + he bowed his head. +</p> +<p> + "Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there + is a church with a likeness of myself over one of the + doors?" +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature + before him and saw that it was, without doubt, exactly + like the stone image on the church. "Yes," he said, + "you are right." +</p> +<p> + "Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me + to it? I wish very much to see it." +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin + entered the town without the people knowing what he + came for, some of them would probably be frightened + to death, and so he sought to gain time to prepare + their minds. +</p> +<p> + "It is growing dark, now," he said, very much + afraid, as he spoke, that his words might enrage the + Griffin, "and objects on the front of the church can + not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until + morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone + image of yourself." +</p> +<p> + "That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I + see you are a man of good sense. I am tired, and I + will take a nap here on this soft grass, while I cool my + tail in the little stream that runs near me. The end of + my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and + it is quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure + and come early to-morrow morning, and show me the + way to the church." +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave, + and hurried into the town. In front of the church he + found a great many people assembled to hear his + report of his interview with the Griffin. When they + found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation, + but simply to see his stony likeness on the + church, they showed neither relief nor gratification, + but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for consenting + to conduct the creature into the town. +</p> +<p> + "What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I + should not bring him he would come himself and, + perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with his red-hot + tail." +</p> +<p> + Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many + plans were proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming + into the town. Some elderly persons urged that + the young men should go out and kill him; but the + young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then + some one said that it would be a good thing to destroy + the stone image so that the Griffin would have no + excuse for entering the town; and this proposal was + received with such favor that many of the people ran + for hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear + down and break up the stone griffin. But the Minor + Canon resisted this plan with all the strength of his + mind and body. He assured the people that this action + would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would + be impossible to conceal from him that his image had + been destroyed during the night. But the people were + so determined to break up the stone griffin that the + Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him to do + but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked + up and down in front of the church-door, keeping + away the men who brought ladders, by which they + might mount to the great stone griffin, and knock it + to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After + many hours the people were obliged to give up their + attempts, and went home to sleep; but the Minor + Canon remained at his post till early morning, and + then he hurried away to the field where he had left the + Griffin. +</p> +<p> + The monster had just awakened, and rising to his + fore-legs and shaking himself, he said that he was + ready to go into the town. The Minor Canon, therefore, + walked back, the Griffin flying slowly through + the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide. + Not a person was to be seen in the streets, and they + proceeded directly to the front of the church, where + the Minor Canon pointed out the stone griffin. +</p> +<p> + The real Griffin settled down in the little square + before the church and gazed earnestly at his sculptured + likeness. For a long time he looked at it. First he + put his head on one side, and then he put it on the + other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his + left, after which he shut his left eye and gazed with + his right. Then he moved a little to one side and + looked at the image, then he moved the other way. + After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had + been standing by all this time: +</p> +<p> + "It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That + breadth between the eyes, that expansive forehead, + those massive jaws! I feel that it must resemble me. + If there is any fault to find with it, it is that the neck + seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an + admirable likeness,—admirable!" +</p> +<p> + The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning + and all the afternoon. The Minor Canon had been + afraid to go away and leave him, and had hoped all + through the day that he would soon be satisfied with + his inspection and fly away home. But by evening + the poor young man was utterly exhausted, and felt + that he must eat and sleep. He frankly admitted this + fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would not like + something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged + in politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken + the words, he was seized with dread lest the monster + should demand half a dozen babies, or some tempting + repast of that kind. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between + the equinoxes. At the vernal and at the autumnal + equinox I take a good meal, and that lasts me for + half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits, + and do not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But + if you need food, go and get it, and I will return to + the soft grass where I slept last night and take another + nap." +</p> +<p> + The next day the Griffin came again to the little + square before the church, and remained there until + evening, steadfastly regarding the stone griffin over + the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to + look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see + him; but the young clergyman could not stay as he + had done before, for he had many duties to perform. + Nobody went to the church, but the people came to + the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him + how long the Griffin was going to stay. +</p> +<p> + "I do not know," he answered, "but I think he + will soon be satisfied with regarding his stone likeness, + and then he will go away." +</p> +<p> + But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after + morning he came to the church, but after a time he + did not stay there all day. He seemed to have taken + a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him + about as he pursued his various avocations. He would + wait for him at the side door of the church, for the + Minor Canon held services every day, morning and + evening, though nobody came now. "If any one + should come," he said to himself, "I must be found + at my post." When the young man came out, the + Griffin would accompany him in his visits to the sick + and the poor, and would often look into the windows + of the school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching + his unruly scholars. All the other schools were + closed, but the parents of the Minor Canon's scholars + forced them to go to school, because they were so bad + they could not endure them all day at home,—griffin + or no griffin. But it must be said they generally + behaved very well when that great monster sat up on + his tail and looked in at the school-room window. +</p> +<p> + When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no + sign of going away, all the people who were able to + do so left the town. The canons and the higher + officers of the church had fled away during the first + day of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the + Minor Canon and some of the men who opened the + doors and swept the church. All the citizens who + could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to + distant parts, and only the working people and the + poor were left behind. After some days these ventured + to go about and attend to their business, for if + they did not work they would starve. They were getting + a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been + told that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did + not feel so much afraid of him as before. +</p> +<p> + Day by day the Griffin became more and more + attached to the Minor Canon. He kept near him a + great part of the time, and often spent the night in + front of the little house where the young clergyman + lived alone. This strange companionship was often + burdensome to the Minor Canon; but, on the other + hand, he could not deny that he derived a great deal + of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had + lived for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and + he told the Minor Canon many wonderful things. +</p> +<p> + "It is like reading an old book," said the young + clergyman to himself; "but how many books I would + have had to read before I would have found out what + the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air, the + water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things, + and all the wonders of the world!" +</p> +<p> + Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its + close. And now the people of the town began to be + very much troubled again. +</p> +<p> + "It will not be long," they said, "before the + autumnal equinox is here, and then that monster will + want to eat. He will be dreadfully hungry, for he + has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He + will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat + them all. What is to be done?" +</p> +<p> + To this question no one could give an answer, but + all agreed that the Griffin must not be allowed to + remain until the approaching equinox. After talking + over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people + went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin + was not with him. +</p> +<p> + "It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster + is among us. You brought him here, and you ought + to see that he goes away. It is only on your account + that he stays here at all, for, although he visits his + image every day, he is with you the greater part of the + time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It + is your duty to go away and then he will follow you, + and we shall be free from the dreadful danger which + hangs over us." +</p> +<p> + "Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved + at being spoken to in such a way. "Where shall I + go? If I go to some other town, shall I not take this + trouble there? Have I a right to do that?" +</p> +<p> + "No," said the people, "you must not go to any + other town. There is no town far enough away. + You must go to the dreadful wilds where the Griffin + lives; and then he will follow you and stay there." +</p> +<p> + They did not say whether or not they expected the + Minor Canon to stay there also, and he did not ask them + any thing about it. He bowed his head, and went into + his house, to think. The more he thought, the more + clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go + away, and thus free the town from the presence of the + Griffin. +</p> +<p> + That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread + and meat, and early the next morning he set out on + his journey to the dreadful wilds. It was a long, + weary, and doleful journey, especially after he had + gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor + Canon kept on bravely, and never faltered. The way + was longer than he had expected, and his provisions + soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but a + little every day, but he kept up his courage, and + pressed on, and, after many days of toilsome travel, + he reached the dreadful wilds. +</p> +<p> + When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had + left the town he seemed sorry, but showed no disposition + to go and look for him. After a few days had + passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of + the people where the Minor Canon had gone. But, + although the citizens had been so anxious that the + young clergyman should go to the dreadful wilds, + thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow + him, they were now afraid to mention the Minor + Canon's destination, for the monster seemed angry + already, and, if he should suspect their trick he would, + doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one + said he did not know, and the Griffin wandered about + disconsolate. One morning he looked into the Minor + Canon's school-house, which was always empty now, + and thought that it was a shame that every thing + should suffer on account of the young man's absence. +</p> +<p> + "It does not matter so much about the church," + he said, "for nobody went there; but it is a pity + about the school. I think I will teach it myself until + he returns." +</p> +<p> + It was the hour for opening the school, and the + Griffin went inside and pulled the rope which rang + the school-bell. Some of the children who heard the + bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it + to be a joke of one of their companions; but when + they saw the Griffin they stood astonished, and + scared. +</p> +<p> + "Go tell the other scholars," said the monster, + "that school is about to open, and that if they are + not all here in ten minutes, I shall come after them." +</p> +<p> + In seven minutes every scholar was in place. +</p> +<p> + Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy + or girl moved, or uttered a whisper. The Griffin + climbed into the master's seat, his wide wings spread + on each side of him, because he could not lean back + in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great + tail coiled around, in front of the desk, the barbed + end sticking up, ready to tap any boy or girl who + might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed the + scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them + while their master was away. In speaking he endeavored + to imitate, as far as possible, the mild and + gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must be + admitted that in this he was not very successful. He + had paid a good deal of attention to the studies of the + school, and he determined not to attempt to teach + them any thing new, but to review them in what they + had been studying; so he called up the various classes, + and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The + children racked their brains to remember what they + had learned. They were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure + that they recited as they had never recited + before. One of the boys, far down in his class, + answered so well that the Griffin was astonished. +</p> +<p> + "I should think you would be at the head," said he. + "I am sure you have never been in the habit of reciting + so well. Why is this?" +</p> +<p> + "Because I did not choose to take the trouble," + said the boy, trembling in his boots. He felt obliged + to speak the truth, for all the children thought that the + great eyes of the Griffin could see right through them, + and that he would know when they told a falsehood. +</p> +<p> + "You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the + Griffin. "Go down to the very tail of the class, and + if you are not at the head in two days, I shall know the + reason why." +</p> +<p> + The next afternoon this boy was number one. +</p> +<p> + It was astonishing how much these children now + learned of what they had been studying. It was as if + they had been educated over again. The Griffin used + no severity toward them, but there was a look about + him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they + were sure they knew their lessons for the next day. +</p> +<p> + The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the + sick and the poor; and he began to go about the town + for this purpose. The effect upon the sick was miraculous. + All, except those who were very ill indeed, + jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming, + and declared themselves quite well. To those + who could not get up, he gave herbs and roots, which + none of them had ever before thought of as medicines, + but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of + the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all + that, they afterward said that no matter what happened + to them, they hoped that they should never + again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides, + feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues. +</p> +<p> + As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared. + All those who had depended upon charity for + their daily bread were now at work in some way or + other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their + neighbors just for the sake of their meals,—a thing + which before had been seldom heard of in the town. + The Griffin could find no one who needed his assistance. +</p> +<p> + The summer had now passed, and the autumnal + equinox was rapidly approaching. The citizens were + in a state of great alarm and anxiety. The Griffin + showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have + settled himself permanently among them. In a short + time, the day for his semi-annual meal would arrive, + and then what would happen? The monster would + certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their + children. +</p> +<p> + Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they + had sent away the Minor Canon; he was the only one + on whom they could have depended in this trouble, for + he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find out + what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive. + Some step must be taken immediately. A + meeting of the citizens was called, and two old men + were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They + were instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner + for him on equinox day,—one which would entirely + satisfy his hunger. They would offer him the fattest + mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of + various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might + fancy. If none of these suited, they were to mention + that there was an orphan asylum in the next town. +</p> +<p> + "Anything would be better," said the citizens, + "than to have our dear children devoured." +</p> +<p> + The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions + were not received with favor. +</p> +<p> + "From what I have seen of the people of this + town," said the monster, "I do not think I could + relish any thing which was prepared by them. They + appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and + selfish. As for eating one of them, old or young, I + could not think of it for a moment. In fact, there + was only one creature in the whole place for whom I + could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor + Canon, who has gone away. He was brave, and good, + and honest, and I think I should have relished him." +</p> +<p> + "Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in + that case I wish we had not sent him to the dreadful + wilds!" +</p> +<p> + "What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean? + Explain instantly what you are talking about!" +</p> +<p> + The old man, terribly frightened at what he had + said, was obliged to tell how the Minor Canon had + been sent away by the people, in the hope that the + Griffin might be induced to follow him. +</p> +<p> + When the monster heard this, he became furiously + angry. He dashed away from the old men and, spreading + his wings, flew backward and forward over the + town. He was so much excited that his tail became + red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening + sky. When at last he settled down in the little field + where he usually rested, and thrust his tail into the + brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the water of + the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens + were greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old + man for telling about the Minor Canon. +</p> +<p> + "It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended + at last to go and look for him, and we should have + been saved. Now who can tell what misery you have + brought upon us." +</p> +<p> + The Griffin did not remain long in the little field. + As soon as his tail was cool he flew to the town-hall + and rang the bell. The citizens knew that they were + expected to come there, and although they were afraid + to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and + they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the + platform at one end, flapping his wings and walking + up and down, and the end of his tail was still so warm + that it slightly scorched the boards as he dragged it + after him. +</p> +<p> + When everybody who was able to come was there, + the Griffin stood still and addressed the meeting. +</p> +<p> + "I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he + said, "ever since I discovered what cowards you are, + but I had no idea that you were so ungrateful, selfish, + and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was your + Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your + good, and thought of nothing else but how he might + benefit you and make you happy; and as soon as you + imagine yourselves threatened with a danger,—for + well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,—you + send him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes, + hoping thereby to save yourselves. Now, I had + conceived a great liking for that young man, and had + intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But + I have changed my mind about him. I shall go and + find him, but I shall send him back here to live among + you, and I intend that he shall enjoy the reward of his + labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to the officers + of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I + first came here, and tell them never to return to this + town under penalty of death. And if, when your + Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not bow yourselves + before him, put him in the highest place among + you, and serve and honor him all his life, beware of + my terrible vengeance! There were only two good + things in this town: the Minor Canon and the stone + image of myself over your church-door. One of these + you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away + myself." +</p> +<p> + With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it + was time, for the end of his tail had become so hot that + there was danger of its setting fire to the building. +</p> +<p> + The next morning, the Griffin came to the church, + and tearing the stone image of himself from its fastenings + over the great door, he grasped it with his powerful + fore-legs and flew up into the air. Then, after + hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail + an angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful + wilds. When he reached this desolate region, he set + the stone Griffin upon a ledge of a rock which rose in + front of the dismal cave he called his home. There the + image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it + had had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting + with the exertion of carrying such an enormous load + to so great a distance, lay down upon the ground, and + regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt + somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon. + He found the young man, weak and half starved, lying + under the shadow of a rock. After picking him up + and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew away to + a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and + herbs which he well knew were strengthening and + beneficial to man, though he had never tasted them + himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was + greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the + Griffin told him what had happened in the town. +</p> +<p> + "Do you know," said the monster, when he had + finished, "that I have had, and still have, a great + liking for you?" +</p> +<p> + "I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon, + with his usual politeness. +</p> +<p> + "I am not at all sure that you would be," said the + Griffin, "if you thoroughly understood the state of + the case, but we will not consider that now. If some + things were different, other things would be otherwise. + I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in + which you have been treated that I have determined + that you shall at last enjoy the rewards and honors + to which you are entitled. Lie down and have a good + sleep, and then I will take you back to the town." +</p> +<p> + As he heard these words, a look of trouble came + over the young man's face. +</p> +<p> + "You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the + Griffin, "about my return to the town. I shall not + remain there. Now that I have that admirable likeness + of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at my + leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent + proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of + cowardly and selfish people." +</p> +<p> + The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back, + and dropped into a doze; and when he was sound + asleep the Griffin took him up, and carried him back + to the town. He arrived just before day-break, and + putting the young man gently on the grass in the little + field where he himself used to rest, the monster, + without having been seen by any of the people, flew + back to his home. +</p> +<p> + When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the + morning among the citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality + with which he was received were truly wonderful. + He was taken to a house which had been occupied by + one of the banished high officers of the place, and + every one was anxious to do all that could be done for + his health and comfort. The people crowded into the + church when he held services, so that the three old + women who used to be his week-day congregation could + not get to the best seats, which they had always been + in the habit of taking; and the parents of the bad children + determined to reform them at home, in order that + he might be spared the trouble of keeping up his + former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to + the highest office of the old church, and before he died, + he became a bishop. +</p> +<p> + During the first years after his return from the + dreadful wilds, the people of the town looked up to + him as a man to whom they were bound to do honor + and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the + sky to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming + back. However, in the course of time, they learned + to honor and reverence their former Minor Canon + without the fear of being punished if they did not do + so. +</p> +<p> + But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin. + The autumnal equinox day came round, and the monster + ate nothing. If he could not have the Minor + Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down, + with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he + gradually declined, and died. It was a good thing for + some of the people of the town that they did not know + this. +</p> +<p> + If you should ever visit the old town, you would still + see the little griffins on the sides of the church; but + the great stone griffin that was over the door is gone. +</p> +<a name="chapter3"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + A mountain brook ran through a little village. + Over the brook there was a narrow bridge, and + from the bridge a foot-path led out from the village + and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and + his mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had + been employed by the villagers to pipe the cattle down + from the hills. Every afternoon, an hour before sunset, + he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage and + play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that + were grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever + they might happen to be, and would come down + to the village—the cows by the easiest paths, the + sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by + the steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all. +</p> +<p> + But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not + piped the cattle home. It is true that every afternoon + he sat upon the rock and played upon his familiar + instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had + grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of + his cheerful notes, which used to come from the rocky + hill on the other side of the valley, were heard no + more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one could + scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had + become somewhat deaf, and did not know that the + sound of his pipes was so thin and weak, and that + the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and + the goats came down every afternoon as before, but + this was because two boys and a girl were sent up after + them. The villagers did not wish the good old man to + know that his piping was no longer of any use, so they + paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing + about the two boys and the girl. +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older + then he was, and was as deaf as a gate,—posts, latch, + hinges, and all,—and she never knew that the sound + of her son's pipe did not spread over all the mountainside, + and echo back strong and clear from the opposite + hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of + his piping; and as he was so much younger than she + was, she never thought of him as being very old. She + cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his + clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little + salary. +</p> +<p> + One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old + Pipes had finished his piping, he took his stout staff + and went down the hill to the village to receive the + money for his month's work. The path seemed a great + deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and + Old Pipes thought that it must have been washed by + the rains and greatly damaged. He remembered it as + a path that was quite easy to traverse either up or + down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man, + and as his mother was so much older than he was, he + never thought of himself as aged and infirm. +</p> +<p> + When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had + talked a little with some of his friends, Old Pipes + started to go home. But when he had crossed the + bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up + the hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon + a stone. He had not been sitting there half a minute, + when along came two boys and a girl. +</p> +<p> + "Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight, + and I don't believe I can climb up this steep + path to my home. I think I shall have to ask you to + help me." +</p> +<p> + "We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite + cheerfully; and one boy took him by the right hand, + and the other by the left, while the girl pushed him in + the back. In this way he went up the hill quite easily, + and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave + each of the three children a copper coin, and then they + sat down for a few minutes' rest before starting back + to the village. +</p> +<p> + "I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the + boys, "if we had not been so far to-day after the cows, + the sheep, and the goats. They rambled high up on + the mountain, and we never before had such a time in + finding them." +</p> +<p> + "Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the + goats!" exclaimed Old Pipes. "What do you mean + by that?" +</p> +<p> + The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her + head, put her hand on her mouth, and made all sorts + of signs to the boy to stop talking on this subject; + but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old + Pipes. +</p> +<p> + "Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the + cattle can't hear your pipes now, somebody has to go + after them every evening to drive them down from the + mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us three to + do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night + the cattle had wandered far." +</p> +<p> + "How long have you been doing this?" asked the + old man. +</p> +<p> + The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on + her mouth more vigorously than before, but the boy + went on. +</p> +<p> + "I think it is about a year now," he said, "since + the people first felt sure that the cattle could not hear + your pipes; and from that time we've been driving + them down. But we are rested now, and will go home. + Good-night, sir." +</p> +<p> + The three children then went down the hill, the girl + scolding the boy all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent + a few moments, and then he went into his cottage. +</p> +<p> + "Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those + children said?" +</p> +<p> + "Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not + hear them. I did not know there were any children + here." +</p> +<p> + Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly + to make her hear, how the two boys and the girl had + helped him up the hill, and what he had heard about his + piping and the cattle. +</p> +<p> + "They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why, + what's the matter with the cattle?" +</p> +<p> + "Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe + there's any thing the matter with the cattle. It must + be with me and my pipes that there is something the + matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the + wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take + them. I shall go straight down to the village and give + back the money I received to-day." +</p> +<p> + "Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've + piped as well as you could, and no more can be expected. + And what are we to do without the money?" +</p> +<p> + "I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going + down to the village to pay it back." +</p> +<p> + The sun had now set; but the moon was shining + very brightly on the hill-side, and Old Pipes could see + his way very well. He did not take the same path by + which he had gone before, but followed another, which + led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though + longer, was not so steep. +</p> +<p> + When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat + down to rest, leaning his back against a great oak-tree. + As he did so, he heard a sound like knocking inside + the tree, and then a voice distinctly said: +</p> +<p> + "Let me out! let me out!" +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and + sprang to his feet. "This must be a Dryad-tree!" + he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her out." +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a + Dryad-tree, but he knew there were such trees on the + hill-sides and the mountains, and that Dryads lived in + them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on + those days when the moon rose before the sun went + down, a Dryad could come out of her tree if any one + could find the key which locked her in, and turn it. + Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree, + which stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that + key," he said, "I shall surely turn it." Before long + he perceived a piece of bark standing out from the + tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle + of a key. He took hold of it, and found he could + turn it quite around. As he did so, a large part of + the side of the tree was pushed open, and a beautiful + Dryad stepped quickly out. +</p> +<p> + For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the + scene before her,—the tranquil valley, the hills, the + forest, and the mountain-side, all lying in the soft + clear light of the moon. "Oh, lovely! lovely!" she + exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any + thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes, + she said: "How good of you to let me out! I am so + happy and so thankful, that I must kiss you, you dear + old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck + of Old Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You + don't know," she then went on to say, "how doleful + it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I don't mind it + in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but in + summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the + beauties of the world. And it's ever so long since + I've been let out. People so seldom come this way; + and when they do come at the right time they either + don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away. + But you, you dear old man, you were not frightened, + and you looked and looked for the key, and you let + me out, and now I shall not have to go back till winter + has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious! + What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I + am?" +</p> +<p> + "I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you + out, since I see that it makes you so happy; but I + must admit that I tried to find the key because I had a + great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to do + something for me, you can, if you happen to be going + down toward the village." +</p> +<p> + "To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will + go anywhere for you, my kind old benefactor." +</p> +<p> + "Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would + take this little bag of money to the Chief Villager and + tell him that Old Pipes cannot receive pay for the services + which he does not perform. It is now more than + a year that I have not been able to make the cattle + hear me, when I piped to call them home. I did not + know this until to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot + keep the money, and so I send it back." And, + handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her good-night, + and turned toward his cottage. +</p> +<p> + "Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank + you over, and over, and over again, you good old + man!" +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be + saved the fatigue of going all the way down to the village + and back again. "To be sure," he said to himself, + "this path does not seem at all steep, and I can + walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me + dreadfully to come up all the way from the village, + especially as I could not have expected those children + to help me again." When he reached home, his + mother was surprised to see him returning so soon. +</p> +<p> + "What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come + back? What did the Chief Villager say? Did he + take the money?" +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent + the money to the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly + reflected that his mother would be sure to disapprove + such a proceeding, and so he merely said he had sent + it by a person whom he had met. +</p> +<p> + "And how do you know that the person will ever + take it to the Chief Villager?" cried his mother. + "You will lose it, and the villagers will never get it. + Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to + have ordinary common sense?" +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy + years of age he could scarcely expect to grow any + wiser, but he made no remark on this subject; and, + saying that he doubted not that the money would go + safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper. + His mother scolded him roundly, but he did not mind + it; and after supper he went out and sat on a rustic chair + in front of the cottage to look at the moonlit village, + and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager really + received the money. While he was doing these two + things, he went fast asleep. +</p> +<p> + When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go + down to the village with the little bag of money. She + held it in her hand, and thought about what she had + heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she said; + "and it is a shame that he should lose this money. + He looked as if he needed it, and I don't believe the + people in the village will take it from one who has + served them so long. Often, when in my tree, have I + heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to + take the money back to him." She did not start + immediately, because there were so many beautiful + things to look at; but after a while she went up to the + cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she + slipped the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently + sped away. +</p> +<p> + The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he + would go up the mountain and cut some wood. He + had a right to get wood from the mountain, but for a + long time he had been content to pick up the dead + branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however, + he felt so strong and vigorous that he thought he + would go and cut some fuel that would be better than + this. He worked all the morning, and when he came + back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very + good appetite for his dinner. +</p> +<p> + Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads, + but there was one thing which, although he had heard, + he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss from a Dryad + made a person ten years younger. The people of the + village knew this, and they were very careful not to let + any child of ten years or younger, go into the woods + where the Dryads were supposed to be; for, if they + should chance to be kissed by one of these tree-nymphs, + they would be set back so far that they would + cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a + very bad boy of eleven once ran away into the woods, + and had an adventure of this kind; and when his + mother found him he was a little baby of one year old. + Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him + up more carefully than she had done before; and he + grew to be a very good boy indeed. +</p> +<p> + Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad, + once on each cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous + and active as when he was a hale man of fifty. His + mother noticed how much work he was doing, and told + him that he need not try in that way to make up for the + loss of his piping wages; for he would only tire himself + out, and get sick. But her son answered that he + had not felt so well for years, and that he was quite + able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old + Pipes, for the first time that day, put his hand in his + coat-pocket, and there, to his amazement, he found + the little bag of money. "Well, well!" he exclaimed, + "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that + I had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big + oak-tree I must have gone to sleep and dreamed it all; + and then I came home thinking I had given the money + to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the time. + But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall + not take it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go + to the village to see some of my old friends; and then + I shall give up the money." +</p> +<p> + Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as + had been his custom for so many years, took his pipes + from the shelf on which they lay, and went out to the + rock in front of the cottage. +</p> +<p> + "What are you going to do?" cried his mother. + "If you will not consent to be paid, why do you + pipe?" +</p> +<p> + "I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her + son. "I am used to it, and I do not wish to give it + up. It does not matter now whether the cattle hear + me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure no + one." +</p> +<p> + When the good man began to play upon his favorite + instrument he was astonished at the sound that came + from it. The beautiful notes of the pipes sounded + clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over + the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond, + while, after a little interval, an echo came back from + the rocky hill on the other side of the valley. +</p> +<p> + "Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my + pipes? They must have been stopped up of late, but + now they are as clear and good as ever." +</p> +<p> + Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide. + The cattle on the mountain heard them, and those that + were old enough remembered how these notes had + called them from their pastures every evening, and so + they started down the mountain-side, the others following. +</p> +<p> + The merry notes were heard in the village below, + and the people were much astonished thereby. "Why, + who can be blowing the pipes of Old Pipes?" they + said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up + to see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the + cattle were coming down the mountain. And so the + two boys and the girl did not have to go after them, + and had an hour for play, for which they were very + glad. +</p> +<p> + The next morning Old Pipes started down to the + village with his money, and on the way he met the + Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that you? Why, I + thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but + a dream." +</p> +<p> + "A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew + how happy you have made me, you would not think + it merely a dream. And has it not benefited you? + Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you + playing beautifully on your pipes." +</p> +<p> + "Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it + before, but I see it all now. I have really grown + younger. I thank you, I thank you, good Dryad, + from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of + the money in my pocket that made me think it was a + dream." +</p> +<p> + "Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said, + laughing, "because I thought you ought to keep it. + Good-by, kind, honest man. May you live long, and + be as happy as I am now." +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood + that he was really a younger man; but that made no + difference about the money, and he kept on his way to + the village. As soon as he reached it, he was eagerly + questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the + evening before, and when the people heard that it was + himself, they were very much surprised. Thereupon, + Old Pipes told what had happened to him, and then + there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations + and hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every + one. The Chief Villager refused to take his money, + and, although Old Pipes said that he had not earned it, + every one present insisted that, as he would now play + on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because, + for a time, he was unable to perform his duty. +</p> +<p> + So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and + after an hour or two spent in conversation with his + friends, he returned to his cottage. +</p> +<p> + There was one individual, however, who was not at + all pleased with what had happened to Old Pipes. + This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on the hills on the + other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to echo + back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be + heard. There were a great many other Echo-dwarfs + on these hills, some of whom echoed back the songs + of maidens, some the shouts of children, and others + the music that was often heard in the village. But + there was only one who could send back the strong + notes of the pipes of Old Pipes, and this had been his + sole duty for many years. But when the old man + grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be + heard on the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing + to do, and he spent his time in delightful idleness; + and he slept so much and grew so fat that it made his + companions laugh to see him walk. +</p> +<p> + On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval, + the sound of the pipes was heard on the echo hills, + this dwarf was fast asleep behind a rock. As soon as + the first notes reached them, some of his companions + ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back + the merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very + much annoyed and indignant at being thus obliged to + give up his life of comfortable leisure, and he hoped + very much that this pipe-playing would not occur again. + The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and, + sure enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes + of the pipes as clear and strong as they ever had been; + and he was obliged to work as long as Old Pipes + played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had + supposed, of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased + forever, and he felt that he had a right to be indignant + at being thus deceived. He was so much disturbed + that he made up his mind to go and try to find out + whether this was to be a temporary matter or not. + He had plenty of time, as the pipes were played but + once a day, and he set off early in the morning for + the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work + for the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the + valley and had gone some distance into the woods on + the hill-side, he stopped to rest, and, in a few minutes, + the Dryad came tripping along. +</p> +<p> + "Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you + doing here? and how did you get out of your + tree?" +</p> +<p> + "Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy; + that's what I am doing. And I was let out of my + tree by the good old man who plays the pipes to call + the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me + happier to think that I have been of service to him. + I gave him two kisses of gratitude, and now he + is young enough to play his pipes as well as + ever." +</p> +<p> + The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with + passion. "Am I to believe," he said, "that you are + the cause of this great evil that has come upon me? + and that you are the wicked creature who has again + started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing? + What have I ever done to you that you should have + condemned me for years and years to echo back the + notes of those wretched pipes?" +</p> +<p> + At this the Dryad laughed loudly. +</p> +<p> + "What a funny little fellow you are!" she said. + "Any one would think you had been condemned to + toil from morning till night; while what you really + have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every + day the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon + you, Echo-dwarf! You are lazy and selfish; and that + is what is the matter with you. Instead of grumbling + at being obliged to do a little wholesome work, which + is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf + upon the rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the + good fortune of the old man who has regained so much + of his strength and vigor. Go home and learn to + be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be + happy. Good-by." +</p> +<p> + "Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he + shook his fat little fist at her. "I'll make you suffer + for this. You shall find out what it is to heap injury + and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from him + the repose that he has earned by long years of toil." + And, shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to + the rocky hill-side. +</p> +<p> + Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of + Old Pipes sounded down into the valley and over the + hills and up the mountain-side; and every afternoon + when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew + more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day, + from early morning till it was time for him to go back + to his duties upon the rocky hill-side, he searched the + woods for her. He intended, if he met her, to pretend + to be very sorry for what he had said, and he + thought he might be able to play a trick upon her + which would avenge him well. One day, while thus + wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The + Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to + ordinary people; but now he was so anxious to find + the object of his search, that he stopped and asked + Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had + not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on + him with some surprise. +</p> +<p> + "No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have + been looking everywhere for her." +</p> +<p> + "You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with + her?" +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he + should be nearer the ear of his small companion, and + he told what the Dryad had done for him. +</p> +<p> + When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man + whose pipes he was obliged to echo back every day, + he would have slain him on the spot had he been able; + but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth + and listened to the rest of the story. +</p> +<p> + "I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued, + "on account of my aged mother. When I + was old myself, I did not notice how very old my + mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble + and decrepit her years have caused her to become; + and I am looking for the Dryad to ask her to make + my mother younger, as she made me." +</p> +<p> + The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was + a man who might help him in his plans. +</p> +<p> + "Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes, + "and it does you honor. But you should know that a + Dryad can make no person younger but one who lets + her out of her tree. However, you can manage the + affair very easily. All you need do is to find the + Dryad, tell her what you want, and request her to + step into her tree and be shut up for a short time. + Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree; + she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish. + Is not this a good plan?" +</p> +<p> + "Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go + instantly and search more diligently for the Dryad." +</p> +<p> + "Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You + can easily carry me on your strong shoulders; and I + shall be glad to help you in any way that I can." +</p> +<p> + "Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as + Old Pipes carried him rapidly along, "if he persuades + the Dryad to get into a tree,—and she is quite foolish + enough to do it,—and then goes away to bring his + mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break + off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn + it again. Then Mistress Dryad will see what she has + brought upon herself by her behavior to me." +</p> +<p> + Before long they came to the great oak-tree in + which the Dryad had lived, and, at a distance, they + saw that beautiful creature herself coming toward + them. +</p> +<p> + "How excellently well every thing happens!" said + the dwarf. "Put me down, and I will go. Your + business with the Dryad is more important than mine; + and you need not say any thing about my having + suggested your plan to you. I am willing that you + should have all the credit of it yourself." +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but + the little rogue did not go away. He concealed himself + between some low, mossy rocks, and he was so + much of their color that you would not have noticed + him if you had been looking straight at him. +</p> +<p> + When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time + in telling her about his mother, and what he wished + her to do. At first, the Dryad answered nothing, but + stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes. +</p> +<p> + "Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?" + she said. "I should dreadfully dislike to do it, for I + don't know what might happen. It is not at all necessary, + for I could make your mother younger at any + time if she would give me the opportunity. I had + already thought of making you still happier in this + way, and several times I have waited about your + cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she + never comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot + enter a house. I cannot imagine what put this idea + into your head. Did you think of it yourself?" +</p> +<p> + "No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old + Pipes. "A little dwarf whom I met in the woods + proposed it to me." +</p> +<p> + "Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it + all. It is the scheme of that vile Echo-dwarf—your + enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like to see + him." +</p> +<p> + "I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes. +</p> +<p> + "No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes + perceived the Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There + he is. Seize him and drag him out, I beg of you." +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was + pointed out to him, and, running to the rocks, he + caught the little fellow by the arm and pulled him + out. +</p> +<p> + "Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the + door of the great oak, "just stick him in there, and + we will shut him up. Then I shall be safe from + his mischief for the rest of the time I am free." +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the + Dryad pushed the door shut; there was a clicking + sound of bark and wood, and no one would have + noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening + in it. +</p> +<p> + "There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be + afraid of him. And I assure you, my good piper, + that I shall be very glad to make your mother younger + as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out + and meet me?" +</p> +<p> + "Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will + do it without delay." +</p> +<p> + And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his + cottage. But when he mentioned the matter to his + mother, the old woman became very angry indeed. + She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did + exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses, + and she would have nothing to do with them. If her + son had ever allowed himself to be kissed by one of + them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to its + doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a + word of it. He felt better than he used to feel, but + that was very common. She had sometimes felt that + way herself, and she forbade him ever to mention a + Dryad to her again. +</p> +<p> + That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his + plan in regard to his mother had failed, sat down upon + the rock and played upon his pipes. The pleasant + sounds went down the valley and up the hills and + mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons + who happened to notice the fact, the notes were not + echoed back from the rocky hill-side, but from the + woods on the side of the valley on which Old Pipes + lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in + their work to listen to the echo of the pipes coming + from the woods. The sound was not as clear and + strong as it used to be when it was sent back from the + rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the + trees. Such a thing as an echo changing its place in + this way had never been heard of before, and nobody + was able to explain how it could have happened. Old + Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came + from the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree. + The sides of the tree were thin, and the sound of the + pipes could be heard through them, and the dwarf was + obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those + notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes + thought he might get the Dryad in trouble if he let any + one know that the Echo-dwarf was shut up in the tree, + and so he wisely said nothing about it. +</p> +<p> + One day the two boys and the girl who had helped + Old Pipes up the hill were playing in the woods. Stopping + near the great oak-tree, they heard a sound of + knocking within it, and then a voice plainly said: +</p> +<p> + "Let me out! let me out!" +</p> +<p> + For a moment the children stood still in astonishment, + and then one of the boys exclaimed: +</p> +<p> + "Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found! + Let's let her out!" +</p> +<p> + "What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I + am the oldest of all, and I am only thirteen. Do you + wish to be turned into crawling babies? Run! run! + run!" +</p> +<p> + And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the + valley as fast as their legs could carry them. There + was no desire in their youthful hearts to be made + younger than they were. And for fear that their parents + might think it well that they should commence + their careers anew, they never said a word about + finding the Dryad-tree. +</p> +<p> + As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother + grew feebler and feebler. One day when her son was + away, for he now frequently went into the woods to + hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she arose + from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But + she felt so weak and tired that she was not able to + do the work to which she had been so long accustomed. + "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come when I + am too old to work. My son will have to hire some + one to come here and cook his meals, make his bed, + and mend his clothes. Alas! alas! I had hoped that + as long as I lived I should be able to do these things. + But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and + some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I + wonder where he is." And tottering to the door, she + went outside to look for him. She did not feel able to + stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank into it, + quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep. +</p> +<p> + The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to + see if she could find an opportunity of carrying out old + Pipes's affectionate design, now happened by; and + seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she + stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently + kissed her on each cheek, and then as quietly disappeared. +</p> +<p> + In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and + looking up at the sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is + almost dinner-time! My son will be here directly, and + I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet, she + hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and + vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her + son arrived the meal was on the table. +</p> +<p> + "How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to + herself, as she was bustling about. She was a woman + of very vigorous constitution, and at seventy had been + a great deal stronger and more active than her son was + at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother, + he knew that the Dryad had been there; but, while he + felt as happy as a king, he was too wise to say any + thing about her. +</p> +<p> + "It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his + mother; "and either my hearing has improved or you + speak much more plainly than you have done of late." +</p> +<p> + The summer days went on and passed away, the + leaves were falling from the trees, and the air was + becoming cold. +</p> +<p> + "Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad, + "and the night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go + back into my comfortable quarters in the great oak. + But first I must pay another visit to the cottage of Old + Pipes." +</p> +<p> + She found the piper and his mother sitting side by + side on the rock in front of the door. The cattle were + not to go to the mountain any more that season, and + he was piping them down for the last time. Loud + and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down + the mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the + easiest paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy, + and the goats by the most difficult ones among the + rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the + echoes of the cheerful music. +</p> +<p> + "How happy they look, sitting there together," + said the Dryad; "and I don't believe it will do them + a bit of harm to be still younger." And moving + quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on + his cheek and then his mother. +</p> +<p> + Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it + was, but he did not move, and said nothing. His + mother, thinking that her son had kissed her, turned + to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And + then she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous + woman of sixty, followed by her son, erect and happy, + and twenty years younger than herself. +</p> +<p> + The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her + shoulders as she felt the cool evening wind. +</p> +<p> + When she reached the great oak, she turned the key + and opened the door. "Come out," she said to the + Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking within. "Winter is + coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of my + tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the + mountain for the last time this year, the pipes will no + longer sound, and you can go to your rocks and have + a holiday until next spring." +</p> +<p> + Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly + out, and the Dryad entered the tree and pulled the + door shut after her. "Now, then," she said to herself, + "he can break off the key if he likes. It does + not matter to me. Another will grow out next spring. + And although the good piper made me no promise, I + know that when the warm days arrive next year, he + will come and let me out again." +</p> +<p> + The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the + tree. He was too happy to be released to think of any + thing else, and he hastened as fast as he could to his + home on the rocky hill-side. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in + the piper. When the warm days came again he went + to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to his sorrow + and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the + ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it + lay with its trunk shattered and split. And what + became of the Dryad, no one ever knew. +</p> +<a name="chapter4"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + There was once a Queen who founded, in her + capital city, a grand museum. This institution + was the pride of her heart, and she devoted nearly all + her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it, + and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This + museum was intended to elevate the intelligence of her + people, but the result was quite disappointing to the + Queen. For some reason, and what it was she could + not imagine, the people were not interested in her + museum. She considered it the most delightful place + in the world, and spent hours every day in examining + and studying the thousands of objects it contained; + but although here and there in the city there was a + person who cared to visit the collection, the great + body of the people found it impossible to feel the + slightest interest in it. At first this grieved the Queen, + and she tried to make her museum better; but as this + did no good, she became very angry, and she issued + a decree that all persons of mature age who were not + interested in her museum should be sent to prison. +</p> +<p> + This decree produced a great sensation in the city. + The people crowded to the building, and did their very + best to be interested; but, in the majority of cases, + the attempt was an utter failure. They could not feel + any interest whatever. The consequence was that + hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to + prison, and as there was not room enough for them + in the ordinary jails, large temporary prisons were + erected in various parts of the city. Those persons + who were actually needed for work or service which + no one else could do were allowed to come out in the + day-time on parole; but at night they had to return to + their prisons. +</p> +<p> + It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a + stranger entered the city one day. He was surprised + at seeing so many prisons, and approaching the window + in one of them, behind the bars of which he saw + a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all + this meant. The citizen informed him how matters + stood, and then, with tears mounting to his eyes, he + added: +</p> +<p> + "Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in + that museum; but it is impossible; I cannot make + myself care for it in the slightest degree! And, what + is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and I + shall languish here for the rest of my days." +</p> +<p> + Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out + of her house. Her face was pale, and she was weeping + bitterly. Filled with pity, he stopped and asked + her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for + a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear + children, to take an interest in that museum. For a + time I thought I might do it, but the hopes proved + false. It is impossible. I must leave my little ones, + and go to prison." +</p> +<p> + The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases + and many others of a similar character, which he soon + met with. "It is too bad! too bad!" he said to + himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble. + There is scarcely a family, I am told, in which there + is not some uninterested person—I must see the + Queen and talk to her about it," and with this he + wended his way to the palace. +</p> +<p> + He met the Queen just starting out on her morning + visit to the museum. When he made it known that + he was a stranger, and desired a short audience, she + stopped and spoke to him. +</p> +<p> + "Have you visited my museum yet?" she said. + "There is nothing in the city so well worth your + attention as that. You should go there before seeing + any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an + intelligent expression, and I have no doubt that it + will interest you greatly. I am going there myself, + and I shall be glad to see what effect that fine collection + has upon a stranger." +</p> +<p> + This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what + he had heard he felt quite sure that if he went to the + museum, he would soon be in jail; and so he hurried + to propose a plan which had occurred to him while on + his way to the palace. +</p> +<p> + "I came to see your Majesty on the subject of + the museum," he said, "and to crave permission to + contribute to the collection some objects which shall + be interesting to every one. I understand that it + is highly desirable that every one should be interested." +</p> +<p> + "Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although + I think that there is not the slightest reason why every + one should not feel the keenest interest in what the + museum already contains, I am willing to add to it + whatever may make it of greater value." +</p> +<p> + "In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should + be lost in securing what I wish to present." +</p> +<p> + "Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon + can you return?" +</p> +<p> + "It will take some days, at least," said the + Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "Give me your parole to return in a week," said + the Queen, "and start immediately." +</p> +<p> + The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace. + Having filled a leathern bag with provisions from a + cook's shop, he went out of the city gates. As he + walked into the open country, he said to himself: +</p> +<p> + "I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise. + Where I am to find any thing that will interest + all the people in that city, I am sure I do not know; + but my heart is so filled with pity for the great number + of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes + and shut up in prison, that I am determined to do + something for them, if I possibly can. There must + be some objects to be found in this vast country that + will interest every one." +</p> +<p> + About noon he came to a great mountain-side + covered with a forest. Thinking that he was as + likely to find what he sought in one place as another, + and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the + forest, and walked for some distance along a path + which gradually led up the mountain. Having crossed + a brook with its edges lined with water-cresses, he + soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of which + sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to + himself, "this is indeed fortunate! This good and + venerable man, who passes his life amid the secrets + of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know." + Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man + the object of his quest. +</p> +<p> + "I am afraid you are looking for what you will not + find," said the Hermit. "Most people are too silly + to be truly interested in any thing. They herd together + like cattle, and do not know what is good for + them. There are now on this mountain-side many + commodious and comfortable caves, all of which would + be tenanted if people only knew how improving and + interesting it is to live apart from their fellow-men. + But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your + quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do + nothing for you myself, but I have a pupil who is + very much given to wandering about, and looking for + curious things. He may tell you where you will be + able to find something that will interest everybody, + though I doubt it. You may go and see him, if you + like, and I will excuse him from his studies for a + time, so that he may aid you in your search." +</p> +<p> + The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of + parchment, and, giving it to the Stranger, he directed + him to the cave of his pupil. +</p> +<p> + This was situated at some distance, and higher up + the mountain, and when the Stranger reached it, he + found the Pupil fast asleep upon the ground. This + individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms, + long hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the + Stranger awakened him, told him why he had come, + and gave him the hermit's excuse, the sleepy eyes of + the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long. +</p> +<p> + "That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a + Monday; for I generally have to be satisfied with a + half-holiday, Wednesdays and Saturdays." +</p> +<p> + "Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the + Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to + the cave; though I have been known to go fishing on + days when there was no holiday. I have never seen + the old man but once, and that was when he first took + me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable. + That wouldn't be hermit-like. He comes up + here on the afternoons I am out, and writes down what + I am to do for the next half-week." +</p> +<p> + "And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but + there have been times when I have wondered whether + it wouldn't have been better for me to have been something + else. But I have chosen my profession, and I + suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately + on our search; but first I must put the cave in + order, for the old man will be sure to come up while I + am gone." +</p> +<p> + So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book + at a marked page, and laid it on a flat stone, which + served as a table, and then placed a skull and a couple + of bones in a proper position near by. +</p> +<p> + The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a + line and hook in his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod + from under some bushes. +</p> +<p> + "What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger, + "we are not going to fish!" +</p> +<p> + "Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a + good place, we might catch something that would be + a real curiosity." +</p> +<p> + Before long they came to a mountain brook, and + here the Pupil insisted on trying his luck. The + Stranger was a little tired and hungry, and so was + quite willing to sit down for a time and eat something + from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait, + and he staid away so long that the Stranger had quite + finished his meal before he returned. He came back + at last, however, in a state of great excitement. +</p> +<p> + "Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I + have found something that is truly astonishing! Come + quickly!" +</p> +<p> + The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil, + whose long legs carried him rapidly over the mountain-side. + Reaching a large hole at the bottom of a + precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming: + "Come in here and I will show you something that + will amaze you!" he immediately entered the hole. +</p> +<p> + The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what + curiosity he had found, followed him some distance + along a narrow and winding under-ground passage. + The two suddenly emerged into a high and spacious + cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof; + on the floor, in various places, were strongly fastened + boxes, and packages of many sorts, bales and bundles + of silks and rich cloths, with handsome caskets, and + many other articles of value. +</p> +<p> + "What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the + Stranger, in great surprise. +</p> +<p> + "Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes + fairly sparkling with delight. "It is a robber's den! + Isn't it a great thing to find a place like this?" +</p> +<p> + "A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm; + "let us get out of it as quickly as we can, or the robbers + will return, and we shall be cut to pieces." +</p> +<p> + "I don't believe they are coming back very soon," + said the Pupil, "and we ought to stop and take a look + at some of these things." +</p> +<p> + "Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger; + "you do not know what danger you are in." And, + so saying, he turned to hasten away from the place. +</p> +<p> + But he was too late. At that moment the robber + captain and his band entered the cave. When these + men perceived the Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil, + they drew their swords and were about to rush upon + them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up + his long arms, exclaimed: +</p> +<p> + "Stop! it is a mistake!" +</p> +<p> + At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword, + and motioned to his men to halt. "A mistake!" he + said; "what do you mean by that?" +</p> +<p> + "I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking + for curiosities, and wandered into this place by accident. + We haven't taken a thing. You may count your + goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have + not even opened a box, although I very much wanted + to see what was in some of them." +</p> +<p> + "Are his statements correct?" said the Captain, + turning to the Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "Entirely so," was the answer. +</p> +<p> + "You have truthful features, and an honest expression," + said the Captain, "and I do not believe you + would be so dishonorable as to creep in here during + our absence and steal our possessions. Your lives + shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain + with us; for we cannot allow any one who knows our + secret to leave us. You shall be treated well, and + shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if your + conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full + members." +</p> +<p> + Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate + position. He strode up and down one side of the cave, + vowing inwardly that never again would he allow himself + to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That individual, + however, was in a state of high delight. He ran + about from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures + which some of the robbers showed him. +</p> +<p> + The two captives were fed and lodged very well; + and the next day the Captain called them and the + band together, and addressed them. +</p> +<p> + "We are now twenty-nine in number," he said; + "twenty-seven full members, and two on probation. + To-night we are about to undertake a very important + expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall fasten + up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall + tell you to what place we are going." +</p> +<p> + An hour or two before midnight the band set out, + accompanied by the Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil; + and when they had gone some miles the Captain halted + them to inform them of the object of the expedition. + "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's + museum. It is the most important business we have + ever undertaken." +</p> +<p> + At these words the Stranger stepped forward and + made a protest. "I left the city yesterday," he said, + "commissioned by the Queen to obtain one or more + objects of interest for her museum; and to return now + to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich + will be simply impossible." +</p> +<p> + "You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's + reflection, "such an action would be highly dishonorable + on your part. If you will give me your word of + honor that you will remain by this stone until our + return, the expedition will proceed without you." +</p> +<p> + The Stranger gave his word, and having been left + sitting upon the stone, soon dropped asleep, and so + remained until he was awakened by the return of the + band, a little before daylight. They came slowly toiling + along, each man carrying an enormous bundle + upon his back. Near the end of the line was the + Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as heavy as any of + the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a + time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it. +</p> +<p> + "I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much + as they can," he said. "You ought to have been + along. We had a fine time! We swept that museum + clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf + or in a case." +</p> +<p> + "What sort of things are they," asked the + Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't + have any light for fear people would notice it, but the + moon shone in bright enough for us to see all the + shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try + and examine any thing, but to take all that was there. + The cases had great cloth covers on them, and we + spread these on the floor and made bundles of the + curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully + as soon as we get to the den." +</p> +<p> + It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their + cave. The bundles were laid in a great circle on the + floor, and, at a given signal, they were opened. For + a moment each robber gazed blankly at the contents + of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and + search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but + after a few minutes, they arose, looking blanker and + more disappointed than before. +</p> +<p> + "So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is + nothing in the whole collection that I care for. I do + not like a thing here!" +</p> +<p> + "Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one + of his band. +</p> +<p> + "I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for + a moment, "that as these things are of no use to us, + we are bound in honor to take them back." +</p> +<p> + "Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do + not be in too great a hurry to do that." He then told + the Captain of the state of affairs in the city, and + explained in full the nature of the expedition he had + undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be + better," he said, "if these things were not taken back + for the present. If you have a safe place where you + can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen where + they are, and if she chooses she can send for them." +</p> +<p> + "Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that + she should bear part of the labor of transportation. + There is a disused cave, a mile or so away, and we + will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and + then we shall leave the matter to you. We take no + further interest in it. And if you have given your + parole to the Queen to return in a week," the Captain + further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it. + Did you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to + the Pupil. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time + fixed for my return. And I am sure that I like a + robber's life much better than that of a hermit. There + is ever so much more spice and dash in it." +</p> +<p> + "The Stranger was then told that if he would promise + not to betray the robbers he might depart. He + gave the promise; but added sadly that he had lost so + much time that he was afraid he would not now be able + to attain the object of his search and return within the + week. +</p> +<p> + "If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will + gladly assist you." "Comrades!" he cried, addressing + his band, "after stowing this useless booty in the + disused cave, and taking some rest and refreshment, + we will set out again, and the object of our expedition + shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum + which will interest every one." +</p> +<p> + Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied + by the Stranger and the Pupil. When they + had walked about an hour, the Captain, as was his + custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell + them where they were going. "I have concluded," + said he, "that no place is so likely to contain what we + are looking for as the castle of the great magician, + Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed thither, and + sack the castle." +</p> +<p> + "Will there not be great danger in attacking the + castle of a magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat + anxious tones. +</p> +<p> + "Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but + we are not such cowards as to hesitate on account of + danger. Forward, my men!" And on they all + marched. +</p> +<p> + When they reached the magician's castle, the order + was given to scale the outer wall. This the robbers + did with great agility, and the Hermit's Pupil was + among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger was + not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over + the wall. Inside the great court-yard they perceived + numbers of Weirds—strange shadowy creatures who + gathered silently around them; but not in the least + appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched + into the castle, the door of which stood open. They + now entered a great hall, having at one end a doorway + before which hung a curtain. Following their Captain, + the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it + aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a + large table, sat the great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy + over his mystic studies, which he generally pursued in + the dead hours of the night. Drawing their swords, + the robbers rushed upon him. +</p> +<p> + "Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to + us the treasures of your castle." +</p> +<p> + The old magician raised his head from his book, + and, pushing up his spectacles from his forehead, + looked at them mildly, and said: +</p> +<p> + "Freeze!" +</p> +<p> + Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man + remaining in the position in which he was when the + magical word was uttered. With uplifted swords and + glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before the + magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old + man said: +</p> +<p> + "I see among you one who has an intelligent brow + and truthful expression. His head may thaw sufficiently + for him to tell me what means this untimely + intrusion upon my studies." +</p> +<p> + The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and + in a few moments he was able to speak. He then + told the magician about the Queen's museum, and how + it had happened that he had come there with the robbers. +</p> +<p> + "Your motive is a good one," said the magician, + "though your actions are somewhat erratic; and I do + not mind helping you to find what you wish. In what + class of objects do the people of the city take the + most interest?" +</p> +<p> + "Truly I do not know," said the Stranger. +</p> +<p> + "This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj. + "How can you expect to obtain that which + will interest every one, when you do not know what it + is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out + this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be + done." +</p> +<p> + The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered + them to carry the frozen visitors outside the castle + walls. Each one of the rigid figures was taken up by + two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him up + in the road outside the castle. When all had been + properly set up, with the captain at their head, the + gates were shut, and the magician still sitting at his + table, uttered the word, "Thaw!" +</p> +<p> + Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched + away. At daybreak they halted, and considered how + they should find out what all the people in the city took + an interest in. +</p> +<p> + "One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil, + "whatever it is, it isn't the same thing." +</p> +<p> + "Your remark is not well put together," said the + Stranger, "but I see the force of it. It is true that + different people like different things. But how shall + we find out what the different people like?" +</p> +<p> + "By asking them," said the Pupil. +</p> +<p> + "Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action + to words. "This night we will ask them." + He then drew upon the sand a plan of the city,—(with + which he was quite familiar, having carefully + robbed it for many years,)—and divided it into + twenty-eight sections, each one of which was assigned + to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the + Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert + at climbing." He then announced that at night the + band would visit the city, and that each man should + enter the houses in his district, and ask the people + what it was in which they took the greatest interest. +</p> +<p> + They then proceeded to the cave for rest and + refreshment; and a little before midnight they entered + the city, and each member of the band, including the + Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the business + assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should + disturb the Queen, for they knew that what she took + most interest in was the museum. During the night + nearly every person in the town was aroused by a + black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the + windows of the house, and who, instead of demanding + money and jewels, simply asked what it was in which + that person took the greatest interest. Upon receiving + an answer, the robber repeated it until he had + learned it by heart, and then went to the next house. + As so many of the citizens were confined in prisons, + which the robbers easily entered, they transacted the + business in much less time than they would otherwise + have required. +</p> +<p> + The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into + and out of houses with great agility. He obtained his + answers quite as easily as did the others, but whenever + he left a house there was a shade of disappointment + upon his features. Among the last places that he + visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping. + He awoke them and asked the usual question. While + they were trembling in their bed, not knowing what to + answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed: + "Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle. + Speak out!" Each of the boys then promptly + declared it was fishing-tackle, and the pupil left, greatly + gratified. "I was very much afraid," he said to himself, + "that not a person in my district would say fishing-tackle; + and I am glad to think that there were two + boys who had sense enough to like something that is + really interesting." +</p> +<p> + It was nearly daylight when the work was finished; + and then the band gathered together in an appointed + place on the outside of the city, where the Stranger + awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent + memory, which was necessary in their profession, and + they repeated to the Stranger all the objects and subjects + that had been mentioned to them, and he wrote + them down upon tablets. +</p> +<p> + The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded + to the castle of the magician, the great gate of + which was silently opened for them by the Weirds. + When they were ushered into the magician's room, + Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined + them carefully. +</p> +<p> + "All these things should make a very complete + collection," he said, "and I think I have specimens + of the various objects in my interminable vaults." + He then called his Weirds and, giving one of them + the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the + vaults and gather enough of the things therein mentioned + to fill a large museum. In half an hour the + Weirds returned and announced that the articles were + ready in the great court-yard. +</p> +<p> + "Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these + men to carry them to the Queen's museum." +</p> +<p> + The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for + the assistance he had given; and the band, accompanied + by a number of Weirds, proceeded to carry the + objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was + a strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a + stuffed mammoth, followed by others bearing the skeleton + of a whale, while the robbers and the rest of their + queer helpers were loaded with every thing relating to + history, science, and art which ought to be in a really + good museum. When the whole collection had been + put in place upon the floors, the shelves, and in the + cases, it was nearly morning. The robbers, with the + Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds disappeared; + while the Stranger betook himself to the + Queen's palace, where, as soon as the proper hour + arrived, he requested an audience. +</p> +<p> + When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was + very pale and that her cheeks bore traces of recent + tears. "You are back in good time," she said to + him, "but it makes very little difference whether you + have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no + longer any museum. There has been a great robbery, + and the thieves have carried off the whole of the vast + and valuable collection which I have been so long in + making." +</p> +<p> + "I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and + I have already placed in your museum-building the + collection which I have obtained. If your Majesty + pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It may, + in some degree, compensate for that which has been + stolen." +</p> +<p> + "Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can + compensate for it; I do not even wish to see what you + have brought." +</p> +<p> + "Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger; + "but I will be so bold as to say that I have great + hopes that the collection which I have obtained will + interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously + allow them to see it?" +</p> +<p> + "I have no objection to that," said the Queen; + "and indeed I shall be very glad if they can be + made to be interested in the museum. I will give + orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody + can go to see what you have brought; and those who + shall be interested in it may return to their homes. I + did not release my obstinate subjects when the museum + was robbed, because their fault then was just as great + as it was before; and it would not be right that they + should profit by my loss." +</p> +<p> + The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several + days the museum was crowded with people moving + from morning till night through the vast collection of + stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and brilliant + insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful + works of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive + objects which had been brought from the + interminable vaults of the magician Alfrarmedj. The + Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe whether + or not the people were interested, were in no doubt + upon this point. Every eye sparkled with delight, + for every one found something which was the very + thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the + Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large + case containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the + smallest hooks for little minnows to the great irons + and spears used in capturing whales. +</p> +<p> + No one went back to prison, and the city was full + of re-united households and happy homes. On the + morning of the fourth day, a grand procession of + citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen + their delight and appreciation of her museum. The + great happiness of her subjects could but please the + Queen. She called the Stranger to her, and said to + him: +</p> +<p> + "Tell me how you came to know what it was that + would interest my people." +</p> +<p> + "I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to + say, I arranged that they should be asked." +</p> +<p> + "That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is + a great pity that my long labors in their behalf should + have been lost. For many years I have been a collector + of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable + or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not + an original specimen or a facsimile. My agents + brought me from foreign lands, even from the most + distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every kind; + in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable + material, and of those which could not be obtained + careful copies were made. There was not a duplicate + specimen in the whole collection; only one of each + kind; nothing repeated. Never before was there such + a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my + people up to an appreciation of button-holes; but, + with the exception of a few tailors and seamstresses, + nobody took the slightest interest in what I had provided + for their benefit. I am glad that my people are + happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of + my efforts." +</p> +<p> + "The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger, + "the better you will understand that we cannot make + other people like a thing simply because we like it + ourselves." +</p> +<p> + "Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with + admiration, "are you a king in disguise?" +</p> +<p> + "I am," he replied. +</p> +<p> + "I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and + I wish to add that I believe you are far better able to + govern this kingdom than I am. If you choose I will + resign it to you." +</p> +<p> + "Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would + not deprive you of your royal position, but I should + be happy to share it with you." +</p> +<p> + "That will answer very well," said the Queen. + And turning to an attendant, she gave orders that + preparations should be made for their marriage on the + following day. +</p> +<p> + After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with + great pomp and grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to + the museum, and, much to her surprise, was greatly + delighted and interested. The King then informed + her that he happened to know where the robbers had + stored her collection, which they could not sell or + make use of, and if she wished, he would regain the + collection and erect a building for its reception. +</p> +<p> + "We will not do that at present," said the + Queen. "When I shall have thoroughly examined + and studied all these objects, most of which are entirely + new to me, we will decide about the button-holes." +</p> +<p> + The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He + was greatly delighted with the spice and dash of a + robber's life, so different from that of a hermit; and + he determined, if possible, to change his business and + enter the band. He had a conversation with the + Captain on the subject, and that individual encouraged + him in his purpose. +</p> +<p> + "I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life. + I have stolen so much, that I cannot use what I + have. I take no further interest in accumulating spoils. + The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and, if you + like we will change places. I will become the pupil of + your old master, and you shall be the captain of my + band." +</p> +<p> + The change was made. The Captain retired to the + cave of the Hermit's Pupil, while the latter, with the + hearty consent of all the men, took command of + the band of robbers. +</p> +<p> + When the King heard of this change, he was not + at all pleased, and he sent for the ex-pupil. +</p> +<p> + "I am willing to reward you," he said, "for + assisting me in my recent undertaking; but I cannot + allow you to lead a band of robbers in my dominions." +</p> +<p> + A dark shade of disappointment passed over the + ex-pupil's features, and his face lengthened visibly. +</p> +<p> + "It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at + the very outset of a brilliant career. I'll tell you + what I'll do," he added suddenly, his face brightening, + "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession, I'll + promise to do nothing but rob robbers." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," said the King, "if you will confine + yourself to that, you may retain your position." +</p> +<p> + The members of the band were perfectly willing to + rob in the new way, for it seemed quite novel and + exciting to them. The first place they robbed was + their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories, + they knew from whom the various goods had been + stolen, and every thing was returned to its proper + owner. The ex-pupil then led his band against the + other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his movements + were conducted with such dash and vigor that + the various hordes scattered in every direction, while + the treasures in their dens were returned to the owners, + or, if these could not be found, were given to the + poor. In a short time every robber, except those led + by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business; + and the victorious youth led his band into other + kingdoms to continue the great work of robbing + robbers. +</p> +<p> + The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities + which the robbers had stolen from her. She was + so much interested in the new museum that she continually + postponed the re-establishment of her old one; + and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still + in the cave where the robbers shut them up. +</p> +<a name="chapter5"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; +</h2> +<center> + OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM. +</center> +<hr> +<p> + The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned + ship, very high in the bow, very high in + the stern, with a quarter-deck always carpeted in fine + weather, because her captain could not see why one + should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as + on land. Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a + fine, jolly, old-fashioned, elderly sailor he was. The + "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one sea, and + always between two ports, one on the west side of the + sea, and one on the east. The port on the west was + quite a large city, in which Captain Covajos had a + married son, and the port on the east was another city + in which he had a married daughter. In each family he + had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was + a great joy to the jolly old sailor to arrive at either + port. The Captain was very particular about his + cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally laden + with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or + fine things to wear, or beautiful things to look at. + Once a merchant brought to him some boxes of bitter + aloes, and mustard plasters, but Captain Covajos + refused to take them into his ship. +</p> +<p> + "I know," said he, "that such things are very useful + and necessary at times, but you would better send + them over in some other vessel. The 'Horn o' Plenty' + has never carried any thing that to look at, to taste, or + to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young. + I am sure you cannot say that of these commodities. + If I were to put such things on board my ship, it would + break the spell which more than fifty savory voyages + have thrown around it." +</p> +<p> + There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who + used to say that sometimes, when the weather was + hazy and they could not see far, they would know they + were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she + came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her + sails and masts, had gradually become so filled with + the odor of good things that the winds that blew + over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance. +</p> +<p> + There was another thing about which Captain Covajos + was very particular; he always liked to arrive at + one of his ports a few days before Christmas. Never, + in the course of his long life, had the old sailor spent + a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine + grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it + would have grieved him very much if he had been + unable to reach one or the other of his ports in good + season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily + laden, and very slow, and there were many days of + calms on that sea when she did not sail at all, so that + her voyages were usually very, very long. But the + Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give himself + plenty of time to get to the other end of his course + before Christmas came around. +</p> +<p> + One spring, however, he started too late, and when + he was about the middle of his voyage, he called to + him Baragat Bean, his old boatswain. This venerable + sailor had been with the Captain ever since he had + commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important + occasions he was always consulted in preference to the + other officers, none of whom had served under Captain + Covajos more then fifteen or twenty years. +</p> +<p> + "Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed + the Isle of Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain + standing up against the sky to the north." +</p> +<p> + "Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she + stands, the same as usual." +</p> +<p> + "That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we + are not yet half-way across, and I am very much afraid + that I shall not be able to reach my dear daughter's + house before Christmas." +</p> +<p> + "That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat; + "but I've feared something of the kind, for we've had + calms nearly every other day, and sometimes, when + the wind did blow, it came from the wrong direction, + and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward." +</p> +<p> + "That was very bad management," said the Captain. + "The chief mate should have seen to it that the + sails were turned in such a manner that the ship could + not go backward. If that sort of thing happened + often, it would become quite a serious affair." +</p> +<p> + "But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain, + "and I don't see how you are going to get into + port before Christmas." +</p> +<p> + "Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the + sea. +</p> +<p> + "It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat, + "to see you spend Christmas at sea; a thing you never + did before, nor ever shall do, if I can help it. If you'll + take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and go back. + It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than + to the one we are going to, and if we turn back + now, I am sure we all shall be on shore before the + holidays." +</p> +<p> + "Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain + Covajos, "where I was last winter! Why, that would + be like spending last Christmas over again!" +</p> +<p> + "But that would be better than having none at all, + sir," said the boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea + would be about equal to none." +</p> +<p> + "Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up + the coming Christmas with my daughter and her children, + and go back and spend last Christmas over again + with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have the + ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the + chief mate I do not wish to sail backward if it can + possibly be avoided." +</p> +<p> + For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed + back upon her track towards the city where dwelt the + Captain's son. The weather was fine, the carpet was + never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing + was going on very well, when a man, who happened to + have an errand at one of the topmasts, came down, + and reported that, far away to the north, he had seen + a little open boat with some people in it. +</p> +<p> + "Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be + some poor fellows who are shipwrecked. It will take + us out of our course, but we must not leave them to + their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will + sail northward." +</p> +<p> + It was not very long before they came up with the + boat; and, much to the Captain's surprise, he saw that + it was filled with boys. +</p> +<p> + "Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near + enough. "And where do you come from?" +</p> +<p> + "We are the First Class in Long Division," said + the oldest boy, "and we are cast away. Have you + any thing to eat that you can spare us? We are almost + famished." +</p> +<p> + "We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain. + "Come on board instantly, and all your wants shall + be supplied." +</p> +<p> + "How long have you been without food?" he asked, + when the boys were on the deck of the vessel. +</p> +<p> + "We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said + one of them; "and it is now late in the afternoon. + Some of us are nearly dead from starvation." +</p> +<p> + "It is very hard for boys to go so long without + eating," said the good Captain. And leading them + below, he soon set them to work upon a bountiful + meal. +</p> +<p> + Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask + them how they came to be cast away. +</p> +<p> + "You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and + the Multiplication Class had a holiday to-day, and + each class took a boat and determined to have a race, + so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest + branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division. + Our class rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of + the Multiplicationers, and found indeed that we were + out of sight of every thing; so that, at last, we did not + know which was the way back, and thus we became + castaways." +</p> +<p> + "Where is your school?" asked the Captain. +</p> +<p> + "It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and, + although it is a long way off for a small boat with + only four oars for nine boys, it can't be very far for a + ship." +</p> +<p> + "That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we + shall take you home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to + have the vessel turned toward Apple Island, that we + may restore these boys to their parents and guardians." +</p> +<p> + Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the + world where Apple Island was, but he did not like to + ask, because that would be confessing his ignorance; + so he steered his vessel toward a point where he believed + he had once seen an island, which, probably, + was the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty" + sailed in this direction all night, and when day broke, + and there was no island in sight, she took another + course; and so sailed this way and that for six or + seven days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All + this time, the First Class in Long Division was as + happy as it could be, for it was having a perfect holiday; + fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up + the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle + for wind. But the Captain now began to grow a little + impatient, for he felt he was losing time; so he sent + for the chief mate, and said to him mildly but firmly: +</p> +<p> + "I know it is out of the line of your duty to search + for island schools, but, if you really think that you do + not know where Apple Island lies, I wish you to say + so, frankly and openly." +</p> +<p> + "Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I + don't think I do." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a + basis to work upon, and we know where we stand. + You can take a little rest, and let the second mate find + the island. But I can only give him three days in + which to do it. We really have no time to spare." +</p> +<p> + The second mate was very proud of the responsibility + placed upon him, and immediately ordered the + vessel to be steered due south. +</p> +<p> + "One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally + unknown place by going straight ahead in a certain + direction, as by sailing here, there, and everywhere. + In this way, you really get over more water, and there + is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging." +</p> +<p> + So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end + of that time they came in sight of land. This was + quite a large island, and when they approached near + enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome + city. +</p> +<p> + "Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to + the oldest boy. +</p> +<p> + "Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I + can say with certainty that I truly believe that it is; + but, I think, if we were to go on shore, the people + there would be able to tell us how to go to Apple + Island." +</p> +<p> + "Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we + will go on shore and make inquiries.—And it has struck + me, Baragat," he said, "that perhaps the merchants in + the city where my son lives may be somewhat annoyed + when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their + goods on board, and not disposed of. Not understanding + my motives, they may be disposed to think ill + of me. Consequently the idea has come into my head, + that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time, + and try to dispose of some of our merchandise. The + city seems to be quite prosperous, and I have no doubt + there are a number of merchants here." +</p> +<p> + So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the + harbor, and as many of the officers and crew as could + be spared went on shore to make inquiries. Of course + the First Class in Long Division was not left behind; + and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody. + The Captain and his companions were cordially welcomed + by some of the dignitaries of the city who had + come down to the harbor to see the strange vessel; + but no one could give any information in regard to + Apple Island, the name of which had never been heard + on those shores. The Captain was naturally desirous + of knowing at what place he had landed, and was + informed that this was the Island of the Fragile Palm. +</p> +<p> + "That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain. + "Why is it so called?" +</p> +<p> + "The reason is this," said his informant. "Near + the centre of the island stands a tall and very slender + palm-tree, which has been growing there for hundreds + of years. It bears large and handsome fruit which + is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection, + is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit." +</p> +<p> + "Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you + not positive about it?" +</p> +<p> + "No," said the other; "no one living has ever + tasted the fruit in its perfection. When it becomes + overripe, it drops to the ground, and, even then, it is + considered royal property, and is taken to the palace + for the King's table. But on fête-days and grand + occasions small bits of it are distributed to the + populace." +</p> +<p> + "Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain + Covajos, "when it is in its best condition to eat?" +</p> +<p> + "It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for + any one to climb up that tree, the trunk of which is so + extremely delicate and fragile that the weight of a + man would probably snap it; and, of course, a ladder + placed against it would produce the same result. + Many attempts have been made to secure this fruit at + the proper season, but all of them have failed. Another + palm-tree of a more robust sort was once planted near + this one in the hope that when it grew high enough, + men could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit + from the other. But, although we waited many years + the second tree never attained sufficient height, and it + was cut down." +</p> +<p> + "It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I + suppose it cannot be helped." And then he began to + make inquiries about the merchants in the place, and + what probability there was of his doing a little trade + here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of + his ship was made up of goods which were greatly + desired by the citizens of this place; and for several + days he was very busy in selling the good things to + eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear, + and the beautiful things to look at, with which the + hold of the "Horn o' Plenty" was crowded. +</p> +<p> + During this time the First Class in Long Division + roamed, in delight, over the city. The busy streets, + the shops, the handsome buildings, and the queer + sights which they occasionally met, interested and + amused them greatly. But still the boys were not + satisfied. They had heard of the Fragile Palm, and + they made up their minds to go and have a look at it. + Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into the + country, and in about an hour they came in sight of + the beautiful tree standing in the centre of the plain. + The trunk was, indeed, exceedingly slender, and, as + the guide informed them, the wood was of so very + brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected + from the winds by the high hills which encircled it, + it would have been snapped off ages ago. Under + the broad tuft of leaves that formed its top, the boys + saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great + nuts as big as their heads. +</p> +<p> + "At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy, + "is that fruit just ripe enough to eat?" +</p> +<p> + "Now," answered the guide. "This is the season + when it is in the most perfect condition. In about a + month it will become entirely too ripe and soft, and + will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest + of us are glad enough to get a taste of it." +</p> +<p> + "I should think the King would be exceedingly + eager to get some of it, just as it is," said the boy. +</p> +<p> + "Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his + father, and I don't know how many grandfathers back, + have offered large rewards to any one who would procure + them this fruit in its best condition. But nobody + has ever been able to get any yet." +</p> +<p> + "The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the + head boy. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was + a King who so much desired to taste the fruit as our + present monarch." +</p> +<p> + The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree, + shut one eye, and gave his head a little wag. Whereupon + every boy in the class looked up, shut one eye, + and slightly wagged his head. After which the oldest + boy said that he thought it was about time for them + to go back to the ship. +</p> +<p> + As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk + together freely, the boys had an animated discussion. + It was unanimously agreed that they would make an + attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the + Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among + them was as to how it should be done. Most of them + were in favor of some method of climbing the tree and + trusting to its not breaking. But this the oldest boy + would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then + somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure, + responsible for the rest of the class. At length a + good plan was proposed by a boy who had studied + mechanics. +</p> +<p> + "What we ought to do with that tree," said he, + "is to put a hinge into her. Then we could let her + down gently, pick off the fruit, and set her up again. +</p> +<p> + "But how are you going to do it?" asked the + others. +</p> +<p> + "This is the way," said the boy who had studied + mechanics. "You take a saw, and then, about two + feet from the ground, you begin and saw down diagonally, + for a foot and a half, to the centre of the + trunk. Then you go on the other side, and saw down + in the same way, the two outs meeting each other. + Now you have the upper part of the trunk ending in + a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of + the trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place + where you first began to saw, you bore a hole straight + through both sides of the cleft and the wedge between + them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole, + and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be + apt to move because she fits in so snug and tight. + Then you get a long rope, and put one end in a slipknot + loosely around the trunk. Then you get a lot of + poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot + up until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull + it tight. Then you take another rope with a slip-knot, + and push this a little more than half-way up the + trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent + too much strain coming on any one part of the trunk. + Then, after that, you take a mallet and chisel and + round off the lower corners of the wedge, so that it + will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of the + ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul + her up again. That will all be easy enough." +</p> +<p> + This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced + in its favor; but the oldest one suggested + that it would be better to fasten the ropes to the trunk + before they began to saw upon it, and another boy + asked how they were going to keep the tree standing + when they hauled her up again. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied + mechanics; "you just bore another hole about six + inches above the first one, and put in another bolt. + Then, of course, she can't move." +</p> +<p> + This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to + start out early the next morning, gather the fruit, and + claim the reward the King had offered. They accordingly + went to the Captain and asked him for a sharp saw, + a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and two + very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given + to them, were put away in readiness for the work to + be attempted. +</p> +<p> + Very early on the next morning, the First Class in + Long Division set out for the Fragile Palm, carrying + their tools and ropes. Few people were awake as they + passed through the city, and, without being observed, + they reached the little plain on which the tree stood. + The ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree + was sawn, diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt + was put in, and the corners of the wedge were rounded + off. Then the eldest boy produced a pound of butter, + whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes, + paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought + the butter. +</p> +<p> + "I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along + some butter, because, when the tree is down, we can + grease the hinge, and then it will not be so hard to + pull it up again." +</p> +<p> + When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of + the long ropes, while another one with a pole pushed + against the trunk of the Fragile Palm. When it began + to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and ran to + help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved + on its hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it + soon began to move with greater rapidity, although + the boys held it back with all their strength; and, + in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came to + the ground at last with a great thump. And then + they all dropped their ropes, and ran for the fruit. + Fortunately the great nuts incased in their strong + husks were not in the least injured, and the boys soon + pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys + were in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts + and eating them, but this the eldest boy positively + forbade. +</p> +<p> + "This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost + sacred, and if we were to eat any of it, it is probable + that we should be put to death, which would be extremely + awkward for fellows who have gone to all the + trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and + carry the fruit to the King." +</p> +<p> + According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the + hinge in the tree with the butter, and then set themselves + to work to haul up the trunk. This, however, + was much more difficult than letting it down; and they + had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles, + before they could pull upon it with advantage. The + tree, although tall, was indeed a very slender one, with + a small top, and, if it had been as fragile as it was + supposed to be, the boys' efforts would surely have + broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm + work, they pulled it into an upright position, and put + in the second bolt. They left the ropes on the tree + because, as some of them had suggested, the people + might want to let the tree down again the next year. + It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in + their arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered; + but, having noticed a basket-maker's cottage on their + way to the tree, two of them were sent to buy one of + his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached to + two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts, + the boys took the poles on their shoulders, and marched + into the city. +</p> +<p> + On their way to the palace they attracted a great + crowd, and when they were ushered into the presence + of the King, his surprise and delight knew no bounds. + At first he could scarcely believe his eyes; but he had + seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake + about it. +</p> +<p> + "I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how + you procured this fruit, and thus accomplished a deed + which has been the object of the ambition of myself + and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave the + tree standing?" +</p> +<p> + "We did," said the boys. +</p> +<p> + "Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty, + "is to give you the reward you have so nobly + earned. Treasurer, measure out to each of them a + quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I + am wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of + these nuts cracked, that I may taste of its luscious + contents." +</p> +<p> + The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied. + Huddling together, they consulted in a low tone, and + then the eldest boy addressed the King. +</p> +<p> + "May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should + very much prefer to have you give each of us one of + those nuts instead of a quart of gold." +</p> +<p> + The King looked grave. "This is a much greater + reward," he said, "than I had ever expected to pay; + but, since you ask it, you must have it. You have + done something which none of my subjects has ever + been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that + you should be fully satisfied." +</p> +<p> + So he gave them each a nut, with which they + departed in triumph to the ship. +</p> +<p> + By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had + sold all his cargo at very good prices; and when the + money was safely stored away in the "Horn o' + Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had + really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible + haste," he said to old Baragat, "to find Apple + Island, put these boys ashore, and then speed away to + the city where lives my son. We must not fail to get + there in time to spend last Christmas over again." +</p> +<p> + On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had + left the Island of the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors + who happened to be aloft noticed a low, black, and exceedingly + unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly approaching. + This soon proved to be the ship of a band of + corsairs, who, having heard of the large amount of + money on the "Horn o' Plenty," had determined to + pursue her and capture the rich prize. All sails were + set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became + plain that she could never outsail the corsair vessel. +</p> +<p> + "What our ship can do better than any thing else," + said Baragat to the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop + her short, and let the other one go by." +</p> +<p> + This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the + corsair passed rapidly by, not being able to stop so + suddenly, it soon turned around and came back, its + decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth. +</p> +<p> + "They are going to board us," cried Baragat. + "They are getting out their grappling-irons, and they + will fasten the two ships together." +</p> +<p> + "Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the + Captain. "It is higher there, and we shall not be so + much exposed to accidents." +</p> +<p> + The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o' + Plenty," and in a moment the two vessels were fastened + together; and then the corsairs, every man of + them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks + and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o' + Plenty," and sprang upon its central deck. Some of + the ferocious fellows, seeing the officers and crew all + huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a movement + in that direction. This so frightened the chief + mate that he sprang down upon the deck of the corsair + ship. A panic now arose, and he was immediately + followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of + course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain + and Baragat felt themselves bound not to desert the + crew, and so they jumped also. None of the corsairs + interfered with this proceeding, for each one of them + was anxious to find the money at once. When the + passengers and crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were + all on board the corsair ship, Baragat came to the + Captain, and said: +</p> +<p> + "If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and + separate the vessels. If we don't do that those rascals, + when they have finished robbing our money-chests, + will come back here and murder us all." +</p> +<p> + "That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and + he told the chief mate to give orders to cast off the + grapnels, push the two vessels apart, and set some of + the sails. +</p> +<p> + When this had been done, the corsair vessel began + to move away from the other, and was soon many + lengths distant from her. When the corsairs came + on deck and perceived what had happened, they were + infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own + vessel with the one they had captured. But the "Horn + o' Plenty" could not, by any possibility, sail as fast + as the corsair ship, and the latter easily kept away + from her. +</p> +<p> + "Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what + you have to do is easy enough. Sail straight for our + port and those sea-robbers will follow you; for, of + course, they will wish to get their own vessel back + again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our + part, to overtake us. In the mean time the money will + be safe enough, for they will have no opportunity of + spending it; and when we come to port, we can take + some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those + fellows. They can never sail away from us on the + 'Horn o' Plenty.'" +</p> +<p> + "That is an admirable plan," said the Captain, + "and I shall carry it out; but I cannot sail to port + immediately. I must first find Apple Island and land + these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably + growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue + to follow us wherever we go." +</p> +<p> + "I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall + see." +</p> +<p> + The First Class in Long Division was very much + delighted with the change of vessels, and the boys + rambled everywhere, and examined with great interest + all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite easy + about the only treasures they possessed, because, when + they had first seen the piratical vessel approaching, + they had taken the precious nuts which had been given + to them by the King, and had hidden them at the + bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain + kept the sailors' winter clothes. +</p> +<p> + "In this warm climate," said the eldest boy, + "the robbers will never meddle with those winter + clothes, and our precious fruit will be perfectly + safe." +</p> +<p> + "If you had taken my advice," said one of the + other boys, "we should have eaten some of the nuts. + Those, at least, we should have been sure of." +</p> +<p> + "And we should have had that many less to show to + the other classes," said the eldest boy. "Nuts like + these, I am told, if picked at the proper season, will + keep for a long time." +</p> +<p> + For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o' + Plenty" followed their own vessel, but then they + seemed to despair of ever being able to overtake it, + and steered in another direction. This threatened to + ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind + became troubled. Then the boy who had studied + mechanics came forward and said to the Captain: +</p> +<p> + "I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd + follow your old ship, and when night came on I'd sail + up quite near to her, and let some of your sailors swim + quietly over, and fasten a cable to her, and then you + could tow her after you wherever you wished to go." +</p> +<p> + "But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it," + said Baragat, who was standing by. +</p> +<p> + "That could easily be prevented," said the boy. + "At their end of the cable must be a stout chain + which they cannot cut, and it must be fastened so far + beneath the surface of the water that they will not be + able to reach it to unfasten it." +</p> +<p> + "A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos; + "let it be carried out." +</p> +<p> + As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel + quietly approached the other, and two stout sailors + from Finland, who swam very well, were ordered to + swim over and attach the chain-end of a long cable + to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult + operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded + at last, and returned to report. +</p> +<p> + "We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they + said to the Captain; "and six feet under water. But + the only place we could find to make it fast to was the + bottom of the rudder." +</p> +<p> + "That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for + the 'Horn o' Plenty' sails better backward than forward, + and will not be so hard to tow." +</p> +<p> + For week after week, and month after month, Captain + Covajos, in the corsair vessel, sailed here and + there in search of Apple Island, always towing after + him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on board, + but never an island with a school on it could they find; + and one day old Baragat came to the Captain and + said: +</p> +<p> + "If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm + regions. I am quite sure that apples grow in colder + latitudes, and are never found so far south as this." +</p> +<p> + "That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos. + "We should sail for the north if we wished to find an + island of apples. Have the vessel turned northward." +</p> +<p> + And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly + moved on to the north. One day the Captain made + some observations and calculations, and then he hastily + summoned Baragat. +</p> +<p> + "Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now + near the end of November, and I am quite certain that + we shall not get to the port where my son lives in time + to celebrate last Christmas again. It is dreadfully + slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full + of corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her + off and sail straight for our port, for I should lose my + good ship, the merchants would lose all their money, + and the corsairs would go unpunished; and, besides + all that, think of the misery of the parents and guardians + of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to + find Apple Island. And if I cannot reach port in + time to spend last Christmas with my son, I shall certainly + get there in season for Christmas before last. + It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter, + but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the + city where my son lives; and, besides, it is necessary + to go back, and give the merchants their money. So + now we shall have plenty of time, and need not feel + hurried." +</p> +<p> + "No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we + need not feel hurried." +</p> +<p> + The mind of the eldest boy now became very much + troubled, and he called his companions about him. + "I don't like at all," said he, "this sailing to the + north. It is now November, and, although it is warm + enough at this season in the southern part of the sea, + it will become colder and colder as we go on. The + consequence of this will be that those corsairs will + want winter clothes, they will take them out of the + Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit." +</p> +<p> + The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of + them; "but still we wish to go back to our + island." +</p> +<p> + "Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite + proper that we should return to Long Division. But + think of the hard work we did to get that fruit, and + think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It + would be too bad to lose it now!" +</p> +<p> + It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad + to lose the fruit, and it was also unanimously agreed + that they wished to go back to Apple Island. But + what to do about it, they did not know. +</p> +<p> + Day by day the weather grew colder and colder, + and the boys became more and more excited and distressed + for fear they should lose their precious fruit. + The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then + a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos + and proposed that he should send a flag of truce + over to the corsairs, offering to exchange winter clothing. + He would send over to them the heavy garments + they had left on their own vessel, and in return would + take the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear + of his sailors. In this way, they would get their fruit + back without the corsairs knowing any thing about it. + The Captain considered this an excellent plan, and + ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of + truce, and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make + the proposition. The eldest boy and two of the others + insisted on going also, in order that there might be no + mistake about the boxes. But when the flag-of-truce + party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not + a corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They + had taken with them all the money-chests, but to the + great delight of the boys, the boxes of winter clothes + had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled, + safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile + Palm. +</p> +<p> + When the matter had been thoroughly looked into, + it became quite evident what the corsairs had done. + There had been only one boat on board the "Horn o' + Plenty," and that was the one on which the First + Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before, + the two vessels had passed within a mile or so + of a large island, which the Captain had approached + in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and + they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to + ferry themselves over, a few at a time, in the little + boat, taking with them the money,—and all without + discovery. +</p> +<p> + Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he + heard of the loss of all the money. +</p> +<p> + "I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he + said, "and Christmas before last will not be celebrated + so joyously as it was the first time. But we cannot + help what has happened, and we all must endeavor to + bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our + search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my + own ship, for I have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck + and my other comforts. The chief mate, + however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on + board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The + 'Horn o' Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we + shall go faster that way." +</p> +<p> + The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit, + and most of them were in favor of cracking two or + three of the great nuts, and eating their contents in + honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded + them. +</p> +<p> + "The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind + in endeavoring to take us back to our school, and still + intends to keep up the search for dear old Apple + Island. The least we can do for him is to give him + this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he + pleases with it. This is the only way in which we can + show our gratitude to him." +</p> +<p> + The boys turned their backs on one another, and + each of them gave his eyes a little rub, but they all + agreed to give the fruit to the Captain. +</p> +<p> + When the good old man received his present, he was + much affected. "I will accept what you offer me," + he said; "for if I did not, I know your feelings would + be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for + yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find + Apple Island in the course of the coming year, I + invite you all to spend Christmas before last over again, + with me at my son's house." +</p> +<p> + All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and + here and there, but never could they find Apple Island. + When Christmas-time came, old Baragat went around + among the boys and the crew, and told them it would + be well not to say a word on the subject to the Captain, + for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending + Christmas away from his families, and the thing had + never happened before. So nobody made any allusion + to the holidays, and they passed over as if they had + been ordinary days. +</p> +<p> + During the spring, and all through the summer, the + two ships kept up the unavailing search, but when + the autumn began, Captain Covajos said to old Baragat: + "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no longer + look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend + Christmas before last over again, with my dearest son; + and if these poor boys never return to their homes, I + am sure they cannot say it was any fault of mine." +</p> +<p> + "No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done + all that could be expected of you." +</p> +<p> + So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of + the sea; and the Captain was received with great joy + by his son, and his grandchildren. He went to the + merchants, and told them how he had lost all their + money. He hoped they would be able to bear their + misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could + do nothing else for them, that they would accept the + eight great nuts from the Fragile Palm that the boys + had given him. To his surprise the merchants became + wild with delight when they received the nuts. The + money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared + to the value of this incomparable and precious + fruit, picked in its prime, and still in a perfect condition. +</p> +<p> + It had been many, many generations since this rare + fruit, the value of which was like unto that of diamonds + and pearls, had been for sale in any market in the + world; and kings and queens in many countries were + ready to give for it almost any price that might be + asked. +</p> +<p> + When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly + rejoiced, and, as the holidays were now near, he insisted + that the boys should spend Christmas before last + over again, at his son's house. He found that a good + many people here knew where Apple Island was, and + he made arrangements for the First Class in Long + Division to return to that island in a vessel which was + to sail about the first of the year. +</p> +<p> + The boys still possessed the great nut which the + Captain had insisted they should keep for themselves, + and he now told them that if they chose to sell it, + they would each have a nice little fortune to take back + with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and + then he said to the Captain: +</p> +<p> + "Our class has gone through a good many hardships, + and has had a lot of trouble with that palm-tree and + other things, and we think we ought to be rewarded. + So, if it is all the same to you, I think we will crack + the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it." +</p> +<p> + "I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he + sat, on that Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's + family and the First Class in Long Division, the eyes + of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as they tasted + the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas + before last could be so joyfully celebrated over + again." +</p> +<a name="chapter6"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + In the spring of a certain year, long since passed + away, Prince Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit + his uncle, the King of Yan. +</p> +<p> + "Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince, + "or when my late father went to see him, the journey + was always made by sea; and, in order to do this, it + was necessary to go in a very roundabout way between + Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind. + It is beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his + way on account of capes, peninsulas, and promontories. + I shall march from my palace to that of my + uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country, + and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my + course. Mountains and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers + shall be bridged, houses shall be levelled; a road shall + be cut through forests; and, when I have finished my + march, the course over which I have passed shall be a + mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the + world that, when a prince desires to travel, it is not + necessary for him to go out of his way on account of + obstacles." +</p> +<p> + As soon as possible after the Prince had determined + upon this march, he made his preparations, and set + out. He took with him a few courtiers, and a large + body of miners, rock-splitters, bridge-builders, and + workmen of that class, whose services would, very + probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer + whose duty it was to point out the direct course to be + taken, and another who was to draw a map of the + march, showing the towns, mountains, and the various + places it passed through. There were no compasses + in those days, but the course-marker had an instrument + which he would set in a proper direction by means of + the stars, and then he could march by it all day. Besides + these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the + schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took + them with him. He wished to show them how, when a + thing was to be done, the best way was to go straight + ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing. +</p> +<p> + "When they grow up they will teach these things to + their children," said he; "and thus I shall instil good + principles into my people." +</p> +<p> + The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched + over a level country, with no further trouble than that + occasioned by the tearing down of fences and walls, + and the destruction of a few cottages and barns. + After encamping for the night, they set out the next + morning, but had not marched many miles before they + came to a rocky hill, on the top of which was a handsome + house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop. +</p> +<p> + "Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order + to go in a direct line we must make a tunnel through + this hill, immediately under the house. This may + cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be + easily removed." +</p> +<p> + "Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I + will dismount from my horse, and watch the proceedings." +</p> +<p> + When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before + his house, he hurried out to pay his respects to the + Prince. When he was informed of what was to be + done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from laughing + aloud. +</p> +<p> + "I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea. + It is so odd and original. It will be very funny, I am + sure, to see a tunnel cut right under my house." +</p> +<p> + The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at + the base of the hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made + a proposition to the Prince. +</p> +<p> + "It will take your men some time," he said, "to + cut this tunnel, and it is a pity your Highness should + not be amused in the meanwhile. It is a fine day: + suppose we go into the forest and hunt." +</p> +<p> + This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care + about sitting under a tree and watching his workmen, + and the Jolly-cum-pop having sent for his horse and + some bows and arrows, the whole party, with the + exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a + short distance away. +</p> +<p> + "What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of + the Jolly-cum-pop. +</p> +<p> + "I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but + we'll hunt whatever we happen to see—deer, small + birds, rabbits, griffins, rhinoceroses, any thing that + comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping grasshopper. + My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful + thing it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious + day!" +</p> +<p> + The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop + affected the whole party, and they rode merrily through + the forest; but they found no game; and, after an + hour or two, they emerged into the open country again. + At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and + massive building. +</p> +<p> + "I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and + perhaps we can get some refreshments at yonder house. + So far, this has not been a very fine hunt." +</p> +<p> + "No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But + what a joyful thing to see a hospitable mansion just at + the moment when we begin to feel a little tired and + hungry!" +</p> +<p> + The building they were approaching belonged to a + Potentate, who lived at a great distance. In some of + his travels he had seen this massive house, and thought + it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought it, + fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three + myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred + years before, but no prisoners had ever been sent to + this jail. A few days preceding the Jolly-cum-pop's + hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and had + stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition, + he had said to the jailer: +</p> +<p> + "It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to + this place, and in all that time there have been no + prisoners, and you and your men have been drawing + your wages without doing any thing. I shall return + this way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I + shall discharge you all and close the jail." +</p> +<p> + This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did + not wish to lose his good situation. When he saw the + Prince and his party approaching, the thought struck + him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them, + and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned. + He came out to meet the hunters, and when they asked + if they could here find refreshment, he gave them a + most cordial welcome. His men took their horses, + and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member + of the party into a small bedroom, of which there + seemed to be a great many. +</p> +<p> + "Here are water and towels," he said to each one, + "and when you have washed your face and hands, + your refreshments will be ready." Then, going out, + he locked the door on the outside. +</p> +<p> + The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three + courtiers, five boys, five girls, the course-marker, the + map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop. The heart of the + jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something to + be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the + prisoners a meal of bread and water through the holes + in their cell-doors, and then he sat down to make out + his report to the Potentate. +</p> +<p> + "They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to + himself, "which are punished by long imprisonment. + I don't want any of them executed." +</p> +<p> + So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen, + according to the cell each happened to be in, and he + wrote a crime opposite each number. The first was + highway robbery, the next forgery, and after that + followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, + poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery, + using false weights and measures, burglary, + counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and + poisoning his grandmother by proxy. +</p> +<p> + This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate + returned. He was very much surprised to find that + seventeen prisoners had come in since his previous + visit, and he read the report with interest. +</p> +<p> + "Here is one who ought to be executed," he said, + referring to Number Seventeen. "And how did he + poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he get another + woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ + some one to act in his place as the poisoner?" +</p> +<p> + "I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said + the jailer, fearful that he should lose a prisoner; + "but this is his first offence, and his grandmother, who + did not die, has testified to his general good character." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever + does it again, let him be executed; and, by the way, I + should like to see the prisoners." +</p> +<p> + Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along + the corridors, and let him look through the holes in the + doors at the prisoners within. +</p> +<p> + "What is this little girl in for?" he asked. +</p> +<p> + The jailer looked at the number over the door, and + then at his report. +</p> +<p> + "Piracy," he answered. +</p> +<p> + "A strange offence for such a child," said the + Potentate. +</p> +<p> + "They often begin that sort of thing very early in + life," said the jailer. +</p> +<p> + "And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate, + looking in at the Prince, "what did he do?" +</p> +<p> + The jailer glanced at the number, and the report. +</p> +<p> + "Robbed hen-roosts," he said. +</p> +<p> + "He must have done a good deal of it to afford to + dress so well," said the Potentate, passing on, and + looking into other cells. "It seems to me that many + of your prisoners are very young." +</p> +<p> + "It is best to take them young, my lord," said the + jailer. "They are very hard to catch when they grow + up." +</p> +<p> + The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop, + and asked what was his offence. +</p> +<p> + "Conspiracy," was the answer. +</p> +<p> + "And where are the other conspirators?" +</p> +<p> + "There was only one," said the jailer. +</p> +<p> + Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers. +</p> +<p> + "He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother," + said the Potentate. "She must be very + aged, and that makes it all the worse for him. I + think he should be executed." +</p> +<p> + "Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured + that his crime was quite unintentional." +</p> +<p> + "Then he should be set free," said the Potentate. +</p> +<p> + "I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just + enough intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here + for a long time, but not enough to deserve execution." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave; + "take good care of your prisoners, and send me a + report every month." +</p> +<p> + "That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing + very low. +</p> +<p> + The Prince and his party had been very much surprised + and incensed when they found that they could + not get out of their rooms, and they had kicked and + banged and shouted until they were tired, but the + jailer had informed them that they were to be confined + there for years; and when the Potentate arrived they + had resigned themselves to despair. The Jolly-cum-pop, + however, was affected in a different way. It + seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that + a person should deliberately walk into a prison-cell + and be locked up for several years; and he lay down + on his little bed and laughed himself to sleep. +</p> +<p> + That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred + window, wide awake. He was a Truant, and had + never yet been in any place from which he could not + run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended + upon him to run away and bring them assistance, and + he knew that his reputation as a Truant was at stake. + His responsibility was so heavy that he could not sleep, + and he sat at the window, trying to think of a way to + get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its + light he saw upon the grass, not far from his window, + a number of little creatures, which at first he took for + birds or small squirrels; but on looking more attentively + he perceived that they were pigwidgeons. They + were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be + making calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At + this sight, the heart of the Truant jumped for joy. + "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to himself, + "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried + in various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons; + but as he was afraid to call or whistle very + loud, for fear of arousing the jailor, he did not succeed. + Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter which he had in + his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into the + midst of the little group with such force that it knocked + the chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was + using it. The little fellows looked up in astonishment, + and perceived the Truant beckoning to them from his + window. At first they stood angrily regarding him; + but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to + his relief, they approached the prison and, clambering + up a vine, soon reached his window-sill. The Truant + now told his mournful tale, to which the pigwidgeons + listened very attentively; and then, after a little consultation + among themselves, one of them said: "We + will get you out if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths + by six." +</p> +<p> + The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then + he said: "That is not the kind of thing I am good + at, but I expect some of the other fellows could tell + you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a row, + and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if + any one tells you, will you get us all out?" +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before. + "We will do that, for we are very anxious to know + how to divide five-sevenths by six. We have been + working at it for four or five days, and there won't be + any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer." +</p> +<p> + The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine; + but one of them lingering a little, the Truant, who had + a great deal of curiosity, asked him what it was they + had to divide. +</p> +<p> + "There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered, + "who helped a farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound + of butter. She did not count us properly, and divided + the butter into seven parts. We did not notice this + at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go + away to a distance, took their portions and departed, + and now we can not divide among six the five-sevenths + that remain." +</p> +<p> + "That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant, + "but I am sure some of the boys can tell you how to + do it." +</p> +<p> + The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which + were occupied by four boys, but not one of them + could tell how to divide five-sevenths by six. The + Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and + neither did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It + was not until they came to the cell of the oldest girl + that they received an answer. She was good at mental + arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said, + "It would be five forty-seconds." +</p> +<p> + "Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide + the butter into forty-two parts, and each take five. + And now let us go to work and cut these bars." +</p> +<p> + Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron, + and they had their little files and saws in pouches by + their sides. They went to work manfully, and the + others helped them, and before morning one bar was + cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were + all on the ground floor, and it was quite easy for the + prisoners to clamber out. That is, it was easy for all + but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so much in + his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it + impossible to squeeze himself through the opening + made by the removal of one iron bar. The sixteen + other prisoners had all departed; the pigwidgeons had + hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two parts, + and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed + with laughter at the idea of being caught in + such a curious predicament. +</p> +<p> + "It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he + said. "I suppose I must stay here and cry until I + get thin." And the idea so tickled him, that he + laughed himself to sleep. +</p> +<p> + The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried + from the prison as fast as they could. When the day + broke they had gone several miles, and then they + stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?" + said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He + is a pretty fellow to lead us into this trouble and then + desert us! How are we to find the way back to his + house? Course-marker, can you tell us the direction in + which we should go?" +</p> +<p> + "Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the + course-marker, "when I can set my instrument by + the stars." +</p> +<p> + The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight. + Every one was very hungry; they were in an open + plain, no house was visible, and they knew not which + way to go. They wandered about for some time, + looking for a brook or a spring where they might + quench their thirst; and then a rabbit sprang out from + some bushes. The whole party immediately started + off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it here, + there, backward and forward, through hollows and + over hills, until it ran quite away and disappeared. + Then they were more tired, thirsty, and hungry than + before; and, to add to their miseries, when night came + on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could + not set his instrument by the stars. It would be + difficult to find sixteen more miserable people than + the Prince and his companions when they awoke the + next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard + ground. Nearly starved, they gazed at one another + with feelings of despair. +</p> +<p> + "I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that + there is nothing I would not do to obtain food. I + would willingly become a slave if my master would + give me a good breakfast." +</p> +<p> + "So would I," ejaculated each of the others. +</p> +<p> + About an hour after this, as they were all sitting + disconsolately upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching, + a large cart drawn by a pair of oxen. On + the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily + loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book. + The boys, when they saw the cart, set up a feeble + shout, and the man, lifting his eyes from his book, + drove directly toward the group on the ground. Dismounting, + he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately + told him his troubles and implored relief. "We + will do any thing," said the Prince, "to obtain food." +</p> +<p> + Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man + with the red beard addressed the Prince in a slow, + meditative manner: "How would you like," he said, + "to form a nucleus?" +</p> +<p> + "Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked + the Prince. +</p> +<p> + "Yes," replied the man, "you can." +</p> +<p> + "We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen, + without waiting for further information. +</p> +<p> + "Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to + my explanations, or eat?" +</p> +<p> + "Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus. +</p> +<p> + The man now produced from his cart a quantity of + bread, meat, wine, and other provisions, which he distributed + generously, but judiciously, to the hungry + Prince and his followers. Every one had enough, but + no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened, + they felt like new beings. +</p> +<p> + "Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a + nucleus, as we promised. How is it done?" +</p> +<p> + "I will explain the matter to you in a few words," + said the man with the red beard. "For a long time I + have been desirous to found a city. In order to do + this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every + great city is started from a nucleus. A few persons + settle down in some particular spot, and live there. + Then they are a nucleus. Then other people come + there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more + people come and more, until in course of time there + is a great city. I have loaded this cart with provisions, + tools, and other things that are necessary for + my purpose, and have set out to find some people who + would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad + to have found you and that you are willing to enter + into my plan; and this seems a good spot for us to + settle upon." +</p> +<p> + "What is the first thing to be done?" said the + Prince. +</p> +<p> + "We must all go to work," said the man with the + red beard, "to build dwellings, and also a school-house + for these young people. Then we must till some + ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at + least, of a few public buildings." +</p> +<p> + "All this will take a good while, will it not?" said + the Prince. +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while; + and the sooner we set about it, the better." +</p> +<p> + Thereupon tools were distributed among the party, + and Prince, courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work + to build houses and form the nucleus of a city. +</p> +<p> + When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning, + and found that all but one of his prisoners had escaped, + he was utterly astounded, and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop + saw him, made that individual roar with + laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed + to deal with emergencies. "You need not + laugh," he said, "every thing shall go on as before, + and I shall take no notice of the absence of your companions. + You are now numbered One to Seventeen + inclusive, and you stand charged with highway robbery, + forgery, treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, + poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and + battery, using false weights and measures, burglary, + counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and + poisoning your grandmother by proxy. I intended + to-day to dress the convicts in prison garb, and you + shall immediately be so clothed." +</p> +<p> + "I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop. +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished." +</p> +<p> + "And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop. +</p> +<p> + "Certainly," replied the jailer. +</p> +<p> + "This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I + shall spend my whole time in eating and putting on + clean clothes." +</p> +<p> + Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to + the Jolly-cum-pop. He put one on, and hung up the + rest in his cell. These suits were half bright yellow + and half bright green, with spots of bright red, as big + as saucers. +</p> +<p> + The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to + another. "If the Potentate comes here and wants + to look at the prisoners," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop, + "you must appear in cell number One, so that + he can look through the hole in the door, and see you; + then, as he walks along the corridor, you must walk + through the cells, and whenever he looks into a cell, + you must be there." +</p> +<p> + "He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop, + "that all your prisoners are very fat, and that the + little girls have grown up into big men." +</p> +<p> + "I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer. +</p> +<p> + For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly + amused at the idea of his being seventeen criminals, + and he would sit first in one cell and then in another, + trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a hard-hearted + usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing + heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began + to tire of this, and to have a strong desire to see what + sort of a tunnel the Prince's miners and rock-splitters + were making under his house. "I had hoped," he + said to himself, "that I should pine away in confinement, + and so be able to get through the window-bars; + but with nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I + see no chance of that. But I must get out of this jail, + and, as there seems no other way, I will revolt." + Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole + in the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We + have risen in a body, and have determined to resist + your authority, and break jail!" +</p> +<p> + When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled. + "Do not proceed to violence," he said; "let us + parley." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you + must open the cell door. We cannot parley through + a hole." +</p> +<p> + The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the + Jolly-cum-pop, having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes + around his left arm as a shield, and holding in his + right hand the iron bar which had been cut from + his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted + the jailer and his myrmidons. +</p> +<p> + "It will be useless for you to resist," he said. + "You are but four, and we are seventeen. If you + had been wise you would have made us all cheating + shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you + might have been able to control us; but when you see + before you a desperate highwayman, a daring smuggler, + a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily poacher, a powerful + ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator, and a + murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!" +</p> +<p> + The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other + in dismay. +</p> +<p> + "We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop, + "and will readily agree to terms. We will give + you your choice: Will you allow us to honorably surrender, + and peacefully disperse to our homes, or shall + we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering + you by numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through + the crackling timbers of the burning pile?" +</p> +<p> + The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be + better, perhaps," he said, "that you should surrender + and disperse to your homes." +</p> +<p> + The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the + great gate being opened, he marched out in good + order. "Now," said he to himself, "the thing for + me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer + may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry, + he turned the wrong way, and walked rapidly into a + country unknown to him. His walk was a very merry + one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince + and his followers have returned to my house, and are + tired of watching the rock-splitters and miners. How + amused they will be when they see me come back in + this gay suit of green and yellow, with red spots, and + with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own + dogs will bark at me! And how my own servants will + not know me! It is the funniest thing I ever knew + of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and wide. But + when he had gone several miles without seeing any + signs of his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would + have been much better," he said, as he sat down to + rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had brought with + me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of + clothes." +</p> +<p> + The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked + a long distance without seeing any person or any house. + Toward the close of the afternoon he stopped, and, + looking back, he saw coming toward him a large party + of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived + that the person in advance was the jailer. At this + the Jolly-cum-pop could not restrain his merriment. + "How comically it has all turned out!" he exclaimed. + "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself + out, and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer + comes now, with a crowd of people, and takes me + back. I might as well have staid where I was. Ha! + ha!" +</p> +<p> + The jailer now left his party and came running + toward the Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he + said, bowing very low, "do not cast us off." +</p> +<p> + "Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop, + looking with much surprise at the jailer's companions, + who were now quite near. +</p> +<p> + "We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our + wives and children. Our situations were such good + ones that we married long ago, and our families lived + in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the + convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should + the Potentate again visit the prison, he would be + disappointed and enraged at finding no prisoners, and + would, probably, punish us grievously. So we determined + to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with + you, wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which + I fastened to the great gate, and in it I stated that + sixteen of the convicts escaped by the aid of outside + confederates, and that seventeen of them mutinied in + a body and broke jail." +</p> +<p> + "That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your + Potentate will not readily understand." +</p> +<p> + "If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain + it to him; but, as it is, he must work it out for + himself." +</p> +<p> + "Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the + Jolly-cum-pop. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions." +</p> +<p> + "Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection. + Let us have supper. I have had nothing to eat since + morning, and the weight of sixteen extra suits of + clothes does not help to refresh one." +</p> +<p> + The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that + night under some trees, and started off early the next + morning. "If I could only get myself turned in the + proper direction," said he, "I believe we should + soon reach my house." +</p> +<p> + The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the + course-marker, and the map-maker worked industriously + for several days at the foundation of their city. + They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut + down trees. This work was very hard for all of them, + for they were not used to it. After a few days' labor, + the Prince said to the man with the red beard, who was + reading his book: "I think we have now formed a + nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be + a city." +</p> +<p> + "No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing + is truly a nucleus until something is gathered around + it. Proceed with your work, while I continue my + studies upon civil government." +</p> +<p> + Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man + raised his eyes from his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop + and his party approaching. "Hurrah!" he + cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And + he went forth to meet them. +</p> +<p> + When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop + in his bright and variegated dress, they did not + know him; but the boys and girls soon recognized his + jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up a + hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their + merry friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening + to the adventures of the Prince and his companions, + and telling what had happened to himself, the man + with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his + party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus + which had been here formed, and help to build a + city. +</p> +<p> + "Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer, + "and the sooner we build a town wall so as to keep + off the Potentate, if he should come this way, the + better shall we be satisfied." +</p> +<p> + The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded + man: "Others have gathered around us. We have + formed a nucleus, and thus have done all that we + promised to do. We shall now depart." +</p> +<p> + The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince + paid no attention to his words. "What troubles me + most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop, "is the disgraceful + condition of our clothes. They have been so torn + and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are + not fit to be seen." +</p> +<p> + "As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have + sixteen suits with me, in which you can all dress, if + you like. They are of unusual patterns, but they are + new and clean." +</p> +<p> + "It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my + station to appear inordinately gay than to be seen in + rags and dirt. We will accept your clothes." +</p> +<p> + Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on + a prison dress of bright green and yellow, with large + red spots. There were some garments left over, for + each boy wore only a pair of trousers with the waistband + tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms; + while the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made + very good dresses for the girls. The Prince and his + party, accompanied by the Jolly-cum-pop, now left the + red-bearded man and his new settlers to continue the + building of the city, and set off on their journey. + The course-marker had not been informed the night + before that they were to go away that morning, and + consequently did not set his instrument by the stars. +</p> +<p> + "As we do not know in which way we should go," + said the Prince, "one way will be as good as another, + and if we can find a road let us take it; it will be easier + walking." +</p> +<p> + In an hour or two they found a road and they took + it. After journeying the greater part of the day, they + reached the top of a low hill, over which the road ran, + and saw before them a glittering sea and the spires + and houses of a city. +</p> +<p> + "It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker. +</p> +<p> + "That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are + so near, we may as well go there." +</p> +<p> + The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this + party, dressed in bright green and yellow, with red + spots, passed through their streets, was so great that + the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter. This set the + boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the + sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when + they reached the palace the King came out to see what + was the matter. What he thought when he saw his + nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party + apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot + now be known; but, after hearing the Prince's story, + he took him into an inner apartment, and thus addressed + him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you pay me a + visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will + come in the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown + to the world that, when a Prince desires to travel, it is + often necessary for him to go out of his way on account + of obstacles." +</p> +<p> + "My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words + shall not be forgotten." +</p> +<p> + After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince + and his party (in new clothes) returned (by sea) to + Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop soon repaired to his + home. There he found the miners and rock-splitters + still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated + half-way through the hill on which stood his house. + "You may go home," he said, "for the Prince has + changed his plans. I will put a door to this tunnel, + and it will make an excellent cellar in which to keep + my wine and provisions." +</p> +<p> + The day after the Prince's return his map-maker + said to him: "Your Highness, according to your commands + I made, each day, a map of your progress to + the city of Yan. Here it is." +</p> +<p> + The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes + upon the floor. "Leave me," he said. "I would be + alone." +</p> + +<center> +<img src="images/map.png" width="747" height="360" +alt="The Map of the Prince's Journey from Itoby to Yan."> +</center> + +<a name="chapter7"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + There were never many persons who could correctly + bound the Autocracy of Mutjado. The + reason for this was that the boundary line was not + stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of + money, he sent his tax-gatherers far and wide, and + people who up to that time had no idea of such a thing + found that they lived in the territory of Mutjado. But + when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and + people in the outlying districts needed protection or + public works, the dominion of the Autocrat became + very much contracted. +</p> +<p> + In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell + into bad health and sent for his doctor. That learned + man prescribed some medicine for him; and as this + did him no good, he ordered another kind. He continued + this method of treatment until the Autocrat had + swallowed the contents of fifteen phials and flasks, + some large and some small. As none of these were of + the slightest benefit, the learned doctor produced another + kind of medicine which he highly extolled. +</p> +<p> + "Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and + you will soon find—" +</p> +<p> + "A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in + disgust. "I will have none of it! These others were + bad enough, and rather than start with a new physic, I + prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and big, + and send me my secretary." +</p> +<p> + When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed + him that he had determined to write his will, and that + he should set about it at once. +</p> +<p> + The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest + male relatives were a third cousin on his father's + side, and another third cousin on his mother's side. Of + course these persons were in nowise related to each + other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had + never seen either of them. He had made up his mind to + leave his throne and dominions to one of these persons, + but he could not determine which of them should be + his heir. +</p> +<p> + "One has as good a right as the other," he said + to himself, "and I can't bother my brains settling the + matter for them. Let them fight it out, and whoever + conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado." +</p> +<p> + Having arranged the affair in this manner in his + will, he signed it, and soon after died. +</p> +<p> + The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was + a young man of about twenty-five, named Alberdin. + He was a good horseman, and trained in the arts of + warfare, and when he was informed of the terms of his + distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly + willing to undertake the combat for the throne. + He set out for Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable + time. +</p> +<p> + The third cousin on the mother's side was a very + different person. He was a boy of about twelve years + of age; and as his father and mother had died when + he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life + under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who + acted as his guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon + arrived in Mutjado,—the boy, Phedo, being mounted + on a little donkey, which was his almost constant companion. + As soon as they reached the territory of the + late Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an + inn, and went forward by himself to take a look at the + other third cousin. When he saw Alberdin mounted + on his fine horse, and looking so strong and valiant, + his heart was much disturbed. +</p> +<p> + "I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other + one was a small boy, but such does not appear to be + the case. There is but one way to have a fair fight + between these two. They must not now be allowed to + see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy + grows up, he will then be able, with the military education + which I intend he shall have, to engage in combat + with any man. They must not meet for at least thirteen + years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to do + worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself + to undertake to superintend so long a delay, but I + must do my best to keep well and strong, and to attain + the greatest possible longevity." +</p> +<p> + Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two + chews to every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate + number of chews to other articles of food; + and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now determined + to increase the number of chews to thirty-six, + for it would be highly necessary for him to live until it + was time for the battle between the third cousins to + take place. +</p> +<p> + Having made up his mind on these points, the old + tutor introduced himself to Alberdin, and told him that + he had come to arrange the terms of combat. +</p> +<p> + "In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like + to know what sort of a person my opponent is." +</p> +<p> + "He is not a cavalryman like you," answered + Salim; "he belongs to the heavy infantry." +</p> +<p> + At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well + that a stout and resolute man on foot had often the + advantage of one who is mounted. He would have + preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal + terms. +</p> +<p> + "Has he had much experience in war?" asked the + young man. +</p> +<p> + "It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was + almost constantly in arms, winter and summer." +</p> +<p> + "He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin. + "I must put myself in good fighting-trim before I + meet him." +</p> +<p> + After some further conversation on the subject, the + old man advised Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful + plain not far from the base of a low line of mountains. +</p> +<p> + "Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself + in the valley on the other side. With the mountains + between you, neither of you need fear a surprise; and + when both are ready, a place of meeting can be appointed. +</p> +<p> + "Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had + been settled; "if I can keep them apart for thirteen + years, all may be well." +</p> +<p> + As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon + the appointed spot, and began to take daily warlike + exercise in the plain, endeavoring in every way to put + himself and his horse into proper condition for the + combat. +</p> +<p> + On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched + himself and the boy, Phedo. He carefully + studied several books on military engineering, and + caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the most + approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts, + and outside of these was a moat filled with + water. In the centre of the camp was a neat little + house which was well provided with books, provisions, + and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When + the drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin + to get inside of the camp; and, moreover, the + ramparts were so high that he could not look over + them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have. + Old Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him + here to live. It would be better to wait until he was + older before informing him of the battle which had + been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary + for him to have a military education, which could very + well be obtained in a place like this; and he was also + very careful to let him know that there was a terrible + soldier in that part of the country who might at any + time, if it were not for the intrenchments, pounce + down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine + day, Phedo was allowed to take a ride on his donkey + outside of the fortifications, but during this time, the + old tutor kept a strict watch on the mountain; and if + a horseman had made his appearance, little Phedo + would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge + would have been up in a twinkling. +</p> +<p> + After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it + dreadfully stupid to see no one but his old tutor, and + never to go outside of these great ramparts except for + donkey-rides, which were generally very short. He + therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go + out and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid + of the dreadful soldier of whom the old man had told + him, because at that time of night this personage + would, of course, be in bed and asleep. Considering + these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a + great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened + the heavy gate, let down the drawbridge, mounted + upon his donkey, and rode forth upon the moonlit + plain. +</p> +<p> + That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a + long time the boy and the donkey rambled and ran; + first going this way and then that, they gradually + climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow, they + trotted about for a while, and then went down the other + side. The boy had been so twisted and turned in his + course that he did not notice that he was not descending + toward his camp, and the donkey, whose instinct + told it that it was not going the right way, was also + told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right + way, and that the intrenchments offered it no temptations + to return. When the morning dawned, Phedo + perceived that he was really lost, and he began to be + afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But, + after a time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking + young man on a handsome horse, and he + immediately took courage. +</p> +<p> + "Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in + danger. If that horrible cut-throat should appear, + this good gentleman will protect me." +</p> +<p> + Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and + he was very glad to meet with so nice a little boy. + When Phedo told him that he was lost, he invited him + to come to his tent, near by, and have breakfast. + While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the + boy if in the course of his rambles he had met with a + heavy infantry soldier, probably armed to the teeth, + and very large and strong. +</p> +<p> + "Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried + Phedo, "and I am very glad that I did not meet him. + If he comes, I hope you'll protect me from him." +</p> +<p> + "I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I + shall not be able to help you find your way home, for + in doing so I should throw myself off my guard, and + might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with + whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is + to be a time fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself + nearly ready, but I have no doubt that my enemy + will be very glad to take me at a disadvantage if I give + him a chance." +</p> +<p> + Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The + tent was large and well furnished; there seemed to be + plenty of good things to eat; the handsome horseman + was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable gentleman; + and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by + high and gloomy ramparts. +</p> +<p> + "I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he + to his host, "to help me to find my way home. I live + with my tutor, and I am sure that when he knows I + am gone he will begin to search for me, and after + awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very + comfortable here." +</p> +<p> + For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat + lived together in the tent, and enjoyed each other's + society very much. Then Alberdin began to grow a + little impatient. +</p> +<p> + "If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said; + "I should like to do it at once. I am now quite ready, + and I think he ought to be. I expected to hear from + him before this time, and I shall start out and see if I + can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about + going over the mountain without giving him notice, but + the capital city of Mutjado is only a day's ride to the + west, and there I can cause inquiries to be made when + he would like to meet me, and where." +</p> +<p> + "I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted + at the idea of visiting the city. +</p> +<p> + "Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your + tutor don't seem inclined to come for you, and, of + course, I can't leave you here." +</p> +<p> + The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on + his donkey, set out for the city, where they arrived + late in the afternoon. After finding a comfortable + lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of + the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be + encamped, and gave them power to arrange with him + for a meeting. He particularly urged them to try to see + the old man who had come to him at first, and who had + seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person. + In two days, however, the messengers returned, stating + that they had found what they supposed to be the intrenched + camp of the heavy infantry man they had + been sent in search of, but that it was entirely deserted, + and nobody could be seen anywhere near it. +</p> +<p> + "It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has + watched my manoeuvres and exercises from the top of + the mountain, and has concluded to run away. I shall + give him a reasonable time to show himself, and then, + if he does not come forward, I will consider him + beaten, and claim the Autocracy." +</p> +<p> + "That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think, + if you can, you ought to find him and kill him, or + drive him out of the country. That's what I should + do, if I were you." +</p> +<p> + "Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin; + "but I could not be expected to wait for him forever." +</p> +<p> + When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin + was informed of something which he did not know + before, and that was that the late Autocrat had left + an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years old. + But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit + his crown, for the laws of the country forbade + that any woman should become Autocrat. A happy + idea now struck Alberdin. +</p> +<p> + "I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then + every one will think that it is the most suitable thing + for me to become Autocrat." +</p> +<p> + So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission + to speak with her, and was granted an audience. + With much courtesy and politeness he made known his + plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider + it advisable to marry him. +</p> +<p> + "I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements," + said the Princess, "but as soon as I heard + the terms of my father's will, I made up my mind to + marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot inherit + the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife + of the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your + antagonist, and when you have conquered him, I will + marry you." +</p> +<p> + "And if he conquers me, you will marry him?" + said Alberdin. +</p> +<p> + "Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile, + and dismissed him. +</p> +<p> + It was plain enough that there was nothing for + Alberdin to do but to go and look for the heavy infantry man. + Phedo was very anxious to accompany him, + and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city + on their quest. +</p> +<p> + When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the + morning and found the boy gone, he immediately + imagined that the youngster had ran away to his old + home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping + to overtake him. But when he reached the distant + town where Phedo had lived, he found that the boy + had not been there; and after taking some needful rest, + he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and made + his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of + him there. It was necessary for him to be very careful + in his inquiries, for he wished no one to find out + that the little boy he was looking for was the third + cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side. He + therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical + man, and determined to use all possible caution. + When he reached the camp of the young horseman, + Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his suspicions + became excited. +</p> +<p> + "If these two have run off together," he said to + himself, "my task is indeed difficult. If the man + discovers it is the boy he has to fight, my poor Phedo + will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe + there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not + know that he is to be one of the combatants, and the + man would not be likely to suspect it. Come what + may, the fight must not take place for thirteen years. + And in order that I may still better preserve my health + and strength to avert the calamity during that period, + I will increase my number of chews to forty-two to + each mouthful of meat." +</p> +<p> + When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that + Alberdin and the boy had been there, and that they + had gone away together. +</p> +<p> + "Nothing has happened so far," said the old man, + with a sigh of relief; "and things may turn out all + right yet. I'll follow them, but I must first find + out what that cavalryman had to say to the Princess." + For he had been told of the interview at the + palace. +</p> +<p> + It was not long before the migratory medical man + was brought to the Princess. There was nothing the + matter with her, but she liked to meet with persons of + skill and learning to hear what they had to say. +</p> +<p> + "Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old + man. +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor." +</p> +<p> + "What is that?" asked the Princess. +</p> +<p> + "All diseases," replied the old man, "come from + germs; generally very little ones. My business is to + discover these, and find out all about them." +</p> +<p> + "Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know + how to cure the diseases?" +</p> +<p> + "You must not expect too much," answered the old + man. "It ought to be a great satisfaction to us to + know what sort of germ is at the bottom of our + woes." +</p> +<p> + "I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and, + so far as I know, none of my household are troubled + by germs. But there is something the matter with my + mind which I wish you could relieve." She then told + the old man how she had determined to marry the victor + in the contest for her father's throne, and how she had + seen one for the claimants whom she considered to be a + very agreeable and deserving young man; while the + other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot soldier, + who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid. + If this one should prove the conqueror, she did not + know what she should do. "You see, I am in a great + deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any thing to + help me?" +</p> +<p> + The pretending migratory medical man looked at her + attentively for a few moments, and then he said: +</p> +<p> + "The reason why you intend to marry the victor in + the coming contest, is that you wish to remain here in + your father's palace, and to continue to enjoy the comforts + and advantages to which you have been accustomed." +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the Princess; "that is it." +</p> +<p> + "Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder," + said the old man, "the great point is gained. I + will see what I can do." +</p> +<p> + And with a respectful bow he left her presence. +</p> +<p> + "Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away, + "she can never marry my boy, for that is certainly out + of the question; but now that I have found out her + motive, I think I can arrange matters satisfactorily, so + far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair between + that young man and Phedo is immensely more + difficult. The first thing is to find them." +</p> +<p> + Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor + travelled diligently, and in two days came up with + Alberdin and Phedo. When he first caught sight of + them, he was very much surprised to see that they + were resting upon the ground quite a long distance + apart, with a little stream between them. Noticing + that Alberdin's back was toward him, he threw off his + disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy received + him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces, + they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old + man all that had happened, and finished by relating + that, as they had that day stopped by this stream to + rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire + into the parentage of his young companion; and after + many questions about his family, it had been made + clear to both of them that they were the two third + cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado. +</p> +<p> + "He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks + that have been played upon him, and went off and left + me. Is it true that I am to fight him? I don't want + to do it, for I like him very much." +</p> +<p> + "It will be a long time before you are old enough to + fight," said Salim; "so we need not consider that. + You stay here, and I'll go over and talk to him." +</p> +<p> + Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin. + When the young man saw him, and recognized + him as the person who had arranged the two + encampments, he turned upon him with fury. +</p> +<p> + "Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary + of my antagonist, you are but the tutor of that + boy! If I had known the truth at first, I would have + met him instantly; would have conquered him without + hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to + the capital city, would have claimed the Autocracy, + and would now have been sitting upon the throne. Instead + of that, look at the delay and annoyance to which + I have been subjected. I have also taken such a + fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure + his prospects, I would willingly resign my pretensions + to the throne, and go back contentedly to my own city. + But this cannot now be done. I have fallen in love + with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will + marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to + what a condition you have brought me!" +</p> +<p> + The old man regarded him with attention. +</p> +<p> + "I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement + of this matter for thirteen years. Are you willing + to wait so long?" +</p> +<p> + "No, I am not," said Alberdin. +</p> +<p> + "Very well, then," said the old man, "each third + cousin must retire to his camp, and as soon as matters + can be arranged the battle must take place." +</p> +<p> + "There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin + in a troubled voice; "but I shall take care that the + boy receives no injury if it can possibly be avoided." +</p> +<p> + The three now retraced their steps, and in a few + days were settled down, Alberdin in his tent in the + plain, and Salim and Phedo in their intrenchments on + the other side of the low mountain. The old man now + gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered + the germ of Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he + had arranged his plans, and went over to see the young + man. +</p> +<p> + "It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate + is to be formed to attend to this business for + Phedo." +</p> +<p> + "A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?" +</p> +<p> + "A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who + attends to business for others; and a syndicate is a + body of men who are able to conduct certain affairs + better than any individual can do it. In a week from + to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large + plain outside of the capital city. There the contest + will take place. Shall you be ready?" +</p> +<p> + "I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin, + "but I shall be there." +</p> +<p> + General notice was given of the coming battle of the + contestants for the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants + of the Autocracy assembled on the plain on the + appointed day. The Princess with her ladies was + there; and as everybody was interested, everybody + was anxious to see what would happen. +</p> +<p> + Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of + the plain, and demanded that his antagonist should + appear. Thereupon old Salim came forward, leading + Phedo by the hand. +</p> +<p> + "This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every + one can see that he is too young to fight a battle, a + syndicate has been appointed to attend to the matter + for him; and there is nothing in the will of the late + Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate + will now appear." +</p> +<p> + At this command there came into the arena a horseman + heavily armed, a tall foot soldier completely + equipped for action, an artilleryman with a small cannon + on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a + drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which + discharged one hundred and twenty balls a minute. +</p> +<p> + "All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat + for the Autocracy will begin!" +</p> +<p> + Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate + ranged before him. Then he dismounted from his + horse, drew his sword, and stuck it, point downward, + into the sand. +</p> +<p> + "I surrender!" he said. +</p> +<p> + "So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him, + and throwing herself into his arms. +</p> +<p> + The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy. +</p> +<p> + "Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I + have my Princess, the throne and the crown are nothing + to me." +</p> +<p> + "So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I + am content to resign all the comforts and advantages + to which I have been accustomed." +</p> +<p> + Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor, + now looked up. +</p> +<p> + "You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We + are all of the same blood, and we will join together + and form a royal family, and we will all live at the + palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the government + for me until I am grown up; and if I have to + go to school for a few years, I suppose I must. And + that is all there is about it!" +</p> +<p> + The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband; + the heralds proclaimed Phedo the conquering + heir, and the people cheered and shouted with delight. + All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come to him + from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much + preferred to have a new ruler from the mother's + family. +</p> +<p> + "I hope you bear no grudge against me," said + Salim to Alberdin; "but if you had been willing to + wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo might have + fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have + been as hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer + the syndicate. The odds would have been quite + as great." +</p> +<p> + "Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer + things as they are. I should have hated to drive the + boy away, and deprive him of a position which the + people wish him to have. Now we are all satisfied." +</p> +<p> + Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably + make a very good Autocrat. He declared that if + he was to be assisted by ministers and cabinet officers + when he came to the throne, he would like them to be + persons who had been educated for their positions, just + as he was to be educated for his own. Consequently + he chose for the head of his cabinet a bright and sensible + boy, and had him educated as a Minister of State. + For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with a + very honest countenance, and for the other members + of his cabinet, suitable youths were selected. He also + said, that he thought there ought to be another officer, + one who would be a sort of Minister of General Comfort, + who would keep an eye on the health and happiness + of the subjects, and would also see that every + thing went all right in the palace, not only in regard + to meals, but lots of other things. For this office he + chose a bright young girl, and had her educated for + the position of Queen. +</p> +<a name="chapter8"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE BANISHED KING. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + There was once a kingdom in which every thing + seemed to go wrong. Everybody knew this, and + everybody talked about it, especially the King. The + bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any + one else, but he could think of no way to make them + better. +</p> +<p> + "I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he + said to the Queen and his chief councillors. "I wish I + knew how other kingdoms were governed." +</p> +<p> + One of his councillors offered to go to some other + countries, and see how they were governed, and come + back and tell him all about it, but this did not suit his + majesty. +</p> +<p> + "You would simply return," he said, "and give me + your ideas about things. I want my own ideas." +</p> +<p> + The Queen then suggested that he should take a + vacation, and visit other kingdoms, and see for himself + how things were managed in them. +</p> +<p> + This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not + answer," he said. "I should not be gone a week before + something would happen here which would make + it necessary for me to come back." +</p> +<p> + The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a + certain time, say a year. In that case he could not + come back, and would be at full liberty to visit foreign + kingdoms, and find out how they were governed. +</p> +<p> + This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible + for me to come back," he said, "of course I + could not do it. The scheme is a good one. Let me + be banished." And he gave orders that his council + should pass a law banishing him for one year. +</p> +<p> + Preparations were immediately begun to carry out + this plan, and in day or two the King bade farewell to + the Queen, and left his kingdom, a banished man. He + went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he + did not wish to cut off all communication between himself + and his kingdom, he made an arrangement which + he thought a very good one. At easy shouting distance + behind him walked one of the officers of the + court, and at shouting distance behind him walked + another, and so on at distances of about a hundred + yards from each other. In this way there would + always be a line of men extending from the King + to his palace. Whenever the King had walked a + hundred yards the line moved on after him, and + another officer was put in the gap between the last + man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked + on, his line of followers lengthened, and was never + broken. Whenever he had any message to send + to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he + shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the + one next to him, and it was so passed on until it + reached the palace. If he needed food, clothes, or any + other necessary thing, the order for it was shouted + along the line, and the article was passed to him from + man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor, + and then retiring to his proper place. +</p> +<p> + In this way the King walked on day by day until he + had passed entirely out of his own kingdom. At night + he stopped at some convenient house on the road, and + if any of his followers did not find himself near a house + or cottage when the King shouted back the order to + halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might + be. By this time the increasing line of followers had + used up all the officers of the court, and it became + necessary to draw upon some of the under government + officers in order to keep the line perfect. +</p> +<p> + The King had not gone very far outside the limits of + his dominions when he met a Sphinx. He had often + heard of these creatures, although he had never seen + one before. But when he saw the winged body of a + lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it + was. He knew, also, that the chief business of a + Sphinx was that of asking people questions, and then + getting them into trouble if the right answers were not + given. He therefore determined that he would not be + caught by any such tricks as these, and that he would + be on his guard if the Sphinx spoke to him. The + creature was lying down when the King first saw it, + but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet. + There was nothing savage about its look, and the King + was not at all afraid. +</p> +<p> + "Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him, + in a pleasant voice. +</p> +<p> + "Give it up," replied the King. +</p> +<p> + "What do you mean by that?" said the other, with + an air of surprise. +</p> +<p> + "I give that up, too," said the King. +</p> +<p> + The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished. +</p> +<p> + "I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my + own free will, and not in answer to any questions, that + I do not know where I am going. I am a King, as + you may have noticed, and I have been banished from + my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into + the government of other countries in order that I may + find out what it is that is wrong in my own kingdom. + Every thing goes badly, and there is something very + faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to + discover." +</p> +<p> + "I am much interested in puzzles and matters of + that kind," said the Sphinx, "and if you like I will go + with you and help to find out what is wrong in your + kingdom." +</p> +<p> + "All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of + your company." +</p> +<p> + "What is the meaning of this long line of people + following you at regular distances?" asked the + Sphinx. +</p> +<p> + "Give it up," said the King. +</p> +<p> + The Sphinx laughed. +</p> +<p> + "I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my + own free will, and not in answer to any question, that + these men form a line of communication between me + and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must be going + on worse than ever, in my absence." +</p> +<p> + The two now travelled on together until they came to + a high hill, from which they could see, not very far + away, a large city. +</p> +<p> + "That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an + extensive country. It is governed by a king of mingled + sentiments. Suppose we go there. I think you + will find a government that is rather peculiar." +</p> +<p> + The King consented, and they walked down the hill + toward the city. +</p> +<p> + "How did the King get his sentiments mingled?" + asked the King. +</p> +<p> + "I really don't know how it began," said the + Sphinx, "but the King, when a young man, had so + many sentiments of different kinds, and he mingled + them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly + what he thought on any particular subject. Of course, + his people gradually got into the same frame of mind, + and you never can know in this kingdom exactly what + people think or what they are going to do. You will + find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies, + gnomes, and personages of that kind, who have been + drawn here by the mingled sentiments of the people. + I, myself, came into these parts because the people + every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and + riddles." +</p> +<p> + On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed + by his brother sovereign, to whom he told his + story; and he was lodged in a room in the palace. + Such of his followers as came within the limits of the + city were entertained by the persons near to whose + houses they found themselves when the line halted. +</p> +<p> + Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the + sights of this strange city. They took long walks + through the streets, and sometimes into the surrounding + country—always going one way and returning + another, the Sphinx being very careful never to bring + the King back by the same road or street by which they + went. In this way the King's line of followers, which, + of course, lengthened out every time he took a walk, + came to be arranged in long loops through many parts + of the city and suburbs. +</p> +<p> + Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the + mingled sentiments of the people. For instance, he + would one day visit a great smith's shop, where heavy + masses of iron were being forged, the whole place resounding + with tremendous blows from heavy hammers, + and the clank and din of iron on the anvils; while + the next day he would find the place transformed + into a studio, where the former blacksmith was painting + dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of + egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment + of his visitor, showed his peculiar nature very plainly. + Sometimes he would receive him with enthusiastic + delight, while at others he would upbraid him with + having left his dominions to go wandering around the + earth in this senseless way. One day his host invited + him to attend a royal dinner, but, when he went to the + grand dining-hall, pleased with anticipations of a splendid + feast, he found that the sentiments of his majesty + had become mingled, and that he had determined, + instead of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services + of one of his servants who had died the day before. + All the guests were obliged by politeness to remain + during the ceremonies, which our King, not having + been acquainted with the deceased servant, had + not found at all interesting. +</p> +<p> + "Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in + favor of moving on. I am tired of this place, where + every sentiment is so mingled with others that you can + never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't + believe any one in this country was ever truly glad + or sorry. They mix one sentiment so quickly with + another that they never can discover the actual ingredients + of any of their impulses." +</p> +<p> + "When this King first began to mingle his sentiments," + said the Sphinx, "it was because he always + desired to think and feel exactly right. He did not + wish his feelings to run too much one way or the + other." +</p> +<p> + "And so he is never either right or wrong," said the + King. "I don't like that, at all. I want to be one + thing or the other." +</p> +<p> + "I have wasted a good deal of time at this place," + remarked the King, as they walked on, "and I have + seen and heard nothing which I wish to teach my + people. But I must find out some way to prevent + every thing going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried + plan after plan, and sometimes two or three together, + and have kept this up year after year, and yet nothing + seems to do my kingdom any good." +</p> +<p> + "Have you heard how things are going on there + now?" asked the Sphinx. +</p> +<p> + "Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind + saying of my own accord, and not as answer to any + question, that I have sent a good many communications + to my Queen, but have never received any from + her. So I do not know how things are going on in my + kingdom." +</p> +<p> + They then travelled on, the long line of followers + coming after, keeping their relative positions a hundred + yards apart, and passing over all the ground the King + had traversed in his circuitous walks about the city. + Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in + straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the + King walked a hundred yards a fresh man from his + capital city was obliged to take his place at the tail of + the procession. +</p> +<p> + "By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had + walked an hour or more, "if you want to see a + kingdom where there really is something to learn, you + ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we + are now approaching." +</p> +<p> + "All right," said the King. "Let us go there." +</p> +<p> + In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge + of a high bluff. "On the level ground, beneath this + precipice," said the Sphinx, "is the country of the + dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of + the bluff and look down upon it." +</p> +<p> + The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and + looked out from the edge over the country of the little + people. The officer of the court who had formed the + head of the line wished very much to see what they + were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not + near enough. +</p> +<p> + "You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little + houses and huts are gathered together in clusters. + Each one of these clusters is under a separate king." +</p> +<p> + "Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked + the King. "That is the proper way." +</p> +<p> + "They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each + of these clusters live the Gaumers who are best suited + to each other; and, if any Gaumer finds he cannot + get along in one cluster, he goes to another. The + kings are chosen from among the very best of them, + and each one is always very anxious to please his subjects. + He knows that every thing that he, and his + queen, and his children eat, or drink, or wear, or have + must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were + not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he + does every thing that he can to make them happy and + contented, for he knows if he does not please them + and govern them well, they will gradually drop off from + him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without + any people or any kingdom." +</p> +<p> + "That is a very queer way of ruling," said the + King. "I think the people ought to try to please + their sovereign." +</p> +<p> + "He is only one, and they are a great many," said + the Sphinx. "Consequently they are much more + important. No subject is ever allowed to look down + upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and + clothe him, and send his children to school. If any + one does a thing of this kind, he is banished until he + learns better." +</p> +<p> + "All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the + King, "but I can learn nothing from a government + like that, where every thing seems to be working in an + opposite direction from what everybody knows is right + and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good + opinion of his subjects! What nonsense! It ought + to be just the other way. The ideas of this people are + as dwarfish as their bodies." +</p> +<p> + The King now arose and took up the line of march, + turning away from the country of the Gaumers. But + he had not gone more than two or three hundred yards + before he received a message from the Queen. It + came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming + anxious to shout it to the man ahead of him as + quickly as possible. The message was to the effect + that he must either stop where he was or come home: + his constantly lengthening line of communication had + used up all the chief officers of the government, all the + clerks in the departments, and all the officials of every + grade, excepting the few who were actually needed to + carry on the government, and if any more men went + into the line it would be necessary to call upon the + laborers and other persons who could not be spared. +</p> +<p> + "I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made + your line long enough." +</p> +<p> + "And I think," said the King. "that you made it + a great deal longer than it need to have been, by taking + me about in such winding ways." +</p> +<p> + "It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic + smile. +</p> +<p> + "Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King, + "and so I might as well go back as soon as I can." + And he shouted to the head man of the line to pass on + the order that his edict of banishment be revoked. +</p> +<p> + In a very short time the news came that the edict + was revoked. The King then commanded that the + procession return home, tail-end foremost. The march + was at once begun, each man, as he reached the city, + going immediately to his home and family. +</p> +<p> + The King and the greater part of the line had a long + and weary journey, as they followed each other through + the country and over the devious ways in which the + Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled Sentiments. + The King was obliged to pursue all these + complicated turnings, or be separated from his officers, + and so break up his communication with his palace. + The Sphinx accompanied him. +</p> +<p> + When at last, he reached his palace, his line of + former followers having apparently melted entirely + away, he hurried up-stairs to the Queen, leaving the + Sphinx in the court-yard. +</p> +<p> + The King found, when he had time to look into the + affairs of his dominions, that every thing was in the + most admirable condition. The Queen had retained a + few of the best officials to carry on the government, + and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the + line of communication. The King set himself to work + to think about the matter. It was not long before he + came to the conclusion that the main thing which had + been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so + greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to + the court-yard to speak to the Sphinx about it. +</p> +<p> + "I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and + I don't wonder that what you learned when you were + away, and what you have seen since you came back, + have made you feel certain that you were the cause of + every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now, + what do you intend to do about your government?" +</p> +<p> + "Give it up," promptly replied the King. +</p> +<p> + "That is exactly what I should advise," said the + Sphinx. +</p> +<p> + The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced + that being a King was exactly the thing he was + not suited for, and that he would get on much better + in some other business or profession. He determined + to be a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into + other countries to find out things that might be useful + to his own nation. His Queen had shown that she + could govern the country most excellently, and it was + not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had + ordered all the men who had made up his line to follow + the King's example and to go into some good business; + in order that not being bothered with so many officers, + she would be able to get along quite easily. +</p> +<p> + The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and + although he did not this time have a line of followers + connecting him with the palace, he frequently sent + home messages which were of use and value to his + nation. +</p> +<p> + "I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself. + "As the King has found his vocation and every thing + is going all right it is not necessary I should remain + where I may be looked upon as a questionable + personage." +</p> +<a name="chapter9"><!-- H2 anchor --></a> + +<div style="height: 2em;"></div> + +<h2> + THE PHILOPENA. +</h2> +<hr> +<p> + There were once a Prince and a Princess who, + when quite young, ate a philopena together. They + agreed that the one who, at any hour after sunrise + the next day, should accept any thing from the other + —the giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"—should + be the loser, and that the loser should marry + the other. +</p> +<p> + They did not meet as soon as they had expected the + next day; and at the time our story begins, many + years had elapsed since they had seen each other, and + the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up. + They often thought of the philopena they had eaten + together, and wondered if they should know each other + when they met. He remembered her as a pretty little + girl dressed in green silk and playing with a snow-white + cat; while she remembered him as a handsome + boy, wearing a little sword, the handle of which was + covered with jewels. But they knew that each must + have changed a great deal in all this time. +</p> +<p> + Neither of these young people had any parents; the + Prince lived with guardians and the Princess with + uncles. +</p> +<p> + The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising + and energetic men, and were allowed to govern the + country until the Prince came of age. The capital city + was a very fine city when the old king died; but the + guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set + to work with all their might and main to improve it. + They tore down old houses and made a great many + new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges + over the river on which the city stood; they constructed + aqueducts to bring water from streams many miles + away; and they were at work all the time upon some + extensive building enterprise. +</p> +<p> + The Prince did not take much interest in the works + which were going on under direction of his guardians; + and when he rode out, he preferred to go into the country + or to ride through some of the quaint old streets, + where nothing had been changed for hundreds of + years. +</p> +<p> + The uncles of the Princess were very different people + from the guardians of the Prince. There were three + of them, and they were very quiet and cosey old men, + who disliked any kind of bustle or disturbance, and + wished that every thing might remain as they had + always known it. It even worried them a little to find + that the Princess was growing up. They would have + much preferred that she should remain exactly as she + was when they first took charge of her. Then they + never would have been obliged to trouble their minds + about any changes in the manner of taking care of her. + But they did not worry their minds very much, after + all. They wished to make her guardianship as little + laborious or exhausting as possible, and so, divided the + work; one of them took charge of her education, another + of her food and lodging, and the third of her + dress. The first sent for teachers, and told them to + teach her; the second had handsome apartments prepared + for her use, and gave orders that she should + have every thing she needed to eat and drink; while + the third commanded that she should have a complete + outfit of new clothes four times a year. Thus every + thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the three + uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard + work. There were never any new houses built in that + city, and if any thing had to be repaired, it was done + with as little noise and dirt as possible. The city and + the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and the + three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great + comfortable thrones. +</p> +<p> + Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things + except the Princess. She often thought to herself that + nothing would be more delightful than a little noise + and motion, and she wondered if the whole world + were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last, + she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the + place any longer; but she could think of nothing to do + but to go and try to find the Prince with whom she had + eaten a philopena. If she should win, he must marry + her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in some + place where things would be bright and lively. So, + early one morning, she put on her white dress, and + mounting her prancing black horse, she rode away from + the city. Only one person saw her go, for nearly all + the people were asleep. +</p> +<p> + About this time, the Prince made up his mind that + he could no longer stand the din and confusion, the + everlasting up-setting and setting-up in his native city. + He would go away, and see if he could find the Princess + with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he + should win, she would be obliged to marry him; and + then, perhaps, they could settle down in some place + where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the same + morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a + handsome suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle + white horse, he rode out of the city. Only one person + saw him go; for, even at that early hour, the people + were so busy that little attention was paid to his movements. +</p> +<p> + About half way between these two cities, in a tall + tower which stood upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive + Dwarf, whose whole object in life was to find out + what people were doing and why they did it. From + the top of this tower he generally managed to see all + that was going on in the surrounding country; and in + each of the two cities that have been mentioned he had + an agent, whose duty it was to send him word, by + means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened. + Before breakfast, on the morning when the + Prince and Princess rode away, a pigeon from the city + of the Prince came flying to the tower of the Inquisitive + Dwarf. +</p> +<p> + "Some new building started, I suppose," said the + Dwarf, as he took the little roll of paper from under + the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is very different! + 'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and + is travelling to the north.'" +</p> +<p> + But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about + the meaning of this departure, another pigeon came + flying in from the city of the Princess. +</p> +<p> + "Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is + a long time since I have had a message from that city, + and my agent has been drawing his salary without + doing any work. What possibly can have happened + there?" +</p> +<p> + When he read that the Princess had ridden alone + from the city that morning, and was travelling to the + south, he was truly amazed. +</p> +<p> + "What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If + the city of the Prince were to the south of that + of the Princess, then I might understand it; for they + would be going to see each other, and that would be + natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her + city, they are travelling in opposite directions. And + what is the meaning of this? I most certainly must + find out." +</p> +<p> + The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he + employed to attend to his most important business. + These were a Gryphoness, a Water Sprite, and an + Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for + there were some things he would do which no one else + would think of attempting. The Dwarf called to him + the Gryphoness, the oldest and most discreet of the + three, and told her of the departure of the Princess. +</p> +<p> + "Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can, + and follow her, and do not return to me until you have + found out why she left her city, where she is going, + and what she expects to do when she gets there. + Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore, + you must take with you the Absolute Fool, to whom + she will probably be willing to talk; but you must see + that every thing is managed properly." +</p> +<p> + Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf + then called the Water Sprite, who was singing to herself + at the edge of a fountain, and telling her of the + departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow him, and + not to return until she had found out why he left his + city, where he was going, and what he intended to do + when he got there. +</p> +<p> + "The road to the north," he said, "lies along the + river bank; therefore, you can easily keep him company." +</p> +<p> + The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy + grass to the river, threw herself into it. Sometimes + she swam beneath the clear water; sometimes she rose + partly in the air, where she seemed like a little cloud + of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and + sometimes she floated upon the surface, her pale blue + robes undulating with the gentle waves, while her white + hands and feet shone in the sun like tiny crests of + foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously + and rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the + south. She did not forget to glance every now and + then upon the road which ran along the river bank; + and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the + Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the + water's edge, while his white horse was grazing near + by. +</p> +<p> + The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river, + and seating herself upon the edge of the grassy bank, + she spoke to him. The Prince looked up in astonishment, + but there was nothing in her appearance to + frighten him. +</p> +<p> + "I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command + of my master, to ask you why you left your city, where + you are going, and what you intend to do when you + get there." +</p> +<p> + The Prince then told her why he had left his city, + and what he intended to do when he had found the + Princess. +</p> +<p> + "But where I am going," he said, "I do not know, + myself. I must travel and travel until I succeed in + the object of my search." +</p> +<p> + The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then + she said: +</p> +<p> + "If I were you, I would not travel to the north. + It is cold and dreary there, and your Princess would + not dwell in such a region. A little above us, on the + other side of this river, there is a stream which runs + sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and + which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is + the most beautiful country in the world, and you will + be much more likely to find your Princess there than + among the desolate mountains of the north." +</p> +<p> + "I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I + will go there, if you will show me the way." +</p> +<p> + "The road runs along the bank of the river," said + the Water Sprite; "and we shall soon reach the Land + of the Lovely Lakes." +</p> +<p> + The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the + river, and was soon riding along the bank of the + stream, while the Water Sprite gayly floated upon its + dancing ripples. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit + of the Princess, she kept out of sight among the bushes + by the roadside; but sped swiftly along. The Absolute + Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse, rode boldly + along upon the open road. He was a good-looking + youth, with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome + figure. As he cantered gayly along, he felt himself + capable of every noble action which the human mind + has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him, + and in the course of the morning they overtook the + Princess, who was allowing her horse to walk in the + shade by the roadside. The Absolute Fool dashed up + to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had + left her city, where she was going, and what she intended + to do when she got there. +</p> +<p> + The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my + city because I wanted to," she said. "I am going + about my business, and when I get to the proper place, + I shall attend to it." +</p> +<p> + "Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your + confidence, do you? But allow me to remark that I + have a Gryphoness with me who is very frightful to + look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the + bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my + questions, she must come out and talk to you, and that + is all there is about it." +</p> +<p> + "If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the + Princess, "let her come out. No matter how frightful + she is, I would rather she should come where I can see + her, than to have her hiding near me." +</p> +<p> + The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now + came out into the road. The horse of the Princess + reared in affright, but his young rider patted him on + the neck, and quieted his fears. +</p> +<p> + "What do you and this young man want?" said the + Princess to the Gryphoness, "and why do you question + me?" +</p> +<p> + "It is not of our own will that we do it," said the + Gryphoness, very respectfully; "but our master, the + Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to obtain information + about the points on which the young man questioned + you; and until we have found out these things, it is + impossible for us to return." +</p> +<p> + "I am opposed to answering impertinent questions," + replied the Princess; "but in order to rid myself + of you, I will tell you the reason of my journey." + And she then stated briefly the facts of the case. +</p> +<p> + "Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very + sorry; but you cannot tell us where you are going, + and we cannot return until we know that. But you + need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we + can assist you in the object of your journey. This + young man is sometimes very useful, and I shall be + glad to do any thing that I can to help you. If you + should think that I would injure you, or willingly + annoy you by my presence, it would grieve me to the + heart." And as she spoke, a tear bedimmed her eye. +</p> +<p> + The Princess was touched by the emotion of the + Gryphoness. +</p> +<p> + "You may accompany me," she said, "and I will + trust you both. You must know this country better + than I do. Have you any advice to give me in regard + to my journey?" +</p> +<p> + "One thing I would strongly advise," said the + Gryphoness, "and that is, that you do not travel any + farther until we know in what direction it will be best + to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a worthy + woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this + young man and I will scour the country round about, + and try to find some news of your Prince. The young + man will return and report to you to-morrow morning. + And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and + obey you as your servant. As for me, unless we have + found the Prince, I shall continue searching for him. + There is a prince in the city to the north of my master's + tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he whom you + seek." +</p> +<p> + "You can find out if it is he," answered the + Princess, "by asking about the philopena." +</p> +<p> + "That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will + return hither as speedily as possible." And, with a + respectful salutation, the Gryphoness and the Absolute + Fool departed by different ways. +</p> +<p> + The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she + took lodgings. +</p> +<p> + The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to + the inn, and seeing the Princess, said: "I rode until + after night-fall, searching for the Prince, before it + occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I would + not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of + that, I rode straight to the nearest house, and slept + until daybreak, when I remembered that I was to report + to you this morning. But as I have heard no news + of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I + think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly + here, where there is nothing of interest going on, and + when a single hour's delay may cause you to miss the + object of your search. The Prince may be in one + place this morning, and there is no knowing where he + will be in the afternoon. While the Gryphoness is + searching, we should search also. We can return + before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the + direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she + can quickly overtake us. It is my opinion that not a + moment should be lost. I will be your guide. I know + this country well." +</p> +<p> + The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning, + and consented to set out. There were some + beautiful mountains to the south-east; and among + these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good + taste would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore, + took this direction. But when they had travelled an + hour or more, the mountains began to look bare and + bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not + believe any prince would live there. He therefore + advised that they turn into a road that led to the + north-east. It was a good road; and therefore he + thought it led to a good place, where a person of good + sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they + therefore travelled. They had ridden but a few miles + when they met three men, well armed and mounted. + These men drew up their horses, and respectfully + saluted the Princess. +</p> +<p> + "High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect + we know you to be such, we would inform you that we + are the soldiers of the King, the outskirts of whose + dominions you have reached. It is our duty to question + all travellers, and, if their object in coming to + our country is a good one, to give them whatever + assistance and information they may require. Will + you tell us why you are come?" +</p> +<p> + "Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool, + riding up in a great passion. "How dare you interfere + with a princess who has left her city because it + was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a + prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order + that she may marry him. Out of my way, or I will + draw my sword and cleave you to the earth, and thus + punish your unwarrantable curiosity!" +</p> +<p> + The soldiers could not repress a smile. +</p> +<p> + "In order to prevent mischief," they said to the + Absolute Fool, "we shall be obliged to take you into + custody." +</p> +<p> + This they immediately did, and then requested the + Princess to accompany them to the palace of their + King, where she would receive hospitality and aid. +</p> +<p> + The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality. + He had no son, and he much wished he had + one; for in that case it might be his Prince for whom + the young lady was looking. But there was a prince, + he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was + probably the very man; and he would send and make + inquiries. In the mean time, the Princess would be + entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her + servant would make a suitable apology, his violent + language would be pardoned. But the Absolute Fool + positively refused to do this. +</p> +<p> + "I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit + would do such a thing. What I say, I stand by." +</p> +<p> + "Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight + a wild beast." And he gave orders that the affair + should be arranged for the following day. +</p> +<p> + In a short time, however, some of his officers came + to him and told him that there were no wild beasts; + those on hand having been kept so long that they had + become tame. +</p> +<p> + "To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they + said; "but he is so dreadfully cross and has had so + much experience in these fights, that for a long time it + has not been considered fair to allow any one to enter + the ring with him." +</p> +<p> + "It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young + man fight a tame beast; but, under the circumstances, + the best thing to do will be to represent the case to + him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we have not + an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice + between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition + and experience you will explain to him." +</p> +<p> + When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool, + he refused with great scorn to fight a tame beast. +</p> +<p> + "I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public," + he said; "I will take the old lion." +</p> +<p> + The next day, the court and the public assembled to + see the fight; but the Queen and our Princess took a + ride into the country, not wishing to witness a combat + of this kind, especially one which was so unequal. + The King ordered that every advantage should be + given to the young man, in order that he might have + every possible chance of success in fighting an animal + which had been a victor on so many similar occasions. + A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile, into + which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment, + but where the lion could not follow him, + was placed in the middle of the arena, and the youth + was supplied with all the weapons he desired. When + every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his + stand in the centre of the arena, and the door of the + lion's den was opened. The great beast came out, he + looked about for an instant, and then, with majestic + step, advanced toward the young man. When he was + within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring. +</p> +<p> + The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a + creature, and he could not restrain his admiration. + With folded arms and sparkling eyes, he gazed with + delight upon the lion's massive head, his long and + flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful + feet and legs. There was an air of grandeur and + strength about him which completely enraptured the + youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt before him, + and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing + eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed. + "What unfathomable expression! What + possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere, + what majesty of curve!" +</p> +<p> + The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct + of the young man; and he soon began to suppose that + this was not the person he was to fight, but probably a + keeper, who was examining into his condition. After + submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a + mighty yawn, which startled the spectators, but which + delighted the Absolute Fool; for never before had he + beheld such a depth of potentiality. He knelt in silent + delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength. +</p> +<p> + Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however, + and he turned and walked back to his den. "When + their man is ready," he thought to himself, "I will + come out and fight him." +</p> +<p> + One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude. + "The youth has conquered!" they cried. "He has + actually frightened the lion back into his den!" + Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool + upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the + open square in front of the palace, that he might be + rewarded for his bravery. Here the King, followed + by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much + delighted as any one at the victory of the young + man. +</p> +<p> + "Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the + bravest of the brave. You are the only man I know + who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you shall + marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only + with the bravest should she wed." +</p> +<p> + At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning + from their ride, heard with joy the result of the + combat; and riding up to the victor, the Queen + declared that she would gladly join with her royal husband + in giving their daughter to so brave a man. +</p> +<p> + The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent + thought; then, addressing the King, he said: +</p> +<p> + "Was Your Majesty's father a king?" +</p> +<p> + "He was," was the answer. +</p> +<p> + "Was his father of royal blood?" +</p> +<p> + "No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather + was a man of the people; but his pre-eminent + virtue, his great ability as a statesman, and the dignity + and nobility of his character made him the unanimous + choice of the nation as its sovereign." +</p> +<p> + "I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool; + "for it makes it necessary for me to decline the kind + offer of your daughter in marriage. If I marry a + princess at all, she must be one who can trace back her + lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And + as he spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride. +</p> +<p> + For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then + loudly he shouted: "Ho, guards! Annihilate him! + Avenge this insult!" +</p> +<p> + At these words, the sword of every by-stander + leaped from its scabbard; but, before any one could + take a step forward, the Princess seized the Absolute + Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs to + her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and + shouted to her to let go; but she held firmly to his + hair, and as he was extraordinarily active and fleet of + foot, he kept pace with the galloping horse. A great + crowd of people started in pursuit, but as none of them + were mounted, they were soon left behind. +</p> +<p> + "Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the + Absolute Fool, as he bounded along. "You don't + know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!" +</p> +<p> + But the Princess never relinquished her hold until + they were out of the King's domain. +</p> +<p> + "A little more," cried the indignant youth, when + she let him go, "and you would have pulled out a + handful of my hair." +</p> +<p> + "A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously, + "and you would have been cut to pieces; for you + have not sense enough to take care of yourself. I am + sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which the + Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to + wait there for her as she told me to do." +</p> +<p> + "Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have + been much better." +</p> +<p> + "Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there, + and see if she has returned." +</p> +<p> + "If we can find it," said the other, "which I very + much doubt." +</p> +<p> + There were several roads at this point and, of + course, they took the wrong one. As they went on, + the Absolute Fool complained bitterly that he had left + his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk. Sometimes + he stopped, and said he would go back after it; + but this the Princess sternly forbade. +</p> +<hr> +<p> + When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince, + it was night; but she was not sorry for this. She did + not like to show herself much in the daytime, because + so many people were frightened by her. After a good + deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had + certainly left the city, although his guardians did not + seem to be aware of it. They were so busy with a + new palace, in part of which they were living, that + they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon + him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew + her, and was not afraid of her, and who told her that + the day before, when he was up the river, he had seen + the Prince on his white horse, riding on the bank of + the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something + which now looked like a woman, and again like + a puff of mist. The Gryphoness reflected. +</p> +<p> + "If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said + to herself, "I believe that he is the very one whom + the Princess is looking for, and that he has set out in + search of her; and that creature in the water must be + our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent + out to discover where the Prince is going. If he had + told me about this, it would have saved much trouble. + From the direction in which they were going, I feel + sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to + the Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go + there, if she can possibly get an excuse. I will follow + them. I suppose the Princess will be tired, waiting at + the inn; but I must know where the Prince is, and if + he is really her Prince, before I go back to her." +</p> +<p> + When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the + Lovely Lakes, she wandered all that day and the next + night; but she saw nothing of those for whom she was + looking. +</p> +<p> + The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on + until near the close of the afternoon, when the sky + began to be overcast, and it looked like rain. They + were then not far from a large piece of water; and at + a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the + shore. +</p> +<p> + "I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the + Princess. +</p> +<p> + "It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute + Fool. "I should prefer to be on dry land." +</p> +<p> + "As the land is not likely to be very dry when it + rains," said the Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if + it is upon wet water." +</p> +<p> + "Women will always have their own way," muttered + the Absolute Fool. +</p> +<p> + The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who + gave the Princess a hearty welcome. +</p> +<p> + "You may go on board if you choose," said the + Absolute Fool to the Princess, "but I shall not risk + my life in a ship manned by women." +</p> +<p> + "It is well that you are of that opinion," said + the Captain of the Amazons, who had heard this remark; + "for you would not be allowed to come on board + if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to protect + you and the horse in case it should rain, and will + send you something to eat." +</p> +<p> + "While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon + Captain, she told her about the Prince, and how she + was trying to find him. +</p> +<p> + "Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the + search, and take you in my ship. Some of my crew told + me that yesterday they saw a young man, who looked + like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which + adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will + sail after him. We shall keep near the shore, and + your servant can mount your horse and ride along the + edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of + this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us." +</p> +<p> + Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her + crew together. "Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said. + "We have an object. I never sail without an object, + and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our + present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess + is in search; and we must spare no pains to bring + him to her, dead or alive." +</p> +<p> + Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not + hear this speech. The day was a fine one, and before + long the sun became very hot. The ship was sailing + quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode down + to the water's edge, and called out that he had something + very important to communicate to the Princess. + As he was not allowed to come on board, she was + obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed in a + small boat. +</p> +<p> + "I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool, + "that it is perfectly ridiculous, and very uncomfortable, + to continue this search any longer. I would go + back, but my master would not suffer me to return + without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore, + a plan to propose. Give up your useless search + for this Prince, who is probably not nearly so handsome + and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We will then + return, and I will assume the reins of government in + your domain." +</p> +<p> + "Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you + have been doing; for I wish some one to take care of + my horse." And without another word, she returned + to the ship. +</p> +<p> + "I should like to sail as far as possible from shore + during the rest of the trip," said she to the Captain. +</p> +<p> + "Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain + to the steers-woman; "and keep him well out + from land." +</p> +<p> + When they had sailed through a small stream into + the lake adjoining, the out-look, who was swinging in + a hammock hung between the tops of the two masts, + sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity + on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under + coils of rope, hem-stitching and embroidery were laid + aside, and every woman was at her post. +</p> +<p> + "The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain, + "and we will not awaken her. It will be so nice to + surprise her by bringing the Prince to her. We will + run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon him. + But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he + resists!" +</p> +<p> + The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance + ahead, was so pleasantly employed that he had + not noticed the approach of the ship. He was sitting + upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the water's + edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found + on the shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes + from the lake, holding them up in the sunlight to + admire their brilliant colors and graceful forms, and then + returning them uninjured to the water. The Water + Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish + to come up and be caught; for the gentle Prince + would not hurt them. It was very delightful and rare + sport, and it is not surprising that it entirely engrossed + the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently + landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back + from the water. Then, at their Captain's command, + they rushed upon the Prince. +</p> +<p> + It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who + had been searching for the Prince, caught her first + sight of him. Perceiving that he was about to be + attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon sailors + reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they + began to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly; + but seeing that his assailants were women, he would + not draw his sword. The Amazon Captain and mate, + who were armed with broad knives, now raised their + weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or + die. But at this moment, the Gryphoness reached the + spot, and catching the Captain and mate, each by an + arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The + other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and + the Prince defended himself by pushing them into the + shallow water, where the Water Sprite nearly stifled + them by throwing over them showers of spray. And + now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a + youth engaged in combat with the Amazon sailors, his + blood boiled with indignation. +</p> +<p> + "A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What + a coward! My arm shall ever assist the weaker + sex." +</p> +<p> + Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and + rushed upon the Prince. The Gryphoness saw the + danger of the latter, and she would have gone to his + assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of + the Amazon Captain and mate. +</p> +<p> + Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree + where she deposited the two warlike women upon a + lofty branch, from which she knew it would take them + a long time to get down to the ground. When she + descended she found that the Absolute Fool had + reached the Prince. The latter, being a brave fellow, + although of so gentle a disposition, had been glad to + find a man among his assailants, and had drawn his + sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to + fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by + the waist and hurled him backward into some bushes. +</p> +<p> + "You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince. + "He is beneath your rank! And as you will not draw + your sword against these Amazons you must fly from + them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you." +</p> +<p> + The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his + sword he rapidly ran along the bank, followed by some + of the Amazons who had succeeded in getting the + water out of their eyes and mouths. +</p> +<p> + "Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the + Absolute Fool. "If you had not interfered with me," + he said to the Gryphoness, "I should soon have put + an end to such a coward." +</p> +<p> + The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to + which the ship was moored, when the Princess, who + had been awakened by the noise of the combat, appeared + upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she + saw the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly + the one for whom she was looking. Fearing that the + pursuing Amazons might kill him, she sprang from the + vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in a rope, + and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the + water, which was here quite deep, and immediately + sank out of sight. The Prince, who had noticed her + just as she sprang, and who felt equally convinced that + she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped + his flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as + the Princess rose to the surface, he reached out his + hand to her, and she took it. +</p> +<p> + "Philopena!" cried the Prince. +</p> +<p> + "You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking + the water from her curls, as he drew her ashore. +</p> +<p> + At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons + forbore to assail the Prince, and when the Captain + and the Mate had descended from the tree, every + thing was explained. +</p> +<p> + Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking + kind leave of the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite, + and of the Amazon sailors, who cheered them loudly, + rode away to the city of the Princess; while the three + servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their + master to report what had happened. +</p> +<p> + The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he + was obliged to go back on foot, having left his horse in + the kingdom where he had so narrowly escaped being + killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair pulled; + and had not been treated with proper respect by either + the Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself + deeply injured. When he reached home, he determined + that he would not remain in a position where his + great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do + something," he said, "which shall prove to the world + that I deserve to stand among the truly great. I will + reform my fellow beings, and I will begin by reforming + the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to his + master, and said: +</p> +<p> + "Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling + thus with the affairs of your neighbors. Give up + your inquisitive habits, and learn some useful business. + While you are doing this, I will consent to manage + your affairs." +</p> +<p> + The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I + have a great desire to know the exact appearance of + the North Pole. Go and discover it for me." +</p> +<p> + The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and + has not yet returned. +</p> +<p> + When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her + city, her uncles were very much amazed; for they had + not known she had gone away. "If you are going to + get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then + you will not need our care, and we shall be free from + the great responsibility which is bearing us down." +</p> +<p> + In a short time the wedding took place, and then + the question arose in which city should the young + couple dwell. The Princess decided it. +</p> +<p> + "In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will + live in your city, where all is life and activity; and + where the houses are so well built with all the latest improvements. + In the summer, we will come to my city, + where everything is old, and shady, and serene." + This they did, and were very happy. +</p> +<p> + The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and + live with the Princess, for she had taken a great fancy + to her; but she did not think it worth her while to ask + permission to do this. +</p> +<p> + "My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but + my appearance is against me." +</p> +<p> + As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate + mood, because she had left so soon the Land of + the Lovely Lakes, where she had been so happy. The + more she thought about it, the more she grieved; + and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer, + she sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High + into the bright air the fountain threw her, scattering + her into a thousand drops of glittering water; but not + one drop fell back into the basin. The great, warm + sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they + floated away across the bright blue sky. +</p> + + +<div style="height: 6em;"></div> + +<hr> + +<h2> + <b>SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG.</b> +</h2> +<hr> +<center> + <i>THIRTIETH THOUSAND.</i> +</center> +<p> + <i>"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to + add to our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a + great lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with + real regret when the episode is over."</i>—Louisa M. Alcott. +</p> +<hr> +<h2>LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY.</h2> +<center>By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT.<br><br> + Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. <i>One volume, square 8vo, handsomely + bound.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p> + In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has given + us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few real classics in the + literature for children. She has presented a picture of child-life such as we have + never had before; she has not only taken a subject quite new but she has written + with such exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American boy's + career that even were the situations old the story would be a notable one. +</p> +<p> + "Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly not a + "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the statement may seem. + The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but with all the elements of a man. + Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy a thoughtful boy, and she is right in + believing that the stories children like best are those best worth thinking about + when they are being read. +</p> +<center> + <i>A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE.</i> +</center> +<hr> +<h2>HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates.</h2> +<h3><i>A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND</i></h3> +<center>By MARY MAPES DODGE.<br><br> + <i>One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations.</i> $1.50. +</center> +<p> + The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received has increased + from year to year, until the original plates have become badly worn from + constant use. The publishers have therefore reissued at half its original price + their beautiful Holiday Edition, of which on its first appearance the Nation said: + "We some time ago expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful + children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates' deserved + an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland instead of America. The + publishers have just issued an edition in accordance with this suggestion. The + pictures are admirable, and the whole volume, in appearance and contents, need + not fear comparison with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years." +</p> +<h2>AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS.</h2> +<center>By EDMUND ALTON.<br><br> + With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of Congress, etc., etc. +<br><i>One volume, square 8vo.</i> $2.50. +</center> +<p> + The author of this book was for four years connected with the legislative branch + of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial page. His record of the + memorable scenes and events which came under his observation is enlivened by + anecdotes of public men, humorous and exciting episodes at the national capitol, + and a great variety of stirring incidents. +</p> +<h2>THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND.</h2> +<center> + 1580—1643.<br><br> + By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE.<br><br> + With many illustrations and maps. <i>One volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50. +</center> +<p> + In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this story, emphasis + has been given to everything that went to make up the home-life of the pioneer + settlers, or that relates to their various avocations." In all history no better + examples of manliness, energy, and conscientiousness could be found, to be read + about and studied by a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in + such a vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance. +</p> +<h2>THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK.</h2> +<center>By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.<br><br> + With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET.<br> + <i>One volume, square 16mo.</i> $1.00. +</center> +<p> + "The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the Giant-Killer,' + 'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs. + Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the + fairy, the wicked princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes + of that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss Rosina + Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many pictures scattered + through its pages accord well with the good old-fashioned character of the tales."— + Frank R. Stockton. +</p> +<h2>BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES.</h2> +<center>By MRS. BURTON HARRISON.<br><br> + Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. <i>One volume, 12mo.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p> + "Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in America, or anywhere + else, might become intimately acquainted with the contents of this book. + There is more virtue in one of these stories than in the entire library of modern + juvenile literature."—Julian Hawthorne. +</p> +<h4>THE</h4> +<h2>MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD,</h2> +<h3>Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire.</h3> +<center>Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE.<br> + <i>One volume, quarto,</i> $3.00.<br><br> + <i>"The Prince of Story-Tellers."</i>—London Times. +</center> +<hr> +<h2>THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE.</h2> +<center>Uniform illustrated edition. <i>Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over 750 full-page + illustrations.</i> Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold also in separate volumes. +</center> +<p> + The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in such a realistic + manner and with so much scientific knowledge ingeniously wrought into them that + they possess a fascination that is all their own. Their great and continued popularity, + among both old and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in + which all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained, and the + volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding. +</p> +<pre> +Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00 +A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00 +Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00 +Dick Sanps..................................................... 2 00 +A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00 +From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty + Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00 +The Steam House. Part I.—The Demon of Cawnpore. + Part II.—Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00 +The Giant Raft. Part I.—Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon. + Part II.—The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00 +The Mysterious Island. Part I.—Dropped from the Clouds. + Part II.—Abandoned. Part III.—The Secret of the Island. + The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50 +</pre> +<center><i>A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE</i></center> +<h2>ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS.</h2> +<hr> +<h3>THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE.</h3> +<p> + Intelligence of Animals—Mountain Adventures—Bodily Strength and Skill—Wonderful + Escapes—Thunder and Lightning—Adventures on the Great Hunting + Grounds—Wonders of the Human Body—The Sublime in Nature. +</p> +<h3>THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE.</h3> +<p> + Wonders of Heat—Wonders of the Heavens—Wonders of Optics—The Sun—Wonders + of Acoustics—Wonders of Water—Wonders of the Moon—Meteors, + Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena. +</p> +<h3>THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.</h3> +<p> + Egypt 3,300 Years Ago—Wonders of Sculpture—Wonders of Glass Making—Wonders + of European Art—Wonders of Pompeii—Wonders of Architecture—The + Wonders of Italian Art—The Wonders of Engraving. +</p> +<center><i>Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable illustrations.</i><br><br> + Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00. +</center> +<p> + Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per volume. +</p> +<h2>CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS.</h2> +<center>By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.<br><br> + With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE DAVIS. <i>One + volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50. +</center> +<p> + "The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of events of + the first half of the present century, and the scope of the book comprehends all the + prominent steps by which we have reached our present position both as regards + extent of country and industrial prosperity. They include an account of the first + Steamboat, the Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida, + the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no event of + importance has been omitted, and any child fond of story-telling will gain from + this book an amount of knowledge which may far exceed that which is usually + acquired from the rigid instruction of the school-room." +</p> +<h2>CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY.</h2> +<center>By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT.<br><br> + With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE DAVIS. <i>One + volume, 12mo.</i> $1.50. +</center> +<hr> +<h2>THE IVORY KING.</h2> +<h3>A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies.</h3> +<center>By CHARLES F. HOLDER.<br><br> + <i>Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p> + The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought together + in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely of his personal observations. + It forms one of the most stimulating and delightful contributions to the class + of Natural History books for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting + forerunner to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and + has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The summary of + its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant, its habits and ways and + its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four Tusked Elephants, Hunting and + Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White + Elephant, Trained Elephants, Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The + numerous illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great variety + of sources. +</p> +<p> + It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and valued + addition to the library of the average boy or girl just beginning to cultivate a love + of reading and an interest in the world around them. +</p> +<h2>MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE.</h2> +<center>By CHARLES F. HOLDER.<br><br> + <i>Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<hr> +<h2>SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS.</h2> +<hr> +<h2>THE BOY'S</h2> +<h1><i>Library of Legend and Chivalry.</i></h1> +<h3>EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER,</h3> +<center><i>And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES.</i></center> +<hr> +<h3>THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR.</h3> +<h3>THE BOY'S FROISSART.</h3> +<h3>KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES.</h3> +<h3>THE BOY'S PERCY.</h3> +<center> + <i>Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00.</i><br><br> + <i>Sold separately. Price per volume $2.00.</i> +</center> +<hr> +<p> + "Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories, character and the ideals + of character remain at the simplest and the purest. The romantic history transpires + in the healthy atmosphere of the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky.... + The figures of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for + Law, are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the book is + for strength to do well and nobly in the world."—<i>The Independent</i>. +</p> +<hr> +<h2>THE BOY'S</h2> +<h1><i>Library of Pluck and Action.</i></h1> +<h3>A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP,</h3> +<center>By FRANK R. STOCKTON.</center> +<h3>HANS BRINKER;<br> +OR, THE SILVER SKATES.</h3> +<center> + A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND.<br><br> + By MRS. MARY MAPES DODGE. +</center> +<h3>THE BOY EMIGRANTS,</h3> +<center>By Noah Brooks.</center> +<h3>PHAETON ROGERS,</h3> +<center>By Rossiter Johnson.<br><br> + Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00.<br> + Sold separately, price per volume $1.50. +</center> +<p> + In the "<i>Boy's Library of Pluck and Action</i>," the design was to bring together + the representative and most popular books of four of the best known writers for young + people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge, Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and + Rossiter Johnson are familiar ones in every household, and a set of books, to which + each has contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every boy who + likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are beautifully illustrated and + uniformly bound in a most attractive form. +</p> +<hr> +<h1><i>Scribner's List of Juvenile Books.</i></h1> +<hr> +<center><i>The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls.</i></center> +<hr> +<h2>THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED.</h2> +<center>By JAMES BALDWIN.<br><br> + With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle. + <i>One volume, square 12mo.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p> + Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in which it most + appeals to the boy-reader,—simply and strongly told, with all its fire and action, yet + without losing any of that strange charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which + every previous attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch. +</p> +<h2>THE STORY OF ROLAND.</h2> +<center>By JAMES BALDWIN.<br><br> + With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. <i>One volume, square 12mo.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p> + This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried." As Siegfried + was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the wants and the understanding + of young readers, so is this story a similar adaptation of the middle-age romances + relating to Charlemagne and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes + of the North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the Middle + Ages. +</p> +<p> + "We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this book. We commend + it to parents who are selecting literature for their children, assured, as we are, + that it will convince them that books may be found which will engage the attention, + and stimulate the imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting + the moral sensibilities."—Philadelphia Messenger. +</p> +<br> +<h3>THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK.</h3> +<hr> +<h2>THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK;</h2> +<h3>Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT.</h3> +<center>By DANIEL C. BEARD.<br><br> + With three hundred illustrations by the author. <i>One volume, 8vo.</i> $2.00. +</center> +<p><i> + Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and practical American + boy the things he really wants to know, the thousand things he wants to do, + and the ten thousand ways in which he can do them, with the helps and ingenious + contrivances which every boy can either procure or make.</i> +</p> +<p> + The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and he has made + an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern devices, besides himself inventing + an immense number of capital and practical ideas. +</p> +<hr> +<h3>FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES.</h3> +<hr> +<h2>THE STORY OF VITEAU.</h2> +<center> + With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch.<br> + <i>One volume, 12mo, extra cloth.</i> $1.50. +</center> +<p> + In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one that he + has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working. While describing the life + and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran, + or in the woods among the <i>Cotereaux</i>, he gives a picture of France in the age + of chivalry, and tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure + and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to the attraction of + the book. +</p> +<h2>A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP.</h2> +<center><i>Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth.</i> $1.50.</center> +<p> + "'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor to his 'Rudder + Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of delicious nonsense that will be + enjoyed by men and women.... The less serious parts are described with a mock + gravity that is the perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein + of good sense running through it, so that really useful information is conveyed to the + young and untravelled reader's mind."—<i>Philadelphia Evening Bulletin</i>. +</p> +<h2>THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES.</h2> +<center>With illustrations by Bensell and others. <i>One volume, quarto, boards.</i> $1.50.</center> +<p> + "Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of writing in the + easiest of colloquial English, without descending to the plane of the vulgar or commonplace. + The very perfection of his work hinders the reader from perceiving at once + how good of its kind it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,—a + real humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy fancy,—his + stories become irresistibly attractive."—<i>Philadelphia Times</i>. +</p> +<br> +<h3>NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES.</h3> +<hr> +<h2>ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION.</h2> +<p> + One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover, three hundred and + seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new edition. Price reduced from + $3.00 to $1.50. +</p> +<h2>TALES OUT OF SCHOOL.</h2> +<p> + One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three hundred and + fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new edition. Price reduced from + $3.00 to $1.50. +</p> +<hr> +<h3>Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York.</h3> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful +Tales, by Frank R. Stockton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + +***** This file should be named 12067-h.htm or 12067-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/ + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/old/12067-h/images/map.png b/old/12067-h/images/map.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5332e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067-h/images/map.png diff --git a/old/12067.txt b/old/12067.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6a3dd4c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6552 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales +by Frank R. Stockton + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful Tales + +Author: Frank R. Stockton + +Release Date: April 17, 2004 [EBook #12067] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + + + + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + + + + +[Transcriber's note: Italics and bold markup only occurred in the +ads for other books at the beginning and end, and using the standard +_italics_ or *bold* just made it hard to read, so this markup has +been removed in the plain-text version.] + + + + +FRANK R. STOCKTON'S WRITINGS. + + * * * * * + +New Uniform Edition. + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN, and Other Fanciful Tales. +THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. +THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. +THE LATE MRS NULL. +RUDDER GRANGE. + +The set, five vols., $6.25; each, $1.25. + + * * * * * + +RUDDER GRANGE. New Illustrated Edition. With over 100 Illustrations +by A.B. Frost. Square 12mo, $2.00. + + * * * * * + +THE LADY OR THE TIGER? and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents. + +THE CHRISTMAS WRECK, and Other Stories. 12mo, paper, 50 cents. + +RUDDER GRANGE. 12mo, paper, 60 cents. + + * * * * * + +A JOLLY FRIENDSHIP. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. + +THE STORY OF VITEAU. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.50. + +THE TING-A-LING TALES. Illustrated, 12mo, $1.00. + +THE FLOATING PRINCE, and Other Fairy Tales. Illustrated, 4to, cloth, +$2.50; boards, $1.50. + +ROUNDABOUT RAMBLERS IN LANDS OF FACT AND FANCY. Illustrated. 4to, +boards, $1.50. + +TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. Illustrated. 4to, boards, $1.50. + + + + + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN + +AND + +OTHER FANCIFUL TALES + +BY + +FRANK R. STOCKTON + + + + + +New York +1887 +Charles Scribner's Sons. + +Rand Avery Company, +Electrotypers and Printers, +Boston. + + + + + +CONTENTS. + + * * * * * + + I. THE BEE-MAN OF ORN + + II. THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON + + III. OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD + + IV. THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM + + V. CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM + + VI. PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH + + VII. THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS + + VIII. THE BANISHED KING + + IX. THE PHILOPENA + + + + + +THE BEE-MAN OF ORN. + + * * * * * + +In the ancient country of Orn, there lived an old man who was called +the Bee-man, because his whole time was spent in the company of bees. +He lived in a small hut, which was nothing more than an immense +bee-hive, for these little creatures had built their honeycombs in +every corner of the one room it contained, on the shelves, under the +little table, all about the rough bench on which the old man sat, and +even about the head-board and along the sides of his low bed. All day +the air of the room was thick with buzzing insects, but this did not +interfere in any way with the old Bee-man, who walked in among them, +ate his meals, and went to sleep, without the slightest fear of being +stung. He had lived with the bees so long, they had become so +accustomed to him, and his skin was so tough and hard, that the bees +no more thought of stinging him than they would of stinging a tree or +a stone. A swarm of bees had made their hive in a pocket of his old +leathern doublet; and when he put on this coat to take one of his +long walks in the forest in search of wild bees' nests, he was very +glad to have this hive with him, for, if he did not find any wild +honey, he would put his hand in his pocket and take out a piece of a +comb for a luncheon. The bees in his pocket worked very +industriously, and he was always certain of having something to eat +with him wherever he went. He lived principally upon honey; and when +he needed bread or meat, he carried some fine combs to a village not +far away and bartered them for other food. He was ugly, untidy, +shrivelled, and brown. He was poor, and the bees seemed to be his +only friends. But, for all that, he was happy and contented; he had +all the honey he wanted, and his bees, whom he considered the best +company in the world, were as friendly and sociable as they could be, +and seemed to increase in number every day. + +One day, there stopped at the hut of the Bee-man a Junior Sorcerer. +This young person, who was a student of magic, necromancy, and the +kindred arts, was much interested in the Bee-man, whom he had +frequently noticed in his wanderings, and he considered him an +admirable subject for study. He had got a great deal of useful +practice by endeavoring to find out, by the various rules and laws of +sorcery, exactly why the old Bee-man did not happen to be something +that he was not, and why he was what he happened to be. He had +studied a long time at this matter, and had found out something. + +"Do you know," he said, when the Bee-man came out of his hut, "that +you have been transformed?" + +"What do you mean by that?" said the other, much surprised. + +"You have surely heard of animals and human beings who have been +magically transformed into different kinds of creatures?" + +"Yes, I have heard of these things," said the Bee-man; "but what have +I been transformed from?" + +"That is more than I know," said the Junior Sorcerer. "But one thing +is certain--you ought to be changed back. If you will find out what +you have been transformed from, I will see that you are made all +right again. Nothing would please me better than to attend to such a +case." + +And, having a great many things to study and investigate, the Junior +Sorcerer went his way. + +This information greatly disturbed the mind of the Bee-man. If he had +been changed from something else, he ought to be that other thing, +whatever it was. He ran after the young man, and overtook him. + +"If you know, kind sir," he said, "that I have been transformed, you +surely are able to tell me what it is that I was." + +"No," said the Junior Sorcerer, "my studies have not proceeded far +enough for that. When I become a senior I can tell you all about it. +But, in the meantime, it will be well for you to try to discover for +yourself your original form, and when you have done that, I will get +some of the learned masters of my art to restore you to it. It will +be easy enough to do that, but you could not expect them to take the +time and trouble to find out what it was." + +And, with these words, he hurried away, and was soon lost to view. + +Greatly disquieted, the Bee-man retraced his steps, and went to his +hut. Never before had he heard any thing which had so troubled him. + +"I wonder what I was transformed from?" he thought, seating himself +on his rough bench. "Could it have been a giant, or a powerful +prince, or some gorgeous being whom the magicians or the fairies +wished to punish? It may be that I was a dog or a horse, or perhaps a +fiery dragon or a horrid snake. I hope it was not one of these. But, +whatever it was, every one has certainly a right to his original +form, and I am resolved to find out mine. I will start early +to-morrow morning, and I am sorry now that I have not more pockets to +my old doublet, so that I might carry more bees and more honey for my +journey." + +He spent the rest of the day in making a hive of twigs and straw, +and, having transferred to this a number of honey-combs and a colony +of bees which had just swarmed, he rose before sunrise the next day, +and having put on his leathern doublet, and having bound his new hive +to his back, he set forth on his quest; the bees who were to +accompany him buzzing around him like a cloud. + +As the Bee-man passed through the little village the people greatly +wondered at his queer appearance, with the hive upon his back. "The +Bee-man is going on a long expedition this time," they said; but no +one imagined the strange business on which he was bent. About noon he +sat down under a tree, near a beautiful meadow covered with blossoms, +and ate a little honey. Then he untied his hive and stretched himself +out on the grass to rest. As he gazed upon his bees hovering about +him, some going out to the blossoms in the sunshine, and some +returning laden with the sweet pollen, he said to himself, "They know +just what they have to do, and they do it; but alas for me! I know +not what I may have to do. And yet, whatever it may be, I am +determined to do it. In some way or other I will find out what was my +original form, and then I will have myself changed back to it." + +And now the thought came to him that perhaps his original form might +have been something very disagreeable, or even horrid. + +"But it does not matter," he said sturdily. "Whatever I was that +shall I be again. It is not right for any one to retain a form which +does not properly belong to him. I have no doubt I shall discover my +original form in the same way that I find the trees in which the wild +bees hive. When I first catch sight of a bee-tree I am drawn towards +it, I know not how. Something says to me: 'That is what you are +looking for.' In the same way I believe that I shall find my original +form. When I see it, I shall be drawn towards it. Something will say +to me: 'That is it.'" + +When the Bee-man was rested he started off again, and in about an +hour he entered a fair domain. Around him were beautiful lawns, grand +trees, and lovely gardens; while at a little distance stood the +stately palace of the Lord of the Domain. Richly dressed people were +walking about or sitting in the shade of the trees and arbors; +splendidly caparisoned horses were waiting for their riders; and +everywhere were seen signs of opulence and gayety. + +"I think," said the Bee-man to himself, "that I should like to stop +here for a time. If it should happen that I was originally like any +of these happy creatures it would please me much." + +He untied his hive, and hid it behind some bushes, and taking off his +old doublet, laid that beside it. It would not do to have his bees +flying about him if he wished to go among the inhabitants of this +fair domain. + +For two days the Bee-man wandered about the palace and its grounds, +avoiding notice as much as possible, but looking at every thing. He +saw handsome men and lovely ladies; the finest horses, dogs, and +cattle that were ever known; beautiful birds in cages, and fishes in +crystal globes, and it seemed to him that the best of all living +things were here collected. + +At the close of the second day, the Bee-man said to himself: "There +is one being here toward whom I feel very much drawn, and that is the +Lord of the Domain. I cannot feel certain that I was once like him, +but it would be a very fine thing if it were so; and it seems +impossible for me to be drawn toward any other being in the domain +when I look upon him, so handsome, rich, and powerful. But I must +observe him more closely, and feel more sure of the matter, before +applying to the sorcerers to change me back into a lord of a fair +domain." + +The next morning, the Bee-man saw the Lord of the Domain walking in +his gardens. He slipped along the shady paths, and followed him so as +to observe him closely, and find out if he were really drawn toward +this noble and handsome being. The Lord of the Domain walked on for +some time, not noticing that the Bee-man was behind him. But suddenly +turning, he saw the little old man. + +"What are you doing here, you vile beggar?" he cried; and he gave him +a kick that sent him into some bushes that grew by the side of the +path. + +The Bee-man scrambled to his feet, and ran as fast as he could to the +place where he had hidden his hive and his old doublet. + +"If I am certain of any thing," he thought, "it is that I was never a +person who would kick a poor old man. I will leave this place. I was +transformed from nothing that I see here." + +He now travelled for a day or two longer, and then he came to a great +black mountain, near the bottom of which was an opening like the +mouth of a cave. + +This mountain he had heard was filled with caverns and under-ground +passages, which were the abodes of dragons, evil spirits, horrid +creatures of all kinds. + +"Ah me!" said the Bee-man with a sigh, "I suppose I ought to visit +this place. If I am going to do this thing properly, I should look on +all sides of the subject, and I may have been one of those horrid +creatures myself." + +Thereupon he went to the mountain, and as he approached the opening +of the passage which led into its inmost recesses he saw, sitting +upon the ground, and leaning his back against a tree, a Languid +Youth. + +"Good-day," said this individual when he saw the Bee-man. "Are you +going inside?" + +"Yes," said the Bee-man, "that is what I intend to do." + +"Then," said the Languid Youth, slowly rising to his feet, "I think I +will go with you. I was told that if I went in there I should get my +energies toned up, and they need it very much; but I did not feel +equal to entering by myself, and I thought I would wait until some +one came along. I am very glad to see you, and we will go in +together." + +So the two went into the cave, and they had proceeded but a short +distance when they met a very little creature, whom it was easy to +recognize as a Very Imp. He was about two feet high, and resembled in +color a freshly polished pair of boots. He was extremely lively and +active, and came bounding toward them. + +"What did you two people come here for?" he asked. + +"I came," said the Languid Youth, "to have my energies toned up." + +"You have come to the right place," said the Very Imp. "We will tone +you up. And what does that old Bee-man want?" + +"He has been transformed from something, and wants to find out what +it is. He thinks he may have been one of the things in here." + +"I should not wonder if that were so," said the Very Imp, rolling his +head on one side, and eying the Bee-man with a critical gaze. + +"All right," said the Very Imp; "he can go around, and pick out his +previous existence. We have here all sorts of vile creepers, +crawlers, hissers, and snorters. I suppose he thinks any thing will +be better than a Bee-man." + +"It is not because I want to be better than I am," said the Bee-man, +"that I started out on this search. I have simply an honest desire to +become what I originally was." + +"Oh! that is it, is it?" said the other. "There is an idiotic +moon-calf here with a clam head, which must be just like what you +used to be." + +"Nonsense," said the Bee-man. "You have not the least idea what an +honest purpose is. I shall go about, and see for myself." + +"Go ahead," said the Very Imp, "and I will attend to this fellow who +wants to be toned up." So saying he joined the Languid Youth. + +"Look here," said that individual, regarding him with interest, "do +you black and shine yourself every morning?" + +"No," said the other, "it is water-proof varnish. You want to be +invigorated, don't you? Well, I will tell you a splendid way to +begin. You see that Bee-man has put down his hive and his coat with +the bees in it. Just wait till he gets out of sight, and then catch a +lot of those bees, and squeeze them flat. If you spread them on a +sticky rag, and make a plaster, and put it on the small of your back, +it will invigorate you like every thing, especially if some of the +bees are not quite dead." + +"Yes," said the Languid Youth, looking at him with his mild eyes, +"but if I had energy enough to catch a bee I would be satisfied. +Suppose you catch a lot for me." + +"The subject is changed," said the Very Imp. "We are now about to +visit the spacious chamber of the King of the Snap-dragons." + +"That is a flower," said the Languid Youth. + +"You will find him a gay old blossom," said the other. "When he has +chased you round his room, and has blown sparks at you, and has +snorted and howled, and cracked his tail, and snapped his jaws like a +pair of anvils, your energies will be toned up higher than ever +before in your life." + +"No doubt of it," said the Languid Youth; "but I think I will begin +with something a little milder." + +"Well then," said other, "there is a flat-tailed Demon of the Gorge +in here. He is generally asleep, and, if you say so, you can slip +into the farthest corner of his cave, and I'll solder his tail to the +opposite wall. Then he will rage and roar, but he can't get at you, +for he doesn't reach all the way across his cave; I have measured +him. It will tone you up wonderfully to sit there and watch him." + +"Very likely," said the Languid Youth; "but I would rather stay +outside and let you go up in the corner. The performance in that way +will be more interesting to me." + +"You are dreadfully hard to please," said the Very Imp. "I have +offered them to you loose, and I have offered them fastened to a +wall, and now the best thing I can do is to give you a chance at one +of them that can't move at all. It is the Ghastly Griffin and is +enchanted. He can't stir so much as the tip of his whiskers for a +thousand years. You can go to his cave and examine him just as if he +were stuffed, and then you can sit on his back and think how it would +be if you should live to be a thousand years old, and he should wake +up while you are sitting there. It would be easy to imagine a lot of +horrible things he would do to you when you look at his open mouth +with its awful fangs, his dreadful claws, and his horrible wings all +covered with spikes." + +"I think that might suit me," said the Languid Youth. "I would much +rather imagine the exercises of these monsters than to see them +really going on." + +"Come on, then," said the Very Imp, and he led the way to the cave of +the Ghastly Griffin. + +The Bee-man went by himself through a great part of the mountain, and +looked into many of its gloomy caves and recesses, recoiling in +horror from most of the dreadful monsters who met his eyes. While he +was wandering about, an awful roar was heard resounding through the +passages of the mountain, and soon there came flapping along an +enormous dragon, with body black as night, and wings and tail of +fiery red. In his great fore-claws he bore a little baby. + +"Horrible!" exclaimed the Bee-man. "He is taking that little creature +to his cave to devour it." + +He saw the dragon enter a cave not far away, and following looked in. +The dragon was crouched upon the ground with the little baby lying +before him. It did not seem to be hurt, but was frightened and +crying. The monster was looking upon it with delight, as if he +intended to make a dainty meal of it as soon as his appetite should +be a little stronger. + +"It is too bad!" thought the Bee-man. "Somebody ought to do +something." And turning around, he ran away as fast as he could. + +He ran through various passages until he came to the spot where he +had left his bee-hive. Picking it up, he hurried back, carrying the +hive in his two hands before him. When he reached the cave of the +dragon, he looked in and saw the monster still crouched over the +weeping child. Without a moment's hesitation, the Bee-man rushed into +the cave and threw his hive straight into the face of the dragon. The +bees, enraged by the shock, rushed out in an angry crowd and +immediately fell upon the head, mouth, eyes, and nose of the dragon. +The great monster, astounded by this sudden attack, and driven almost +wild by the numberless stings of the bees, sprang back to the +farthest portion of his cave, still followed by his relentless +enemies, at whom he flapped wildly with his great wings and struck +with his paws. While the dragon was thus engaged with the bees, the +Bee-man rushed forward, and, seizing the child, he hurried away. He +did not stop to pick up his doublet, but kept on until he reached the +entrance of the caves. There he saw the Very Imp hopping along on one +leg, and rubbing his back and shoulders with his hands, and stopped +to inquire what was the matter, and what had become of the Languid +Youth. + +"He is no kind of a fellow," said the Very Imp. "He disappointed me +dreadfully. I took him up to the Ghastly Griffin, and told him the +thing was enchanted, and that he might sit on its back and think +about what it could do if it was awake; and when he came near it the +wretched creature opened its eyes, and raised its head, and then you +ought to have seen how mad that simpleton was. He made a dash at me +and seized me by the ears; he kicked and beat me till I can scarcely +move." + +"His energies must have been toned up a good deal," said the Bee-man. + +"Toned up! I should say so!" cried the other. "I raised a howl, and a +Scissor-jawed Clipper came out of his hole, and got after him; but +that lazy fool ran so fast that he could not be caught." + +The Bee-man now ran on and soon overtook the Languid Youth. + +"You need not be in a hurry now," said the latter, "for the rules of +this institution don't allow the creatures inside to come out of this +opening, or to hang around it. If they did, they would frighten away +visitors. They go in and out of holes in the upper part of the +mountain." + +The two proceeded on their way. + +"What are you going to do with that baby?" said the Languid Youth. + +"I shall carry it along with me," said the Bee-man, "as I go on with +my search, and perhaps I may find its mother. If I do not, I shall +give it to somebody in that little village yonder. Any thing would be +better than leaving it to be devoured by that horrid dragon." + +"Let me carry it. I feel quite strong enough now to carry a baby." + +"Thank you," said the Bee-man, "but I can take it myself. I like to +carry something, and I have now neither my hive nor my doublet." + +"It is very well that you had to leave them behind," said the Youth, +"for the bees would have stung the baby." + +"My bees never sting babies," said the other. + +"They probably never had a chance," remarked his companion. + +They soon entered the village, and after walking a short distance the +youth exclaimed: "Do you see that woman over there sitting at the +door of her house? She has beautiful hair and she is tearing it all +to pieces. She should not be allowed to do that." + +"No," said the Bee-man. "Her friends should tie her hands." + +"Perhaps she is the mother of this child," said the Youth, "and if +you give it to her she will no longer think of tearing her hair." + +"But," said the Bee-man, "you don't really think this is her child?" + +"Suppose you go over and see," said the other. + +The Bee-man hesitated a moment, and then he walked toward the woman. +Hearing him coming, she raised her head, and when she saw the child +she rushed towards it, snatched it into her arms, and screaming with +joy she covered it with kisses. Then with happy tears she begged to +know the story of the rescue of her child, whom she never expected to +see again; and she loaded the Bee-man with thanks and blessings. The +friends and neighbors gathered around and there was great rejoicing. +The mother urged the Bee-man and the Youth to stay with her, and rest +and refresh themselves, which they were glad to do as they were tired +and hungry. + +They remained at the cottage all night, and in the afternoon of the +next day the Bee-man said to the Youth: "It may seem an odd thing to +you, but never in all my life have I felt myself drawn towards any +living being as I am drawn towards this baby. Therefore I believe +that I have been transformed from a baby." + +"Good!" cried the Youth. "It is my opinion that you have hit the +truth. And now would you like to be changed back to your original +form?" + +"Indeed I would!" said the Bee-man, "I have the strongest yearning to +be what I originally was." + +The Youth, who had now lost every trace of languid feeling, took a +great interest in the matter, and early the next morning started off +to inform the Junior Sorcerer that the Bee-man had discovered what he +had been transformed from, and desired to be changed back to it. + +The Junior Sorcerer and his learned Masters were filled with +enthusiasm when they heard this report, and they at once set out for +the mother's cottage. And there by magic arts the Bee-man was changed +back into a baby. The mother was so grateful for what the Bee-man had +done for her that she agreed to take charge of this baby, and to +bring it up as her own. + +"It will be a grand thing for him," said the Junior Sorcerer, "and I +am glad that I studied his case. He will now have a fresh start in +life, and will have a chance to become something better than a +miserable old man living in a wretched hut with no friends or +companions but buzzing bees." + +The Junior Sorcerer and his Masters then returned to their homes, +happy in the success of their great performance; and the Youth went +back to his home anxious to begin a life of activity and energy. + +Years and years afterward, when the Junior Sorcerer had become a +Senior and was very old indeed, he passed through the country of Orn, +and noticed a small hut about which swarms of bees were flying. He +approached it, and looking in at the door he saw an old man in a +leathern doublet, sitting at a table, eating honey. By his magic art +he knew this was the baby which had been transformed from the +Bee-man. + +"Upon my word!" exclaimed the Sorcerer, "He has grown into the same +thing again!" + + + + + + THE GRIFFIN AND THE MINOR CANON. + + * * * * * + +Over the great door of an old, old church which stood in a quiet town +of a far-away land there was carved in stone the figure of a large +griffin. The old-time sculptor had done his work with great care, but +the image he had made was not a pleasant one to look at. It had a +large head, with enormous open mouth and savage teeth; from its back +arose great wings, armed with sharp hooks and prongs; it had stout +legs in front, with projecting claws; but there were no legs +behind,--the body running out into a long and powerful tail, finished +off at the end with a barbed point. This tail was coiled up under +him, the end sticking up just back of his wings. + +The sculptor, or the people who had ordered this stone figure, had +evidently been very much pleased with it, for little copies of it, +also in stone, had been placed here and there along the sides of the +church, not very far from the ground, so that people could easily +look at them, and ponder on their curious forms. There were a great +many other sculptures on the outside of this church,--saints, +martyrs, grotesque heads of men, beasts, and birds, as well as those +of other creatures which cannot be named, because nobody knows +exactly what they were; but none were so curious and interesting as +the great griffin over the door, and the little griffins on the sides +of the church. + +A long, long distance from the town, in the midst of dreadful wilds +scarcely known to man, there dwelt the Griffin whose image had been +put up over the church-door. In some way or other, the old-time +sculptor had seen him, and afterward, to the best of his memory, had +copied his figure in stone. The Griffin had never known this, until, +hundreds of years afterward, he heard from a bird, from a wild +animal, or in some manner which it is not now easy to find out, that +there was a likeness of him on the old church in the distant town. +Now, this Griffin had no idea how he looked. He had never seen a +mirror, and the streams where he lived were so turbulent and violent +that a quiet piece of water, which would reflect the image of any +thing looking into it, could not be found. Being, as far as could be +ascertained, the very last of his race, he had never seen another +griffin. Therefore it was, that, when he heard of this stone image of +himself, he became very anxious to know what he looked like, and at +last he determined to go to the old church, and see for himself what +manner of being he was. So he started off from the dreadful wilds, +and flew on and on until he came to the countries inhabited by men, +where his appearance in the air created great consternation; but he +alighted nowhere, keeping up a steady flight until he reached the +suburbs of the town which had his image on its church. Here, late in +the afternoon, he alighted in a green meadow by the side of a brook, +and stretched himself on the grass to rest. His great wings were +tired, for he had not made such a long flight in a century, or more. + +The news of his coming spread quickly over the town, and the people, +frightened nearly out of their wits by the arrival of so +extraordinary a visitor, fled into their houses, and shut themselves +up. The Griffin called loudly for some one to come to him, but the +more he called, the more afraid the people were to show themselves. +At length he saw two laborers hurrying to their homes through the +fields, and in a terrible voice he commanded them to stop. Not daring +to disobey, the men stood, trembling. + +"What is the matter with you all?" cried the Griffin. "Is there not a +man in your town who is brave enough to speak to me?" + +"I think," said one of the laborers, his voice shaking so that his +words could hardly be understood, "that--perhaps--the Minor +Canon--would come." + +"Go, call him, then!" said the Griffin; "I want to see him." + +The Minor Canon, who filled a subordinate position in the old church, +had just finished the afternoon services, and was coming out of a +side door, with three aged women who had formed the week-day +congregation. He was a young man of a kind disposition, and very +anxious to do good to the people of the town. Apart from his duties +in the church, where he conducted services every week-day, he visited +the sick and the poor, counselled and assisted persons who were in +trouble, and taught a school composed entirely of the bad children in +the town with whom nobody else would have any thing to do. Whenever +the people wanted something difficult done for them, they always went +to the Minor Canon. Thus it was that the laborer thought of the young +priest when he found that some one must come and speak to the +Griffin. + +The Minor Canon had not heard of the strange event, which was known +to the whole town except himself and the three old women, and when he +was informed of it, and was told that the Griffin had asked to see +him, he was greatly amazed, and frightened. + +"Me!" he exclaimed. "He has never heard of me! What should he want +with me?" + +"Oh! you must go instantly!" cried the two men. "He is very angry now +because he has been kept waiting so long; and nobody knows what may +happen if you don't hurry to him." + +The poor Minor Canon would rather have had his hand cut off than go +out to meet an angry griffin; but he felt that it was his duty to go, +for it would be a woful thing if injury should come to the people of +the town because he was not brave enough to obey the summons of the +Griffin. So, pale and frightened, he started off. + +"Well," said the Griffin, as soon as the young man came near, "I am +glad to see that there is some one who has the courage to come to +me." + +The Minor Canon did not feel very courageous, but he bowed his head. + +"Is this the town," said the Griffin, "where there is a church with a +likeness of myself over one of the doors?" + +The Minor Canon looked at the frightful creature before him and saw +that it was, without doubt, exactly like the stone image on the +church. "Yes," he said, "you are right." + +"Well, then," said the Griffin, "will you take me to it? I wish very +much to see it." + +The Minor Canon instantly thought that if the Griffin entered the +town without the people knowing what he came for, some of them would +probably be frightened to death, and so he sought to gain time to +prepare their minds. + +"It is growing dark, now," he said, very much afraid, as he spoke, +that his words might enrage the Griffin, "and objects on the front of +the church can not be seen clearly. It will be better to wait until +morning, if you wish to get a good view of the stone image of +yourself." + +"That will suit me very well," said the Griffin. "I see you are a man +of good sense. I am tired, and I will take a nap here on this soft +grass, while I cool my tail in the little stream that runs near me. +The end of my tail gets red-hot when I am angry or excited, and it is +quite warm now. So you may go, but be sure and come early to-morrow +morning, and show me the way to the church." + +The Minor Canon was glad enough to take his leave, and hurried into +the town. In front of the church he found a great many people +assembled to hear his report of his interview with the Griffin. When +they found that he had not come to spread ruin and devastation, but +simply to see his stony likeness on the church, they showed neither +relief nor gratification, but began to upbraid the Minor Canon for +consenting to conduct the creature into the town. + +"What could I do?" cried the young man. "If I should not bring him he +would come himself and, perhaps, end by setting fire to the town with +his red-hot tail." + +Still the people were not satisfied, and a great many plans were +proposed to prevent the Griffin from coming into the town. Some +elderly persons urged that the young men should go out and kill him; +but the young men scoffed at such a ridiculous idea. Then some one +said that it would be a good thing to destroy the stone image so that +the Griffin would have no excuse for entering the town; and this +proposal was received with such favor that many of the people ran for +hammers, chisels, and crowbars, with which to tear down and break up +the stone griffin. But the Minor Canon resisted this plan with all +the strength of his mind and body. He assured the people that this +action would enrage the Griffin beyond measure, for it would be +impossible to conceal from him that his image had been destroyed +during the night. But the people were so determined to break up the +stone griffin that the Minor Canon saw that there was nothing for him +to do but to stay there and protect it. All night he walked up and +down in front of the church-door, keeping away the men who brought +ladders, by which they might mount to the great stone griffin, and +knock it to pieces with their hammers and crowbars. After many hours +the people were obliged to give up their attempts, and went home to +sleep; but the Minor Canon remained at his post till early morning, +and then he hurried away to the field where he had left the Griffin. + +The monster had just awakened, and rising to his fore-legs and +shaking himself, he said that he was ready to go into the town. The +Minor Canon, therefore, walked back, the Griffin flying slowly +through the air, at a short distance above the head of his guide. Not +a person was to be seen in the streets, and they proceeded directly +to the front of the church, where the Minor Canon pointed out the +stone griffin. + +The real Griffin settled down in the little square before the church +and gazed earnestly at his sculptured likeness. For a long time he +looked at it. First he put his head on one side, and then he put it +on the other; then he shut his right eye and gazed with his left, +after which he shut his left eye and gazed with his right. Then he +moved a little to one side and looked at the image, then he moved the +other way. After a while he said to the Minor Canon, who had been +standing by all this time: + +"It is, it must be, an excellent likeness! That breadth between the +eyes, that expansive forehead, those massive jaws! I feel that it +must resemble me. If there is any fault to find with it, it is that +the neck seems a little stiff. But that is nothing. It is an +admirable likeness,--admirable!" + +The Griffin sat looking at his image all the morning and all the +afternoon. The Minor Canon had been afraid to go away and leave him, +and had hoped all through the day that he would soon be satisfied +with his inspection and fly away home. But by evening the poor young +man was utterly exhausted, and felt that he must eat and sleep. He +frankly admitted this fact to the Griffin, and asked him if he would +not like something to eat. He said this because he felt obliged in +politeness to do so, but as soon as he had spoken the words, he was +seized with dread lest the monster should demand half a dozen babies, +or some tempting repast of that kind. + +"Oh, no," said the Griffin, "I never eat between the equinoxes. At +the vernal and at the autumnal equinox I take a good meal, and that +lasts me for half a year. I am extremely regular in my habits, and do +not think it healthful to eat at odd times. But if you need food, go +and get it, and I will return to the soft grass where I slept last +night and take another nap." + +The next day the Griffin came again to the little square before the +church, and remained there until evening, steadfastly regarding the +stone griffin over the door. The Minor Canon came once or twice to +look at him, and the Griffin seemed very glad to see him; but the +young clergyman could not stay as he had done before, for he had many +duties to perform. Nobody went to the church, but the people came to +the Minor Canon's house, and anxiously asked him how long the Griffin +was going to stay. + +"I do not know," he answered, "but I think he will soon be satisfied +with regarding his stone likeness, and then he will go away." + +But the Griffin did not go away. Morning after morning he came to the +church, but after a time he did not stay there all day. He seemed to +have taken a great fancy to the Minor Canon, and followed him about +as he pursued his various avocations. He would wait for him at the +side door of the church, for the Minor Canon held services every day, +morning and evening, though nobody came now. "If any one should +come," he said to himself, "I must be found at my post." When the +young man came out, the Griffin would accompany him in his visits to +the sick and the poor, and would often look into the windows of the +school-house where the Minor Canon was teaching his unruly scholars. +All the other schools were closed, but the parents of the Minor +Canon's scholars forced them to go to school, because they were so +bad they could not endure them all day at home,--griffin or no +griffin. But it must be said they generally behaved very well when +that great monster sat up on his tail and looked in at the +school-room window. + +When it was perceived that the Griffin showed no sign of going away, +all the people who were able to do so left the town. The canons and +the higher officers of the church had fled away during the first day +of the Griffin's visit, leaving behind only the Minor Canon and some +of the men who opened the doors and swept the church. All the +citizens who could afford it shut up their houses and travelled to +distant parts, and only the working people and the poor were left +behind. After some days these ventured to go about and attend to +their business, for if they did not work they would starve. They were +getting a little used to seeing the Griffin, and having been told +that he did not eat between equinoxes, they did not feel so much +afraid of him as before. + +Day by day the Griffin became more and more attached to the Minor +Canon. He kept near him a great part of the time, and often spent the +night in front of the little house where the young clergyman lived +alone. This strange companionship was often burdensome to the Minor +Canon; but, on the other hand, he could not deny that he derived a +great deal of benefit and instruction from it. The Griffin had lived +for hundreds of years, and had seen much; and he told the Minor Canon +many wonderful things. + +"It is like reading an old book," said the young clergyman to +himself; "but how many books I would have had to read before I would +have found out what the Griffin has told me about the earth, the air, +the water, about minerals, and metals, and growing things, and all +the wonders of the world!" + +Thus the summer went on, and drew toward its close. And now the +people of the town began to be very much troubled again. + +"It will not be long," they said, "before the autumnal equinox is +here, and then that monster will want to eat. He will be dreadfully +hungry, for he has taken so much exercise since his last meal. He +will devour our children. Without doubt, he will eat them all. What +is to be done?" + +To this question no one could give an answer, but all agreed that the +Griffin must not be allowed to remain until the approaching equinox. +After talking over the matter a great deal, a crowd of the people +went to the Minor Canon, at a time when the Griffin was not with him. + +"It is all your fault," they said, "that that monster is among us. +You brought him here, and you ought to see that he goes away. It is +only on your account that he stays here at all, for, although he +visits his image every day, he is with you the greater part of the +time. If you were not here, he would not stay. It is your duty to go +away and then he will follow you, and we shall be free from the +dreadful danger which hangs over us." + +"Go away!" cried the Minor Canon, greatly grieved at being spoken to +in such a way. "Where shall I go? If I go to some other town, shall I +not take this trouble there? Have I a right to do that?" + +"No," said the people, "you must not go to any other town. There is +no town far enough away. You must go to the dreadful wilds where the +Griffin lives; and then he will follow you and stay there." + +They did not say whether or not they expected the Minor Canon to stay +there also, and he did not ask them any thing about it. He bowed his +head, and went into his house, to think. The more he thought, the +more clear it became to his mind that it was his duty to go away, and +thus free the town from the presence of the Griffin. + +That evening he packed a leathern bag full of bread and meat, and +early the next morning he set out on his journey to the dreadful +wilds. It was a long, weary, and doleful journey, especially after he +had gone beyond the habitations of men, but the Minor Canon kept on +bravely, and never faltered. The way was longer than he had expected, +and his provisions soon grew so scanty that he was obliged to eat but +a little every day, but he kept up his courage, and pressed on, and, +after many days of toilsome travel, he reached the dreadful wilds. + +When the Griffin found that the Minor Canon had left the town he +seemed sorry, but showed no disposition to go and look for him. After +a few days had passed, he became much annoyed, and asked some of the +people where the Minor Canon had gone. But, although the citizens had +been so anxious that the young clergyman should go to the dreadful +wilds, thinking that the Griffin would immediately follow him, they +were now afraid to mention the Minor Canon's destination, for the +monster seemed angry already, and, if he should suspect their trick +he would, doubtless, become very much enraged. So every one said he +did not know, and the Griffin wandered about disconsolate. One +morning he looked into the Minor Canon's school-house, which was +always empty now, and thought that it was a shame that every thing +should suffer on account of the young man's absence. + +"It does not matter so much about the church," he said, "for nobody +went there; but it is a pity about the school. I think I will teach +it myself until he returns." + +It was the hour for opening the school, and the Griffin went inside +and pulled the rope which rang the school-bell. Some of the children +who heard the bell ran in to see what was the matter, supposing it to +be a joke of one of their companions; but when they saw the Griffin +they stood astonished, and scared. + +"Go tell the other scholars," said the monster, "that school is about +to open, and that if they are not all here in ten minutes, I shall +come after them." + +In seven minutes every scholar was in place. + +Never was seen such an orderly school. Not a boy or girl moved, or +uttered a whisper. The Griffin climbed into the master's seat, his +wide wings spread on each side of him, because he could not lean back +in his chair while they stuck out behind, and his great tail coiled +around, in front of the desk, the barbed end sticking up, ready to +tap any boy or girl who might misbehave. The Griffin now addressed +the scholars, telling them that he intended to teach them while their +master was away. In speaking he endeavored to imitate, as far as +possible, the mild and gentle tones of the Minor Canon, but it must +be admitted that in this he was not very successful. He had paid a +good deal of attention to the studies of the school, and he +determined not to attempt to teach them any thing new, but to review +them in what they had been studying; so he called up the various +classes, and questioned them upon their previous lessons. The +children racked their brains to remember what they had learned. They +were so afraid of the Griffin's displeasure that they recited as they +had never recited before. One of the boys, far down in his class, +answered so well that the Griffin was astonished. + +"I should think you would be at the head," said he. "I am sure you +have never been in the habit of reciting so well. Why is this?" + +"Because I did not choose to take the trouble," said the boy, +trembling in his boots. He felt obliged to speak the truth, for all +the children thought that the great eyes of the Griffin could see +right through them, and that he would know when they told a +falsehood. + +"You ought to be ashamed of yourself," said the Griffin. "Go down to +the very tail of the class, and if you are not at the head in two +days, I shall know the reason why." + +The next afternoon this boy was number one. + +It was astonishing how much these children now learned of what they +had been studying. It was as if they had been educated over again. +The Griffin used no severity toward them, but there was a look about +him which made them unwilling to go to bed until they were sure they +knew their lessons for the next day. + +The Griffin now thought that he ought to visit the sick and the poor; +and he began to go about the town for this purpose. The effect upon +the sick was miraculous. All, except those who were very ill indeed, +jumped from their beds when they heard he was coming, and declared +themselves quite well. To those who could not get up, he gave herbs +and roots, which none of them had ever before thought of as +medicines, but which the Griffin had seen used in various parts of +the world; and most of them recovered. But, for all that, they +afterward said that no matter what happened to them, they hoped that +they should never again have such a doctor coming to their bed-sides, +feeling their pulses and looking at their tongues. + +As for the poor, they seemed to have utterly disappeared. All those +who had depended upon charity for their daily bread were now at work +in some way or other; many of them offering to do odd jobs for their +neighbors just for the sake of their meals,--a thing which before had +been seldom heard of in the town. The Griffin could find no one who +needed his assistance. + +The summer had now passed, and the autumnal equinox was rapidly +approaching. The citizens were in a state of great alarm and anxiety. +The Griffin showed no signs of going away, but seemed to have settled +himself permanently among them. In a short time, the day for his +semi-annual meal would arrive, and then what would happen? The +monster would certainly be very hungry, and would devour all their +children. + +Now they greatly regretted and lamented that they had sent away the +Minor Canon; he was the only one on whom they could have depended in +this trouble, for he could talk freely with the Griffin, and so find +out what could be done. But it would not do to be inactive. Some step +must be taken immediately. A meeting of the citizens was called, and +two old men were appointed to go and talk to the Griffin. They were +instructed to offer to prepare a splendid dinner for him on equinox +day,--one which would entirely satisfy his hunger. They would offer +him the fattest mutton, the most tender beef, fish, and game of +various sorts, and any thing of the kind that he might fancy. If none +of these suited, they were to mention that there was an orphan asylum +in the next town. + +"Anything would be better," said the citizens, "than to have our dear +children devoured." + +The old men went to the Griffin, but their propositions were not +received with favor. + +"From what I have seen of the people of this town," said the monster, +"I do not think I could relish any thing which was prepared by them. +They appear to be all cowards, and, therefore, mean and selfish. As +for eating one of them, old or young, I could not think of it for a +moment. In fact, there was only one creature in the whole place for +whom I could have had any appetite, and that is the Minor Canon, who +has gone away. He was brave, and good, and honest, and I think I +should have relished him." + +"Ah!" said one of the old men very politely, "in that case I wish we +had not sent him to the dreadful wilds!" + +"What!" cried the Griffin. "What do you mean? Explain instantly what +you are talking about!" + +The old man, terribly frightened at what he had said, was obliged to +tell how the Minor Canon had been sent away by the people, in the +hope that the Griffin might be induced to follow him. + +When the monster heard this, he became furiously angry. He dashed +away from the old men and, spreading his wings, flew backward and +forward over the town. He was so much excited that his tail became +red-hot, and glowed like a meteor against the evening sky. When at +last he settled down in the little field where he usually rested, and +thrust his tail into the brook, the steam arose like a cloud, and the +water of the stream ran hot through the town. The citizens were +greatly frightened, and bitterly blamed the old man for telling about +the Minor Canon. + +"It is plain," they said, "that the Griffin intended at last to go +and look for him, and we should have been saved. Now who can tell +what misery you have brought upon us." + +The Griffin did not remain long in the little field. As soon as his +tail was cool he flew to the town-hall and rang the bell. The +citizens knew that they were expected to come there, and although +they were afraid to go, they were still more afraid to stay away; and +they crowded into the hall. The Griffin was on the platform at one +end, flapping his wings and walking up and down, and the end of his +tail was still so warm that it slightly scorched the boards as he +dragged it after him. + +When everybody who was able to come was there, the Griffin stood +still and addressed the meeting. + +"I have had a contemptible opinion of you," he said, "ever since I +discovered what cowards you are, but I had no idea that you were so +ungrateful, selfish, and cruel, as I now find you to be. Here was +your Minor Canon, who labored day and night for your good, and +thought of nothing else but how he might benefit you and make you +happy; and as soon as you imagine yourselves threatened with a +danger,--for well I know you are dreadfully afraid of me,--you send +him off, caring not whether he returns or perishes, hoping thereby to +save yourselves. Now, I had conceived a great liking for that young +man, and had intended, in a day or two, to go and look him up. But I +have changed my mind about him. I shall go and find him, but I shall +send him back here to live among you, and I intend that he shall +enjoy the reward of his labor and his sacrifices. Go, some of you, to +the officers of the church, who so cowardly ran away when I first +came here, and tell them never to return to this town under penalty +of death. And if, when your Minor Canon comes back to you, you do not +bow yourselves before him, put him in the highest place among you, +and serve and honor him all his life, beware of my terrible +vengeance! There were only two good things in this town: the Minor +Canon and the stone image of myself over your church-door. One of +these you have sent away, and the other I shall carry away myself." + +With these words he dismissed the meeting, and it was time, for the +end of his tail had become so hot that there was danger of its +setting fire to the building. + +The next morning, the Griffin came to the church, and tearing the +stone image of himself from its fastenings over the great door, he +grasped it with his powerful fore-legs and flew up into the air. +Then, after hovering over the town for a moment, he gave his tail an +angry shake and took up his flight to the dreadful wilds. When he +reached this desolate region, he set the stone Griffin upon a ledge +of a rock which rose in front of the dismal cave he called his home. +There the image occupied a position somewhat similar to that it had +had over the church-door; and the Griffin, panting with the exertion +of carrying such an enormous load to so great a distance, lay down +upon the ground, and regarded it with much satisfaction. When he felt +somewhat rested he went to look for the Minor Canon. He found the +young man, weak and half starved, lying under the shadow of a rock. +After picking him up and carrying him to his cave, the Griffin flew +away to a distant marsh, where he procured some roots and herbs which +he well knew were strengthening and beneficial to man, though he had +never tasted them himself. After eating these the Minor Canon was +greatly revived, and sat up and listened while the Griffin told him +what had happened in the town. + +"Do you know," said the monster, when he had finished, "that I have +had, and still have, a great liking for you?" + +"I am very glad to hear it," said the Minor Canon, with his usual +politeness. + +"I am not at all sure that you would be," said the Griffin, "if you +thoroughly understood the state of the case, but we will not consider +that now. If some things were different, other things would be +otherwise. I have been so enraged by discovering the manner in which +you have been treated that I have determined that you shall at last +enjoy the rewards and honors to which you are entitled. Lie down and +have a good sleep, and then I will take you back to the town." + +As he heard these words, a look of trouble came over the young man's +face. + +"You need not give yourself any anxiety," said the Griffin, "about my +return to the town. I shall not remain there. Now that I have that +admirable likeness of myself in front of my cave, where I can sit at +my leisure, and gaze upon its noble features and magnificent +proportions, I have no wish to see that abode of cowardly and selfish +people." + +The Minor Canon, relieved from his fears, lay back, and dropped into +a doze; and when he was sound asleep the Griffin took him up, and +carried him back to the town. He arrived just before daybreak, and +putting the young man gently on the grass in the little field where +he himself used to rest, the monster, without having been seen by any +of the people, flew back to his home. + +When the Minor Canon made his appearance in the morning among the +citizens, the enthusiasm and cordiality with which he was received +were truly wonderful. He was taken to a house which had been occupied +by one of the banished high officers of the place, and every one was +anxious to do all that could be done for his health and comfort. The +people crowded into the church when he held services, so that the +three old women who used to be his week-day congregation could not +get to the best seats, which they had always been in the habit of +taking; and the parents of the bad children determined to reform them +at home, in order that he might be spared the trouble of keeping up +his former school. The Minor Canon was appointed to the highest +office of the old church, and before he died, he became a bishop. + +During the first years after his return from the dreadful wilds, the +people of the town looked up to him as a man to whom they were bound +to do honor and reverence; but they often, also, looked up to the sky +to see if there were any signs of the Griffin coming back. However, +in the course of time, they learned to honor and reverence their +former Minor Canon without the fear of being punished if they did not +do so. + +But they need never have been afraid of the Griffin. The autumnal +equinox day came round, and the monster ate nothing. If he could not +have the Minor Canon, he did not care for any thing. So, lying down, +with his eyes fixed upon the great stone griffin, he gradually +declined, and died. It was a good thing for some of the people of the +town that they did not know this. + +If you should ever visit the old town, you would still see the little +griffins on the sides of the church; but the great stone griffin that +was over the door is gone. + + + + + + OLD PIPES AND THE DRYAD. + + * * * * * + +A mountain brook ran through a little village. Over the brook there +was a narrow bridge, and from the bridge a foot-path led out from the +village and up the hill-side, to the cottage of Old Pipes and his +mother. For many, many years, Old Pipes had been employed by the +villagers to pipe the cattle down from the hills. Every afternoon, an +hour before sunset, he would sit on a rock in front of his cottage +and play on his pipes. Then all the flocks and herds that were +grazing on the mountains would hear him, wherever they might happen +to be, and would come down to the village--the cows by the easiest +paths, the sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the +steep and rocky ways that were hardest of all. + +But now, for a year or more, Old Pipes had not piped the cattle home. +It is true that every afternoon he sat upon the rock and played upon +his familiar instrument; but the cattle did not hear him. He had +grown old, and his breath was feeble. The echoes of his cheerful +notes, which used to come from the rocky hill on the other side of +the valley, were heard no more; and twenty yards from Old Pipes one +could scarcely tell what tune he was playing. He had become somewhat +deaf, and did not know that the sound of his pipes was so thin and +weak, and that the cattle did not hear him. The cows, the sheep, and +the goats came down every afternoon as before, but this was because +two boys and a girl were sent up after them. The villagers did not +wish the good old man to know that his piping was no longer of any +use, so they paid him his little salary every month, and said nothing +about the two boys and the girl. + +Old Pipes's mother was, of course, a great deal older then he was, +and was as deaf as a gate,--posts, latch, hinges, and all,--and she +never knew that the sound of her son's pipe did not spread over all +the mountainside, and echo back strong and clear from the opposite +hills. She was very fond of Old Pipes, and proud of his piping; and +as he was so much younger than she was, she never thought of him as +being very old. She cooked for him, and made his bed, and mended his +clothes; and they lived very comfortably on his little salary. + +One afternoon, at the end of the month, when Old Pipes had finished +his piping, he took his stout staff and went down the hill to the +village to receive the money for his month's work. The path seemed a +great deal steeper and more difficult than it used to be; and Old +Pipes thought that it must have been washed by the rains and greatly +damaged. He remembered it as a path that was quite easy to traverse +either up or down. But Old Pipes had been a very active man, and as +his mother was so much older than he was, he never thought of himself +as aged and infirm. + +When the Chief Villager had paid him, and he had talked a little with +some of his friends, Old Pipes started to go home. But when he had +crossed the bridge over the brook, and gone a short distance up the +hill-side, he became very tired, and sat down upon a stone. He had +not been sitting there half a minute, when along came two boys and a +girl. + +"Children," said Old Pipes, "I'm very tired tonight, and I don't +believe I can climb up this steep path to my home. I think I shall +have to ask you to help me." + +"We will do that," said the boys and the girl, quite cheerfully; and +one boy took him by the right hand, and the other by the left, while +the girl pushed him in the back. In this way he went up the hill +quite easily, and soon reached his cottage door. Old Pipes gave each +of the three children a copper coin, and then they sat down for a few +minutes' rest before starting back to the village. + +"I'm sorry that I tired you so much," said Old Pipes. + +"Oh, that would not have tired us," said one of the boys, "if we had +not been so far to-day after the cows, the sheep, and the goats. They +rambled high up on the mountain, and we never before had such a time +in finding them." + +"Had to go after the cows, the sheep, and the goats!" exclaimed Old +Pipes. "What do you mean by that?" + +The girl, who stood behind the old man, shook her head, put her hand +on her mouth, and made all sorts of signs to the boy to stop talking +on this subject; but he did not notice her, and promptly answered Old +Pipes. + +"Why, you see, good sir," said he, "that as the cattle can't hear +your pipes now, somebody has to go after them every evening to drive +them down from the mountain, and the Chief Villager has hired us +three to do it. Generally it is not very hard work, but to-night the +cattle had wandered far." + +"How long have you been doing this?" asked the old man. + +The girl shook her head and clapped her hand on her mouth more +vigorously than before, but the boy went on. + +"I think it is about a year now," he said, "since the people first +felt sure that the cattle could not hear your pipes; and from that +time we've been driving them down. But we are rested now, and will go +home. Good-night, sir." + +The three children then went down the hill, the girl scolding the boy +all the way home. Old Pipes stood silent a few moments, and then he +went into his cottage. + +"Mother," he shouted; "did you hear what those children said?" + +"Children!" exclaimed the old woman; "I did not hear them. I did not +know there were any children here." + +Then Old Pipes told his mother, shouting very loudly to make her +hear, how the two boys and the girl had helped him up the hill, and +what he had heard about his piping and the cattle. + +"They can't hear you?" cried his mother. "Why, what's the matter with +the cattle?" + +"Ah, me!" said Old Pipes; "I don't believe there's any thing the +matter with the cattle. It must be with me and my pipes that there is +something the matter. But one thing is certain, if I do not earn the +wages the Chief Villager pays me, I shall not take them. I shall go +straight down to the village and give back the money I received +to-day." + +"Nonsense!" cried his mother. "I'm sure you've piped as well as you +could, and no more can be expected. And what are we to do without the +money?" + +"I don't know," said Old Pipes; "but I'm going down to the village to +pay it back." + +The sun had now set; but the moon was shining very brightly on the +hill-side, and Old Pipes could see his way very well. He did not take +the same path by which he had gone before, but followed another, +which led among the trees upon the hill-side, and, though longer, was +not so steep. + +When he had gone about half-way, the old man sat down to rest, +leaning his back against a great oak-tree. As he did so, he heard a +sound like knocking inside the tree, and then a voice distinctly +said: + +"Let me out! let me out!" + +Old Pipes instantly forgot that he was tired, and sprang to his feet. +"This must be a Dryad-tree!" he exclaimed. "If it is, I'll let her +out." + +Old Pipes had never, to his knowledge, seen a Dryad-tree, but he knew +there were such trees on the hill-sides and the mountains, and that +Dryads lived in them. He knew, too, that in the summer-time, on those +days when the moon rose before the sun went down, a Dryad could come +out of her tree if any one could find the key which locked her in, +and turn it. Old Pipes closely examined the trunk of the tree, which +stood in the full moonlight. "If I see that key," he said, "I shall +surely turn it." Before long he perceived a piece of bark standing +out from the tree, which appeared to him very much like the handle of +a key. He took hold of it, and found he could turn it quite around. +As he did so, a large part of the side of the tree was pushed open, +and a beautiful Dryad stepped quickly out. + +For a moment she stood motionless, gazing on the scene before +her,--the tranquil valley, the hills, the forest, and the +mountain-side, all lying in the soft clear light of the moon. "Oh, +lovely! lovely!" she exclaimed. "How long it is since I have seen any +thing like this!" And then, turning to Old Pipes, she said: "How good +of you to let me out! I am so happy and so thankful, that I must kiss +you, you dear old man!" And she threw her arms around the neck of Old +Pipes, and kissed him on both cheeks. "You don't know," she then went +on to say, "how doleful it is to be shut up so long in a tree. I +don't mind it in the winter, for then I am glad to be sheltered, but +in summer it is a rueful thing not to be able to see all the beauties +of the world. And it's ever so long since I've been let out. People +so seldom come this way; and when they do come at the right time they +either don't hear me, or they are frightened, and run away. But you, +you dear old man, you were not frightened, and you looked and looked +for the key, and you let me out, and now I shall not have to go back +till winter has come, and the air grows cold. Oh, it is glorious! +What can I do for you, to show you how grateful I am?" + +"I am very glad," said Old Pipes, "that I let you out, since I see +that it makes you so happy; but I must admit that I tried to find the +key because I had a great desire to see a Dryad. But if you wish to +do something for me, you can, if you happen to be going down toward +the village." + +"To the village!" exclaimed the Dryad. "I will go anywhere for you, +my kind old benefactor." + +"Well, then," said Old Pipes, "I wish you would take this little bag +of money to the Chief Villager and tell him that Old Pipes cannot +receive pay for the services which he does not perform. It is now +more than a year that I have not been able to make the cattle hear +me, when I piped to call them home. I did not know this until +to-night; but now that I know it, I cannot keep the money, and so I +send it back." And, handing the little bag to the Dryad, he bade her +good-night, and turned toward his cottage. + +"Good-night," said the Dryad. "And I thank you over, and over, and +over again, you good old man!" + +Old Pipes walked toward his home, very glad to be saved the fatigue +of going all the way down to the village and back again. "To be +sure," he said to himself, "this path does not seem at all steep, and +I can walk along it very easily; but it would have tired me +dreadfully to come up all the way from the village, especially as I +could not have expected those children to help me again." When he +reached home, his mother was surprised to see him returning so soon. + +"What!" she exclaimed; "have you already come back? What did the +Chief Villager say? Did he take the money?" + +Old Pipes was just about to tell her that he had sent the money to +the village by a Dryad, when he suddenly reflected that his mother +would be sure to disapprove such a proceeding, and so he merely said +he had sent it by a person whom he had met. + +"And how do you know that the person will ever take it to the Chief +Villager?" cried his mother. "You will lose it, and the villagers +will never get it. Oh, Pipes! Pipes! when will you be old enough to +have ordinary common sense?" + +Old Pipes considered that as he was already seventy years of age he +could scarcely expect to grow any wiser, but he made no remark on +this subject; and, saying that he doubted not that the money would go +safely to its destination, he sat down to his supper. His mother +scolded him roundly, but he did not mind it; and after supper he went +out and sat on a rustic chair in front of the cottage to look at the +moonlit village, and to wonder whether or not the Chief Villager +really received the money. While he was doing these two things, he +went fast asleep. + +When Old Pipes left the Dryad, she did not go down to the village +with the little bag of money. She held it in her hand, and thought +about what she had heard. "This is a good and honest old man," she +said; "and it is a shame that he should lose this money. He looked as +if he needed it, and I don't believe the people in the village will +take it from one who has served them so long. Often, when in my tree, +have I heard the sweet notes of his pipes. I am going to take the +money back to him." She did not start immediately, because there were +so many beautiful things to look at; but after a while she went up to +the cottage, and, finding Old Pipes asleep in his chair, she slipped +the little bag into his coat-pocket, and silently sped away. + +The next day, Old Pipes told his mother that he would go up the +mountain and cut some wood. He had a right to get wood from the +mountain, but for a long time he had been content to pick up the dead +branches which lay about his cottage. To-day, however, he felt so +strong and vigorous that he thought he would go and cut some fuel +that would be better than this. He worked all the morning, and when +he came back he did not feel at all tired, and he had a very good +appetite for his dinner. + +Now, Old Pipes knew a good deal about Dryads, but there was one thing +which, although he had heard, he had forgotten. This was, that a kiss +from a Dryad made a person ten years younger. The people of the +village knew this, and they were very careful not to let any child of +ten years or younger, go into the woods where the Dryads were +supposed to be; for, if they should chance to be kissed by one of +these tree-nymphs, they would be set back so far that they would +cease to exist. A story was told in the village that a very bad boy +of eleven once ran away into the woods, and had an adventure of this +kind; and when his mother found him he was a little baby of one year +old. Taking advantage of her opportunity, she brought him up more +carefully than she had done before; and he grew to be a very good boy +indeed. + +Now, Old Pipes had been kissed twice by the Dryad, once on each +cheek, and he therefore felt as vigorous and active as when he was a +hale man of fifty. His mother noticed how much work he was doing, and +told him that he need not try in that way to make up for the loss of +his piping wages; for he would only tire himself out, and get sick. +But her son answered that he had not felt so well for years, and that +he was quite able to work. In the course of the afternoon, Old Pipes, +for the first time that day, put his hand in his coat-pocket, and +there, to his amazement, he found the little bag of money. "Well, +well!" he exclaimed, "I am stupid, indeed! I really thought that I +had seen a Dryad; but when I sat down by that big oak-tree I must +have gone to sleep and dreamed it all; and then I came home thinking +I had given the money to a Dryad, when it was in my pocket all the +time. But the Chief Villager shall have the money. I shall not take +it to him to-day, but to-morrow I wish to go to the village to see +some of my old friends; and then I shall give up the money." + +Toward the close of the afternoon, Old Pipes, as had been his custom +for so many years, took his pipes from the shelf on which they lay, +and went out to the rock in front of the cottage. + +"What are you going to do?" cried his mother. "If you will not +consent to be paid, why do you pipe?" + +"I am going to pipe for my own pleasure," said her son. "I am used to +it, and I do not wish to give it up. It does not matter now whether +the cattle hear me or not, and I am sure that my piping will injure +no one." + +When the good man began to play upon his favorite instrument he was +astonished at the sound that came from it. The beautiful notes of the +pipes sounded clear and strong down into the valley, and spread over +the hills, and up the sides of the mountain beyond, while, after a +little interval, an echo came back from the rocky hill on the other +side of the valley. + +"Ha! ha!" he cried, "what has happened to my pipes? They must have +been stopped up of late, but now they are as clear and good as ever." + +Again the merry notes went sounding far and wide. The cattle on the +mountain heard them, and those that were old enough remembered how +these notes had called them from their pastures every evening, and so +they started down the mountain-side, the others following. + +The merry notes were heard in the village below, and the people were +much astonished thereby. "Why, who can be blowing the pipes of Old +Pipes?" they said. But, as they were all very busy, no one went up to +see. One thing, however, was plain enough: the cattle were coming +down the mountain. And so the two boys and the girl did not have to +go after them, and had an hour for play, for which they were very +glad. + +The next morning Old Pipes started down to the village with his +money, and on the way he met the Dryad. "Oh, ho!" he cried, "is that +you? Why, I thought my letting you out of the tree was nothing but a +dream." + +"A dream!" cried the Dryad; "if you only knew how happy you have made +me, you would not think it merely a dream. And has it not benefited +you? Do you not feel happier? Yesterday I heard you playing +beautifully on your pipes." + +"Yes, yes," cried he. "I did not understand it before, but I see it +all now. I have really grown younger. I thank you, I thank you, good +Dryad, from the bottom of my heart. It was the finding of the money +in my pocket that made me think it was a dream." + +"Oh, I put it in when you were asleep," she said, laughing, "because +I thought you ought to keep it. Good-by, kind, honest man. May you +live long, and be as happy as I am now." + +Old Pipes was greatly delighted when he understood that he was really +a younger man; but that made no difference about the money, and he +kept on his way to the village. As soon as he reached it, he was +eagerly questioned as to who had been playing his pipes the evening +before, and when the people heard that it was himself, they were very +much surprised. Thereupon, Old Pipes told what had happened to him, +and then there was greater wonder, with hearty congratulations and +hand-shakes; for Old Pipes was liked by every one. The Chief Villager +refused to take his money, and, although Old Pipes said that he had +not earned it, every one present insisted that, as he would now play +on his pipes as before, he should lose nothing, because, for a time, +he was unable to perform his duty. + +So Old Pipes was obliged to keep his money, and after an hour or two +spent in conversation with his friends, he returned to his cottage. + +There was one individual, however, who was not at all pleased with +what had happened to Old Pipes. This was an Echo-dwarf, who lived on +the hills on the other side of the valley, and whose duty it was to +echo back the notes of the pipes whenever they could be heard. There +were a great many other Echo-dwarfs on these hills, some of whom +echoed back the songs of maidens, some the shouts of children, and +others the music that was often heard in the village. But there was +only one who could send back the strong notes of the pipes of Old +Pipes, and this had been his sole duty for many years. But when the +old man grew feeble, and the notes of his pipes could not be heard on +the opposite hills, this Echo-dwarf had nothing to do, and he spent +his time in delightful idleness; and he slept so much and grew so fat +that it made his companions laugh to see him walk. + +On the afternoon on which, after so long an interval, the sound of +the pipes was heard on the echo hills, this dwarf was fast asleep +behind a rock. As soon as the first notes reached them, some of his +companions ran to wake him. Rolling to his feet, he echoed back the +merry tune of Old Pipes. Naturally, he was very much annoyed and +indignant at being thus obliged to give up his life of comfortable +leisure, and he hoped very much that this pipe-playing would not +occur again. The next afternoon he was awake and listening, and, sure +enough, at the usual hour, along came the notes of the pipes as clear +and strong as they ever had been; and he was obliged to work as long +as Old Pipes played. The Echo-dwarf was very angry. He had supposed, +of course, that the pipe-playing had ceased forever, and he felt that +he had a right to be indignant at being thus deceived. He was so much +disturbed that he made up his mind to go and try to find out whether +this was to be a temporary matter or not. He had plenty of time, as +the pipes were played but once a day, and he set off early in the +morning for the hill on which Old Pipes lived. It was hard work for +the fat little fellow, and when he had crossed the valley and had +gone some distance into the woods on the hill-side, he stopped to +rest, and, in a few minutes, the Dryad came tripping along. + +"Ho, ho!" exclaimed the dwarf; "what are you doing here? and how did +you get out of your tree?" + +"Doing!" cried the Dryad; "I am being happy; that's what I am doing. +And I was let out of my tree by the good old man who plays the pipes +to call the cattle down from the mountain. And it makes me happier to +think that I have been of service to him. I gave him two kisses of +gratitude, and now he is young enough to play his pipes as well as +ever." + +The Echo-dwarf stepped forward, his face pale with passion. "Am I to +believe," he said, "that you are the cause of this great evil that +has come upon me? and that you are the wicked creature who has again +started this old man upon his career of pipe-playing? What have I +ever done to you that you should have condemned me for years and +years to echo back the notes of those wretched pipes?" + +At this the Dryad laughed loudly. + +"What a funny little fellow you are!" she said. "Any one would think +you had been condemned to toil from morning till night; while what +you really have to do is merely to imitate for half an hour every day +the merry notes of Old Pipes's piping. Fie upon you, Echo-dwarf! You +are lazy and selfish; and that is what is the matter with you. +Instead of grumbling at being obliged to do a little wholesome work, +which is less, I am sure, than that of any other echo-dwarf upon the +rocky hill-side, you should rejoice at the good fortune of the old +man who has regained so much of his strength and vigor. Go home and +learn to be just and generous; and then, perhaps, you may be happy. +Good-by." + +"Insolent creature!" shouted the dwarf, as he shook his fat little +fist at her. "I'll make you suffer for this. You shall find out what +it is to heap injury and insult upon one like me, and to snatch from +him the repose that he has earned by long years of toil." And, +shaking his head savagely, he hurried back to the rocky hill-side. + +Every afternoon the merry notes of the pipes of Old Pipes sounded +down into the valley and over the hills and up the mountain-side; and +every afternoon when he had echoed them back, the little dwarf grew +more and more angry with the Dryad. Each day, from early morning till +it was time for him to go back to his duties upon the rocky +hill-side, he searched the woods for her. He intended, if he met her, +to pretend to be very sorry for what he had said, and he thought he +might be able to play a trick upon her which would avenge him well. +One day, while thus wandering among the trees, he met Old Pipes. The +Echo-dwarf did not generally care to see or speak to ordinary people; +but now he was so anxious to find the object of his search, that he +stopped and asked Old Pipes if he had seen the Dryad. The piper had +not noticed the little fellow, and he looked down on him with some +surprise. + +"No," he said; "I have not seen her, and I have been looking +everywhere for her." + +"You!" cried the dwarf, "what do you wish with her?" + +Old Pipes then sat down on a stone, so that he should be nearer the +ear of his small companion, and he told what the Dryad had done for +him. + +When the Echo-dwarf heard that this was the man whose pipes he was +obliged to echo back every day, he would have slain him on the spot +had he been able; but, as he was not able, he merely ground his teeth +and listened to the rest of the story. + +"I am looking for the Dryad now," Old Pipes continued, "on account of +my aged mother. When I was old myself, I did not notice how very old +my mother was; but now it shocks me to see how feeble and decrepit +her years have caused her to become; and I am looking for the Dryad +to ask her to make my mother younger, as she made me." + +The eyes of the Echo-dwarf glistened. Here was a man who might help +him in his plans. + +"Your idea is a good one," he said to Old Pipes, "and it does you +honor. But you should know that a Dryad can make no person younger +but one who lets her out of her tree. However, you can manage the +affair very easily. All you need do is to find the Dryad, tell her +what you want, and request her to step into her tree and be shut up +for a short time. Then you will go and bring your mother to the tree; +she will open it, and every thing will be as you wish. Is not this a +good plan?" + +"Excellent!" cried Old Pipes; "and I will go instantly and search +more diligently for the Dryad." + +"Take me with you," said the Echo-dwarf. "You can easily carry me on +your strong shoulders; and I shall be glad to help you in any way +that I can." + +"Now, then," said the little fellow to himself, as Old Pipes carried +him rapidly along, "if he persuades the Dryad to get into a +tree,--and she is quite foolish enough to do it,--and then goes away +to bring his mother, I shall take a stone or a club and I will break +off the key of that tree, so that nobody can ever turn it again. Then +Mistress Dryad will see what she has brought upon herself by her +behavior to me." + +Before long they came to the great oak-tree in which the Dryad had +lived, and, at a distance, they saw that beautiful creature herself +coming toward them. + +"How excellently well every thing happens!" said the dwarf. "Put me +down, and I will go. Your business with the Dryad is more important +than mine; and you need not say any thing about my having suggested +your plan to you. I am willing that you should have all the credit of +it yourself." + +Old Pipes put the Echo-dwarf upon the ground, but the little rogue +did not go away. He concealed himself between some low, mossy rocks, +and he was so much of their color that you would not have noticed him +if you had been looking straight at him. + +When the Dryad came up, Old Pipes lost no time in telling her about +his mother, and what he wished her to do. At first, the Dryad +answered nothing, but stood looking very sadly at Old Pipes. + +"Do you really wish me to go into my tree again?" she said. "I should +dreadfully dislike to do it, for I don't know what might happen. It +is not at all necessary, for I could make your mother younger at any +time if she would give me the opportunity. I had already thought of +making you still happier in this way, and several times I have waited +about your cottage, hoping to meet your aged mother, but she never +comes outside, and you know a Dryad cannot enter a house. I cannot +imagine what put this idea into your head. Did you think of it +yourself?" + +"No, I cannot say that I did," answered Old Pipes. "A little dwarf +whom I met in the woods proposed it to me." + +"Oh!" cried the Dryad; "now I see through it all. It is the scheme of +that vile Echo-dwarf--your enemy and mine. Where is he? I should like +to see him." + +"I think he has gone away," said Old Pipes. + +"No he has not," said the Dryad, whose quick eyes perceived the +Echo-dwarf among the rocks. "There he is. Seize him and drag him out, +I beg of you." + +Old Pipes perceived the dwarf as soon as he was pointed out to him, +and, running to the rocks, he caught the little fellow by the arm and +pulled him out. + +"Now, then," cried the Dryad, who had opened the door of the great +oak, "just stick him in there, and we will shut him up. Then I shall +be safe from his mischief for the rest of the time I am free." + +Old Pipes thrust the Echo-dwarf into the tree; the Dryad pushed the +door shut; there was a clicking sound of bark and wood, and no one +would have noticed that the big oak had ever had an opening in it. + +"There," said the Dryad; "now we need not be afraid of him. And I +assure you, my good piper, that I shall be very glad to make your +mother younger as soon as I can. Will you not ask her to come out and +meet me?" + +"Of course I will," cried Old Pipes; "and I will do it without +delay." + +And then, the Dryad by his side, he hurried to his cottage. But when +he mentioned the matter to his mother, the old woman became very +angry indeed. She did not believe in Dryads; and, if they really did +exist, she knew they must be witches and sorceresses, and she would +have nothing to do with them. If her son had ever allowed himself to +be kissed by one of them, he ought to be ashamed of himself. As to +its doing him the least bit of good, she did not believe a word of +it. He felt better than he used to feel, but that was very common. +She had sometimes felt that way herself, and she forbade him ever to +mention a Dryad to her again. + +That afternoon, Old Pipes, feeling very sad that his plan in regard +to his mother had failed, sat down upon the rock and played upon his +pipes. The pleasant sounds went down the valley and up the hills and +mountain, but, to the great surprise of some persons who happened to +notice the fact, the notes were not echoed back from the rocky +hill-side, but from the woods on the side of the valley on which Old +Pipes lived. The next day many of the villagers stopped in their work +to listen to the echo of the pipes coming from the woods. The sound +was not as clear and strong as it used to be when it was sent back +from the rocky hill-side, but it certainly came from among the trees. +Such a thing as an echo changing its place in this way had never been +heard of before, and nobody was able to explain how it could have +happened. Old Pipes, however, knew very well that the sound came from +the Echo-dwarf shut up in the great oak-tree. The sides of the tree +were thin, and the sound of the pipes could be heard through them, +and the dwarf was obliged by the laws of his being to echo back those +notes whenever they came to him. But Old Pipes thought he might get +the Dryad in trouble if he let any one know that the Echo-dwarf was +shut up in the tree, and so he wisely said nothing about it. + +One day the two boys and the girl who had helped Old Pipes up the +hill were playing in the woods. Stopping near the great oak-tree, +they heard a sound of knocking within it, and then a voice plainly +said: + +"Let me out! let me out!" + +For a moment the children stood still in astonishment, and then one +of the boys exclaimed: + +"Oh, it is a Dryad, like the one Old Pipes found! Let's let her out!" + +"What are you thinking of?" cried the girl. "I am the oldest of all, +and I am only thirteen. Do you wish to be turned into crawling +babies? Run! run! run!" + +And the two boys and the girl dashed down into the valley as fast as +their legs could carry them. There was no desire in their youthful +hearts to be made younger than they were. And for fear that their +parents might think it well that they should commence their careers +anew, they never said a word about finding the Dryad-tree. + +As the summer days went on, Old Pipes's mother grew feebler and +feebler. One day when her son was away, for he now frequently went +into the woods to hunt or fish, or down into the valley to work, she +arose from her knitting to prepare the simple dinner. But she felt so +weak and tired that she was not able to do the work to which she had +been so long accustomed. "Alas! alas!" she said, "the time has come +when I am too old to work. My son will have to hire some one to come +here and cook his meals, make his bed, and mend his clothes. Alas! +alas! I had hoped that as long as I lived I should be able to do +these things. But it is not so. I have grown utterly worthless, and +some one else must prepare the dinner for my son. I wonder where he +is." And tottering to the door, she went outside to look for him. She +did not feel able to stand, and reaching the rustic chair, she sank +into it, quite exhausted, and soon fell asleep. + +The Dryad, who had often come to the cottage to see if she could find +an opportunity of carrying out old Pipes's affectionate design, now +happened by; and seeing that the much-desired occasion had come, she +stepped up quietly behind the old woman and gently kissed her on each +cheek, and then as quietly disappeared. + +In a few minutes the mother of old Pipes awoke, and looking up at the +sun, she exclaimed: "Why, it is almost dinner-time! My son will be +here directly, and I am not ready for him." And rising to her feet, +she hurried into the house, made the fire, set the meat and +vegetables to cook, laid the cloth, and by the time her son arrived +the meal was on the table. + +"How a little sleep does refresh one," she said to herself, as she +was bustling about. She was a woman of very vigorous constitution, +and at seventy had been a great deal stronger and more active than +her son was at that age. The moment Old Pipes saw his mother, he knew +that the Dryad had been there; but, while he felt as happy as a king, +he was too wise to say any thing about her. + +"It is astonishing how well I feel to-day," said his mother; "and +either my hearing has improved or you speak much more plainly than +you have done of late." + +The summer days went on and passed away, the leaves were falling from +the trees, and the air was becoming cold. + +"Nature has ceased to be lovely," said the Dryad, "and the +night-winds chill me. It is time for me to go back into my +comfortable quarters in the great oak. But first I must pay another +visit to the cottage of Old Pipes." + +She found the piper and his mother sitting side by side on the rock +in front of the door. The cattle were not to go to the mountain any +more that season, and he was piping them down for the last time. Loud +and merrily sounded the pipes of Old Pipes, and down the +mountain-side came the cattle, the cows by the easiest paths, the +sheep by those not quite so easy, and the goats by the most difficult +ones among the rocks; while from the great oak-tree were heard the +echoes of the cheerful music. + +"How happy they look, sitting there together," said the Dryad; "and I +don't believe it will do them a bit of harm to be still younger." And +moving quietly up behind them, she first kissed Old Pipes on his +cheek and then his mother. + +Old Pipes, who had stopped playing, knew what it was, but he did not +move, and said nothing. His mother, thinking that her son had kissed +her, turned to him with a smile and kissed him in return. And then +she arose and went into the cottage, a vigorous woman of sixty, +followed by her son, erect and happy, and twenty years younger than +herself. + +The Dryad sped away to the woods, shrugging her shoulders as she felt +the cool evening wind. + +When she reached the great oak, she turned the key and opened the +door. "Come out," she said to the Echo-dwarf, who sat blinking +within. "Winter is coming on, and I want the comfortable shelter of +my tree for myself. The cattle have come down from the mountain for +the last time this year, the pipes will no longer sound, and you can +go to your rocks and have a holiday until next spring." + +Upon hearing these words the dwarf skipped quickly out, and the Dryad +entered the tree and pulled the door shut after her. "Now, then," she +said to herself, "he can break off the key if he likes. It does not +matter to me. Another will grow out next spring. And although the +good piper made me no promise, I know that when the warm days arrive +next year, he will come and let me out again." + +The Echo-dwarf did not stop to break the key of the tree. He was too +happy to be released to think of any thing else, and he hastened as +fast as he could to his home on the rocky hill-side. + + * * * * * + +The Dryad was not mistaken when she trusted in the piper. When the +warm days came again he went to the oak-tree to let her out. But, to +his sorrow and surprise, he found the great tree lying upon the +ground. A winter storm had blown it down, and it lay with its trunk +shattered and split. And what became of the Dryad, no one ever knew. + + + + + + THE QUEEN'S MUSEUM. + + * * * * * + +There was once a Queen who founded, in her capital city, a grand +museum. This institution was the pride of her heart, and she devoted +nearly all her time to overseeing the collection of objects for it, +and their arrangement in the spacious halls. This museum was intended +to elevate the intelligence of her people, but the result was quite +disappointing to the Queen. For some reason, and what it was she +could not imagine, the people were not interested in her museum. She +considered it the most delightful place in the world, and spent hours +every day in examining and studying the thousands of objects it +contained; but although here and there in the city there was a person +who cared to visit the collection, the great body of the people found +it impossible to feel the slightest interest in it. At first this +grieved the Queen, and she tried to make her museum better; but as +this did no good, she became very angry, and she issued a decree that +all persons of mature age who were not interested in her museum +should be sent to prison. + +This decree produced a great sensation in the city. The people +crowded to the building, and did their very best to be interested; +but, in the majority of cases, the attempt was an utter failure. They +could not feel any interest whatever. The consequence was that +hundreds and thousands of the people were sent to prison, and as +there was not room enough for them in the ordinary jails, large +temporary prisons were erected in various parts of the city. Those +persons who were actually needed for work or service which no one +else could do were allowed to come out in the day-time on parole; but +at night they had to return to their prisons. + +It was during this deplorable state of affairs that a stranger +entered the city one day. He was surprised at seeing so many prisons, +and approaching the window in one of them, behind the bars of which +he saw a very respectable-looking citizen, he asked what all this +meant. The citizen informed him how matters stood, and then, with +tears mounting to his eyes, he added: + +"Oh, sir, I have tried my best to be interested in that museum; but +it is impossible; I cannot make myself care for it in the slightest +degree! And, what is more, I know I shall never be able to do so; and +I shall languish here for the rest of my days." + +Passing on, the Stranger met a mother coming out of her house. Her +face was pale, and she was weeping bitterly. Filled with pity, he +stopped and asked her what was the matter. "Oh, sir," she said, "for +a week I have been trying, for the sake of my dear children, to take +an interest in that museum. For a time I thought I might do it, but +the hopes proved false. It is impossible. I must leave my little +ones, and go to prison." + +The Stranger was deeply affected by these cases and many others of a +similar character, which he soon met with. "It is too bad! too bad!" +he said to himself. "I never saw a city in so much trouble. There is +scarcely a family, I am told, in which there is not some uninterested +person--I must see the Queen and talk to her about it," and with this +he wended his way to the palace. + +He met the Queen just starting out on her morning visit to the +museum. When he made it known that he was a stranger, and desired a +short audience, she stopped and spoke to him. + +"Have you visited my museum yet?" she said. "There is nothing in the +city so well worth your attention as that. You should go there before +seeing any thing else. You have a high forehead, and an intelligent +expression, and I have no doubt that it will interest you greatly. I +am going there myself, and I shall be glad to see what effect that +fine collection has upon a stranger." + +This did not suit the Stranger at all. From what he had heard he felt +quite sure that if he went to the museum, he would soon be in jail; +and so he hurried to propose a plan which had occurred to him while +on his way to the palace. + +"I came to see your Majesty on the subject of the museum," he said, +"and to crave permission to contribute to the collection some objects +which shall be interesting to every one. I understand that it is +highly desirable that every one should be interested." + +"Of course it is," said the Queen, "and although I think that there +is not the slightest reason why every one should not feel the keenest +interest in what the museum already contains, I am willing to add to +it whatever may make it of greater value." + +"In that case," said the Stranger, "no time should be lost in +securing what I wish to present." + +"Go at once," said the Queen. "But how soon can you return?" + +"It will take some days, at least," said the Stranger. + +"Give me your parole to return in a week," said the Queen, "and start +immediately." + +The Stranger gave his parole and left the palace. Having filled a +leathern bag with provisions from a cook's shop, he went out of the +city gates. As he walked into the open country, he said to himself: + +"I have certainly undertaken a very difficult enterprise. Where I am +to find any thing that will interest all the people in that city, I +am sure I do not know; but my heart is so filled with pity for the +great number of unfortunate persons who are torn from their homes and +shut up in prison, that I am determined to do something for them, if +I possibly can. There must be some objects to be found in this vast +country that will interest every one." + +About noon he came to a great mountain-side covered with a forest. +Thinking that he was as likely to find what he sought in one place as +another, and preferring the shade to the sun, he entered the forest, +and walked for some distance along a path which gradually led up the +mountain. Having crossed a brook with its edges lined with +water-cresses, he soon perceived a large cave, at the entrance of +which sat an aged hermit. "Ah," said the Stranger to himself, "this +is indeed fortunate! This good and venerable man, who passes his life +amid the secrets of nature, can surely tell me what I wish to know." +Saluting the Hermit, he sat down and told the old man the object of +his quest. + +"I am afraid you are looking for what you will not find," said the +Hermit. "Most people are too silly to be truly interested in any +thing. They herd together like cattle, and do not know what is good +for them. There are now on this mountain-side many commodious and +comfortable caves, all of which would be tenanted if people only knew +how improving and interesting it is to live apart from their +fellow-men. But, so far as it can be done, I will help you in your +quest, which I think is a worthy one. I can do nothing for you +myself, but I have a pupil who is very much given to wandering about, +and looking for curious things. He may tell you where you will be +able to find something that will interest everybody, though I doubt +it. You may go and see him, if you like, and I will excuse him from +his studies for a time, so that he may aid you in your search." + +The Hermit then wrote an excuse upon a piece of parchment, and, +giving it to the Stranger, he directed him to the cave of his pupil. + +This was situated at some distance, and higher up the mountain, and +when the Stranger reached it, he found the Pupil fast asleep upon the +ground. This individual was a long-legged youth, with long arms, long +hair, a long nose, and a long face. When the Stranger awakened him, +told him why he had come, and gave him the hermit's excuse, the +sleepy eyes of the Pupil brightened, and his face grew less long. + +"That's delightful!" he said, "to be let off on a Monday; for I +generally have to be satisfied with a half-holiday, Wednesdays and +Saturdays." + +"Is the Hermit very strict with you?" asked the Stranger. + +"Yes," said the Pupil, "I have to stick closely to the cave; though I +have been known to go fishing on days when there was no holiday. I +have never seen the old man but once, and that was when he first took +me. You know it wouldn't do for us to be too sociable. That wouldn't +be hermit-like. He comes up here on the afternoons I am out, and +writes down what I am to do for the next half-week." + +"And do you always do it?" asked the Stranger. + +"Oh, I get some of it done," said the Pupil; "but there have been +times when I have wondered whether it wouldn't have been better for +me to have been something else. But I have chosen my profession, and +I suppose I must be faithful to it. We will start immediately on our +search; but first I must put the cave in order, for the old man will +be sure to come up while I am gone." + +So saying, the Pupil opened an old parchment book at a marked page, +and laid it on a flat stone, which served as a table, and then placed +a skull and a couple of bones in a proper position near by. + +The two now started off, the Pupil first putting a line and hook in +his pocket, and pulling out a fishing-rod from under some bushes. + +"What do you want with that?" asked the Stranger, "we are not going +to fish!" + +"Why not?" said the Pupil; "if we come to a good place, we might +catch something that would be a real curiosity." + +Before long they came to a mountain brook, and here the Pupil +insisted on trying his luck. The Stranger was a little tired and +hungry, and so was quite willing to sit down for a time and eat +something from his bag. The Pupil ran off to find some bait, and he +staid away so long that the Stranger had quite finished his meal +before he returned. He came back at last, however, in a state of +great excitement. + +"Come with me! come with me!" he cried. "I have found something that +is truly astonishing! Come quickly!" + +The Stranger arose and hurried after the Pupil, whose long legs +carried him rapidly over the mountain-side. Reaching a large hole at +the bottom of a precipitous rock, the Pupil stopped, and exclaiming: +"Come in here and I will show you something that will amaze you!" he +immediately entered the hole. + +The Stranger, who was very anxious to see what curiosity he had +found, followed him some distance along a narrow and winding +under-ground passage. The two suddenly emerged into a high and +spacious cavern, which was lighted by openings in the roof; on the +floor, in various places, were strongly fastened boxes, and packages +of many sorts, bales and bundles of silks and rich cloths, with +handsome caskets, and many other articles of value. + +"What kind of a place is this?" exclaimed the Stranger, in great +surprise. + +"Don't you know?" cried the Pupil, his eyes fairly sparkling with +delight. "It is a robber's den! Isn't it a great thing to find a +place like this?" + +"A robber's den!" exclaimed the Stranger in alarm; "let us get out of +it as quickly as we can, or the robbers will return, and we shall be +cut to pieces." + +"I don't believe they are coming back very soon," said the Pupil, +"and we ought to stop and take a look at some of these things." + +"Fly, you foolish youth!" cried the Stranger; "you do not know what +danger you are in." And, so saying, he turned to hasten away from the +place. + +But he was too late. At that moment the robber captain and his band +entered the cave. When these men perceived the Stranger and the +Hermit's Pupil, they drew their swords and were about to rush upon +them, when the Pupil sprang forward and, throwing up his long arms, +exclaimed: + +"Stop! it is a mistake!" + +At these words, the robber captain lowered his sword, and motioned to +his men to halt. "A mistake!" he said; "what do you mean by that?" + +"I mean," said the Pupil, "that I was out looking for curiosities, +and wandered into this place by accident. We haven't taken a thing. +You may count your goods, and you will find nothing missing. We have +not even opened a box, although I very much wanted to see what was in +some of them." + +"Are his statements correct?" said the Captain, turning to the +Stranger. + +"Entirely so," was the answer. + +"You have truthful features, and an honest expression," said the +Captain, "and I do not believe you would be so dishonorable as to +creep in here during our absence and steal our possessions. Your +lives shall be spared, but you will be obliged to remain with us; for +we cannot allow any one who knows our secret to leave us. You shall +be treated well, and shall accompany us in our expeditions; and if +your conduct merits it, you shall in time be made full members." + +Bitterly the Stranger now regretted his unfortunate position. He +strode up and down one side of the cave, vowing inwardly that never +again would he allow himself to be led by a Hermit's Pupil. That +individual, however, was in a state of high delight. He ran about +from box to bale, looking at the rare treasures which some of the +robbers showed him. + +The two captives were fed and lodged very well; and the next day the +Captain called them and the band together, and addressed them. + +"We are now twenty-nine in number," he said; "twenty-seven full +members, and two on probation. To-night we are about to undertake a +very important expedition, in which we shall all join. We shall +fasten up the door of the cave, and at the proper time I shall tell +you to what place we are going." + +An hour or two before midnight the band set out, accompanied by the +Stranger and the Hermit's Pupil; and when they had gone some miles +the Captain halted them to inform them of the object of the +expedition. "We are going," he said, "to rob the Queen's museum. It +is the most important business we have ever undertaken." + +At these words the Stranger stepped forward and made a protest. "I +left the city yesterday," he said, "commissioned by the Queen to +obtain one or more objects of interest for her museum; and to return +now to rob an institution which I have promised to enrich will be +simply impossible." + +"You are right," said the Captain, after a moment's reflection, "such +an action would be highly dishonorable on your part. If you will give +me your word of honor that you will remain by this stone until our +return, the expedition will proceed without you." + +The Stranger gave his word, and having been left sitting upon the +stone, soon dropped asleep, and so remained until he was awakened by +the return of the band, a little before daylight. They came slowly +toiling along, each man carrying an enormous bundle upon his back. +Near the end of the line was the Hermit's Pupil, bearing a load as +heavy as any of the others. The Stranger offered to relieve him for a +time of his burden, but the Pupil would not allow it. + +"I don't wish these men to think I can't do as much as they can," he +said. "You ought to have been along. We had a fine time! We swept +that museum clean, I tell you! We didn't leave a thing on a shelf or +in a case." + +"What sort of things are they," asked the Stranger. + +"I don't know," replied the Pupil, "we didn't have any light for fear +people would notice it, but the moon shone in bright enough for us to +see all the shelves and the cases; and our orders were not to try and +examine any thing, but to take all that was there. The cases had +great cloth covers on them, and we spread these on the floor and made +bundles of the curiosities. We are going to examine them carefully as +soon as we get to the den." + +It was broad daylight when the robbers reached their cave. The +bundles were laid in a great circle on the floor, and, at a given +signal, they were opened. For a moment each robber gazed blankly at +the contents of his bundle, and then they all began to fumble and +search among the piles of articles upon the cloths; but after a few +minutes, they arose, looking blanker and more disappointed than +before. + +"So far as I can see," said the Captain, "there is nothing in the +whole collection that I care for. I do not like a thing here!" + +"Nor I!" "Nor I!" "Nor I!" cried each one of his band. + +"I suppose," said the Captain, after musing for a moment, "that as +these things are of no use to us, we are bound in honor to take them +back." + +"Hold!" said the Stranger, stepping forward; "do not be in too great +a hurry to do that." He then told the Captain of the state of affairs +in the city, and explained in full the nature of the expedition he +had undertaken for the Queen. "I think it would be better," he said, +"if these things were not taken back for the present. If you have a +safe place where you can put them, I will in due time tell the Queen +where they are, and if she chooses she can send for them." + +"Good!" said the Captain, "it is but right that she should bear part +of the labor of transportation. There is a disused cave, a mile or so +away, and we will tie up these bundles and carry them there; and then +we shall leave the matter to you. We take no further interest in it. +And if you have given your parole to the Queen to return in a week," +the Captain further continued, "of course you'll have to keep it. Did +you give your parole also?" he asked, turning to the Pupil. + +"Oh, no!" cried that youth; "there was no time fixed for my return. +And I am sure that I like a robber's life much better than that of a +hermit. There is ever so much more spice and dash in it." + +"The Stranger was then told that if he would promise not to betray +the robbers he might depart. He gave the promise; but added sadly +that he had lost so much time that he was afraid he would not now be +able to attain the object of his search and return within the week. + +"If that is the case," said the Captain, "we will gladly assist you." +"Comrades!" he cried, addressing his band, "after stowing this +useless booty in the disused cave, and taking some rest and +refreshment, we will set out again, and the object of our expedition +shall be to obtain something for the Queen's museum which will +interest every one." + +Shortly after midnight the robbers set out, accompanied by the +Stranger and the Pupil. When they had walked about an hour, the +Captain, as was his custom, brought them to a halt that he might tell +them where they were going. "I have concluded," said he, "that no +place is so likely to contain what we are looking for as the castle +of the great magician, Alfrarmedj. We will, therefore, proceed +thither, and sack the castle." + +"Will there not be great danger in attacking the castle of a +magician?" asked the Stranger in somewhat anxious tones. + +"Of course there will be," said the Captain, "but we are not such +cowards as to hesitate on account of danger. Forward, my men!" And on +they all marched. + +When they reached the magician's castle, the order was given to scale +the outer wall. This the robbers did with great agility, and the +Hermit's Pupil was among the first to surmount it. But the Stranger +was not used to climbing, and he had to be assisted over the wall. +Inside the great court-yard they perceived numbers of Weirds--strange +shadowy creatures who gathered silently around them; but not in the +least appalled, the robbers formed into a body, and marched into the +castle, the door of which stood open. They now entered a great hall, +having at one end a doorway before which hung a curtain. Following +their Captain, the robbers approached this curtain, and pushing it +aside, entered the room beyond. There, behind a large table, sat the +great magician, Alfrarmedj, busy over his mystic studies, which he +generally pursued in the dead hours of the night. Drawing their +swords, the robbers rushed upon him. + +"Surrender!" cried the Captain, "and deliver to us the treasures of +your castle." + +The old magician raised his head from his book, and, pushing up his +spectacles from his forehead, looked at them mildly, and said: + +"Freeze!" + +Instantly, they all froze as hard as ice, each man remaining in the +position in which he was when the magical word was uttered. With +uplifted swords and glaring eyes they stood, rigid and stiff, before +the magician. After calmly surveying the group, the old man said: + +"I see among you one who has an intelligent brow and truthful +expression. His head may thaw sufficiently for him to tell me what +means this untimely intrusion upon my studies." + +The Stranger now felt his head begin to thaw, and in a few moments he +was able to speak. He then told the magician about the Queen's +museum, and how it had happened that he had come there with the +robbers. + +"Your motive is a good one," said the magician, "though your actions +are somewhat erratic; and I do not mind helping you to find what you +wish. In what class of objects do the people of the city take the +most interest?" + +"Truly I do not know," said the Stranger. + +"This is indeed surprising!" exclaimed Alfrarmedj. "How can you +expect to obtain that which will interest every one, when you do not +know what it is in which every one takes an interest? Go, find out +this, and then return to me, and I will see what can be done." + +The magician then summoned his Weirds and ordered them to carry the +frozen visitors outside the castle walls. Each one of the rigid +figures was taken up by two Weirds, who carried him out and stood him +up in the road outside the castle. When all had been properly set up, +with the captain at their head, the gates were shut, and the magician +still sitting at his table, uttered the word, "Thaw!" + +Instantly, the whole band thawed and marched away. At daybreak they +halted, and considered how they should find out what all the people +in the city took an interest in. + +"One thing is certain," cried the Hermit's Pupil, "whatever it is, it +isn't the same thing." + +"Your remark is not well put together," said the Stranger, "but I see +the force of it. It is true that different people like different +things. But how shall we find out what the different people like?" + +"By asking them," said the Pupil. + +"Good!" cried the Captain, who preferred action to words. "This night +we will ask them." He then drew upon the sand a plan of the +city,--(with which he was quite familiar, having carefully robbed it +for many years,)--and divided it into twenty-eight sections, each one +of which was assigned to a man. "I omit you," the Captain said to the +Stranger, "because I find that you are not expert at climbing." He +then announced that at night the band would visit the city, and that +each man should enter the houses in his district, and ask the people +what it was in which they took the greatest interest. + +They then proceeded to the cave for rest and refreshment; and a +little before midnight they entered the city, and each member of the +band, including the Hermit's Pupil, proceeded to attend to the +business assigned to him. It was ordered that no one should disturb +the Queen, for they knew that what she took most interest in was the +museum. During the night nearly every person in the town was aroused +by a black-bearded robber, who had climbed into one of the windows of +the house, and who, instead of demanding money and jewels, simply +asked what it was in which that person took the greatest interest. +Upon receiving an answer, the robber repeated it until he had learned +it by heart, and then went to the next house. As so many of the +citizens were confined in prisons, which the robbers easily entered, +they transacted the business in much less time than they would +otherwise have required. + +The Hermit's Pupil was very active, climbing into and out of houses +with great agility. He obtained his answers quite as easily as did +the others, but whenever he left a house there was a shade of +disappointment upon his features. Among the last places that he +visited was a room in which two boys were sleeping. He awoke them and +asked the usual question. While they were trembling in their bed, not +knowing what to answer, the Pupil drew his sword and exclaimed: +"Come, now, no prevarication; you know it's fishing-tackle. Speak +out!" Each of the boys then promptly declared it was fishing-tackle, +and the pupil left, greatly gratified. "I was very much afraid," he +said to himself, "that not a person in my district would say +fishing-tackle; and I am glad to think that there were two boys who +had sense enough to like something that is really interesting." + +It was nearly daylight when the work was finished; and then the band +gathered together in an appointed place on the outside of the city, +where the Stranger awaited them. Each of the men had an excellent +memory, which was necessary in their profession, and they repeated to +the Stranger all the objects and subjects that had been mentioned to +them, and he wrote them down upon tablets. + +The next night, accompanied by the band, he proceeded to the castle +of the magician, the great gate of which was silently opened for them +by the Weirds. When they were ushered into the magician's room, +Alfrarmedj took the tablets from the Stranger and examined them +carefully. + +"All these things should make a very complete collection," he said, +"and I think I have specimens of the various objects in my +interminable vaults." He then called his Weirds and, giving one of +them the tablets, told him to go with his companions into the vaults +and gather enough of the things therein mentioned to fill a large +museum. In half an hour the Weirds returned and announced that the +articles were ready in the great court-yard. + +"Go, then," said the magician, "and assist these men to carry them to +the Queen's museum." + +The Stranger then heartily thanked Alfrarmedj for the assistance he +had given; and the band, accompanied by a number of Weirds, proceeded +to carry the objects of interest to the Queen's museum. It was a +strange procession. Half a dozen Weirds carried a stuffed mammoth, +followed by others bearing the skeleton of a whale, while the robbers +and the rest of their queer helpers were loaded with every thing +relating to history, science, and art which ought to be in a really +good museum. When the whole collection had been put in place upon the +floors, the shelves, and in the cases, it was nearly morning. The +robbers, with the Hermit's Pupil, retired to the cave; the Weirds +disappeared; while the Stranger betook himself to the Queen's palace, +where, as soon as the proper hour arrived, he requested an audience. + +When he saw the Queen, he perceived that she was very pale and that +her cheeks bore traces of recent tears. "You are back in good time," +she said to him, "but it makes very little difference whether you +have succeeded in your mission or not. There is no longer any museum. +There has been a great robbery, and the thieves have carried off the +whole of the vast and valuable collection which I have been so long +in making." + +"I know of that affair," said the Stranger, "and I have already +placed in your museum-building the collection which I have obtained. +If your Majesty pleases, I shall be glad to have you look at it. It +may, in some degree, compensate for that which has been stolen." + +"Compensate!" cried the Queen. "Nothing can compensate for it; I do +not even wish to see what you have brought." + +"Be that as your Majesty pleases," said the Stranger; "but I will be +so bold as to say that I have great hopes that the collection which I +have obtained will interest the people. Will your Majesty graciously +allow them to see it?" + +"I have no objection to that," said the Queen; "and indeed I shall be +very glad if they can be made to be interested in the museum. I will +give orders that the prisons be opened, so that everybody can go to +see what you have brought; and those who shall be interested in it +may return to their homes. I did not release my obstinate subjects +when the museum was robbed, because their fault then was just as +great as it was before; and it would not be right that they should +profit by my loss." + +The Queen's proclamation was made, and for several days the museum +was crowded with people moving from morning till night through the +vast collection of stuffed animals, birds, and fishes; rare and +brilliant insects; mineral and vegetable curiosities; beautiful works +of art; and all the strange, valuable, and instructive objects which +had been brought from the interminable vaults of the magician +Alfrarmedj. The Queen's officers, who had been sent to observe +whether or not the people were interested, were in no doubt upon this +point. Every eye sparkled with delight, for every one found something +which was the very thing he wished to see; and in the throng was the +Hermit's Pupil, standing in rapt ecstasy before a large case +containing all sorts of fishing-tackle, from the smallest hooks for +little minnows to the great irons and spears used in capturing +whales. + +No one went back to prison, and the city was full of re-united +households and happy homes. On the morning of the fourth day, a grand +procession of citizens came to the palace to express to the Queen +their delight and appreciation of her museum. The great happiness of +her subjects could but please the Queen. She called the Stranger to +her, and said to him: + +"Tell me how you came to know what it was that would interest my +people." + +"I asked them," said the Stranger. "That is to say, I arranged that +they should be asked." + +"That was well done," said the Queen; "but it is a great pity that my +long labors in their behalf should have been lost. For many years I +have been a collector of button-holes; and there was nothing valuable +or rare in the line of my studies of which I had not an original +specimen or a facsimile. My agents brought me from foreign lands, +even from the most distant islands of the sea, button-holes of every +kind; in silk, in wool, in cloth of gold, in every imaginable +material, and of those which could not be obtained careful copies +were made. There was not a duplicate specimen in the whole +collection; only one of each kind; nothing repeated. Never before was +there such a museum. With all my power I strove to educate my people +up to an appreciation of button-holes; but, with the exception of a +few tailors and seamstresses, nobody took the slightest interest in +what I had provided for their benefit. I am glad that my people are +happy, but I cannot restrain a sigh for the failure of my efforts." + +"The longer your Majesty lives," said the Stranger, "the better you +will understand that we cannot make other people like a thing simply +because we like it ourselves." + +"Stranger," said the Queen, gazing upon him with admiration, "are you +a king in disguise?" + +"I am," he replied. + +"I thought I perceived it," said the Queen, "and I wish to add that I +believe you are far better able to govern this kingdom than I am. If +you choose I will resign it to you." + +"Not so, your majesty," said the other; "I would not deprive you of +your royal position, but I should be happy to share it with you." + +"That will answer very well," said the Queen. And turning to an +attendant, she gave orders that preparations should be made for their +marriage on the following day. + +After the royal wedding, which was celebrated with great pomp and +grandeur, the Queen paid a visit to the museum, and, much to her +surprise, was greatly delighted and interested. The King then +informed her that he happened to know where the robbers had stored +her collection, which they could not sell or make use of, and if she +wished, he would regain the collection and erect a building for its +reception. + +"We will not do that at present," said the Queen. "When I shall have +thoroughly examined and studied all these objects, most of which are +entirely new to me, we will decide about the button-holes." + +The Hermit's Pupil did not return to his cave. He was greatly +delighted with the spice and dash of a robber's life, so different +from that of a hermit; and he determined, if possible, to change his +business and enter the band. He had a conversation with the Captain +on the subject, and that individual encouraged him in his purpose. + +"I am tired," the Captain said, "of a robber's life. I have stolen so +much, that I cannot use what I have. I take no further interest in +accumulating spoils. The quiet of a hermit's life attracts me; and, +if you like we will change places. I will become the pupil of your +old master, and you shall be the captain of my band." + +The change was made. The Captain retired to the cave of the Hermit's +Pupil, while the latter, with the hearty consent of all the men, took +command of the band of robbers. + +When the King heard of this change, he was not at all pleased, and he +sent for the ex-pupil. + +"I am willing to reward you," he said, "for assisting me in my recent +undertaking; but I cannot allow you to lead a band of robbers in my +dominions." + +A dark shade of disappointment passed over the ex-pupil's features, +and his face lengthened visibly. + +"It is too bad," he said, "to be thus cut short at the very outset of +a brilliant career. I'll tell you what I'll do," he added suddenly, +his face brightening, "if you'll let me keep on in my new profession, +I'll promise to do nothing but rob robbers." + +"Very well," said the King, "if you will confine yourself to that, +you may retain your position." + +The members of the band were perfectly willing to rob in the new way, +for it seemed quite novel and exciting to them. The first place they +robbed was their own cave, and as they all had excellent memories, +they knew from whom the various goods had been stolen, and every +thing was returned to its proper owner. The ex-pupil then led his +band against the other dens of robbers in the kingdom, and his +movements were conducted with such dash and vigor that the various +hordes scattered in every direction, while the treasures in their +dens were returned to the owners, or, if these could not be found, +were given to the poor. In a short time every robber, except those +led by the ex-pupil, had gone into some other business; and the +victorious youth led his band into other kingdoms to continue the +great work of robbing robbers. + +The Queen never sent for the collection of curiosities which the +robbers had stolen from her. She was so much interested in the new +museum that she continually postponed the re-establishment of her old +one; and, as far as can be known, the button-holes are still in the +cave where the robbers shut them up. + + + + + + CHRISTMAS BEFORE LAST; + +OR, THE FRUIT OF THE FRAGILE PALM. + + * * * * * + +The "Horn o' Plenty" was a fine, big, old-fashioned ship, very high +in the bow, very high in the stern, with a quarter-deck always +carpeted in fine weather, because her captain could not see why one +should not make himself comfortable at sea as well as on land. +Covajos Maroots was her captain, and a fine, jolly, old-fashioned, +elderly sailor he was. The "Horn o' Plenty" always sailed upon one +sea, and always between two ports, one on the west side of the sea, +and one on the east. The port on the west was quite a large city, in +which Captain Covajos had a married son, and the port on the east was +another city in which he had a married daughter. In each family he +had several grandchildren; and, consequently, it was a great joy to +the jolly old sailor to arrive at either port. The Captain was very +particular about his cargo, and the "Horn o' Plenty" was generally +laden with good things to eat, or sweet things to smell, or fine +things to wear, or beautiful things to look at. Once a merchant +brought to him some boxes of bitter aloes, and mustard plasters, but +Captain Covajos refused to take them into his ship. + +"I know," said he, "that such things are very useful and necessary at +times, but you would better send them over in some other vessel. The +'Horn o' Plenty' has never carried any thing that to look at, to +taste, or to smell, did not delight the souls of old and young. I am +sure you cannot say that of these commodities. If I were to put such +things on board my ship, it would break the spell which more than +fifty savory voyages have thrown around it." + +There were sailors who sailed upon that sea who used to say that +sometimes, when the weather was hazy and they could not see far, they +would know they were about to meet the "Horn o' Plenty" before she +came in sight; her planks and timbers, and even her sails and masts, +had gradually become so filled with the odor of good things that the +winds that blew over her were filled with an agreeable fragrance. + +There was another thing about which Captain Covajos was very +particular; he always liked to arrive at one of his ports a few days +before Christmas. Never, in the course of his long life, had the old +sailor spent a Christmas at sea; and now that he had his fine +grandchildren to help make the holidays merry, it would have grieved +him very much if he had been unable to reach one or the other of his +ports in good season. His jolly old vessel was generally heavily +laden, and very slow, and there were many days of calms on that sea +when she did not sail at all, so that her voyages were usually very, +very long. But the Captain fixed the days of sailing so as to give +himself plenty of time to get to the other end of his course before +Christmas came around. + +One spring, however, he started too late, and when he was about the +middle of his voyage, he called to him Baragat Bean, his old +boatswain. This venerable sailor had been with the Captain ever since +he had commanded the "Horn o' Plenty," and on important occasions he +was always consulted in preference to the other officers, none of +whom had served under Captain Covajos more then fifteen or twenty +years. + +"Baragat," said the Captain, "we have just passed the Isle of +Guinea-Hens. You can see its one mountain standing up against the sky +to the north." + +"Aye, aye, sir," said old Baragat; "there she stands, the same as +usual." + +"That makes it plain," said the Captain, "that we are not yet +half-way across, and I am very much afraid that I shall not be able +to reach my dear daughter's house before Christmas." + +"That would be doleful, indeed," said Baragat; "but I've feared +something of the kind, for we've had calms nearly every other day, +and sometimes, when the wind did blow, it came from the wrong +direction, and it's my belief that the ship sailed backward." + +"That was very bad management," said the Captain. "The chief mate +should have seen to it that the sails were turned in such a manner +that the ship could not go backward. If that sort of thing happened +often, it would become quite a serious affair." + +"But what is done can't be helped," said the boatswain, "and I don't +see how you are going to get into port before Christmas." + +"Nor do I," said the Captain, gazing out over the sea. + +"It would give me a sad turn, sir," said Baragat, "to see you spend +Christmas at sea; a thing you never did before, nor ever shall do, if +I can help it. If you'll take my advice, sir, you'll turn around, and +go back. It's a shorter distance to the port we started from than to +the one we are going to, and if we turn back now, I am sure we all +shall be on shore before the holidays." + +"Go back to my son's house!" exclaimed Captain Covajos, "where I was +last winter! Why, that would be like spending last Christmas over +again!" + +"But that would be better than having none at all, sir," said the +boatswain, "and a Christmas at sea would be about equal to none." + +"Good!" exclaimed the Captain. "I will give up the coming Christmas +with my daughter and her children, and go back and spend last +Christmas over again with my son and his dear boys and girls. Have +the ship turned around immediately, Baragat, and tell the chief mate +I do not wish to sail backward if it can possibly be avoided." + +For a week or more the "Horn o' Plenty" sailed back upon her track +towards the city where dwelt the Captain's son. The weather was fine, +the carpet was never taken up from the quarter-deck, and every thing +was going on very well, when a man, who happened to have an errand at +one of the topmasts, came down, and reported that, far away to the +north, he had seen a little open boat with some people in it. + +"Ah me!" said Captain Covajos, "it must be some poor fellows who are +shipwrecked. It will take us out of our course, but we must not leave +them to their fate. Have the ship turned about, so that it will sail +northward." + +It was not very long before they came up with the boat; and, much to +the Captain's surprise, he saw that it was filled with boys. + +"Who are you?" he cried as soon as he was near enough. "And where do +you come from?" + +"We are the First Class in Long Division," said the oldest boy, "and +we are cast away. Have you any thing to eat that you can spare us? We +are almost famished." + +"We have plenty of every thing," said the Captain. "Come on board +instantly, and all your wants shall be supplied." + +"How long have you been without food?" he asked, when the boys were +on the deck of the vessel. + +"We have had nothing to eat since breakfast," said one of them; "and +it is now late in the afternoon. Some of us are nearly dead from +starvation." + +"It is very hard for boys to go so long without eating," said the +good Captain. And leading them below, he soon set them to work upon a +bountiful meal. + +Not until their hunger was fully satisfied did he ask them how they +came to be cast away. + +"You see, sir," said the oldest boy, "that we and the Multiplication +Class had a holiday to-day, and each class took a boat and determined +to have a race, so as to settle, once for all, which was the highest +branch of arithmetic, multiplication or long division. Our class +rowed so hard that we entirely lost sight of the Multiplicationers, +and found indeed that we were out of sight of every thing; so that, +at last, we did not know which was the way back, and thus we became +castaways." + +"Where is your school?" asked the Captain. + +"It is on Apple Island," said the boy; "and, although it is a long +way off for a small boat with only four oars for nine boys, it can't +be very far for a ship." + +"That is quite likely," said the Captain, "and we shall take you +home. Baragat, tell the chief mate to have the vessel turned toward +Apple Island, that we may restore these boys to their parents and +guardians." + +Now, the chief mate had not the least idea in the world where Apple +Island was, but he did not like to ask, because that would be +confessing his ignorance; so he steered his vessel toward a point +where he believed he had once seen an island, which, probably, was +the one in question. The "Horn o' Plenty" sailed in this direction +all night, and when day broke, and there was no island in sight, she +took another course; and so sailed this way and that for six or seven +days, without ever seeing a sign of land. All this time, the First +Class in Long Division was as happy as it could be, for it was having +a perfect holiday; fishing off the sides of the vessel, climbing up +the ladders and ropes, and helping the sailors whistle for wind. But +the Captain now began to grow a little impatient, for he felt he was +losing time; so he sent for the chief mate, and said to him mildly +but firmly: + +"I know it is out of the line of your duty to search for island +schools, but, if you really think that you do not know where Apple +Island lies, I wish you to say so, frankly and openly." + +"Frankly and openly," answered the mate, "I don't think I do." + +"Very well," said the Captain. "Now, that is a basis to work upon, +and we know where we stand. You can take a little rest, and let the +second mate find the island. But I can only give him three days in +which to do it. We really have no time to spare." + +The second mate was very proud of the responsibility placed upon him, +and immediately ordered the vessel to be steered due south. + +"One is just as likely," he said, "to find a totally unknown place by +going straight ahead in a certain direction, as by sailing here, +there, and everywhere. In this way, you really get over more water, +and there is less wear and tear of the ship and rigging." + +So he sailed due south for two days, and at the end of that time they +came in sight of land. This was quite a large island, and when they +approached near enough, they saw upon its shores a very handsome +city. + +"Is this Apple Island?" said Captain Covajos to the oldest boy. + +"Well, sir," answered the youth, "I am not sure I can say with +certainty that I truly believe that it is; but, I think, if we were +to go on shore, the people there would be able to tell us how to go +to Apple Island." + +"Very likely," said the good Captain; "and we will go on shore and +make inquiries.--And it has struck me, Baragat," he said, "that +perhaps the merchants in the city where my son lives may be somewhat +annoyed when the 'Horn o' Plenty' comes back with all their goods on +board, and not disposed of. Not understanding my motives, they may be +disposed to think ill of me. Consequently the idea has come into my +head, that it might be a good thing to stop here for a time, and try +to dispose of some of our merchandise. The city seems to be quite +prosperous, and I have no doubt there are a number of merchants +here." + +So the "Horn o' Plenty" was soon anchored in the harbor, and as many +of the officers and crew as could be spared went on shore to make +inquiries. Of course the First Class in Long Division was not left +behind; and, indeed, they were ashore as soon as anybody. The Captain +and his companions were cordially welcomed by some of the dignitaries +of the city who had come down to the harbor to see the strange +vessel; but no one could give any information in regard to Apple +Island, the name of which had never been heard on those shores. The +Captain was naturally desirous of knowing at what place he had +landed, and was informed that this was the Island of the Fragile +Palm. + +"That is rather an odd name," said the old Captain. "Why is it so +called?" + +"The reason is this," said his informant. "Near the centre of the +island stands a tall and very slender palm-tree, which has been +growing there for hundreds of years. It bears large and handsome +fruit which is something like the cocoanut; and, in its perfection, +is said to be a transcendently delicious fruit." + +"Said to be!" exclaimed the Captain; "are you not positive about it?" + +"No," said the other; "no one living has ever tasted the fruit in its +perfection. When it becomes overripe, it drops to the ground, and, +even then, it is considered royal property, and is taken to the +palace for the King's table. But on fete-days and grand occasions +small bits of it are distributed to the populace." + +"Why don't you pick the fruit," asked Captain Covajos, "when it is in +its best condition to eat?" + +"It would be impossible," said the citizen, "for any one to climb up +that tree, the trunk of which is so extremely delicate and fragile +that the weight of a man would probably snap it; and, of course, a +ladder placed against it would produce the same result. Many attempts +have been made to secure this fruit at the proper season, but all of +them have failed. Another palm-tree of a more robust sort was once +planted near this one in the hope that when it grew high enough, men +could climb up the stronger tree and get the fruit from the other. +But, although we waited many years the second tree never attained +sufficient height, and it was cut down." + +"It is a great pity," said the Captain; "but I suppose it cannot be +helped." And then he began to make inquiries about the merchants in +the place, and what probability there was of his doing a little trade +here. The Captain soon discovered that the cargo of his ship was made +up of goods which were greatly desired by the citizens of this place; +and for several days he was very busy in selling the good things to +eat, the sweet things to smell, the fine things to wear, and the +beautiful things to look at, with which the hold of the "Horn o' +Plenty" was crowded. + +During this time the First Class in Long Division roamed, in delight, +over the city. The busy streets, the shops, the handsome buildings, +and the queer sights which they occasionally met, interested and +amused them greatly. But still the boys were not satisfied. They had +heard of the Fragile Palm, and they made up their minds to go and +have a look at it. Therefore, taking a guide, they tramped out into +the country, and in about an hour they came in sight of the beautiful +tree standing in the centre of the plain. The trunk was, indeed, +exceedingly slender, and, as the guide informed them, the wood was of +so very brittle a nature that if the tree had not been protected from +the winds by the high hills which encircled it, it would have been +snapped off ages ago. Under the broad tuft of leaves that formed its +top, the boys saw hanging large clusters of the precious fruit; great +nuts as big as their heads. + +"At what time of the year," asked the oldest boy, "is that fruit just +ripe enough to eat?" + +"Now," answered the guide. "This is the season when it is in the most +perfect condition. In about a month it will become entirely too ripe +and soft, and will drop. But, even then, the King and all the rest of +us are glad enough to get a taste of it." + +"I should think the King would be exceedingly eager to get some of +it, just as it is," said the boy. + +"Indeed he is!" replied the guide. "He and his father, and I don't +know how many grandfathers back, have offered large rewards to any +one who would procure them this fruit in its best condition. But +nobody has ever been able to get any yet." + +"The reward still holds good, I suppose," said the head boy. + +"Oh, yes," answered the guide; "there never was a King who so much +desired to taste the fruit as our present monarch." + +The oldest boy looked up at the top of the tree, shut one eye, and +gave his head a little wag. Whereupon every boy in the class looked +up, shut one eye, and slightly wagged his head. After which the +oldest boy said that he thought it was about time for them to go back +to the ship. + +As soon as they reached the vessel, and could talk together freely, +the boys had an animated discussion. It was unanimously agreed that +they would make an attempt to get some of the precious fruit from the +Fragile Palm, and the only difference of opinion among them was as to +how it should be done. Most of them were in favor of some method of +climbing the tree and trusting to its not breaking. But this the +oldest boy would not listen to; the trunk might snap, and then +somebody would be hurt, and he felt, in a measure, responsible for +the rest of the class. At length a good plan was proposed by a boy +who had studied mechanics. + +"What we ought to do with that tree," said he, "is to put a hinge +into her. Then we could let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and +set her up again. + +"But how are you going to do it?" asked the others. + +"This is the way," said the boy who had studied mechanics. "You take +a saw, and then, about two feet from the ground, you begin and saw +down diagonally, for a foot and a half, to the centre of the trunk. +Then you go on the other side, and saw down in the same way, the two +outs meeting each other. Now you have the upper part of the trunk +ending in a wedge, which fits into a cleft in the lower part of the +trunk. Then, about nine inches below the place where you first began +to saw, you bore a hole straight through both sides of the cleft and +the wedge between them. Then you put an iron bolt through this hole, +and you have your tree on a hinge, only she wont be apt to move +because she fits in so snug and tight. Then you get a long rope, and +put one end in a slipknot loosely around the trunk. Then you get a +lot of poles, and tie them end to end, and push this slip-knot up +until it is somewhere near the top, when you pull it tight. Then you +take another rope with a slip-knot, and push this a little more than +half-way up the trunk. By having two ropes, that way, you prevent too +much strain coming on any one part of the trunk. Then, after that, +you take a mallet and chisel and round off the lower corners of the +wedge, so that it will turn easily in the cleft. Then we take hold of +the ropes, let her down gently, pick off the fruit, and haul her up +again. That will all be easy enough." + +This plan delighted the boys, and they all pronounced in its favor; +but the oldest one suggested that it would be better to fasten the +ropes to the trunk before they began to saw upon it, and another boy +asked how they were going to keep the tree standing when they hauled +her up again. + +"Oh, that is easy," said the one who had studied mechanics; "you just +bore another hole about six inches above the first one, and put in +another bolt. Then, of course, she can't move." + +This settled all the difficulties, and it was agreed to start out +early the next morning, gather the fruit, and claim the reward the +King had offered. They accordingly went to the Captain and asked him +for a sharp saw, a mallet and chisel, an auger, two iron bolts, and +two very long ropes. These, having been cheerfully given to them, +were put away in readiness for the work to be attempted. + +Very early on the next morning, the First Class in Long Division set +out for the Fragile Palm, carrying their tools and ropes. Few people +were awake as they passed through the city, and, without being +observed, they reached the little plain on which the tree stood. The +ropes were attached at the proper places, the tree was sawn, +diagonally, according to the plan; the bolt was put in, and the +corners of the wedge were rounded off. Then the eldest boy produced a +pound of butter, whereupon his comrades, who had seized the ropes, +paused in surprise and asked him why he had brought the butter. + +"I thought it well," was the reply, "to bring along some butter, +because, when the tree is down, we can grease the hinge, and then it +will not be so hard to pull it up again." + +When all was ready, eight of the boys took hold of the long ropes, +while another one with a pole pushed against the trunk of the Fragile +Palm. When it began to lean over a little, he dropped his pole and +ran to help the others with the ropes. Slowly the tree moved on its +hinge, descending at first very gradually; but it soon began to move +with greater rapidity, although the boys held it back with all their +strength; and, in spite of their most desperate efforts, the top came +to the ground at last with a great thump. And then they all dropped +their ropes, and ran for the fruit. Fortunately the great nuts +incased in their strong husks were not in the least injured, and the +boys soon pulled them off, about forty in all. Some of the boys were +in favor of cracking open a few of the nuts and eating them, but this +the eldest boy positively forbade. + +"This fruit," he said, "is looked upon as almost sacred, and if we +were to eat any of it, it is probable that we should be put to death, +which would be extremely awkward for fellows who have gone to all the +trouble we have had. We must set up the tree and carry the fruit to +the King." + +According to this advice, they thoroughly greased the hinge in the +tree with the butter, and then set themselves to work to haul up the +trunk. This, however, was much more difficult than letting it down; +and they had to lift up the head of it, and prop it up on poles, +before they could pull upon it with advantage. The tree, although +tall, was indeed a very slender one, with a small top, and, if it had +been as fragile as it was supposed to be, the boys' efforts would +surely have broken it. At last, after much tugging and warm work, +they pulled it into an upright position, and put in the second bolt. +They left the ropes on the tree because, as some of them had +suggested, the people might want to let the tree down again the next +year. It would have been difficult for the boys to carry in their +arms the great pile of fruit they had gathered; but, having noticed a +basket-maker's cottage on their way to the tree, two of them were +sent to buy one of his largest baskets or hampers. This was attached +to two long poles, and, having been filled with the nuts, the boys +took the poles on their shoulders, and marched into the city. + +On their way to the palace they attracted a great crowd, and when +they were ushered into the presence of the King, his surprise and +delight knew no bounds. At first he could scarcely believe his eyes; +but he had seen the fruit so often that there could be no mistake +about it. + +"I shall not ask you," he said to the boys, "how you procured this +fruit, and thus accomplished a deed which has been the object of the +ambition of myself and my forefathers. All I ask is, did you leave +the tree standing?" + +"We did," said the boys. + +"Then all that remains to be done," said His Majesty, "is to give you +the reward you have so nobly earned. Treasurer, measure out to each +of them a quart of gold coin. And pray be quick about it, for I am +wild with desire to have a table spread, and one of these nuts +cracked, that I may taste of its luscious contents." + +The boys, however, appeared a little dissatisfied. Huddling together, +they consulted in a low tone, and then the eldest boy addressed the +King. + +"May it please your Majesty," he said; "we should very much prefer to +have you give each of us one of those nuts instead of a quart of +gold." + +The King looked grave. "This is a much greater reward," he said, +"than I had ever expected to pay; but, since you ask it, you must +have it. You have done something which none of my subjects has ever +been able to accomplish, and it is right, therefore, that you should +be fully satisfied." + +So he gave them each a nut, with which they departed in triumph to +the ship. + +By the afternoon of the next day, the Captain had sold all his cargo +at very good prices; and when the money was safely stored away in the +"Horn o' Plenty," he made ready to sail, for he declared he had +really no time to spare. "I must now make all possible haste," he +said to old Baragat, "to find Apple Island, put these boys ashore, +and then speed away to the city where lives my son. We must not fail +to get there in time to spend last Christmas over again." + +On the second day, after the "Horn o' Plenty" had left the Island of +the Fragile Palm, one of the sailors who happened to be aloft noticed +a low, black, and exceedingly unpleasant-looking vessel rapidly +approaching. This soon proved to be the ship of a band of corsairs, +who, having heard of the large amount of money on the "Horn o' +Plenty," had determined to pursue her and capture the rich prize. All +sails were set upon the "Horn o' Plenty," but it soon became plain +that she could never outsail the corsair vessel. + +"What our ship can do better than any thing else," said Baragat to +the Captain, "is to stop short. Stop her short, and let the other one +go by." + +This manoeuvre was executed, but, although the corsair passed rapidly +by, not being able to stop so suddenly, it soon turned around and +came back, its decks swarming with savage men armed to the teeth. + +"They are going to board us," cried Baragat. "They are getting out +their grappling-irons, and they will fasten the two ships together." + +"Let all assemble on the quarter-deck," said the Captain. "It is +higher there, and we shall not be so much exposed to accidents." + +The corsair ship soon ran alongside the "Horn o' Plenty," and in a +moment the two vessels were fastened together; and then the corsairs, +every man of them, each with cutlass in hand and a belt full of dirks +and knives, swarmed up the side of the "Horn o' Plenty," and sprang +upon its central deck. Some of the ferocious fellows, seeing the +officers and crew all huddled together upon the quarter-deck, made a +movement in that direction. This so frightened the chief mate that he +sprang down upon the deck of the corsair ship. A panic now arose, and +he was immediately followed by the officers and crew. The boys, of +course, were not to be left behind; and the Captain and Baragat felt +themselves bound not to desert the crew, and so they jumped also. +None of the corsairs interfered with this proceeding, for each one of +them was anxious to find the money at once. When the passengers and +crew of the "Horn o' Plenty" were all on board the corsair ship, +Baragat came to the Captain, and said: + +"If I were you, sir, I'd cast off those grapnels, and separate the +vessels. If we don't do that those rascals, when they have finished +robbing our money-chests, will come back here and murder us all." + +"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos; and he told the chief +mate to give orders to cast off the grapnels, push the two vessels +apart, and set some of the sails. + +When this had been done, the corsair vessel began to move away from +the other, and was soon many lengths distant from her. When the +corsairs came on deck and perceived what had happened, they were +infuriated, and immediately began to pursue their own vessel with the +one they had captured. But the "Horn o' Plenty" could not, by any +possibility, sail as fast as the corsair ship, and the latter easily +kept away from her. + +"Now, then," said Baragat to the Captain, "what you have to do is +easy enough. Sail straight for our port and those sea-robbers will +follow you; for, of course, they will wish to get their own vessel +back again, and will hope, by some carelessness on our part, to +overtake us. In the mean time the money will be safe enough, for they +will have no opportunity of spending it; and when we come to port, we +can take some soldiers on board, and go back and capture those +fellows. They can never sail away from us on the 'Horn o' Plenty.'" + +"That is an admirable plan," said the Captain, "and I shall carry it +out; but I cannot sail to port immediately. I must first find Apple +Island and land these boys, whose parents and guardians are probably +growing very uneasy. I suppose the corsairs will continue to follow +us wherever we go." + +"I hope so," said Baragat; "at any rate we shall see." + +The First Class in Long Division was very much delighted with the +change of vessels, and the boys rambled everywhere, and examined with +great interest all that belonged to the corsairs. They felt quite +easy about the only treasures they possessed, because, when they had +first seen the piratical vessel approaching, they had taken the +precious nuts which had been given to them by the King, and had +hidden them at the bottom of some large boxes, in which the Captain +kept the sailors' winter clothes. + +"In this warm climate," said the eldest boy, "the robbers will never +meddle with those winter clothes, and our precious fruit will be +perfectly safe." + +"If you had taken my advice," said one of the other boys, "we should +have eaten some of the nuts. Those, at least, we should have been +sure of." + +"And we should have had that many less to show to the other classes," +said the eldest boy. "Nuts like these, I am told, if picked at the +proper season, will keep for a long time." + +For some days the corsairs on board the "Horn o' Plenty" followed +their own vessel, but then they seemed to despair of ever being able +to overtake it, and steered in another direction. This threatened to +ruin all the plans of Captain Covajos, and his mind became troubled. +Then the boy who had studied mechanics came forward and said to the +Captain: + +"I'll tell you what I'd do, sir, if I were you; I'd follow your old +ship, and when night came on I'd sail up quite near to her, and let +some of your sailors swim quietly over, and fasten a cable to her, +and then you could tow her after you wherever you wished to go." + +"But they might unfasten the cable, or cut it," said Baragat, who was +standing by. + +"That could easily be prevented," said the boy. "At their end of the +cable must be a stout chain which they cannot cut, and it must be +fastened so far beneath the surface of the water that they will not +be able to reach it to unfasten it." + +"A most excellent plan," said Captain Covajos; "let it be carried +out." + +As soon as it became quite dark, the corsair vessel quietly +approached the other, and two stout sailors from Finland, who swam +very well, were ordered to swim over and attach the chain-end of a +long cable to the "Horn o' Plenty." It was a very difficult +operation, for the chain was heavy, but the men succeeded at last, +and returned to report. + +"We put the chain on, fast and strong sir," they said to the Captain; +"and six feet under water. But the only place we could find to make +it fast to was the bottom of the rudder." + +"That will do very well," remarked Baragat; "for the 'Horn o' Plenty' +sails better backward than forward, and will not be so hard to tow." + +For week after week, and month after month, Captain Covajos, in the +corsair vessel, sailed here and there in search of Apple Island, +always towing after him the "Horn o' Plenty," with the corsairs on +board, but never an island with a school on it could they find; and +one day old Baragat came to the Captain and said: + +"If I were you, sir, I'd sail no more in these warm regions. I am +quite sure that apples grow in colder latitudes, and are never found +so far south as this." + +"That is a good idea," said Captain Covajos. "We should sail for the +north if we wished to find an island of apples. Have the vessel +turned northward." + +And so, for days and weeks, the two vessels slowly moved on to the +north. One day the Captain made some observations and calculations, +and then he hastily summoned Baragat. + +"Do you know," said he, "that I find it is now near the end of +November, and I am quite certain that we shall not get to the port +where my son lives in time to celebrate last Christmas again. It is +dreadfully slow work, towing after us the 'Horn o' Plenty,' full of +corsairs, wherever we go. But we cannot cast her off and sail +straight for our port, for I should lose my good ship, the merchants +would lose all their money, and the corsairs would go unpunished; +and, besides all that, think of the misery of the parents and +guardians of those poor boys. No; I must endeavor to find Apple +Island. And if I cannot reach port in time to spend last Christmas +with my son, I shall certainly get there in season for Christmas +before last. It is true that I spent that Christmas with my daughter, +but I cannot go on to her now. I am much nearer the city where my son +lives; and, besides, it is necessary to go back, and give the +merchants their money. So now we shall have plenty of time, and need +not feel hurried." + +"No," said Baragat, heaving a vast sigh, "we need not feel hurried." + +The mind of the eldest boy now became very much troubled, and he +called his companions about him. "I don't like at all," said he, +"this sailing to the north. It is now November, and, although it is +warm enough at this season in the southern part of the sea, it will +become colder and colder as we go on. The consequence of this will be +that those corsairs will want winter clothes, they will take them out +of the Captain's chests, and they will find our fruit." + +The boys groaned. "That is true," said one of them; "but still we +wish to go back to our island." + +"Of course," said the eldest boy, "it is quite proper that we should +return to Long Division. But think of the hard work we did to get +that fruit, and think of the quarts of gold we gave up for it! It +would be too bad to lose it now!" + +It was unanimously agreed that it would be too bad to lose the fruit, +and it was also unanimously agreed that they wished to go back to +Apple Island. But what to do about it, they did not know. + +Day by day the weather grew colder and colder, and the boys became +more and more excited and distressed for fear they should lose their +precious fruit. The eldest boy lay awake for several nights, and then +a plan came into his head. He went to Captain Covajos and proposed +that he should send a flag of truce over to the corsairs, offering to +exchange winter clothing. He would send over to them the heavy +garments they had left on their own vessel, and in return would take +the boxes of clothes intended for the winter wear of his sailors. In +this way, they would get their fruit back without the corsairs +knowing any thing about it. The Captain considered this an excellent +plan, and ordered the chief mate to take a boat and a flag of truce, +and go over to the "Horn o' Plenty," and make the proposition. The +eldest boy and two of the others insisted on going also, in order +that there might be no mistake about the boxes. But when the +flag-of-truce party reached the "Horn o' Plenty" they found not a +corsair there! Every man of them had gone. They had taken with them +all the money-chests, but to the great delight of the boys, the boxes +of winter clothes had not been disturbed; and in them still nestled, +safe and sound, the precious nuts of the Fragile Palm. + +When the matter had been thoroughly looked into, it became quite +evident what the corsairs had done. There had been only one boat on +board the "Horn o' Plenty," and that was the one on which the First +Class in Long Division had arrived. The night before, the two vessels +had passed within a mile or so of a large island, which the Captain +had approached in the hope it was the one they were looking for, and +they passed it so slowly that the corsairs had time to ferry +themselves over, a few at a time, in the little boat, taking with +them the money,--and all without discovery. + +Captain Covajos was greatly depressed when he heard of the loss of +all the money. + +"I shall have a sad tale to tell my merchants," he said, "and +Christmas before last will not be celebrated so joyously as it was +the first time. But we cannot help what has happened, and we all must +endeavor to bear our losses with patience. We shall continue our +search for Apple Island, but I shall go on board my own ship, for I +have greatly missed my carpeted quarter-deck and my other comforts. +The chief mate, however, and a majority of the crew shall remain on +board the corsair vessel, and continue to tow us. The 'Horn o' +Plenty' sails better stern foremost, and we shall go faster that +way." + +The boys were overjoyed at recovering their fruit, and most of them +were in favor of cracking two or three of the great nuts, and eating +their contents in honor of the occasion, but the eldest boy dissuaded +them. + +"The good Captain," he said, "has been very kind in endeavoring to +take us back to our school, and still intends to keep up the search +for dear old Apple Island. The least we can do for him is to give him +this fruit, which is all we have, and let him do what he pleases with +it. This is the only way in which we can show our gratitude to him." + +The boys turned their backs on one another, and each of them gave his +eyes a little rub, but they all agreed to give the fruit to the +Captain. + +When the good old man received his present, he was much affected. "I +will accept what you offer me," he said; "for if I did not, I know +your feelings would be wounded. But you must keep one of the nuts for +yourselves. And, more than that, if we do not find Apple Island in +the course of the coming year, I invite you all to spend Christmas +before last over again, with me at my son's house." + +All that winter, the two ships sailed up and down, and here and +there, but never could they find Apple Island. When Christmas-time +came, old Baragat went around among the boys and the crew, and told +them it would be well not to say a word on the subject to the +Captain, for his feelings were very tender in regard to spending +Christmas away from his families, and the thing had never happened +before. So nobody made any allusion to the holidays, and they passed +over as if they had been ordinary days. + +During the spring, and all through the summer, the two ships kept up +the unavailing search, but when the autumn began, Captain Covajos +said to old Baragat: "I am very sorry, but I feel that I can no +longer look for Apple Island. I must go back and spend Christmas +before last over again, with my dearest son; and if these poor boys +never return to their homes, I am sure they cannot say it was any +fault of mine." + +"No, sir," said Baragat, "I think you have done all that could be +expected of you." + +So the ships sailed to the city on the west side of the sea; and the +Captain was received with great joy by his son, and his +grandchildren. He went to the merchants, and told them how he had +lost all their money. He hoped they would be able to bear their +misfortune with fortitude, and begged, as he could do nothing else +for them, that they would accept the eight great nuts from the +Fragile Palm that the boys had given him. To his surprise the +merchants became wild with delight when they received the nuts. The +money they had lost was as nothing, they said, compared to the value +of this incomparable and precious fruit, picked in its prime, and +still in a perfect condition. + +It had been many, many generations since this rare fruit, the value +of which was like unto that of diamonds and pearls, had been for sale +in any market in the world; and kings and queens in many countries +were ready to give for it almost any price that might be asked. + +When the good old Captain heard this he was greatly rejoiced, and, as +the holidays were now near, he insisted that the boys should spend +Christmas before last over again, at his son's house. He found that a +good many people here knew where Apple Island was, and he made +arrangements for the First Class in Long Division to return to that +island in a vessel which was to sail about the first of the year. + +The boys still possessed the great nut which the Captain had insisted +they should keep for themselves, and he now told them that if they +chose to sell it, they would each have a nice little fortune to take +back with them. The eldest boy consulted the others, and then he said +to the Captain: + +"Our class has gone through a good many hardships, and has had a lot +of trouble with that palm-tree and other things, and we think we +ought to be rewarded. So, if it is all the same to you, I think we +will crack the nut on Christmas Day and we all will eat it." + +"I never imagined," cried Captain Covajos, as he sat, on that +Christmas Day, surrounded by his son's family and the First Class in +Long Division, the eyes of the whole party sparkling with ecstasy as +they tasted the peerless fruit of the Fragile Palm, "that Christmas +before last could be so joyfully celebrated over again." + + + + + + PRINCE HASSAK'S MARCH. + + * * * * * + +In the spring of a certain year, long since passed away, Prince +Hassak, of Itoby, determined to visit his uncle, the King of Yan. + +"Whenever my uncle visited us," said the Prince, "or when my late +father went to see him, the journey was always made by sea; and, in +order to do this, it was necessary to go in a very roundabout way +between Itoby and Yan. Now, I shall do nothing of this kind. It is +beneath the dignity of a prince to go out of his way on account of +capes, peninsulas, and promontories. I shall march from my palace to +that of my uncle in a straight line. I shall go across the country, +and no obstacle shall cause me to deviate from my course. Mountains +and hills shall be tunnelled, rivers shall be bridged, houses shall +be levelled; a road shall be cut through forests; and, when I have +finished my march, the course over which I have passed shall be a +mathematically straight line. Thus will I show to the world that, +when a prince desires to travel, it is not necessary for him to go +out of his way on account of obstacles." + +As soon as possible after the Prince had determined upon this march, +he made his preparations, and set out. He took with him a +few courtiers, and a large body of miners, rock-splitters, +bridge-builders, and workmen of that class, whose services would, +very probably, be needed. Besides these, he had an officer whose duty +it was to point out the direct course to be taken, and another who +was to draw a map of the march, showing the towns, mountains, and the +various places it passed through. There were no compasses in those +days, but the course-marker had an instrument which he would set in a +proper direction by means of the stars, and then he could march by it +all day. Besides these persons, Prince Hassak selected from the +schools of his city five boys and five girls, and took them with him. +He wished to show them how, when a thing was to be done, the best way +was to go straight ahead and do it, turning aside for nothing. + +"When they grow up they will teach these things to their children," +said he; "and thus I shall instil good principles into my people." + +The first day Prince Hassak and his party marched over a level +country, with no further trouble than that occasioned by the tearing +down of fences and walls, and the destruction of a few cottages and +barns. After encamping for the night, they set out the next morning, +but had not marched many miles before they came to a rocky hill, on +the top of which was a handsome house, inhabited by a Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Your Highness," said the course-marker, "in order to go in a direct +line we must make a tunnel through this hill, immediately under the +house. This may cause the building to fall in, but the rubbish can be +easily removed." + +"Let the men go to work," said the Prince. "I will dismount from my +horse, and watch the proceedings." + +When the Jolly-cum-pop saw the party halt before his house, he +hurried out to pay his respects to the Prince. When he was informed +of what was to be done, the Jolly-cum-pop could not refrain from +laughing aloud. + +"I never heard," he said, "of such a capital idea. It is so odd and +original. It will be very funny, I am sure, to see a tunnel cut right +under my house." + +The miners and rock-splitters now began to work at the base of the +hill, and then the Jolly-cum-pop made a proposition to the Prince. + +"It will take your men some time," he said, "to cut this tunnel, and +it is a pity your Highness should not be amused in the meanwhile. It +is a fine day: suppose we go into the forest and hunt." + +This suited the Prince very well, for he did not care about sitting +under a tree and watching his workmen, and the Jolly-cum-pop having +sent for his horse and some bows and arrows, the whole party, with +the exception of the laborers, rode toward the forest, a short +distance away. + +"What shall we find to hunt?" asked the Prince of the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"I really do not know," exclaimed the latter, "but we'll hunt +whatever we happen to see--deer, small birds, rabbits, griffins, +rhinoceroses, any thing that comes along. I feel as gay as a skipping +grasshopper. My spirits rise like a soaring bird. What a joyful thing +it is to have such a hunt on such a glorious day!" + +The gay and happy spirits of the Jolly-cum-pop affected the whole +party, and they rode merrily through the forest; but they found no +game; and, after an hour or two, they emerged into the open country +again. At a distance, on a slight elevation, stood a large and +massive building. + +"I am hungry and thirsty," said the Prince, "and perhaps we can get +some refreshments at yonder house. So far, this has not been a very +fine hunt." + +"No," cried the Jolly-cum-pop, "not yet. But what a joyful thing to +see a hospitable mansion just at the moment when we begin to feel a +little tired and hungry!" + +The building they were approaching belonged to a Potentate, who lived +at a great distance. In some of his travels he had seen this massive +house, and thought it would make a good prison. He accordingly bought +it, fitted it up as a jail, and appointed a jailer and three +myrmidons to take charge of it. This had occurred years before, but +no prisoners had ever been sent to this jail. A few days preceding +the Jolly-cum-pop's hunt, the Potentate had journeyed this way and +had stopped at his jail. After inquiring into its condition, he had +said to the jailer: + +"It is now fourteen years since I appointed you to this place, and in +all that time there have been no prisoners, and you and your men have +been drawing your wages without doing any thing. I shall return this +way in a few days, and if I still find you idle I shall discharge you +all and close the jail." + +This filled the jailer with great dismay, for he did not wish to lose +his good situation. When he saw the Prince and his party approaching, +the thought struck him that perhaps he might make prisoners of them, +and so not be found idle when the Potentate returned. He came out to +meet the hunters, and when they asked if they could here find +refreshment, he gave them a most cordial welcome. His men took their +horses, and, inviting them to enter, he showed each member of the +party into a small bedroom, of which there seemed to be a great many. + +"Here are water and towels," he said to each one, "and when you have +washed your face and hands, your refreshments will be ready." Then, +going out, he locked the door on the outside. + +The party numbered seventeen: the Prince, three courtiers, five boys, +five girls, the course-marker, the map-maker, and the Jolly-cum-pop. +The heart of the jailer was joyful; seventeen inmates was something +to be proud of. He ordered his myrmidons to give the prisoners a meal +of bread and water through the holes in their cell-doors, and then he +sat down to make out his report to the Potentate. + +"They must all be guilty of crimes," he said to himself, "which are +punished by long imprisonment. I don't want any of them executed." + +So he numbered his prisoners from one to seventeen, according to the +cell each happened to be in, and he wrote a crime opposite each +number. The first was highway robbery, the next forgery, and after +that followed treason, smuggling, barn-burning, bribery, poaching, +usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault and battery, using false weights +and measures, burglary, counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, +conspiracy, and poisoning his grandmother by proxy. + +This report was scarcely finished when the Potentate returned. He was +very much surprised to find that seventeen prisoners had come in +since his previous visit, and he read the report with interest. + +"Here is one who ought to be executed," he said, referring to Number +Seventeen. "And how did he poison his grandmother by proxy? Did he +get another woman to be poisoned in her stead? Or did he employ some +one to act in his place as the poisoner?" + +"I have not yet been fully informed, my lord," said the jailer, +fearful that he should lose a prisoner; "but this is his first +offence, and his grandmother, who did not die, has testified to his +general good character." + +"Very well," said the Potentate; "but if he ever does it again, let +him be executed; and, by the way, I should like to see the +prisoners." + +Thereupon the jailer conducted the Potentate along the corridors, and +let him look through the holes in the doors at the prisoners within. + +"What is this little girl in for?" he asked. + +The jailer looked at the number over the door, and then at his +report. + +"Piracy," he answered. + +"A strange offence for such a child," said the Potentate. + +"They often begin that sort of thing very early in life," said the +jailer. + +"And this fine gentleman," said the Potentate, looking in at the +Prince, "what did he do?" + +The jailer glanced at the number, and the report. + +"Robbed hen-roosts," he said. + +"He must have done a good deal of it to afford to dress so well," +said the Potentate, passing on, and looking into other cells. "It +seems to me that many of your prisoners are very young." + +"It is best to take them young, my lord," said the jailer. "They are +very hard to catch when they grow up." + +The Potentate then looked in at the Jolly-cum-pop, and asked what was +his offence. + +"Conspiracy," was the answer. + +"And where are the other conspirators?" + +"There was only one," said the jailer. + +Number Seventeen was the oldest of the courtiers. + +"He appears to be an elderly man to have a grandmother," said the +Potentate. "She must be very aged, and that makes it all the worse +for him. I think he should be executed." + +"Oh, no, my lord," cried the jailor. "I am assured that his crime was +quite unintentional." + +"Then he should be set free," said the Potentate. + +"I mean to say," said the jailer, "that it was just enough +intentional to cause him to be imprisoned here for a long time, but +not enough to deserve execution." + +"Very well," said the Potentate, turning to leave; "take good care of +your prisoners, and send me a report every month." + +"That will I do, my lord," said the jailer, bowing very low. + +The Prince and his party had been very much surprised and incensed +when they found that they could not get out of their rooms, and they +had kicked and banged and shouted until they were tired, but the +jailer had informed them that they were to be confined there for +years; and when the Potentate arrived they had resigned themselves to +despair. The Jolly-cum-pop, however, was affected in a different way. +It seemed to him the most amusing joke in the world that a person +should deliberately walk into a prison-cell and be locked up for +several years; and he lay down on his little bed and laughed himself +to sleep. + +That night one of the boys sat at his iron-barred window, wide awake. +He was a Truant, and had never yet been in any place from which he +could not run away. He felt that his school-fellows depended upon him +to run away and bring them assistance, and he knew that his +reputation as a Truant was at stake. His responsibility was so heavy +that he could not sleep, and he sat at the window, trying to think of +a way to get out. After some hours the moon arose, and by its light +he saw upon the grass, not far from his window, a number of little +creatures, which at first he took for birds or small squirrels; but +on looking more attentively he perceived that they were pigwidgeons. +They were standing around a flat stone, and seemed to be making +calculations on it with a piece of chalk. At this sight, the heart of +the Truant jumped for joy. "Pigwidgeons can do any thing," he said to +himself, "and these certainly can get us out." He now tried in +various ways to attract the attention of the pigwidgeons; but as he +was afraid to call or whistle very loud, for fear of arousing the +jailor, he did not succeed. Happily, he thought of a pea-shooter +which he had in his pocket, and taking this out he blew a pea into +the midst of the little group with such force that it knocked the +chalk from the hand of the pigwidgeon who was using it. The little +fellows looked up in astonishment, and perceived the Truant beckoning +to them from his window. At first they stood angrily regarding him; +but on his urging them in a loud whisper to come to his relief, they +approached the prison and, clambering up a vine, soon reached his +window-sill. The Truant now told his mournful tale, to which the +pigwidgeons listened very attentively; and then, after a little +consultation among themselves, one of them said: "We will get you out +if you will tell us how to divide five-sevenths by six." + +The poor Truant was silent for an instant, and then he said: "That is +not the kind of thing I am good at, but I expect some of the other +fellows could tell you easily enough. Our windows must be all in a +row, and you can climb up and ask some of them; and if any one tells +you, will you get us all out?" + +"Yes," said the pigwidgeon who had spoken before. "We will do that, +for we are very anxious to know how to divide five-sevenths by six. +We have been working at it for four or five days, and there won't be +any thing worth dividing if we wait much longer." + +The pigwidgeons now began to descend the vine; but one of them +lingering a little, the Truant, who had a great deal of curiosity, +asked him what it was they had to divide. + +"There were eight of us," the pigwidgeon answered, "who helped a +farmer's wife, and she gave us a pound of butter. She did not count +us properly, and divided the butter into seven parts. We did not +notice this at first, and two of the party, who were obliged to go +away to a distance, took their portions and departed, and now we can +not divide among six the five-sevenths that remain." + +"That is a pretty hard thing," said the Truant, "but I am sure some +of the boys can tell you how to do it." + +The pigwidgeons visited the next four cells, which were occupied by +four boys, but not one of them could tell how to divide five-sevenths +by six. The Prince was questioned, but he did not know; and neither +did the course-marker, nor the map-maker. It was not until they came +to the cell of the oldest girl that they received an answer. She was +good at mental arithmetic; and, after a minute's thought, she said, +"It would be five forty-seconds." + +"Good!" cried the pigwidgeons. "We will divide the butter into +forty-two parts, and each take five. And now let us go to work and +cut these bars." + +Three of the six pigwidgeons were workers in iron, and they had their +little files and saws in pouches by their sides. They went to work +manfully, and the others helped them, and before morning one bar was +cut in each of the seventeen windows. The cells were all on the +ground floor, and it was quite easy for the prisoners to clamber out. +That is, it was easy for all but the Jolly-cum-pop. He had laughed so +much in his life that he had grown quite fat, and he found it +impossible to squeeze himself through the opening made by the removal +of one iron bar. The sixteen other prisoners had all departed; the +pigwidgeons had hurried away to divide their butter into forty-two +parts, and the Jolly-cum-pop still remained in his cell, convulsed +with laughter at the idea of being caught in such a curious +predicament. + +"It is the most ridiculous thing in the world," he said. "I suppose I +must stay here and cry until I get thin." And the idea so tickled +him, that he laughed himself to sleep. + +The Prince and his party kept together, and hurried from the prison +as fast as they could. When the day broke they had gone several +miles, and then they stopped to rest. "Where is that Jolly-cum-pop?" +said the Prince. "I suppose he has gone home. He is a pretty fellow +to lead us into this trouble and then desert us! How are we to find +the way back to his house? Course-marker, can you tell us the +direction in which we should go?" + +"Not until to-night, your Highness," answered the course-marker, +"when I can set my instrument by the stars." + +The Prince's party was now in a doleful plight. Every one was very +hungry; they were in an open plain, no house was visible, and they +knew not which way to go. They wandered about for some time, looking +for a brook or a spring where they might quench their thirst; and +then a rabbit sprang out from some bushes. The whole party +immediately started off in pursuit of the rabbit. They chased it +here, there, backward and forward, through hollows and over hills, +until it ran quite away and disappeared. Then they were more tired, +thirsty, and hungry than before; and, to add to their miseries, when +night came on the sky was cloudy, and the course-marker could not set +his instrument by the stars. It would be difficult to find sixteen +more miserable people than the Prince and his companions when they +awoke the next morning from their troubled sleep on the hard ground. +Nearly starved, they gazed at one another with feelings of despair. + +"I feel," said the Prince, in a weak voice, "that there is nothing I +would not do to obtain food. I would willingly become a slave if my +master would give me a good breakfast." + +"So would I," ejaculated each of the others. + +About an hour after this, as they were all sitting disconsolately +upon the ground, they saw, slowly approaching, a large cart drawn by +a pair of oxen. On the front of the cart, which seemed to be heavily +loaded, sat a man, with a red beard, reading a book. The boys, when +they saw the cart, set up a feeble shout, and the man, lifting his +eyes from his book, drove directly toward the group on the ground. +Dismounting, he approached Prince Hassak, who immediately told him +his troubles and implored relief. "We will do any thing," said the +Prince, "to obtain food." + +Standing for a minute in a reflective mood, the man with the red +beard addressed the Prince in a slow, meditative manner: "How would +you like," he said, "to form a nucleus?" + +"Can we get any thing to eat by it?" eagerly asked the Prince. + +"Yes," replied the man, "you can." + +"We'll do it!" immediately cried the whole sixteen, without waiting +for further information. + +"Which will you do first," said the man, "listen to my explanations, +or eat?" + +"Eat!" cried the entire sixteen in chorus. + +The man now produced from his cart a quantity of bread, meat, wine, +and other provisions, which he distributed generously, but +judiciously, to the hungry Prince and his followers. Every one had +enough, but no one too much. And soon, revived and strengthened, they +felt like new beings. + +"Now," said the Prince, "we are ready to form a nucleus, as we +promised. How is it done?" + +"I will explain the matter to you in a few words," said the man with +the red beard. "For a long time I have been desirous to found a city. +In order to do this one must begin by forming a nucleus. Every great +city is started from a nucleus. A few persons settle down in some +particular spot, and live there. Then they are a nucleus. Then other +people come there, and gather around this nucleus, and then more +people come and more, until in course of time there is a great city. +I have loaded this cart with provisions, tools, and other things that +are necessary for my purpose, and have set out to find some people +who would be willing to form a nucleus. I am very glad to have found +you and that you are willing to enter into my plan; and this seems a +good spot for us to settle upon." + +"What is the first thing to be done?" said the Prince. + +"We must all go to work," said the man with the red beard, "to build +dwellings, and also a school-house for these young people. Then we +must till some ground in the suburbs, and lay the foundations, at +least, of a few public buildings." + +"All this will take a good while, will it not?" said the Prince. + +"Yes," said the man, "it will take a good while; and the sooner we +set about it, the better." + +Thereupon tools were distributed among the party, and Prince, +courtiers, boys, girls, and all went to work to build houses and form +the nucleus of a city. + +When the jailer looked into his cells in the morning, and found that +all but one of his prisoners had escaped, he was utterly astounded, +and his face, when the Jolly-cum-pop saw him, made that individual +roar with laughter. The jailer, however, was a man accustomed to deal +with emergencies. "You need not laugh," he said, "every thing shall +go on as before, and I shall take no notice of the absence of your +companions. You are now numbered One to Seventeen inclusive, and you +stand charged with highway robbery, forgery, treason, smuggling, +barn-burning, bribery, poaching, usury, piracy, witchcraft, assault +and battery, using false weights and measures, burglary, +counterfeiting, robbing hen-roosts, conspiracy, and poisoning your +grandmother by proxy. I intended to-day to dress the convicts in +prison garb, and you shall immediately be so clothed." + +"I shall require seventeen suits," said the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Yes," said the jailer, "they shall be furnished." + +"And seventeen rations a day," said the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Certainly," replied the jailer. + +"This is luxury," roared the Jolly-cum-pop. "I shall spend my whole +time in eating and putting on clean clothes." + +Seventeen large prison suits were now brought to the Jolly-cum-pop. +He put one on, and hung up the rest in his cell. These suits were +half bright yellow and half bright green, with spots of bright red, +as big as saucers. + +The jailer now had doors cut from one cell to another. "If the +Potentate comes here and wants to look at the prisoners," he said to +the Jolly-cum-pop, "you must appear in cell number One, so that he +can look through the hole in the door, and see you; then, as he walks +along the corridor, you must walk through the cells, and whenever he +looks into a cell, you must be there." + +"He will think," merrily replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "that all your +prisoners are very fat, and that the little girls have grown up into +big men." + +"I will endeavor to explain that," said the jailer. + +For several days the Jolly-cum-pop was highly amused at the idea of +his being seventeen criminals, and he would sit first in one cell and +then in another, trying to look like a ferocious pirate, a +hard-hearted usurer, or a mean-spirited chicken thief, and laughing +heartily at his failures. But, after a time, he began to tire of +this, and to have a strong desire to see what sort of a tunnel the +Prince's miners and rock-splitters were making under his house. "I +had hoped," he said to himself, "that I should pine away in +confinement, and so be able to get through the window-bars; but with +nothing to do, and seventeen rations a day, I see no chance of that. +But I must get out of this jail, and, as there seems no other way, I +will revolt." Thereupon he shouted to the jailer through the hole in +the door of his cell: "We have revolted! We have risen in a body, and +have determined to resist your authority, and break jail!" + +When the jailer heard this, he was greatly troubled. "Do not proceed +to violence," he said; "let us parley." + +"Very well," replied the Jolly-cum-pop, "but you must open the cell +door. We cannot parley through a hole." + +The jailer thereupon opened the cell door, and the Jolly-cum-pop, +having wrapped sixteen suits of clothes around his left arm as a +shield, and holding in his right hand the iron bar which had been cut +from his window, stepped boldly into the corridor, and confronted the +jailer and his myrmidons. + +"It will be useless for you to resist," he said. "You are but four, +and we are seventeen. If you had been wise you would have made us all +cheating shop-keepers, chicken thieves, or usurers. Then you might +have been able to control us; but when you see before you a desperate +highwayman, a daring smuggler, a blood-thirsty pirate, a wily +poacher, a powerful ruffian, a reckless burglar, a bold conspirator, +and a murderer by proxy, you well may tremble!" + +The jailer and his myrmidons looked at each other in dismay. + +"We sigh for no blood," continued the Jolly-cum-pop, "and will +readily agree to terms. We will give you your choice: Will you allow +us to honorably surrender, and peacefully disperse to our homes, or +shall we rush upon you in a body, and, after overpowering you by +numbers, set fire to the jail, and escape through the crackling +timbers of the burning pile?" + +The jailer reflected for a minute. "It would be better, perhaps," he +said, "that you should surrender and disperse to your homes." + +The Jolly-cum-pop agreed to these terms, and the great gate being +opened, he marched out in good order. "Now," said he to himself, "the +thing for me to do is to get home as fast as I can, or that jailer +may change his mind." But, being in a great hurry, he turned the +wrong way, and walked rapidly into a country unknown to him. His walk +was a very merry one. "By this time," he said to himself, "the Prince +and his followers have returned to my house, and are tired of +watching the rock-splitters and miners. How amused they will be when +they see me come back in this gay suit of green and yellow, with red +spots, and with sixteen similar suits upon my arm! How my own dogs +will bark at me! And how my own servants will not know me! It is the +funniest thing I ever knew of!" And his gay laugh echoed far and +wide. But when he had gone several miles without seeing any signs of +his habitation, his gayety abated. "It would have been much better," +he said, as he sat down to rest under the shade of a tree, "if I had +brought with me sixteen rations instead of these sixteen suits of +clothes." + +The Jolly-cum-pop soon set out again, but he walked a long distance +without seeing any person or any house. Toward the close of the +afternoon he stopped, and, looking back, he saw coming toward him a +large party of foot travellers. In a few moments, he perceived that +the person in advance was the jailer. At this the Jolly-cum-pop could +not restrain his merriment. "How comically it has all turned out!" he +exclaimed. "Here I've taken all this trouble, and tired myself out, +and have nearly starved myself, and the jailer comes now, with a +crowd of people, and takes me back. I might as well have staid where +I was. Ha! ha!" + +The jailer now left his party and came running toward the +Jolly-cum-pop. "I pray you, sir," he said, bowing very low, "do not +cast us off." + +"Who are you all?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop, looking with much +surprise at the jailer's companions, who were now quite near. + +"We are myself, my three myrmidons, and our wives and children. Our +situations were such good ones that we married long ago, and our +families lived in the upper stories of the prison. But when all the +convicts had left we were afraid to remain, for, should the Potentate +again visit the prison, he would be disappointed and enraged at +finding no prisoners, and would, probably, punish us grievously. So +we determined to follow you, and to ask you to let us go with you, +wherever you are going. I wrote a report, which I fastened to the +great gate, and in it I stated that sixteen of the convicts escaped +by the aid of outside confederates, and that seventeen of them +mutinied in a body and broke jail." + +"That report," laughed the Jolly-cum-pop, "your Potentate will not +readily understand." + +"If I were there," said the jailer, "I could explain it to him; but, +as it is, he must work it out for himself." + +"Have you any thing to eat with you?" asked the Jolly-cum-pop. + +"Oh, yes," said the jailer, "we brought provisions." + +"Well, then, I gladly take you under my protection. Let us have +supper. I have had nothing to eat since morning, and the weight of +sixteen extra suits of clothes does not help to refresh one." + +The Jolly-cum-pop and his companions slept that night under some +trees, and started off early the next morning. "If I could only get +myself turned in the proper direction," said he, "I believe we should +soon reach my house." + +The Prince, his courtiers, the boys and girls, the course-marker, and +the map-maker worked industriously for several days at the foundation +of their city. They dug the ground, they carried stones, they cut +down trees. This work was very hard for all of them, for they were +not used to it. After a few days' labor, the Prince said to the man +with the red beard, who was reading his book: "I think we have now +formed a nucleus. Any one can see that this is intended to be a +city." + +"No," said the man with the red beard, "nothing is truly a nucleus +until something is gathered around it. Proceed with your work, while +I continue my studies upon civil government." + +Toward the close of that day the red-bearded man raised his eyes from +his book and beheld the Jolly-cum-pop and his party approaching. +"Hurrah!" he cried, "we are already attracting settlers!" And he went +forth to meet them. + +When the prince and the courtiers saw the Jolly-cum-pop in his bright +and variegated dress, they did not know him; but the boys and girls +soon recognized his jovial face, and, tired as they were, they set up +a hearty laugh, in which they were loudly joined by their merry +friend. While the Jolly-cum-pop was listening to the adventures of +the Prince and his companions, and telling what had happened to +himself, the man with the red beard was talking to the jailer and his +party, and urging them to gather around the nucleus which had been +here formed, and help to build a city. + +"Nothing will suit us better," exclaimed the jailer, "and the sooner +we build a town wall so as to keep off the Potentate, if he should +come this way, the better shall we be satisfied." + +The next morning, the Prince said to the red-bearded man: "Others +have gathered around us. We have formed a nucleus, and thus have done +all that we promised to do. We shall now depart." + +The man objected strongly to this, but the Prince paid no attention +to his words. "What troubles me most," he said to the Jolly-cum-pop, +"is the disgraceful condition of our clothes. They have been so torn +and soiled during our unaccustomed work that they are not fit to be +seen." + +"As for that," said the Jolly-cum-pop, "I have sixteen suits with me, +in which you can all dress, if you like. They are of unusual +patterns, but they are new and clean." + +"It is better," said the Prince, "for persons in my station to appear +inordinately gay than to be seen in rags and dirt. We will accept +your clothes." + +Thereupon, the Prince and each of the others put on a prison dress of +bright green and yellow, with large red spots. There were some +garments left over, for each boy wore only a pair of trousers with +the waistband tied around his neck, and holes cut for his arms; while +the large jackets, with the sleeves tucked, made very good dresses +for the girls. The Prince and his party, accompanied by the +Jolly-cum-pop, now left the red-bearded man and his new settlers to +continue the building of the city, and set off on their journey. The +course-marker had not been informed the night before that they were +to go away that morning, and consequently did not set his instrument +by the stars. + +"As we do not know in which way we should go," said the Prince, "one +way will be as good as another, and if we can find a road let us take +it; it will be easier walking." + +In an hour or two they found a road and they took it. After +journeying the greater part of the day, they reached the top of a low +hill, over which the road ran, and saw before them a glittering sea +and the spires and houses of a city. + +"It is the city of Yan," said the course-marker. + +"That is true," said the Prince; "and as we are so near, we may as +well go there." + +The astonishment of the people of Yan, when this party, dressed in +bright green and yellow, with red spots, passed through their +streets, was so great that the Jolly-cum-pop roared with laughter. +This set the boys and girls and all the people laughing, and the +sounds of merriment became so uproarious that when they reached the +palace the King came out to see what was the matter. What he thought +when he saw his nephew in his fantastic guise, accompanied by a party +apparently composed of sixteen other lunatics, cannot now be known; +but, after hearing the Prince's story, he took him into an inner +apartment, and thus addressed him: "My dear Hassak: The next time you +pay me a visit, I beg for your sake and my own, that you will come in +the ordinary way. You have sufficiently shown to the world that, when +a Prince desires to travel, it is often necessary for him to go out +of his way on account of obstacles." + +"My dear uncle," replied Hassak, "your words shall not be forgotten." + +After a pleasant visit of a few weeks, the Prince and his party (in +new clothes) returned (by sea) to Itoby, whence the Jolly-cum-pop +soon repaired to his home. There he found the miners and +rock-splitters still at work at the tunnel, which had now penetrated +half-way through the hill on which stood his house. "You may go +home," he said, "for the Prince has changed his plans. I will put a +door to this tunnel, and it will make an excellent cellar in which to +keep my wine and provisions." + +The day after the Prince's return his map-maker said to him: "Your +Highness, according to your commands I made, each day, a map of your +progress to the city of Yan. Here it is." + +The Prince glanced at it and then he cast his eyes upon the floor. +"Leave me," he said. "I would be alone." + +[Illustration: THE MAP OF THE PRINCE'S JOURNEY FROM ITOBY TO YAN.] + + + + + + THE BATTLE OF THE THIRD COUSINS. + + * * * * * + +There were never many persons who could correctly bound the Autocracy +of Mutjado. The reason for this was that the boundary line was not +stationary. Whenever the Autocrat felt the need of money, he sent his +tax-gatherers far and wide, and people who up to that time had no +idea of such a thing found that they lived in the territory of +Mutjado. But when times were ordinarily prosperous with him, and +people in the outlying districts needed protection or public works, +the dominion of the Autocrat became very much contracted. + +In the course of time, the Autocrat of Mutjado fell into bad health +and sent for his doctor. That learned man prescribed some medicine +for him; and as this did him no good, he ordered another kind. He +continued this method of treatment until the Autocrat had swallowed +the contents of fifteen phials and flasks, some large and some small. +As none of these were of the slightest benefit, the learned doctor +produced another kind of medicine which he highly extolled. + +"Take a dose of this twice a day," said he, "and you will soon +find--" + +"A new medicine?" interrupted the Autocrat, in disgust. "I will have +none of it! These others were bad enough, and rather than start with +a new physic, I prefer to die. Take away your bottles, little and +big, and send me my secretary." + +When that officer arrived, the Autocrat informed him that he had +determined to write his will, and that he should set about it at +once. + +The Autocrat of Mutjado had no son, and his nearest male relatives +were a third cousin on his father's side, and another third cousin on +his mother's side. Of course these persons were in nowise related to +each other; and as they lived in distant countries, he had never seen +either of them. He had made up his mind to leave his throne and +dominions to one of these persons, but he could not determine which +of them should be his heir. + +"One has as good a right as the other," he said to himself, "and I +can't bother my brains settling the matter for them. Let them fight +it out, and whoever conquers shall be Autocrat of Mutjado." + +Having arranged the affair in this manner in his will, he signed it, +and soon after died. + +The Autocrat's third cousin on his father's side was a young man of +about twenty-five, named Alberdin. He was a good horseman, and +trained in the arts of warfare, and when he was informed of the terms +of his distinguished relative's will, he declared himself perfectly +willing to undertake the combat for the throne. He set out for +Mutjado, where he arrived in a reasonable time. + +The third cousin on the mother's side was a very different person. He +was a boy of about twelve years of age; and as his father and mother +had died when he was very young, he had been for nearly all his life +under the charge of an elderly and prudent man, who acted as his +guardian and tutor. These two, also, soon arrived in Mutjado,--the +boy, Phedo, being mounted on a little donkey, which was his almost +constant companion. As soon as they reached the territory of the late +Autocrat, old Salim, the tutor, left the boy at an inn, and went +forward by himself to take a look at the other third cousin. When he +saw Alberdin mounted on his fine horse, and looking so strong and +valiant, his heart was much disturbed. + +"I had hoped," he said to himself, "that the other one was a small +boy, but such does not appear to be the case. There is but one way to +have a fair fight between these two. They must not now be allowed to +see each other. If they can be kept apart until my boy grows up, he +will then be able, with the military education which I intend he +shall have, to engage in combat with any man. They must not meet for +at least thirteen years. Phedo will then be twenty-five, and able to +do worthy combat. To be sure, I am somewhat old myself to undertake +to superintend so long a delay, but I must do my best to keep well +and strong, and to attain the greatest possible longevity." + +Salim had always been in the habit of giving thirty-two chews to +every mouthful of meat, and a proportionate number of chews to other +articles of food; and had, so far, been very healthy. But he now +determined to increase the number of chews to thirty-six, for it +would be highly necessary for him to live until it was time for the +battle between the third cousins to take place. + +Having made up his mind on these points, the old tutor introduced +himself to Alberdin, and told him that he had come to arrange the +terms of combat. + +"In the first place," said Alberdin, "I should like to know what sort +of a person my opponent is." + +"He is not a cavalryman like you," answered Salim; "he belongs to the +heavy infantry." + +At this, Alberdin looked grave. He knew very well that a stout and +resolute man on foot had often the advantage of one who is mounted. +He would have preferred meeting a horseman, and fighting on equal +terms. + +"Has he had much experience in war?" asked the young man. + +"It is not long," answered the tutor, "since he was almost constantly +in arms, winter and summer." + +"He must be a practised warrior," thought Alberdin. "I must put +myself in good fighting-trim before I meet him." + +After some further conversation on the subject, the old man advised +Alberdin to go into camp on a beautiful plain not far from the base +of a low line of mountains. + +"Your opponent," said he, "will intrench himself in the valley on the +other side. With the mountains between you, neither of you need fear +a surprise; and when both are ready, a place of meeting can be +appointed. + +"Now, then," said Salim to himself when this had been settled; "if I +can keep them apart for thirteen years, all may be well." + +As soon as possible, Alberdin pitched a tent upon the appointed spot, +and began to take daily warlike exercise in the plain, endeavoring in +every way to put himself and his horse into proper condition for the +combat. + +On the other side of the mountain, old Salim intrenched himself and +the boy, Phedo. He carefully studied several books on military +engineering, and caused a fortified camp to be constructed on the +most approved principles. It was surrounded by high ramparts, and +outside of these was a moat filled with water. In the centre of the +camp was a neat little house which was well provided with books, +provisions, and every thing necessary for a prolonged stay. When the +drawbridge was up, it would be impossible for Alberdin to get inside +of the camp; and, moreover, the ramparts were so high that he could +not look over them to see what sort of antagonist he was to have. Old +Salim did not tell the boy why he brought him here to live. It would +be better to wait until he was older before informing him of the +battle which had been decreed. He told Phedo that it was necessary +for him to have a military education, which could very well be +obtained in a place like this; and he was also very careful to let +him know that there was a terrible soldier in that part of the +country who might at any time, if it were not for the intrenchments, +pounce down upon him, and cut him to pieces. Every fine day, Phedo +was allowed to take a ride on his donkey outside of the +fortifications, but during this time, the old tutor kept a strict +watch on the mountain; and if a horseman had made his appearance, +little Phedo would have been whisked inside, and the drawbridge would +have been up in a twinkling. + +After about two weeks of this life Phedo found it dreadfully stupid +to see no one but his old tutor, and never to go outside of these +great ramparts except for donkey-rides, which were generally very +short. He therefore determined, late one moonlight night, to go out +and take a ramble by himself. He was not afraid of the dreadful +soldier of whom the old man had told him, because at that time of +night this personage would, of course, be in bed and asleep. +Considering these things, he quietly dressed himself, took down a +great key from over his sleeping tutor's head, opened the heavy gate, +let down the drawbridge, mounted upon his donkey, and rode forth upon +the moonlit plain. + +That night-ride was a very delightful one, and for a long time the +boy and the donkey rambled and ran; first going this way and then +that, they gradually climbed the mountain; and, reaching the brow, +they trotted about for a while, and then went down the other side. +The boy had been so twisted and turned in his course that he did not +notice that he was not descending toward his camp, and the donkey, +whose instinct told it that it was not going the right way, was also +told by its instinct that it did not wish to go the right way, and +that the intrenchments offered it no temptations to return. When the +morning dawned, Phedo perceived that he was really lost, and he began +to be afraid that he might meet the terrible soldier. But, after a +time, he saw riding toward him a very pleasant-looking young man on a +handsome horse, and he immediately took courage. + +"Now," said he to himself, "I am no longer in danger. If that +horrible cut-throat should appear, this good gentleman will protect +me." + +Alberdin had not seen any one for a long time, and he was very glad +to meet with so nice a little boy. When Phedo told him that he was +lost, he invited him to come to his tent, near by, and have +breakfast. While they were eating their meal, Alberdin asked the boy +if in the course of his rambles he had met with a heavy infantry +soldier, probably armed to the teeth, and very large and strong. + +"Oh, I've heard of that dreadful man!" cried Phedo, "and I am very +glad that I did not meet him. If he comes, I hope you'll protect me +from him." + +"I will do that," said Alberdin; "but I am afraid I shall not be able +to help you find your way home, for in doing so I should throw myself +off my guard, and might be set upon unexpectedly by this fellow, with +whom I have a regular engagement to fight. There is to be a time +fixed for the combat, for which I feel myself nearly ready, but I +have no doubt that my enemy will be very glad to take me at a +disadvantage if I give him a chance." + +Phedo looked about him with an air of content. The tent was large and +well furnished; there seemed to be plenty of good things to eat; the +handsome horseman was certainly a very good-humored and agreeable +gentleman; and, moreover, the tent was not shut in by high and gloomy +ramparts. + +"I do not think you need trouble yourself," said he to his host, "to +help me to find my way home. I live with my tutor, and I am sure that +when he knows I am gone he will begin to search for me, and after +awhile he will find me. Until then, I can be very comfortable here." + +For several days the two third cousins of the Autocrat lived together +in the tent, and enjoyed each other's society very much. Then +Alberdin began to grow a little impatient. + +"If I am to fight this heavy infantry man," he said; "I should like +to do it at once. I am now quite ready, and I think he ought to be. I +expected to hear from him before this time, and I shall start out and +see if I can get any news of his intentions. I don't care about going +over the mountain without giving him notice, but the capital city of +Mutjado is only a day's ride to the west, and there I can cause +inquiries to be made when he would like to meet me, and where." + +"I will go with you," said Phedo, greatly delighted at the idea of +visiting the city. + +"Yes, I will take you," said Alberdin. "Your tutor don't seem +inclined to come for you, and, of course, I can't leave you here." + +The next day, Alberdin on his horse, and Phedo on his donkey, set out +for the city, where they arrived late in the afternoon. After finding +a comfortable lodging, Alberdin sent messengers to the other side of +the mountain, where his opponent was supposed to be encamped, and +gave them power to arrange with him for a meeting. He particularly +urged them to try to see the old man who had come to him at first, +and who had seemed to be a very fair-minded and sensible person. In +two days, however, the messengers returned, stating that they had +found what they supposed to be the intrenched camp of the heavy +infantry man they had been sent in search of, but that it was +entirely deserted, and nobody could be seen anywhere near it. + +"It is very likely," said Alberdin, "that he has watched my +manoeuvres and exercises from the top of the mountain, and has +concluded to run away. I shall give him a reasonable time to show +himself, and then, if he does not come forward, I will consider him +beaten, and claim the Autocracy." + +"That is a good idea," said Phedo, "but I think, if you can, you +ought to find him and kill him, or drive him out of the country. +That's what I should do, if I were you." + +"Of course I shall do that, if I can," said Alberdin; "but I could +not be expected to wait for him forever." + +When his intention had been proclaimed, Alberdin was informed of +something which he did not know before, and that was that the late +Autocrat had left an only daughter, a Princess about twenty years +old. But although she was his daughter, she could not inherit his +crown, for the laws of the country forbade that any woman should +become Autocrat. A happy idea now struck Alberdin. + +"I will marry the Princess," he said, "and then every one will think +that it is the most suitable thing for me to become Autocrat." + +So Alberdin sent to the Princess to ask permission to speak with her, +and was granted an audience. With much courtesy and politeness he +made known his plans to the lady, and hoped that she would consider +it advisable to marry him. + +"I am sorry to interfere with any of your arrangements," said the +Princess, "but as soon as I heard the terms of my father's will, I +made up my mind to marry the victor in the contest. As I cannot +inherit the throne myself, the next best thing is to be the wife of +the man who does. Go forth, then, and find your antagonist, and when +you have conquered him, I will marry you." + +"And if he conquers me, you will marry him?" said Alberdin. + +"Yes, sir," answered the Princess, with a smile, and dismissed him. + +It was plain enough that there was nothing for Alberdin to do but to +go and look for the heavy infantry man. Phedo was very anxious to +accompany him, and the two, mounted as before, set out from the city +on their quest. + +When old Salim, the tutor of Phedo, awoke in the morning and found +the boy gone, he immediately imagined that the youngster had ran away +to his old home; so he set forth with all possible speed, hoping to +overtake him. But when he reached the distant town where Phedo had +lived, he found that the boy had not been there; and after taking +some needful rest, he retraced his steps, crossed the mountains, and +made his way toward the capital city, hoping to find news of him +there. It was necessary for him to be very careful in his inquiries, +for he wished no one to find out that the little boy he was looking +for was the third cousin of the late Autocrat on the mother's side. +He therefore disguised himself as a migratory medical man, and +determined to use all possible caution. When he reached the camp of +the young horseman, Alberdin, and found that personage gone, his +suspicions became excited. + +"If these two have run off together," he said to himself, "my task is +indeed difficult. If the man discovers it is the boy he has to fight, +my poor Phedo will be cut to pieces in a twinkling. I do not believe +there has been any trouble yet, for the boy does not know that he is +to be one of the combatants, and the man would not be likely to +suspect it. Come what may, the fight must not take place for thirteen +years. And in order that I may still better preserve my health and +strength to avert the calamity during that period, I will increase my +number of chews to forty-two to each mouthful of meat." + +When old Salim reached the city, he soon found that Alberdin and the +boy had been there, and that they had gone away together. + +"Nothing has happened so far," said the old man, with a sigh of +relief; "and things may turn out all right yet. I'll follow them, but +I must first find out what that cavalryman had to say to the +Princess." For he had been told of the interview at the palace. + +It was not long before the migratory medical man was brought to the +Princess. There was nothing the matter with her, but she liked to +meet with persons of skill and learning to hear what they had to say. + +"Have you any specialty?" she asked of the old man. + +"Yes," said he, "I am a germ-doctor." + +"What is that?" asked the Princess. + +"All diseases," replied the old man, "come from germs; generally very +little ones. My business is to discover these, and find out all about +them." + +"Then I suppose," said the Princess, "you know how to cure the +diseases?" + +"You must not expect too much," answered the old man. "It ought to be +a great satisfaction to us to know what sort of germ is at the bottom +of our woes." + +"I am very well, myself," said the Princess, "and, so far as I know, +none of my household are troubled by germs. But there is something +the matter with my mind which I wish you could relieve." She then +told the old man how she had determined to marry the victor in the +contest for her father's throne, and how she had seen one for the +claimants whom she considered to be a very agreeable and deserving +young man; while the other, she had heard, was a great, strong foot +soldier, who was probably very disagreeable, and even horrid. If this +one should prove the conqueror, she did not know what she should do. +"You see, I am in a great deal of trouble," said she. "Can you do any +thing to help me?" + +The pretending migratory medical man looked at her attentively for a +few moments, and then he said: + +"The reason why you intend to marry the victor in the coming contest, +is that you wish to remain here in your father's palace, and to +continue to enjoy the comforts and advantages to which you have been +accustomed." + +"Yes," said the Princess; "that is it." + +"Well, having discovered the germ of your disorder," said the old +man, "the great point is gained. I will see what I can do." + +And with a respectful bow he left her presence. + +"Well," said old Salim to himself, as he went away, "she can never +marry my boy, for that is certainly out of the question; but now that +I have found out her motive, I think I can arrange matters +satisfactorily, so far as she is concerned. But to settle the affair +between that young man and Phedo is immensely more difficult. The +first thing is to find them." + +Having learned the way they had gone, the old tutor travelled +diligently, and in two days came up with Alberdin and Phedo. When he +first caught sight of them, he was very much surprised to see that +they were resting upon the ground quite a long distance apart, with a +little stream between them. Noticing that Alberdin's back was toward +him, he threw off his disguise and hastened to Phedo. The boy +received him with the greatest delight, and, after many embraces, +they sat down to talk. Phedo told the old man all that had happened, +and finished by relating that, as they had that day stopped by this +stream to rest, Alberdin had taken it into his head to inquire into +the parentage of his young companion; and after many questions about +his family, it had been made clear to both of them that they were the +two third cousins who were to fight for the Autocracy of Mutjado. + +"He is very angry," said the boy, "at the tricks that have been +played upon him, and went off and left me. Is it true that I am to +fight him? I don't want to do it, for I like him very much." + +"It will be a long time before you are old enough to fight," said +Salim; "so we need not consider that. You stay here, and I'll go over +and talk to him." + +Salim then crossed the stream, and approached Alberdin. When the +young man saw him, and recognized him as the person who had arranged +the two encampments, he turned upon him with fury. + +"Wretched old man, who came to me as the emissary of my antagonist, +you are but the tutor of that boy! If I had known the truth at first, +I would have met him instantly; would have conquered him without +hurting a hair on his head; and carrying him bound to the capital +city, would have claimed the Autocracy, and would now have been +sitting upon the throne. Instead of that, look at the delay and +annoyance to which I have been subjected. I have also taken such a +fancy to the boy that rather than hurt him or injure his prospects, I +would willingly resign my pretensions to the throne, and go back +contentedly to my own city. But this cannot now be done. I have +fallen in love with the daughter of the late Autocrat, and she will +marry none but the victorious claimant. Behold to what a condition +you have brought me!" + +The old man regarded him with attention. + +"I wish very much," said he, "to defer the settlement of this matter +for thirteen years. Are you willing to wait so long?" + +"No, I am not," said Alberdin. + +"Very well, then," said the old man, "each third cousin must retire +to his camp, and as soon as matters can be arranged the battle must +take place." + +"There is nothing else to be done," said Alberdin in a troubled +voice; "but I shall take care that the boy receives no injury if it +can possibly be avoided." + +The three now retraced their steps, and in a few days were settled +down, Alberdin in his tent in the plain, and Salim and Phedo in their +intrenchments on the other side of the low mountain. The old man now +gave himself up to deep thought. He had discovered the germ of +Alberdin's trouble; and in a few days he had arranged his plans, and +went over to see the young man. + +"It has been determined," said he, "that a syndicate is to be formed +to attend to this business for Phedo." + +"A syndicate!" cried Alberdin. "What is that?" + +"A syndic," answered Salim, "is a person who attends to business for +others; and a syndicate is a body of men who are able to conduct +certain affairs better than any individual can do it. In a week from +to-day, Phedo's syndicate will meet you in the large plain outside of +the capital city. There the contest will take place. Shall you be +ready?" + +"I don't exactly understand it," said Alberdin, "but I shall be +there." + +General notice was given of the coming battle of the contestants for +the throne, and thousands of the inhabitants of the Autocracy +assembled on the plain on the appointed day. The Princess with her +ladies was there; and as everybody was interested, everybody was +anxious to see what would happen. + +Alberdin rode into the open space in the centre of the plain, and +demanded that his antagonist should appear. Thereupon old Salim came +forward, leading Phedo by the hand. + +"This is the opposing heir," he said; "but as every one can see that +he is too young to fight a battle, a syndicate has been appointed to +attend to the matter for him; and there is nothing in the will of the +late Autocrat which forbids this arrangement. The syndicate will now +appear." + +At this command there came into the arena a horseman heavily armed, a +tall foot soldier completely equipped for action, an artilleryman +with a small cannon on wheels, a sailor with a boarding-pike and a +drawn cutlass, and a soldier with a revolving gun which discharged +one hundred and twenty balls a minute. + +"All being ready," exclaimed Salim, "the combat for the Autocracy +will begin!" + +Alberdin took a good long look at the syndicate ranged before him. +Then he dismounted from his horse, drew his sword, and stuck it, +point downward, into the sand. + +"I surrender!" he said. + +"So do I!" cried the Princess, running toward him, and throwing +herself into his arms. + +The eyes of Alberdin sparkled with joy. + +"Let the Autocracy go!" he cried. "Now that I have my Princess, the +throne and the crown are nothing to me." + +"So long as I have you," returned the Princess, "I am content to +resign all the comforts and advantages to which I have been +accustomed." + +Phedo, who had been earnestly talking with his tutor, now looked up. + +"You shall not resign any thing!" he cried. "We are all of the same +blood, and we will join together and form a royal family, and we will +all live at the palace. Alberdin and my tutor shall manage the +government for me until I am grown up; and if I have to go to school +for a few years, I suppose I must. And that is all there is about +it!" + +The syndicate was now ordered to retire and disband; the heralds +proclaimed Phedo the conquering heir, and the people cheered and +shouted with delight. All the virtues of the late Autocrat had come +to him from his mother, and the citizens of Mutjado much preferred to +have a new ruler from the mother's family. + +"I hope you bear no grudge against me," said Salim to Alberdin; "but +if you had been willing to wait for thirteen years, you and Phedo +might have fought on equal terms. As it is now, it would have been as +hard for him to conquer you, as for you to conquer the syndicate. The +odds would have been quite as great." + +"Don't mention it," said Alberdin. "I prefer things as they are. I +should have hated to drive the boy away, and deprive him of a +position which the people wish him to have. Now we are all +satisfied." + +Phedo soon began to show signs that he would probably make a very +good Autocrat. He declared that if he was to be assisted by ministers +and cabinet officers when he came to the throne, he would like them +to be persons who had been educated for their positions, just as he +was to be educated for his own. Consequently he chose for the head of +his cabinet a bright and sensible boy, and had him educated as a +Minister of State. For Minister of Finance, he chose another boy with +a very honest countenance, and for the other members of his cabinet, +suitable youths were selected. He also said, that he thought there +ought to be another officer, one who would be a sort of Minister of +General Comfort, who would keep an eye on the health and happiness of +the subjects, and would also see that every thing went all right in +the palace, not only in regard to meals, but lots of other things. +For this office he chose a bright young girl, and had her educated +for the position of Queen. + + + + + + THE BANISHED KING. + + * * * * * + +There was once a kingdom in which every thing seemed to go wrong. +Everybody knew this, and everybody talked about it, especially the +King. The bad state of affairs troubled him more than it did any one +else, but he could think of no way to make them better. + +"I cannot bear to see things going on so badly," he said to the Queen +and his chief councillors. "I wish I knew how other kingdoms were +governed." + +One of his councillors offered to go to some other countries, and see +how they were governed, and come back and tell him all about it, but +this did not suit his majesty. + +"You would simply return," he said, "and give me your ideas about +things. I want my own ideas." + +The Queen then suggested that he should take a vacation, and visit +other kingdoms, and see for himself how things were managed in them. + +This did not suit the king. "A vacation would not answer," he said. +"I should not be gone a week before something would happen here which +would make it necessary for me to come back." + +The Queen then suggested that he be banished for a certain time, say +a year. In that case he could not come back, and would be at full +liberty to visit foreign kingdoms, and find out how they were +governed. + +This plan pleased the King. "If it were made impossible for me to +come back," he said, "of course I could not do it. The scheme is a +good one. Let me be banished." And he gave orders that his council +should pass a law banishing him for one year. + +Preparations were immediately begun to carry out this plan, and in +day or two the King bade farewell to the Queen, and left his kingdom, +a banished man. He went away on foot, entirely unattended. But, as he +did not wish to cut off all communication between himself and his +kingdom, he made an arrangement which he thought a very good one. At +easy shouting distance behind him walked one of the officers of the +court, and at shouting distance behind him walked another, and so on +at distances of about a hundred yards from each other. In this way +there would always be a line of men extending from the King to his +palace. Whenever the King had walked a hundred yards the line moved +on after him, and another officer was put in the gap between the last +man and the palace door. Thus, as the King walked on, his line of +followers lengthened, and was never broken. Whenever he had any +message to send to the Queen, or any other person in the palace, he +shouted it to the officer next him, who shouted it to the one next to +him, and it was so passed on until it reached the palace. If he +needed food, clothes, or any other necessary thing, the order for it +was shouted along the line, and the article was passed to him from +man to man, each one carrying it forward to his neighbor, and then +retiring to his proper place. + +In this way the King walked on day by day until he had passed +entirely out of his own kingdom. At night he stopped at some +convenient house on the road, and if any of his followers did not +find himself near a house or cottage when the King shouted back the +order to halt, he laid himself down to sleep wherever he might be. By +this time the increasing line of followers had used up all the +officers of the court, and it became necessary to draw upon some of +the under government officers in order to keep the line perfect. + +The King had not gone very far outside the limits of his dominions +when he met a Sphinx. He had often heard of these creatures, although +he had never seen one before. But when he saw the winged body of a +lion with a woman's head, he knew instantly what it was. He knew, +also, that the chief business of a Sphinx was that of asking people +questions, and then getting them into trouble if the right answers +were not given. He therefore determined that he would not be caught +by any such tricks as these, and that he would be on his guard if the +Sphinx spoke to him. The creature was lying down when the King first +saw it, but when he approached nearer it rose to its feet. There was +nothing savage about its look, and the King was not at all afraid. + +"Where are you going?" said the Sphinx to him, in a pleasant voice. + +"Give it up," replied the King. + +"What do you mean by that?" said the other, with an air of surprise. + +"I give that up, too," said the King. + +The Sphinx then looked at him quite astonished. + +"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and +not in answer to any questions, that I do not know where I am going. +I am a King, as you may have noticed, and I have been banished from +my kingdom for a year. I am now going to look into the government of +other countries in order that I may find out what it is that is wrong +in my own kingdom. Every thing goes badly, and there is something +very faulty at the bottom of it all. What this is I want to +discover." + +"I am much interested in puzzles and matters of that kind," said the +Sphinx, "and if you like I will go with you and help to find out what +is wrong in your kingdom." + +"All right," said the King. "I shall be glad of your company." + +"What is the meaning of this long line of people following you at +regular distances?" asked the Sphinx. + +"Give it up," said the King. + +The Sphinx laughed. + +"I don't mind telling you," said the King, "of my own free will, and +not in answer to any question, that these men form a line of +communication between me and my kingdom, where matters, I fear, must +be going on worse than ever, in my absence." + +The two now travelled on together until they came to a high hill, +from which they could see, not very far away, a large city. + +"That city," said the Sphinx, "is the capital of an extensive +country. It is governed by a king of mingled sentiments. Suppose we +go there. I think you will find a government that is rather +peculiar." + +The King consented, and they walked down the hill toward the city. + +"How did the King get his sentiments mingled?" asked the King. + +"I really don't know how it began," said the Sphinx, "but the King, +when a young man, had so many sentiments of different kinds, and he +mingled them up so much, that no one could ever tell exactly what he +thought on any particular subject. Of course, his people gradually +got into the same frame of mind, and you never can know in this +kingdom exactly what people think or what they are going to do. You +will find all sorts of people here: giants, dwarfs, fairies, gnomes, +and personages of that kind, who have been drawn here by the mingled +sentiments of the people. I, myself, came into these parts because +the people every now and then take a great fancy to puzzles and +riddles." + +On entering the city, the King was cordially welcomed by his brother +sovereign, to whom he told his story; and he was lodged in a room in +the palace. Such of his followers as came within the limits of the +city were entertained by the persons near to whose houses they found +themselves when the line halted. + +Every day the Sphinx went with him to see the sights of this strange +city. They took long walks through the streets, and sometimes into +the surrounding country--always going one way and returning another, +the Sphinx being very careful never to bring the King back by the +same road or street by which they went. In this way the King's line +of followers, which, of course, lengthened out every time he took a +walk, came to be arranged in long loops through many parts of the +city and suburbs. + +Many of the things the King saw showed plainly the mingled sentiments +of the people. For instance, he would one day visit a great smith's +shop, where heavy masses of iron were being forged, the whole place +resounding with tremendous blows from heavy hammers, and the clank +and din of iron on the anvils; while the next day he would find the +place transformed into a studio, where the former blacksmith was +painting dainty little pictures on the delicate surface of +egg-shells. The king of the country, in his treatment of his visitor, +showed his peculiar nature very plainly. Sometimes he would receive +him with enthusiastic delight, while at others he would upbraid him +with having left his dominions to go wandering around the earth in +this senseless way. One day his host invited him to attend a royal +dinner, but, when he went to the grand dining-hall, pleased with +anticipations of a splendid feast, he found that the sentiments of +his majesty had become mingled, and that he had determined, instead +of having a dinner, to conduct the funeral services of one of his +servants who had died the day before. All the guests were obliged by +politeness to remain during the ceremonies, which our King, not +having been acquainted with the deceased servant, had not found at +all interesting. + +"Now," said the King to the Sphinx, "I am in favor of moving on. I am +tired of this place, where every sentiment is so mingled with others +that you can never tell what anybody really thinks or feels. I don't +believe any one in this country was ever truly glad or sorry. They +mix one sentiment so quickly with another that they never can +discover the actual ingredients of any of their impulses." + +"When this King first began to mingle his sentiments," said the +Sphinx, "it was because he always desired to think and feel exactly +right. He did not wish his feelings to run too much one way or the +other." + +"And so he is never either right or wrong," said the King. "I don't +like that, at all. I want to be one thing or the other." + +"I have wasted a good deal of time at this place," remarked the King, +as they walked on, "and I have seen and heard nothing which I wish to +teach my people. But I must find out some way to prevent every thing +going wrong in my kingdom. I have tried plan after plan, and +sometimes two or three together, and have kept this up year after +year, and yet nothing seems to do my kingdom any good." + +"Have you heard how things are going on there now?" asked the Sphinx. + +"Give it up," said the King. "But I don't mind saying of my own +accord, and not as answer to any question, that I have sent a good +many communications to my Queen, but have never received any from +her. So I do not know how things are going on in my kingdom." + +They then travelled on, the long line of followers coming after, +keeping their relative positions a hundred yards apart, and passing +over all the ground the King had traversed in his circuitous walks +about the city. Thus the line crept along like an enormous snake in +straight lines, loops, and coils; and every time the King walked a +hundred yards a fresh man from his capital city was obliged to take +his place at the tail of the procession. + +"By the way," said the Sphinx, after they had walked an hour or more, +"if you want to see a kingdom where there really is something to +learn, you ought to go to the country of the Gaumers, which we are +now approaching." + +"All right," said the King. "Let us go there." + +In the course of the afternoon they reached the edge of a high bluff. +"On the level ground, beneath this precipice," said the Sphinx, "is +the country of the dwarfs called Gaumers. You can sit on the edge of +the bluff and look down upon it." + +The King and the Sphinx then sat down, and looked out from the edge +over the country of the little people. The officer of the court who +had formed the head of the line wished very much to see what they +were looking at, but, when the line halted, he was not near enough. + +"You will notice," said the Sphinx, "that the little houses and huts +are gathered together in clusters. Each one of these clusters is +under a separate king." + +"Why don't they all live under one ruler?" asked the King. "That is +the proper way." + +"They do not think so," said the Sphinx. "In each of these clusters +live the Gaumers who are best suited to each other; and, if any +Gaumer finds he cannot get along in one cluster, he goes to another. +The kings are chosen from among the very best of them, and each one +is always very anxious to please his subjects. He knows that every +thing that he, and his queen, and his children eat, or drink, or +wear, or have must be given to him by his subjects, and if it were +not for them he could not be their ruler. And so he does every thing +that he can to make them happy and contented, for he knows if he does +not please them and govern them well, they will gradually drop off +from him and go to other clusters, and he will be left without any +people or any kingdom." + +"That is a very queer way of ruling," said the King. "I think the +people ought to try to please their sovereign." + +"He is only one, and they are a great many," said the Sphinx. +"Consequently they are much more important. No subject is ever +allowed to look down upon a king, simply because he helps to feed and +clothe him, and send his children to school. If any one does a thing +of this kind, he is banished until he learns better." + +"All that may be very well for Gaumers," said the King, "but I can +learn nothing from a government like that, where every thing seems to +be working in an opposite direction from what everybody knows is +right and proper. A king anxious to deserve the good opinion of his +subjects! What nonsense! It ought to be just the other way. The ideas +of this people are as dwarfish as their bodies." + +The King now arose and took up the line of march, turning away from +the country of the Gaumers. But he had not gone more than two or +three hundred yards before he received a message from the Queen. It +came to him very rapidly, every man in the line seeming anxious to +shout it to the man ahead of him as quickly as possible. The message +was to the effect that he must either stop where he was or come home: +his constantly lengthening line of communication had used up all the +chief officers of the government, all the clerks in the departments, +and all the officials of every grade, excepting the few who were +actually needed to carry on the government, and if any more men went +into the line it would be necessary to call upon the laborers and +other persons who could not be spared. + +"I think," said the Sphinx, "that you have made your line long +enough." + +"And I think," said the King. "that you made it a great deal longer +than it need to have been, by taking me about in such winding ways." + +"It may be so," said the Sphinx, with its mystic smile. + +"Well, I am not going to stop here," said the King, "and so I might +as well go back as soon as I can." And he shouted to the head man of +the line to pass on the order that his edict of banishment be +revoked. + +In a very short time the news came that the edict was revoked. The +King then commanded that the procession return home, tail-end +foremost. The march was at once begun, each man, as he reached the +city, going immediately to his home and family. + +The King and the greater part of the line had a long and weary +journey, as they followed each other through the country and over the +devious ways in which the Sphinx had led them in the City of Mingled +Sentiments. The King was obliged to pursue all these complicated +turnings, or be separated from his officers, and so break up his +communication with his palace. The Sphinx accompanied him. + +When at last, he reached his palace, his line of former followers +having apparently melted entirely away, he hurried up-stairs to the +Queen, leaving the Sphinx in the court-yard. + +The King found, when he had time to look into the affairs of his +dominions, that every thing was in the most admirable condition. The +Queen had retained a few of the best officials to carry on the +government, and had ordered the rest to fall, one by one, into the +line of communication. The King set himself to work to think about +the matter. It was not long before he came to the conclusion that the +main thing which had been wrong in his kingdom was himself. He was so +greatly impressed with this idea that he went down to the court-yard +to speak to the Sphinx about it. + +"I dare say you are right," said the Sphinx, "and I don't wonder that +what you learned when you were away, and what you have seen since you +came back, have made you feel certain that you were the cause of +every thing going wrong in this kingdom. And now, what do you intend +to do about your government?" + +"Give it up," promptly replied the King. + +"That is exactly what I should advise," said the Sphinx. + +The King did give up his kingdom. He was convinced that being a King +was exactly the thing he was not suited for, and that he would get on +much better in some other business or profession. He determined to be +a traveller and explorer, and to go abroad into other countries to +find out things that might be useful to his own nation. His Queen had +shown that she could govern the country most excellently, and it was +not at all necessary for him to stay at home. She had ordered all the +men who had made up his line to follow the King's example and to go +into some good business; in order that not being bothered with so +many officers, she would be able to get along quite easily. + +The King was very successful in his new pursuit, and although he did +not this time have a line of followers connecting him with the +palace, he frequently sent home messages which were of use and value +to his nation. + +"I may as well retire," said the Sphinx to itself. "As the King has +found his vocation and every thing is going all right it is not +necessary I should remain where I may be looked upon as a +questionable personage." + + + + + + THE PHILOPENA. + + * * * * * + +There were once a Prince and a Princess who, when quite young, ate a +philopena together. They agreed that the one who, at any hour after +sunrise the next day, should accept any thing from the other--the +giver at the same time saying "Philopena!"--should be the loser, and +that the loser should marry the other. + +They did not meet as soon as they had expected the next day; and at +the time our story begins, many years had elapsed since they had seen +each other, and the Prince and the Princess were nearly grown up. +They often thought of the philopena they had eaten together, and +wondered if they should know each other when they met. He remembered +her as a pretty little girl dressed in green silk and playing with a +snow-white cat; while she remembered him as a handsome boy, wearing a +little sword, the handle of which was covered with jewels. But they +knew that each must have changed a great deal in all this time. + +Neither of these young people had any parents; the Prince lived with +guardians and the Princess with uncles. + +The guardians of the Prince were very enterprising and energetic men, +and were allowed to govern the country until the Prince came of age. +The capital city was a very fine city when the old king died; but the +guardians thought it might be much finer, so they set to work with +all their might and main to improve it. They tore down old houses and +made a great many new streets; they built grand and splendid bridges +over the river on which the city stood; they constructed aqueducts to +bring water from streams many miles away; and they were at work all +the time upon some extensive building enterprise. + +The Prince did not take much interest in the works which were going +on under direction of his guardians; and when he rode out, he +preferred to go into the country or to ride through some of the +quaint old streets, where nothing had been changed for hundreds of +years. + +The uncles of the Princess were very different people from the +guardians of the Prince. There were three of them, and they were very +quiet and cosey old men, who disliked any kind of bustle or +disturbance, and wished that every thing might remain as they had +always known it. It even worried them a little to find that the +Princess was growing up. They would have much preferred that she +should remain exactly as she was when they first took charge of her. +Then they never would have been obliged to trouble their minds about +any changes in the manner of taking care of her. But they did not +worry their minds very much, after all. They wished to make her +guardianship as little laborious or exhausting as possible, and so, +divided the work; one of them took charge of her education, another +of her food and lodging, and the third of her dress. The first sent +for teachers, and told them to teach her; the second had handsome +apartments prepared for her use, and gave orders that she should have +every thing she needed to eat and drink; while the third commanded +that she should have a complete outfit of new clothes four times a +year. Thus every thing went on very quietly and smoothly; and the +three uncles were not obliged to exhaust themselves by hard work. +There were never any new houses built in that city, and if any thing +had to be repaired, it was done with as little noise and dirt as +possible. The city and the whole kingdom were quiet and serene, and +the three uncles dozed away most of the day in three great +comfortable thrones. + +Everybody seemed satisfied with this state of things except the +Princess. She often thought to herself that nothing would be more +delightful than a little noise and motion, and she wondered if the +whole world were as quiet as the city in which she lived. At last, +she became unable to bear the dreadful stillness of the place any +longer; but she could think of nothing to do but to go and try to +find the Prince with whom she had eaten a philopena. If she should +win, he must marry her; and then, perhaps, they could settle down in +some place where things would be bright and lively. So, early one +morning, she put on her white dress, and mounting her prancing black +horse, she rode away from the city. Only one person saw her go, for +nearly all the people were asleep. + +About this time, the Prince made up his mind that he could no longer +stand the din and confusion, the everlasting up-setting and +setting-up in his native city. He would go away, and see if he could +find the Princess with whom he had eaten a philopena. If he should +win, she would be obliged to marry him; and then, perhaps, they could +settle down in some place where it was quiet and peaceful. So, on the +same morning in which the Princess rode away, he put on a handsome +suit of black clothes, and mounting a gentle white horse, he rode out +of the city. Only one person saw him go; for, even at that early +hour, the people were so busy that little attention was paid to his +movements. + +About half way between these two cities, in a tall tower which stood +upon a hill, there lived an Inquisitive Dwarf, whose whole object in +life was to find out what people were doing and why they did it. From +the top of this tower he generally managed to see all that was going +on in the surrounding country; and in each of the two cities that +have been mentioned he had an agent, whose duty it was to send him +word, by means of carrier pigeons, whenever a new thing happened. +Before breakfast, on the morning when the Prince and Princess rode +away, a pigeon from the city of the Prince came flying to the tower +of the Inquisitive Dwarf. + +"Some new building started, I suppose," said the Dwarf, as he took +the little roll of paper from under the pigeon's wing. "But no; it is +very different! 'The Prince has ridden away from the city alone, and +is travelling to the north.'" + +But before he could begin to puzzle his brains about the meaning of +this departure, another pigeon came flying in from the city of the +Princess. + +"Well!" cried the Dwarf, "this is amazing! It is a long time since I +have had a message from that city, and my agent has been drawing his +salary without doing any work. What possibly can have happened +there?" + +When he read that the Princess had ridden alone from the city that +morning, and was travelling to the south, he was truly amazed. + +"What on earth can it mean?" he exclaimed. "If the city of the Prince +were to the south of that of the Princess, then I might understand +it; for they would be going to see each other, and that would be +natural enough. But as his city is to the north of her city, they are +travelling in opposite directions. And what is the meaning of this? I +most certainly must find out." + +The Inquisitive Dwarf had three servants whom he employed to attend +to his most important business. These were a Gryphoness, a Water +Sprite, and an Absolute Fool. This last one was very valuable; for +there were some things he would do which no one else would think of +attempting. The Dwarf called to him the Gryphoness, the oldest and +most discreet of the three, and told her of the departure of the +Princess. + +"Hasten southward," he said, "as fast as you can, and follow her, and +do not return to me until you have found out why she left her city, +where she is going, and what she expects to do when she gets there. +Your appearance may frighten her; and, therefore, you must take with +you the Absolute Fool, to whom she will probably be willing to talk; +but you must see that every thing is managed properly." + +Having despatched these two, the Inquisitive Dwarf then called the +Water Sprite, who was singing to herself at the edge of a fountain, +and telling her of the departure of the Prince, ordered her to follow +him, and not to return until she had found out why he left his city, +where he was going, and what he intended to do when he got there. + +"The road to the north," he said, "lies along the river bank; +therefore, you can easily keep him company." + +The Water Sprite bowed, and dancing over the dewy grass to the river, +threw herself into it. Sometimes she swam beneath the clear water; +sometimes she rose partly in the air, where she seemed like a little +cloud of sparkling mist borne onward by the wind; and sometimes she +floated upon the surface, her pale blue robes undulating with the +gentle waves, while her white hands and feet shone in the sun like +tiny crests of foam. Thus, singing to herself, she went joyously and +rapidly on, aided by a full, strong wind from the south. She did not +forget to glance every now and then upon the road which ran along the +river bank; and, in the course of the morning, she perceived the +Prince. He was sitting in the shade of a tree near the water's edge, +while his white horse was grazing near by. + +The Water Sprite came very gently out of the river, and seating +herself upon the edge of the grassy bank, she spoke to him. The +Prince looked up in astonishment, but there was nothing in her +appearance to frighten him. + +"I came," said the Water Sprite, "at the command of my master, to ask +you why you left your city, where you are going, and what you intend +to do when you get there." + +The Prince then told her why he had left his city, and what he +intended to do when he had found the Princess. + +"But where I am going," he said, "I do not know, myself. I must +travel and travel until I succeed in the object of my search." + +The Water Sprite reflected for a moment, and then she said: + +"If I were you, I would not travel to the north. It is cold and +dreary there, and your Princess would not dwell in such a region. A +little above us, on the other side of this river, there is a stream +which runs sometimes to the east and sometimes to the south, and +which leads to the Land of the Lovely Lakes. This is the most +beautiful country in the world, and you will be much more likely to +find your Princess there than among the desolate mountains of the +north." + +"I dare say you are right," said the Prince; "and I will go there, if +you will show me the way." + +"The road runs along the bank of the river," said the Water Sprite; +"and we shall soon reach the Land of the Lovely Lakes." + +The Prince then mounted his horse, forded the river, and was soon +riding along the bank of the stream, while the Water Sprite gayly +floated upon its dancing ripples. + + * * * * * + +When the Gryphoness started southward, in pursuit of the Princess, +she kept out of sight among the bushes by the roadside; but sped +swiftly along. The Absolute Fool, however, mounted upon a fine horse, +rode boldly along upon the open road. He was a good-looking youth, +with rosy cheeks, bright eyes, and a handsome figure. As he cantered +gayly along, he felt himself capable of every noble action which the +human mind has ever conceived. The Gryphoness kept near him, and in +the course of the morning they overtook the Princess, who was +allowing her horse to walk in the shade by the roadside. The Absolute +Fool dashed up to her, and, taking off his hat, asked her why she had +left her city, where she was going, and what she intended to do when +she got there. + +The Princess looked at him in surprise. "I left my city because I +wanted to," she said. "I am going about my business, and when I get +to the proper place, I shall attend to it." + +"Oh," said the Absolute Fool, "you refuse me your confidence, do you? +But allow me to remark that I have a Gryphoness with me who is very +frightful to look at, and whom it was my intention to keep in the +bushes; but if you will not give fair answers to my questions, she +must come out and talk to you, and that is all there is about it." + +"If there is a Gryphoness in the bushes," said the Princess, "let her +come out. No matter how frightful she is, I would rather she should +come where I can see her, than to have her hiding near me." + +The Gryphoness, who had heard these words, now came out into the +road. The horse of the Princess reared in affright, but his young +rider patted him on the neck, and quieted his fears. + +"What do you and this young man want?" said the Princess to the +Gryphoness, "and why do you question me?" + +"It is not of our own will that we do it," said the Gryphoness, very +respectfully; "but our master, the Inquisitive Dwarf, has sent us to +obtain information about the points on which the young man questioned +you; and until we have found out these things, it is impossible for +us to return." + +"I am opposed to answering impertinent questions," replied the +Princess; "but in order to rid myself of you, I will tell you the +reason of my journey." And she then stated briefly the facts of the +case. + +"Ah, me!" said the Gryphoness. "I am very sorry; but you cannot tell +us where you are going, and we cannot return until we know that. But +you need not desire to be rid of us, for it may be that we can assist +you in the object of your journey. This young man is sometimes very +useful, and I shall be glad to do any thing that I can to help you. +If you should think that I would injure you, or willingly annoy you +by my presence, it would grieve me to the heart." And as she spoke, a +tear bedimmed her eye. + +The Princess was touched by the emotion of the Gryphoness. + +"You may accompany me," she said, "and I will trust you both. You +must know this country better than I do. Have you any advice to give +me in regard to my journey?" + +"One thing I would strongly advise," said the Gryphoness, "and that +is, that you do not travel any farther until we know in what +direction it will be best to go. There is an inn close by, kept by a +worthy woman. If you will stop there until to-morrow, this young man +and I will scour the country round about, and try to find some news +of your Prince. The young man will return and report to you to-morrow +morning. And if you should need help, or escort, he will aid and obey +you as your servant. As for me, unless we have found the Prince, I +shall continue searching for him. There is a prince in the city to +the north of my master's tower, and it is not unlikely that it is he +whom you seek." + +"You can find out if it is he," answered the Princess, "by asking +about the philopena." + +"That will I do," said the Gryphoness, "and I will return hither as +speedily as possible." And, with a respectful salutation, the +Gryphoness and the Absolute Fool departed by different ways. + +The Princess then repaired to the inn, where she took lodgings. + +The next morning, the Absolute Fool came back to the inn, and seeing +the Princess, said: "I rode until after night-fall, searching for the +Prince, before it occurred to me that, even if I should find him, I +would not know him in the dark. As soon as I thought of that, I rode +straight to the nearest house, and slept until daybreak, when I +remembered that I was to report to you this morning. But as I have +heard no news of the Prince, and as this is a beautiful, clear day, I +think it would be extremely foolish to remain idly here, where there +is nothing of interest going on, and when a single hour's delay may +cause you to miss the object of your search. The Prince may be in one +place this morning, and there is no knowing where he will be in the +afternoon. While the Gryphoness is searching, we should search also. +We can return before sunset, and we will leave word here as to the +direction we have taken, so that when she returns, she can quickly +overtake us. It is my opinion that not a moment should be lost. I +will be your guide. I know this country well." + +The Princess thought this sounded like good reasoning, and consented +to set out. There were some beautiful mountains to the south-east; +and among these, the Absolute Fool declared, a prince of good taste +would be very apt to dwell. They, therefore, took this direction. But +when they had travelled an hour or more, the mountains began to look +bare and bleak, and the Absolute Fool declared that he did not +believe any prince would live there. He therefore advised that they +turn into a road that led to the north-east. It was a good road; and +therefore he thought it led to a good place, where a person of good +sense would be likely to reside. Along this road they therefore +travelled. They had ridden but a few miles when they met three men, +well armed and mounted. These men drew up their horses, and +respectfully saluted the Princess. + +"High-born Lady," they said, "for by your aspect we know you to be +such, we would inform you that we are the soldiers of the King, the +outskirts of whose dominions you have reached. It is our duty to +question all travellers, and, if their object in coming to our +country is a good one, to give them whatever assistance and +information they may require. Will you tell us why you are come?" + +"Impertinent vassals!" cried the Absolute Fool, riding up in a great +passion. "How dare you interfere with a princess who has left her +city because it was so dull and stupid, and is endeavoring to find a +prince, with whom she has eaten a philopena, in order that she may +marry him. Out of my way, or I will draw my sword and cleave you to +the earth, and thus punish your unwarrantable curiosity!" + +The soldiers could not repress a smile. + +"In order to prevent mischief," they said to the Absolute Fool, "we +shall be obliged to take you into custody." + +This they immediately did, and then requested the Princess to +accompany them to the palace of their King, where she would receive +hospitality and aid. + +The King welcomed the Princess with great cordiality. He had no son, +and he much wished he had one; for in that case it might be his +Prince for whom the young lady was looking. But there was a prince, +he said, who lived in a city to the north, who was probably the very +man; and he would send and make inquiries. In the mean time, the +Princess would be entertained by himself and his Queen; and, if her +servant would make a suitable apology, his violent language would be +pardoned. But the Absolute Fool positively refused to do this. + +"I never apologize," he cried. "No man of spirit would do such a +thing. What I say, I stand by." + +"Very well," said the King; "then you shall fight a wild beast." And +he gave orders that the affair should be arranged for the following +day. + +In a short time, however, some of his officers came to him and told +him that there were no wild beasts; those on hand having been kept so +long that they had become tame. + +"To be sure, there's the old lion, Sardon," they said; "but he is so +dreadfully cross and has had so much experience in these fights, that +for a long time it has not been considered fair to allow any one to +enter the ring with him." + +"It is a pity," said the King, "to make the young man fight a tame +beast; but, under the circumstances, the best thing to do will be to +represent the case to him, just as it is. Tell him we are sorry we +have not an ordinary wild beast; but that he can take his choice +between a tame one and the lion Sardon, whose disposition and +experience you will explain to him." + +When the matter was stated to the Absolute Fool, he refused with +great scorn to fight a tame beast. + +"I will not be degraded in the eyes of the public," he said; "I will +take the old lion." + +The next day, the court and the public assembled to see the fight; +but the Queen and our Princess took a ride into the country, not +wishing to witness a combat of this kind, especially one which was so +unequal. The King ordered that every advantage should be given to the +young man, in order that he might have every possible chance of +success in fighting an animal which had been a victor on so many +similar occasions. A large iron cage, furnished with a turnstile, +into which the Absolute Fool could retire for rest and refreshment, +but where the lion could not follow him, was placed in the middle of +the arena, and the youth was supplied with all the weapons he +desired. When every thing was ready, the Absolute Fool took his stand +in the centre of the arena, and the door of the lion's den was +opened. The great beast came out, he looked about for an instant, and +then, with majestic step, advanced toward the young man. When he was +within a few paces of him, he crouched for a spring. + +The Absolute Fool had never seen so magnificent a creature, and he +could not restrain his admiration. With folded arms and sparkling +eyes, he gazed with delight upon the lion's massive head, his long +and flowing mane, his magnificent muscles, and his powerful feet and +legs. There was an air of grandeur and strength about him which +completely enraptured the youth. Approaching the lion, he knelt +before him, and gazed with wondering ecstasy into his great, glowing +eyes. "What glorious orbs!" he inwardly exclaimed. "What unfathomable +expression! What possibilities! What reminiscences! And everywhere, +what majesty of curve!" + +The lion was a good deal astonished at the conduct of the young man; +and he soon began to suppose that this was not the person he was to +fight, but probably a keeper, who was examining into his condition. +After submitting to this scrutiny a few minutes, he gave a mighty +yawn, which startled the spectators, but which delighted the Absolute +Fool; for never before had he beheld such a depth of potentiality. He +knelt in silent delight at this exhibition of the beauty of strength. + +Old Sardon soon became tired of all this, however, and he turned and +walked back to his den. "When their man is ready," he thought to +himself, "I will come out and fight him." + +One tremendous shout now arose from the multitude. "The youth has +conquered!" they cried. "He has actually frightened the lion back +into his den!" Rushing into the arena, they raised the Absolute Fool +upon their shoulders and carried him in triumph to the open square in +front of the palace, that he might be rewarded for his bravery. Here +the King, followed by his court, quickly appeared; for he was as much +delighted as any one at the victory of the young man. + +"Noble youth," he exclaimed, "you are the bravest of the brave. You +are the only man I know who is worthy of our royal daughter, and you +shall marry her forthwith. Long since, I vowed that only with the +bravest should she wed." + +At this moment, the Queen and the Princess, returning from their +ride, heard with joy the result of the combat; and riding up to the +victor, the Queen declared that she would gladly join with her royal +husband in giving their daughter to so brave a man. + +The Absolute Fool stood for a moment in silent thought; then, +addressing the King, he said: + +"Was Your Majesty's father a king?" + +"He was," was the answer. + +"Was his father of royal blood?" + +"No; he was not," replied the King. "My grandfather was a man of the +people; but his pre-eminent virtue, his great ability as a statesman, +and the dignity and nobility of his character made him the unanimous +choice of the nation as its sovereign." + +"I am sorry to hear that," said the Absolute Fool; "for it makes it +necessary for me to decline the kind offer of your daughter in +marriage. If I marry a princess at all, she must be one who can trace +back her lineage through a long line of royal ancestors." And as he +spoke, his breast swelled with manly pride. + +For a moment, the King was dumb with rage. Then loudly he shouted: +"Ho, guards! Annihilate him! Avenge this insult!" + +At these words, the sword of every by-stander leaped from its +scabbard; but, before any one could take a step forward, the Princess +seized the Absolute Fool by his long and flowing locks, and put spurs +to her horse. The young man yelled with pain, and shouted to +her to let go; but she held firmly to his hair, and as he was +extraordinarily active and fleet of foot, he kept pace with the +galloping horse. A great crowd of people started in pursuit, but as +none of them were mounted, they were soon left behind. + +"Let go my hair! Let go my hair!" shouted the Absolute Fool, as he +bounded along. "You don't know how it hurts. Let go! Let go!" + +But the Princess never relinquished her hold until they were out of +the King's domain. + +"A little more," cried the indignant youth, when she let him go, "and +you would have pulled out a handful of my hair." + +"A little less," said the Princess, contemptuously, "and you would +have been cut to pieces; for you have not sense enough to take care +of yourself. I am sorry I listened to you, and left the inn to which +the Gryphoness took me. It would have been far better to wait there +for her as she told me to do." + +"Yes," said the Absolute Fool; "it would have been much better." + +"Now," said the Princess, "we will go back there, and see if she has +returned." + +"If we can find it," said the other, "which I very much doubt." + +There were several roads at this point and, of course, they took the +wrong one. As they went on, the Absolute Fool complained bitterly +that he had left his horse behind him, and was obliged to walk. +Sometimes he stopped, and said he would go back after it; but this +the Princess sternly forbade. + + * * * * * + +When the Gryphoness reached the city of the Prince, it was night; but +she was not sorry for this. She did not like to show herself much in +the daytime, because so many people were frightened by her. After a +good deal of trouble, she discovered that the Prince had certainly +left the city, although his guardians did not seem to be aware of it. +They were so busy with a new palace, in part of which they were +living, that they could not be expected to keep a constant eye upon +him. In the morning, she met an old man who knew her, and was not +afraid of her, and who told her that the day before, when he was up +the river, he had seen the Prince on his white horse, riding on the +bank of the stream; and that near him, in the water, was something +which now looked like a woman, and again like a puff of mist. The +Gryphoness reflected. + +"If this Prince has gone off in that way," she said to herself, "I +believe that he is the very one whom the Princess is looking for, and +that he has set out in search of her; and that creature in the water +must be our Water Sprite, whom our master has probably sent out to +discover where the Prince is going. If he had told me about this, it +would have saved much trouble. From the direction in which they were +going, I feel sure that the Water Sprite was taking the Prince to the +Land of the Lovely Lakes. She never fails to go there, if she can +possibly get an excuse. I will follow them. I suppose the Princess +will be tired, waiting at the inn; but I must know where the Prince +is, and if he is really her Prince, before I go back to her." + +When the Gryphoness reached the Land of the Lovely Lakes, she +wandered all that day and the next night; but she saw nothing of +those for whom she was looking. + +The Princess and the Absolute Fool journeyed on until near the close +of the afternoon, when the sky began to be overcast, and it looked +like rain. They were then not far from a large piece of water; and at +a little distance, they saw a ship moored near the shore. + +"I shall seek shelter on board that ship," said the Princess. + +"It is going to storm," remarked the Absolute Fool. "I should prefer +to be on dry land." + +"As the land is not likely to be very dry when it rains," said the +Princess, "I prefer a shelter, even if it is upon wet water." + +"Women will always have their own way," muttered the Absolute Fool. + +The ship belonged to a crew of Amazon sailors, who gave the Princess +a hearty welcome. + +"You may go on board if you choose," said the Absolute Fool to the +Princess, "but I shall not risk my life in a ship manned by women." + +"It is well that you are of that opinion," said the Captain of the +Amazons, who had heard this remark; "for you would not be allowed to +come on board if you wished to. But we will give you a tent to +protect you and the horse in case it should rain, and will send you +something to eat." + +"While the Princess was taking tea with the Amazon Captain, she told +her about the Prince, and how she was trying to find him. + +"Good!" cried the Captain. "I will join in the search, and take you +in my ship. Some of my crew told me that yesterday they saw a young +man, who looked like a prince, riding along the shore of a lake which +adjoins the one we are on. In the morning we will sail after him. We +shall keep near the shore, and your servant can mount your horse and +ride along the edge of the lake. From what I know of the speed of +this vessel, I think he can easily keep up with us." + +Early in the morning, the Amazon Captain called her crew together. +"Hurrah, my brave girls!" she said. "We have an object. I never sail +without an object, and it lights me to get one. The purpose of our +present cruise is to find the Prince of whom this Princess is in +search; and we must spare no pains to bring him to her, dead or +alive." + +Luckily for her peace of mind, the Princess did not hear this speech. +The day was a fine one, and before long the sun became very hot. The +ship was sailing quite near the land, when the Absolute Fool rode +down to the water's edge, and called out that he had something very +important to communicate to the Princess. As he was not allowed to +come on board, she was obliged to go on shore, to which she was rowed +in a small boat. + +"I have been thinking," said the Absolute Fool, "that it is perfectly +ridiculous, and very uncomfortable, to continue this search any +longer. I would go back, but my master would not suffer me to return +without knowing where you are going. I have, therefore, a plan to +propose. Give up your useless search for this Prince, who is probably +not nearly so handsome and intellectual as I am, and marry me. We +will then return, and I will assume the reins of government in your +domain." + +"Follow the vessel," said the Princess, "as you have been doing; for +I wish some one to take care of my horse." And without another word, +she returned to the ship. + +"I should like to sail as far as possible from shore during the rest +of the trip," said she to the Captain. + +"Put the helm bias!" shouted the Amazon Captain to the steers-woman; +"and keep him well out from land." + +When they had sailed through a small stream into the lake adjoining, +the out-look, who was swinging in a hammock hung between the tops of +the two masts, sang out, "Prince ahead!" Instantly all was activity +on board the vessel. Story books were tucked under coils of rope, +hem-stitching and embroidery were laid aside, and every woman was at +her post. + +"The Princess is taking a nap," said the Captain, "and we will not +awaken her. It will be so nice to surprise her by bringing the Prince +to her. We will run our vessel ashore, and then steal quietly upon +him. But do not let him get away. Cut him down, if he resists!" + +The Prince, who was plainly visible only a short distance ahead, was +so pleasantly employed that he had not noticed the approach of the +ship. He was sitting upon a low, moss-covered rock, close to the +water's edge; and with a small hand-net, which he had found on the +shore, he was scooping the most beautiful fishes from the lake, +holding them up in the sunlight to admire their brilliant colors and +graceful forms, and then returning them uninjured to the water. The +Water Sprite was swimming near him, and calling to the fish to come +up and be caught; for the gentle Prince would not hurt them. It was +very delightful and rare sport, and it is not surprising that it +entirely engrossed the attention of the Prince. The Amazons silently +landed, and softly stole along the shore, a little back from the +water. Then, at their Captain's command, they rushed upon the Prince. + +It was just about this time that the Gryphoness, who had been +searching for the Prince, caught her first sight of him. Perceiving +that he was about to be attacked, she rushed to his aid. The Amazon +sailors reached him before she did, and seizing upon him they began +to pull him away. The Prince resisted stoutly; but seeing that his +assailants were women, he would not draw his sword. The Amazon +Captain and mate, who were armed with broad knives, now raised their +weapons, and called upon the Prince to surrender or die. But at this +moment, the Gryphoness reached the spot, and catching the Captain and +mate, each by an arm, she dragged them back from the Prince. The +other Amazons, however, continued the combat; and the Prince defended +himself by pushing them into the shallow water, where the Water +Sprite nearly stifled them by throwing over them showers of spray. +And now came riding up the Absolute Fool. Seeing a youth engaged in +combat with the Amazon sailors, his blood boiled with indignation. + +"A man fighting women!" he exclaimed. "What a coward! My arm shall +ever assist the weaker sex." + +Jumping from the horse, he drew his sword, and rushed upon the +Prince. The Gryphoness saw the danger of the latter, and she would +have gone to his assistance, but she was afraid to loosen her hold of +the Amazon Captain and mate. + +Spreading her wings she flew to the top of a tree where she deposited +the two warlike women upon a lofty branch, from which she knew it +would take them a long time to get down to the ground. When she +descended she found that the Absolute Fool had reached the Prince. +The latter, being a brave fellow, although of so gentle a +disposition, had been glad to find a man among his assailants, and +had drawn his sword to defend himself. The two had just begun to +fight when the Gryphoness seized the Absolute Fool by the waist and +hurled him backward into some bushes. + +"You must not fight him!" she cried to the Prince. "He is beneath +your rank! And as you will not draw your sword against these Amazons +you must fly from them. If you run fast they cannot overtake you." + +The Prince followed her advice, and sheathing his sword he rapidly +ran along the bank, followed by some of the Amazons who had succeeded +in getting the water out of their eyes and mouths. + +"Run from women!" contemptuously remarked the Absolute Fool. "If you +had not interfered with me," he said to the Gryphoness, "I should +soon have put an end to such a coward." + +The Prince had nearly reached the place opposite to which the ship +was moored, when the Princess, who had been awakened by the noise of +the combat, appeared upon the deck of the vessel. The moment she saw +the Prince, she felt convinced that he was certainly the one for whom +she was looking. Fearing that the pursuing Amazons might kill him, +she sprang from the vessel to his assistance; but her foot caught in +a rope, and instead of reaching the shore, she fell into the water, +which was here quite deep, and immediately sank out of sight. The +Prince, who had noticed her just as she sprang, and who felt equally +convinced that she was the one for whom he was searching, stopped his +flight and rushed to the edge of the bank. Just as the Princess rose +to the surface, he reached out his hand to her, and she took it. + +"Philopena!" cried the Prince. + +"You have won," said the Princess, gayly shaking the water from her +curls, as he drew her ashore. + +At the request of the Princess, the pursuing Amazons forbore to +assail the Prince, and when the Captain and the Mate had descended +from the tree, every thing was explained. + +Within an hour, the Prince and Princess, after taking kind leave of +the Gryphoness, and Water Sprite, and of the Amazon sailors, who +cheered them loudly, rode away to the city of the Princess; while the +three servants of the Inquisitive Dwarf returned to their master to +report what had happened. + +The Absolute Fool was in a very bad humor; for he was obliged to go +back on foot, having left his horse in the kingdom where he had so +narrowly escaped being killed; and, besides this, he had had his hair +pulled; and had not been treated with proper respect by either the +Princess or the Gryphoness. He felt himself deeply injured. When he +reached home, he determined that he would not remain in a position +where his great abilities were so little appreciated. "I will do +something," he said, "which shall prove to the world that I deserve +to stand among the truly great. I will reform my fellow beings, and I +will begin by reforming the Inquisitive Dwarf." Thereupon he went to +his master, and said: + +"Sir, it is foolish and absurd for you to be meddling thus with the +affairs of your neighbors. Give up your inquisitive habits, and learn +some useful business. While you are doing this, I will consent to +manage your affairs." + +The Inquisitive Dwarf turned to him, and said: "I have a great desire +to know the exact appearance of the North Pole. Go and discover it +for me." + +The Absolute Fool departed on this mission, and has not yet returned. + +When the Princess, with her Prince, reached her city, her uncles were +very much amazed; for they had not known she had gone away. "If you +are going to get married," they said, "we are very glad; for then you +will not need our care, and we shall be free from the great +responsibility which is bearing us down." + +In a short time the wedding took place, and then the question arose +in which city should the young couple dwell. The Princess decided it. + +"In the winter," she said to the Prince, "We will live in your city, +where all is life and activity; and where the houses are so well +built with all the latest improvements. In the summer, we will come +to my city, where everything is old, and shady, and serene." This +they did, and were very happy. + +The Gryphoness would have been glad to go and live with the Princess, +for she had taken a great fancy to her; but she did not think it +worth her while to ask permission to do this. + +"My impulses, I know, are good," she said; "but my appearance is +against me." + +As for the Water Sprite, she was in a truly disconsolate mood, +because she had left so soon the Land of the Lovely Lakes, where she +had been so happy. The more she thought about it, the more she +grieved; and one morning, unable to bear her sorrow longer, she +sprang into the great jet of the fountain. High into the bright air +the fountain threw her, scattering her into a thousand drops of +glittering water; but not one drop fell back into the basin. The +great, warm sun drew them up; and, in a little white cloud, they +floated away across the bright blue sky. + + + + + +SCRIBNER'S BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG. + +THIRTIETH THOUSAND. + +"In 'Little Lord Fauntleroy' we gain another charming child to add to +our gallery of juvenile heroes and heroines; one who teaches a great +lesson with such truth and sweetness that we part with him with real +regret when the episode is over."--Louisa M. Alcott. + + * * * * * + +LITTLE LORD FAUNTLEROY. + +By FRANCES HODGSON BURNETT. + +Beautifully illustrated by R. B. Birch. One volume, square 8vo, +handsomely bound. $2.00. + +In "Little Lord Fauntleroy" the author of "That Lass o' Lowrie's" has +given us a book which is absolutely certain to become one of the few +real classics in the literature for children. She has presented a +picture of child-life such as we have never had before; she has not +only taken a subject quite new but she has written with such +exquisite delicacy and sweetness the story of the little American +boy's career that even were the situations old the story would be a +notable one. + +"Little Lord Fauntleroy," though a book for children, is certainly +not a "juvenile" in the common use of the word, paradoxical as the +statement may seem. The hero is a manly little fellow, a child, but +with all the elements of a man. Mrs. Burnett has made Lord Fauntleroy +a thoughtful boy, and she is right in believing that the stories +children like best are those best worth thinking about when they are +being read. + +A NEW EDITION OF AN OLD FAVORITE. + + * * * * * + +HANS BRINKER; or, The Silver Skates. + +A STORY OF LIFE IN HOLLAND + +By MARY MAPES DODGE. + +One volume, 12mo, with sixty beautiful illustrations. $1.50. + +The cordial appreciation with which "Hans Brinker" was first received +has increased from year to year, until the original plates have +become badly worn from constant use. The publishers have therefore +reissued at half its original price their beautiful Holiday Edition, +of which on its first appearance the Nation said: "We some time ago +expressed our opinion that Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge's delightful +children's story called 'Hans Brinker; or, The Silver Skates' +deserved an entirely new dress, with illustrations made in Holland +instead of America. The publishers have just issued an edition in +accordance with this suggestion. The pictures are admirable, and the +whole volume, in appearance and contents, need not fear comparison +with any juvenile publication of the year or of many years." + + +AMONG THE LAW-MAKERS. + +By EDMUND ALTON. + +With many illustrations of the Government Buildings, Halls of +Congress, etc., etc. + +One volume, square 8vo. $2.50. + +The author of this book was for four years connected with the +legislative branch of our Government, in the capacity of a Senatorial +page. His record of the memorable scenes and events which came under +his observation is enlivened by anecdotes of public men, humorous and +exciting episodes at the national capitol, and a great variety of +stirring incidents. + + +THE MAKING OF NEW ENGLAND. + +1580--1643. + +By SAMUEL ADAMS DRAKE. + +With many illustrations and maps. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + +In his preface the author says: "To enhance the interest of this +story, emphasis has been given to everything that went to make up the +home-life of the pioneer settlers, or that relates to their various +avocations." In all history no better examples of manliness, energy, +and conscientiousness could be found, to be read about and studied by +a child whose character is just forming. The story is told in such a +vivid way that it is as interesting and absorbing as a romance. + + +THE OLD-FASHIONED FAIRY BOOK. + +By MRS. BURTON HARRISON. + +With many quaint illustrations by MISS ROSINA EMMET. + +One volume, square 16mo. $1.00. + +"The little ones, who so willingly go back with us to 'Jack the +Giant-Killer,' 'Blue-beard,' and the kindred stories of our +childhood, will gladly welcome Mrs. Burton Harrison's 'Old-Fashioned +Fairy Tales,' where the giant, the dwarf, the fairy, the wicked +princess, the ogre, the metamorphosed prince, and all the heroes of +that line come into play and action. ...The graceful pencil of Miss +Rosina Emmet has given a pictorial interest to the book, and the many +pictures scattered through its pages accord well with the good +old-fashioned character of the tales."--Frank R. Stockton. + + +BRIC-A-BRAC STORIES. + +By MRS. BURTON HARRISON. + +Illustrated and Cover designed by WALTER CRANE. One volume, 12mo. +$2.00. + +"Upon the whole it is to be wished that every boy and girl in +America, or anywhere else, might become intimately acquainted with +the contents of this book. There is more virtue in one of +these stories than in the entire library of modern juvenile +literature."--Julian Hawthorne. + + +THE MERRY ADVENTURES OF ROBIN HOOD, +Of Great Renown in Nottinghamshire. + +Written and Illustrated by HOWARD PYLE. + +One volume, quarto, $3.00. + +"The Prince of Story-Tellers."--London Times. + + * * * * * + +THE WORKS OF JULES VERNE. + +Uniform illustrated edition. Nine vols., 8vo, extra cloth, with over +750 full-page illustrations. Price, per set, in a box, $17.50. Sold +also in separate volumes. + +The most impossible stories of this imaginative writer are told in +such a realistic manner and with so much scientific knowledge +ingeniously wrought into them that they possess a fascination that is +all their own. Their great and continued popularity, among both old +and young, has led to the publication of this new edition in which +all the numerous illustrations of the French edition are retained, +and the volumes are issued in a uniform and attractive binding. + +Michael Strogoff; or, The Courier of the Czar..................$2 00 +A Floating City and the Blockade Runners....................... 2 00 +Hector Servadac................................................ 2 00 +Dick Sands..................................................... 2 00 +A Journey to the Center of the Earth........................... 2 00 +From the Earth to the Moon Direct in Ninety-seven Hours, Twenty + Minutes; and a Journey Around It............................ 2 00 +The Steam House. Part I.--The Demon of Cawnpore. + Part II.--Tigers and Traitors. Complete in one volume....... 2 00 +The Giant Raft. Part I.--Eight Hundred Leagues on the Amazon. + Part II.--The Cryptogram. Complete in one volume............ 2 00 +The Mysterious Island. Part I.--Dropped from the Clouds. + Part II.--Abandoned. Part III.--The Secret of the Island. + The complete work in one volume, with 150 illustrations..... 2 50 + + +A NEW AND REVISED EDITION OF THE +ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY OF WONDERS. + + * * * * * + +THE WONDERS OF MAN AND NATURE. + +Intelligence of Animals--Mountain Adventures--Bodily Strength and +Skill--Wonderful Escapes--Thunder and Lightning--Adventures on the +Great Hunting Grounds--Wonders of the Human Body--The Sublime in +Nature. + + +THE WONDERS OF SCIENCE. + +Wonders of Heat--Wonders of the Heavens--Wonders of Optics--The +Sun--Wonders of Acoustics--Wonders of Water--Wonders of the +Moon--Meteors, Aerolites, Storms, and Atmospheric Phenomena. + + +THE WONDERS OF ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY. + +Egypt 3,300 Years Ago--Wonders of Sculpture--Wonders of Glass +Making--Wonders of European Art--Wonders of Pompeii--Wonders of +Architecture--The Wonders of Italian Art--The Wonders of Engraving. + +Twenty-four volumes, containing aver a thousand valuable +illustrations. + +Each set, 8 volumes, in a box, $8.00. + +Each volume, 12mo, complete in itself. Sold separately at $1.00 per +volume. + + +CHILDREN'S STORIES OF AMERICAN PROGRESS. + +By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT. + +With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE +DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + +"The 'Stories of American Progress' contain a series of pictures of +events of the first half of the present century, and the scope of the +book comprehends all the prominent steps by which we have reached our +present position both as regards extent of country and industrial +prosperity. They include an account of the first Steamboat, the +Railroad, and the Telegraph, as well as of the Purchase of Florida, +the War of 1812, and the Discovery of Gold. It will be found that no +event of importance has been omitted, and any child fond of +story-telling will gain from this book an amount of knowledge which +may far exceed that which is usually acquired from the rigid +instruction of the school-room." + + +CHILDREN'S STORIES IN AMERICAN HISTORY. + +By HENRIETTA CHRISTIAN WRIGHT. + +With twelve full-page illustrations from drawings by J. STEEPLE +DAVIS. One volume, 12mo. $1.50. + + * * * * * + +THE IVORY KING. + +A Popular History of the Elephant and Its Allies. + +By CHARLES F. HOLDER. + +Square 8vo, with twenty-four full-page illustrations. $2.00. + +The wonderfully interesting array of facts which Mr. Holder brought +together in his "Marvels of Animal Life" was the fruit very largely +of his personal observations. It forms one of the most stimulating +and delightful contributions to the class of Natural History books +for the young that has ever been made, and was a fitting forerunner +to "The Ivory King," which is devoted entirely to the Elephant, and +has even a more vivid fascination than the first named volume. The +summary of its contents includes the Natural History of the Elephant, +its habits and ways and its intelligence, the Mammoth Three and Four +Tusked Elephants, Hunting and Capturing Wild Elephants, the Elephant +in Captivity, Rogue Elephants, the White Elephant, Trained Elephants, +Show Elephants, Ivory, War Elephants, etc., etc. The numerous +illustrations are especially excellent, being drawn from a great +variety of sources. + +It would be hard to name a book which would be a more welcome and +valued addition to the library of the average boy or girl just +beginning to cultivate a love of reading and an interest in the world +around them. + + +MARVELS OF ANIMAL LIFE. + +By CHARLES F. HOLDER. + +Square 8vo, with thirty-two full-page illustrations. $2.00. + + * * * * * + +SCRIBNER'S STANDARD JUVENILE BOOKS. + +THE BOY'S + +Library of Legend and Chivalry. + +EDITED BY SIDNEY LANIER, + +And richly illustrated by FREDERICKS, BENSELL, and KAPPES. + + * * * * * + +THE BOY'S KING ARTHUR. THE BOY'S FROISSART. +KNIGHTLY LEGENDS OF WALES. THE BOY'S PERCY. + +Four volumes, cloth, uniform binding. Price per set $7.00. Sold +separately. Price per volume $2.00. + + * * * * * + +"Amid all the strange and fanciful scenery of these stories, +character and the ideals of character remain at the simplest and the +purest. The romantic history transpires in the healthy atmosphere of +the open air, on the green earth beneath the open sky.... The figures +of Right, Truth, Justice, Honor, Purity, Courage, Reverence for Law, +are always in the background; and the grand passion inspired by the +book is for strength to do well and nobly in the world."--The +Independent. + + * * * * * + +THE BOY'S +Library of Pluck and Action. + +A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP, By Frank R. Stockton. +HANS BRINKER; OR, THE SILVER SKATES. A story of life in Holland. By + Mrs. Mary Mapes Dodge. +THE BOY EMIGRANTS, By Noah Brooks. +PHAETON ROGERS, By Rossiter Johnson. + +Four volumes, 12mo, in a box, illustrated, $5.00. Sold separately, +price per volume $1.50. + +In the "Boy's Library of Pluck and Action," the design was to bring +together the representative and most popular books of four of the +best known writers for young people. The names of Mary Mapes Dodge, +Frank R. Stockton, Noah Brooks, and Rossiter Johnson are familiar +ones in every household, and a set of books, to which each has +contributed one, forms a present that will delight the heart of every +boy who likes manly, spirited, and amusing tales. The volumes are +beautifully illustrated and uniformly bound in a most attractive +form. + + +SCRIBNER'S LIST OF JUVENILE BOOKS. + + * * * * * +The great legend of the Nibelungen told to boys and girls. + * * * * * + +THE STORY OF SIEGFRIED. + +By JAMES BALDWIN. + +With a series of superb illustrations by Howard Pyle. One volume, +square 12mo. $2.00. + +Mr. Baldwin has at last given "The Story of Siegfried" in the way in +which it most appeals to the boy-reader,--simply and strongly told, +with all its fire and action, yet without losing any of that strange +charm of the myth, and that heroic pathos, which every previous +attempt at a version, even for adult readers, has failed to catch. + + +THE STORY OF ROLAND. + +By JAMES BALDWIN. + +With a series of illustrations by R.B. Birch. One volume, square +12mo. $2.00. + +This volume is intended as a companion to "The Story of Siegfried." +As Siegfried was an adaptation of Northern myths and romances to the +wants and the understanding of young readers, so is this story a +similar adaptation of the middle-age romances relating to Charlemagne +and his paladins. As Siegfried was the greatest of the heroes of the +North, so, too, was Roland the most famous among the knights of the +Middle Ages. + +"We congratulate the boys of the land upon the appearance of this +book. We commend it to parents who are selecting literature for their +children, assured, as we are, that it will convince them that books +may be found which will engage the attention, and stimulate the +imagination, of the young, without dissipating the mind, or blunting +the moral sensibilities."--Philadelphia Messenger. + + +THE FIRST REALLY PRACTICAL BOY'S BOOK. + + * * * * * + +THE AMERICAN BOY'S HANDY BOOK; + +Or, WHAT TO DO AND HOW TO DO IT. + +By DANIEL C. BEARD. + +With three hundred illustrations by the author. One volume, 8vo. +$2.00. + +Mr. Beard's book is the first to tell the active, inventive, and +practical American boy the things he really wants to know, the +thousand things he wants to do, and the ten thousand ways in which he +can do them, with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every +boy can either procure or make. + +The author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons; and +he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern +devices, besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and +practical ideas. + + +FRANK R. STOCKTON'S POPULAR STORIES. + + * * * * * + +THE STORY OF VITEAU. + +With sixteen full-page illustrations by R.B. Birch. + +One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50. + +In "The Story of Viteau," Mr. Stockton has opened a new vein, and one +that he has shown all his well-known skill and ability in working. +While describing the life and surroundings of Raymond, Louis, and +Agnes at Viteau at the Castle of De Barran, or in the woods among the +Cotereaux, he gives a picture of France in the age of chivalry, and +tells, at the same time, a romantic and absorbing story of adventure +and knightly daring. Mr. Birch's spirited illustrations add much to +the attraction of the book. + + +A JOLLY FELLOWSHIP. + +Illustrated. One volume, 12mo, extra cloth. $1.50. + +"'A Jolly Fellowship,' by Mr. Frank Stockton, is a worthy successor +to his 'Rudder Grange.' Although written for lads, it is full of +delicious nonsense that will be enjoyed by men and women.... The less +serious parts are described with a mock gravity that is the +perfection of harmless burlesque, while all the nonsense has a vein +of good sense running through it, so that really useful information +is conveyed to the young and untravelled reader's mind."--Philadelphia +Evening Bulletin. + + +THE FLOATING PRINCE, AND OTHER FAIRY TALES. + +With illustrations by Bensell and others. One volume, quarto, boards. +$1.50. + +"Stockton has the knack, perhaps genius would be a better word, of +writing in the easiest of colloquial English, without descending to +the plane of the vulgar or commonplace. The very perfection of his +work hinders the reader from perceiving at once how good of its kind +it is.... With the added charm of a most delicate humor,--a real +humor, mellow, tender, and informed by a singularly quaint and racy +fancy,--his stories become irresistibly attractive."--Philadelphia +Times. + + +NEW EDITIONS OF OLD FAVORITES. + + * * * * * + +ROUNDABOUT RAMBLES IN LANDS OF FACT AND FICTION. + +One volume, quarto, boards, with very attractive lithographed cover, +three hundred and seventy pages, two hundred illustrations. A new +edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50. + + +TALES OUT OF SCHOOL. + +One volume, quarto, boards, with handsome lithographed cover, three +hundred and fifty pages, nearly two hundred illustrations. A new +edition. Price reduced from $3.00 to $1.50. + + * * * * * + +Charles Scribner's Sons, Publishers, 743 and 745 Broadway, New York. + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Bee-Man of Orn and Other Fanciful +Tales, by Frank R. Stockton + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BEE-MAN OF ORN AND OTHERS *** + +***** This file should be named 12067.txt or 12067.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/2/0/6/12067/ + +Produced by Suzanne Shell, Kevin Field and PG Distributed Proofreaders + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/12067.zip b/old/12067.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d4fca7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/12067.zip |
